Audio

121: How To Start A Successful Ecommerce Conference On Your First Try With Steve Chou And Toni Anderson

121: How To Start A Successful Ecommerce Conference On Your First Try With Steve Chou And Toni Anderson

Today’s episode is a little different in that I’m not interviewing anyone on the show. Instead, I brought in my partner Toni Anderson to talk about how we launched The Sellers Summit, our ecommerce learning conference!

This was my first event ever and I discuss all of the little things that were involved in planning and running the event. If you plan on launching your own conference someday, our mistakes and successes may help you out!

I really loved every minute and I met so many new awesome people as well.

Right now, we are selling virtual passes to the conference for a limited time. Because our event sold out so quickly, many of you did not have the opportunity to attend.

So I’m doing my best to bring the event directly to you.

If you purchase a virtual pass by July 18, you will be invited to a live Q&A webinar where some of the speakers of the Sellers Summit will be present to answer your questions. It’s the closest thing to attending that I could think of without actually going.

Click Here To Grab Your Virtual Pass

What You’ll Learn

  • Our motivations for starting the Sellers Summit
  • How we sold out so quickly
  • Our strategy for making the attendees ecstatic
  • How we chose our speakers
  • What we did right and what we did wrong
  • How we chose the venue

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today is going to be a special episode because I’m not interviewing anyone on the show today. Instead, I brought my partner Toni Anderson on the podcast to talk about the Seller’s Summit, which was a conference that we both threw last month in Miami, Florida. It was my very first conference. I thought it would be interesting to talk about the planning, the preparations, the attention to detail and all of the ups and down involved in planning the event. First off, how are you doing today Toni? Thanks for taking the time to come on.

Toni: Thanks for having me again.

Steve: Yeah, and I wanted to talk about the motivation for the conference, because it was kind of funny. I did not want to do it in the beginning, because if you think about the conference in terms of just upfront risk and monetary reward, you got to put a lot of money upfront to do the conference and you don’t do a conference to make any money.

People have to travel, you got to sell tickets, you got to get sponsors, you got to book a venue, deal with logistics. It’s like planning a wedding all over again, not that I planned my wedding or anything, but still how did you convince me to do it? I knew I wanted to do it, but I can’t even remember what you said to me.

Toni: I think it was a consistent wearing down, wasn’t it? Through multiple meetings, over the fall of 2015?

Steve: Yeah, because there was a stretch when we were seeing each other. We saw each other for like a full week, right? Straight was it?

Toni: Yes. I think we saw each other in September at a conference, and then we saw each other again in October at 2 different conferences, and I think we just kept having that conversation over and over again about is it really worth it? Is it worth it for your brand; is it worth it for my time? What are the benefits truly at bottom-line for us to do this, because it was definitely a huge risk?

Steve: Just for listeners out there, Toni does wear on you and after a while you just want to give up and go commit suicide. Anyway sorry, so what were your motivations actually? I think I asked you this before, but I don’t even remember your answer because at the time you had just started getting into ecommerce, right?

Toni: Right. I had been– I started selling in May. When we were talking about this, I’d only been selling for 4 or 5 months. I think what appealed to me was being able to be on the planning team, or ownership team of an event, in a field that I didn’t have a lot connections in. I have a lot of connections in the marketing and social media world, but in the ecommerce world, I don’t really anybody but you, not anymore.

For me it was very appealing to be able to be a part of something where it would give me access to the thought leaders and people that are really making a big impact in that community, and it was a way to jump to the top pretty quickly. For me that was a huge appeal to be on that side of things.

Steve: If you consider me the top, that’s very sad.

Toni: Right, I have low standards though. Don’t worry.

Steve: Okay, all right. Good because you had been running conferences for the past 7 years, is that right?

Toni: Yeah, so I’ve been running blog, primarily blog conferences, marketing events for bloggers. This was a little bit different, and we were really trying to reach a totally different audience.

Steve: Just for my knowledge, why are you shifting away from the blogging crowd to ecommerce?

Toni: I really like ecommerce a lot better than I like blogging. I love blogging, it will always be something that I do, but the ecommerce was a way to step back a little bit I think if anybody out there is a blogger or has been in that world. You really have to put a lot of your personal life out there on a blog.

My kids are getting older and it was time to do something where they didn’t have to be front and centre all the time. My personal life didn’t have to be exposed. Ecommerce has got a lot of anonymity to it. That really appealed to me.

Steve: Yeah, I know for me, my motivations were I actually wanted to go and meet some of the people that were reading my blog or taking my class. I know for me, going to conferences had such a huge impact on my businesses, and in fact both my blog and my ecommerce store did not really start taking off until I started meeting other likeminded entrepreneurs.

I know my students were asking for this for such a long time. Thankfully Toni was there just nagging and nagging at me to do this, maybe nagging is not the right word Toni, I apologize. Pleasantly whispering in my ear that I should do this, and she actually gave me the courage to take the plunge because she had the experience of running these conferences for the past 7 years. You still there Toni?

Toni: I am.

Steve: Okay, not pissed, okay good. The first thing that we did, and I was really squeamish about this entire idea from the start actually. First thing that Toni suggested was, “Hey, why not just send out an email and have people sign up for a list just to confirm that the idea is a viable one.” What I did was I just put together a very quick and dirty landing page saying, “Hey, I’m thinking about putting on an event next year, and it’s going to be called,”– actually we didn’t even have a name.

It was basically ecommerce based conference. I just said, “Hey, sign up for this email list if you are interested.” I think that list just immediately got like a thousand people. From there I was like okay, maybe some people are interested in this, and maybe we can actually pull this off. Is there anything else that you said to me, I can’t remember to kind of convince me that was going to work?

Toni: I think we said whenever you agree to put up that landing page, I think we said, if we can get a thousand people to sign up, we can move forward. I think that was our number because we felt like, we wanted the conference to be really small. I know we are going to talk about that later. We felt like a thousand people when you think about who’s actually going to commit and do it, that was a good number. Then I think we got a thousand really quickly. I think that sort of for you was enough to push you, push you to actually doing it.

Steve: Yeah. How does that usually translate though just curious? Like what percentage of people who go on an interest list actually end up signing up in your experience?

Toni: I mean, I would say probably 5% or less. It shows the interest I think is the big thing. Is there people even willing to like give us that information of, “Yeah we are interested in getting marketed to for the event?” I thought a thousand, because that doesn’t include actually marketing it, right or doing advertising, or getting speakers involved, getting them marketing it for us as well, or word of mouth kind of thing. I think that’s why we picked that thousand number.

Steve: Okay, then, I forgot to mention some of my other motivations for doing the conference. I actually really like interacting with other entrepreneurs, and so having a conference was also an excuse for me to invite other more successful entrepreneurs to actually come and speak, and then we could actually hangout for a weekend and really get to know these people. In fact, that was how I met Toni. We met at World Domination Summit. I want to say it was at 2013 or through 2012.

Toni: I think it was 13.

Steve: 2013. When I first met Toni, like never in a million years would I have thought that I would be working with her, not because of anything negative or anything, but it was just like a random meeting. You were in the blogging space, mainly catering to mums, would you say?

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: Here I was running about entrepreneurship. It’s just really random. All these connections and the people that you meet over the years, just somewhat randomly may become your business partner some day. That was another motivation that I forgot to mention.

Toni: Right, and I think 2, it helped that we had just come off this conference circuit last fall where we had been to conference after conference after conference. I think when we were at the final conference; we met Daniel Solid who ended up speaking at Seller’s Summit. I think having that fresh in our minds of just thinking like,” Wow, we’ve been in this thing for 4 days or 3 days.” However long it was and we’ve already made all these connections with people that we probably would have never crossed paths with outside of being at the event. I think that was a huge motivator. Two, just being right in that experience and then making the decision soon after that.

Steve: Here’s actually a little known fact about me. I have never really worked with anyone in a partnership capacity before, because I like to do things myself. I use contractors to do different things. This was actually the first time that I ever partnered with anyone on anything. The reason why I felt comfortable with Toni was because if she could hang out with me for multiple days like 24/7 and not go crazy then I figured that it might work.

Toni: I think that’s a compliment, I’m not sure.

Steve: It means you have a high tolerance.

Toni: I have a high tolerance.

Steve: One of the top questions actually that people kept asking me even during the ticket sales and everything was why we actually chose the venue that we did. The Seller Summit was held in Miami, Florida. The way this worked was, I went up to Toni and said,” Hey, can you just do some research on different venues, and then get back to me with a short list.” I relied on Toni to steer me in the right direction. Really this is a question for you Toni. How did we narrow down the venue list?

Toni: A city or the hotel or both.

Steve: Both. Let’s start with the city actually.

Toni: Yeah, I think we had a conversation and we had some cities in mind. Unfortunately, or fortunately, with the conference, you’ve got to keep in mind what does that city bring as far as the hotel pricing, airport proximity to hotels, things like that. I mean, we had some great locations that were 45 minutes from the airport.

People that are flying and don’t want to pay for a 45 minute cab drive or rent-a-car. You’ve got to think about the attendees and what they are willing to pay, and obviously being conscious of their budgets. Miami came to the top because the rooms were affordable, and their proximity to the airport was under 20 dollar cab ride which was kind of the goal for the location.

I think we had it narrowed down to 3 or 4 cities at the end, but Miami just worked the best with the international airport, the walk-ability of the location, the hotel that we were at. This year you could walk to just about any restaurant you wanted to go to. Once you flew in, you didn’t need a car which was really nice. We did have a majority of the people attend from outside of the Miami area.

I think that that plays a big part of making those decisions, because you know people are going to spend money on a ticket and a flight and a hotel. You are trying to minimize their cost once they get there by giving them restaurant options, and not having to do the car thing and things like that. It’s Miami, it’s a fun city. I think for people that don’t live in Florida, it’s a tourist … It’s a place where it’s like, “Hey I can combine this, maybe I’ll bring my spouse. We can add an extra day, go to the beach something like that.” That was appealing too I think about the Miami location.

Steve: The other thing that we forgot to mention also is that we pretty much decided we were going to launch this conference in November, which didn’t give a whole lot of time. Initially, we were actually even planning on having a conference in April. We actually launched over Thanksgiving which is, from what you told me, it sounds like a really bad time to launch, right, over Thanksgiving?

Toni: I think when we are trying to get ecommerce folks to pay attention to us, we launch black Friday. That’s probably not the best, probably not the best time to get anybody’s attention, because I wasn’t paying attention myself and I’m running the thing. Yeah, I think we launched at a tough time just because I know for me I was focused on maxing my sales out for that month. I know you were super busy and you guys were running out of stock too.

I think for a lot of– it was a tough time, but it was also good because people were bringing a lot of income at that time too. They did have some extra money and thinking maybe end of year expenses type of thing. Deciding how to, it’s pros and cons, but it was definitely tough just to get people’s attention during that last quarter of the year.

Steve: Yeah, I think what were the other venues we were considering? I think Denver, Austin …

Toni: I think those were the 3. Miami, Denver and Austin. Austin is just with South by Southwest, it’s just too expensive. It’s not affordable for attendees to basically get rooms. Denver I think the weekends that we could find availability were still maybe in their winter season, I mean Denver can get a snowfall in May.

Steve: Yeah, there was a conference like a week before ours and there were snowfalls the entire time.

Toni: Right. I think that for us was a pretty big risk. I know that I did a conferencing in Colorado Springs in July, and we had people straying on the runway in Denver with the freak weather issue. I think it’s tough. Denver is a tough spot with weather, but obviously it’s a great location too. I think had we been able to work out the dates that would have been a definite contender.

Steve: I know for me, I wanted to go to a place that I had never been to in the past. I really like hot weather and beach kind of atmosphere. Miami kind of stood out to me because right near the water, it was very walk-able from the hotel through all the restaurants. There are some really good restaurants there including that Italian place we went to. Then people could just head over the beach if they wanted to afterwards. A lot of people actually took their spouses.

Toni: Which I think was great because we did offer like a networking spouse pass. The spouse could explore [inaudible 00:14:37] during the day, and then attend the networking event at night which I know people appreciated being able to introduce their spouse to other people at their meeting. There was multiple connections going on there too.

Steve: But outside the venue, really the goals for the conference for me at least, and I go to like maybe 5 or 6 conferences every year, and a lot of times when I go to a conference I hear people get up there like the speakers and they talk about their success stories. A lot of times their stories are very inspiring, but what ends up happening is I’ll head home super inspired to take action. Then that inspiration just wears off after a couple of weeks.

My vision for the conference is that I wanted to cut down on the inspirational stuff, and then focus more on the actionable items. I didn’t want all the speakers to come to my conference and talk about their success stories. I wanted to make it very small and intimate and have kind of like a teaching environment. You were completely on the same page right Toni, because your previous conferences were the same way?

Toni: Absolutely and I just … I know we met at World Domination Summit which is a very fun event, but every talk at World Domination is inspirational, which …

Steve: Yeah, actually the World Domination Summit was like the anti Seller Summit I would say, right?

Toni: Yeah, which it’s a great event, but it’s absolutely the opposite of what I think we both thought would be best in the ecommerce world. Because I think the people that we wanted to attend already were inspired to start something. Or at least begin the research process whether they were researching a product or … They needed those practical like,” Hey I’m stuck in the importing process. Or I’m stuck with the … Okay I have the Amazon sales, but I don’t know how to do that to my own website.” We really wanted to help people get unstuck from whatever step they were in the process.

Steve: Yes, a lot of the speakers including my speech that I gave was a step by step that walked you through certain things. That was the information that I wanted to be given at the event. It’s funny and I went actually back and watched some of the recordings of some of the speakers. Part of the beginning of their speeches they said,” Hey Steve told me to cut down on the inspirational stuff and focus more on the actionable stuff. So I’m just going to … this is the only slide that I’m giving that’s going to talk about my background. Let’s jump into the good stuff now.”

Toni: Yeah I saw that too in editing, most people spend very little time talking about these things.

Steve: Which sounds terrible, but …

Toni: I think and actually sometimes now I think I have watched almost every talk for a second time. It’s amazing what I missed even just sitting in there because there was so much information given in some of those talks. Most of the talks where I didn’t have a baseline knowledge. It was really helpful to be able to sit in front of my computer and have my notebook out, and be able to freeze the frame. I’m going to implement this right this minute because now I’m basically sitting in a college lecture kind of thing.

Steve: Yeah, and that’s actually one of the main reasons why I insisted on getting everything recorded. Now not every conference would do this, but I think in a teaching sort of conference it’s important to get the recordings so that everyone can watch a lecture over and over again to get all the finer points of what was pointed out. I remember actually when we were talking about this, we were planning. I asked you, “Hey how much would it cost to just record everything and have an AV person in every room?” Then I think you quoted some insane costs, right?

Toni: I did. I think I said a lot that was probably my …

Steve: Yes and I was like, “Well how much is a lot? Like we have to have this, and then yeah.” Ultimately it was important to me. We ate the cost on that. I think it is important for any conference especially a content focused sort of conference to have video recording. That was another thing that we wanted to make sure that we invested in.

Toni: I agree and I think going back and looking through even the slide decks of our speakers those slides were so content rich, that to be able to have those and go back through them because while they were speaking obviously you were getting a great overview and you were understanding the principles behind what they were talking about. Being able to go back and actually read those slides and see the detail on a lot of them. A lot of them were screenshots of different parts of the process, which for me I’m a visual learner, so it’s very helpful to go back and be able to look at those.

Steve: I mean the other goal too is we sent out a couple of surveys once people bought tickets. We noticed that some people were beginners, and then some people were experienced sellers. I don’t know … Do you remember the breakdown actually ultimately of what the experience versus the beginners were?

Toni: I think we had about 25% of the attendees were full time sellers. Like this was their primary job. About 50% were either selling or … Selling but not to the point where they felt they had a viable business. It was … There was another 25% they were in the middle like maybe they never planned on quitting their full time job, and this was going to be a side thing. We were probably 50, 25-25 at the end of the day.

Steve: Yeah, and so that compelled … Originally we were just going to do a single track which meant everybody would watch every single lecture like the same way. Once we got the survey results, and we realized that we needed to divide it up into 2 distinct tracks. One catering specifically to beginners, and then another tracks catering to the more advanced people.

Toni: Right, I think when we started we thought we would get all beginners.

Steve: Yeah, actually that was the case and that was just kind of this misconception I had about my list. I didn’t realize that there were so many experienced guys who were coming to the conference.

Toni: Yeah, which I thought it was fun. I thought it was fun to have a nice mix of people, because it was fun to see them make the connections at the event. Even people that weren’t speakers, but the people who were there that were experienced sellers were able to mentor some of the less experienced. I know Ryan Gourmande, am I saying his name correctly? He met up with I can’t think of that guy’s name that sold the trigger kits.

Steve: Oh yes I don’t remember his name either, but there was 2 guys on trigger kits actually yeah.

Toni: I noticed like their connection. They really hit it off throughout the event and were able to pass knowledge back and forth to each other. I saw a lot of that. They just happen to be sitting in the front row on most of the talks. I noticed them but yeah I noticed that a lot which was cool to see everybody that was there I think was really valuable. Even if they were a new seller they maybe had a background in something else that was able to provide benefit in a different topic for other attendees.

Steve: So what I really liked about the conference was from working with you was there was a lot of attention to detail. For me at least my only request was that one of my pet peeves for going to your conference is I always lose the conference schedule. After fumbling through my bag pack and looking for the schedule. I know I wanted the schedule on the name tag. That was my only requirement, but you actually thought of a whole bunch of other things that were really detailed oriented that I probably wouldn’t have thought of. You want to mention some of those things?

Toni: Yes, so I think the schedule, the schedule and the name tag is something I have done at previous events. It’s always met with like, “Oh thank you so much, I never can keep track of a schedule.” I can’t keep track of a room key. I mean I love having the schedule on the back of the name tag, I think it makes it easy to figure out where you are going.

I think another thing that was good is that we gave a detailed account of what the talks were going to be about before the talks. So that people didn’t just show up and then feel panicky. They had 12 hours to make a decision about what session they were going to that they had the ability to plan out their event before they got there. I think another thing that I really liked and I don’t know if this is much attention to detail but is all of our speakers were very available to our attendees.

Which to me I have been to events where the speaker shows up, gives the talk and leaves. To me that was one of the most important things about this conference was that we needed to make sure that our speakers were going to be very available for the attendees and willing to sit down. One of the things that we did that was helpful for that was that we all ate lunch together every day. The lunch was in the hotel. People didn’t have to leave which meant you had more time to eat and talk to people, because you weren’t rushing out to try to find a place to eat. Then people were able to make those connections at lunch. I think the tables sat 8 or 10 people, but it allowed … By the end of the first day you could already see friendships form.

That was really nice that we gave people a lot of opportunities to hang out with each other. We did the networking events every night. That was really another opportunity. They met at lunch and then they could meet up again at night or you could talk to new people. Our speakers for the most part attended all of that with the attendees. Our sponsors did too which was really important for us as well.

We wanted them to be a part of this too because it’s great for the sponsors to have a table and they can go up and talk to them. It’s really nice to just be able to sit down and have a conversation at lunch and not have this pressured sales pitch. Or just like, “Hey I’m just going to meet you and talk about my family or we are going to talk about what I do.” Then you develop this relationship with somebody as opposed to this shake hands, pass a business card out and then never talk to them again.

Steve: Here is what I noticed. The first day everyone was … At the first mix everyone was super stiff. Like, “Hi, my name is whatever.” But the second day like everyone was a lot looser and by like the third day everyone was like hugging each other. Like they knew each other for years, which was really fun to actually see.

One thing that you forgot to mention that I actually noticed was I liked how you structured the conference in such a way that we had like our own little private nook of the hotel. I have been to conferences where you have to actually walk 5 minutes to get to the next room if you want to attend a session. Everything was just really close to each other. There was no way to avoid the other attendees. We had our own little private nook together.

Toni: Yeah and I think that was another factor in why we picked that hotel, was that not every hotel is set up to be able to do that. And you are right that made it really nice, because one it cut down on the time people had to spend trying to get where they needed to go. Then two they really weren’t able to leave each other, which I think is a good thing for them unless you are a total introvert, then I apologize.

Steve: Well see that’s where open bar comes in. I insisted on open bar every single night, because in my experience when I go to conferences that’s where the good stuff comes out. You start to … You are having a couple of beers with someone that you just met, and you talk about your businesses. Then before you know it a lot of sensitive information gets leaked out there, and so that’s why I insisted on it.

Toni: Your next job will be with the CIA.

Steve: Of course I don’t drink anything during these events, I just pry for information. The other thing that was important also was we wanted to keep it small, right? Because I have gotten lost at big events where I just end up hanging out with the people that I already know. When you keep it small that kind of fosters networking and encourages people to reach out to new people.

Toni: Well I think too when you have it small is that you can’t avoid people. Well not that you would want to avoid people, but you see the same people over and over again all day. At some point you have to introduce yourself, because it gets awkward that you haven’t because you are bumping into them getting coffee, or you are sitting next to them in 2 sessions or then you’re at lunch. I think the smallness, when you are at a conference … World Domination was what? 3,000 people the year we were there.

Steve: Yeah, that’s a lot of people.

Toni: As soon as I met you and the people I was with I was like I’ll never meet anybody else. I have my people, I don’t have to meet anybody else because I have them and I never saw the same people again. That’s really how … That’s what tends to happen at those bigger events and the smaller events, you can’t avoid people, once again sorry to the introverts.

Steve: I thought the introverts did pretty well at the conference to be honest with you.

Toni: I did too and you know why? We got feedback about this from several attendees is that we had that Facebook group, that pre-event Facebook group that allowed people to introduce them. We had … I think we even had an introduce yourself thread and I think Scott Volker came in and said, “Hey tell me about your business.”

We had a lot of speakers in there saying,” Hey give me some feedback about, this is what I’m talking about what do you want to learn?” I think that was really valuable especially for people that aren’t … I mean I am a mastered extrovert, but I still think it’s hard to just walk up to somebody I don’t know at all and introduce myself, so …

Steve: Well that’s what I did with you at the World Domination Summit if I recall.

Toni: Yeah it is, yeah but I think having that Facebook group you had a face with a name. You had already interacted with them online. If some of the people shared rides from the airport … By the time they got to Miami and to the hotel it didn’t feel like you were talking to strangers. It felt like you already had some sort of relationship with these people even if it was online, it didn’t feel as awkward.

Steve: Yeah and speaking of the speakers, I was very careful in choosing the people who were going to speak at the conference. I basically only wanted to get specialists. People who were focused on a very specific topic and knew it inside and out, for example I had Spencer Hawes talk about SEO. That’s pretty much what he is done in his internet career.

Scott Volker from the Amazing Seller really focused on Amazon selling, launching products and that sort of thing. Greg Mercer he runs Jungle Scout. He’s got this tool that helps people do research and that’s like all he does. He is also a very successful Amazon seller as well. Every single person was hand selected to actually cover a very specific topic in deep depth, and so yeah.

Toni: I think that was a positive, but conference logistic wise it makes it tough.

Steve: Why is that?

Toni: Well because if you have a talk, let’s think Erick. Erick did a talk on Gmail ads, right? That was his talk. So you are devoting 50 minutes to Gmail ads. That’s a lot of time. If you get a generalist up there they are going to talk about 7 things in 15 minutes and you can check all these boxes. The problem is you don’t get any real information on any of those 7 things, you get very cursory.

I think to me I love when everyone is a specialist, because then … I walked out of Curt’s Google analytics talk with my mind blown. I have already re-watched his talk 3 times. There was so much information in there for me in that one talk, super valuable. It’s almost like taking a course in Google analytics just to go to the one talk. It’s tough because you are then trying to cram in all this really great information in 48 hours which is basically what you have for the event.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely I mean I was ending up taking notes myself on a lot of these talks. Jeff Cowen … Amazon changes all the time, and Jeff gave an awesome talk on how to rank your products on Amazon, which kind of blew me away. Daniel Sarlad’s talk about how he runs his Amazon business blew me away. There was like 2 or 3 points on there that I didn’t even know people were doing out there. It was just nice that all the speakers were so open in revealing some of the secrets to their success.

Toni: Yeah, I was surprised at them. I was surprised that they were more willing to share the fact that they shared, but I thought it was awesome that they did.

Steve: Yeah totally, and then Lars with the whole sourcing thing. Lars is like my go to guy for product sourcing, and then Dru is just an amazing person when it comes to email and just marketing because he’s worked with so many different companies. It was incredible how everyone was willing to share so much stuff, and we’ve got it all on recording now, which is pretty cool.

Okay, so one thing I was also wanted to mention was– that worked really well for us was the VIP passes that we offered. For people who were willing to pay a little bit extra, we had a couple of special events just for VIP people. The thing that worked the best for the VIP customers were, we offered these 30 minutes one on one consults.

I knew in my experience at least teaching my class is that even though you might have all the information from the sessions and that sort of thing, there is always going to be questions that you have that are very specific towards your business. Perhaps you might have a question that is very specific to a certain thing that you might be selling, and by offering these consults, it allowed the attendees to ask very specific questions about their businesses that we could help them out with.

Toni: Yeah, and I think we got a lot of feedback from them telling us how valuable that was to their business. On top of that I think you are right, being able to … Because the reality is you don’t have time, Scott Walker doesn’t have time, Greg Mercer, all these guys that did our one on ones for the VIPs, they can’t be taking one on one consults on a regular basis. It’s obviously not scalable.

Steve: Yes, it is not.

Toni: I think for them to be able … I think and you did this in your office hours sometimes where it was just to ask me anything. I think those are so valuable because sometimes you get to a point, you and I had this conversation in a day where I was trying to set up a listing, and I was having issues, and I said I would pay so much money for someone to just tell me how to do this right now.

Steve: I recall asking for a 1,000 bucks, but you didn’t pay me anything.

Toni: Oh sorry, you also didn’t tell me how to do it.

Steve: Well, you didn’t pay me.

Toni: I think for some people, just being able to have that face time with someone who’s seen a lot of success in a certain area, and I think one of the things with the VIPs is we had them doing this survey and said, “Hey what is your biggest pain point?” Then we really tried to be purposeful in who we paired them up with. If someone had a problem with SEO, they were getting with Spencer, I mean that was just a done deal. If someone wants to do Amazon they are getting Greg or Scott or Jeff.

We tried to be really get … Treg was trying to do more with drop shipping and so we paired him up with Andrew. I think that that was really helpful that we tried to get them what the person is going to give them the most bank for their buck during that time. I think just having that ability to ask, ask Scott anything you want to ask him, most people don’t have that opportunity.

Steve: Yeah, and all the speakers, they were just so generous with their time. Some of these sessions went over 30 minutes, and it didn’t really matter. I’m just very grateful for everyone who took part in that.

Toni: Absolutely, and I know we had Michael Jackness, who wasn’t even a speaker at the event, although easily could have been a speaker. He was connecting with these people before the events. I think there was so much of that with the speaker just really investing in those VIP people, and they were investing in everybody at the conference, but they take that extra time, and a lot of them had to move their travel schedule, or they weren’t going out to dinner because they were with somebody. I think that was really valuable, and I’m very appreciative that they were able to take the time and do that.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. What’s funny is that, what ended up happening is that we ended up selling out our tickets over the holidays pretty much, and demand ended up being just so high for these tickets, but we wanted to keep it small, and so we ended up with a the sold out conference way ahead of time. I want to switch gears a little bit now and just talk about what worked well at the conference from both of our perspectives, and what did not work so well. We already talked a lot about the good stuff already, what needed work in your opinion?

Toni: Well I think one of the things, and we heard this from some attendees too was that, I think we gave a people a ton of networking time, but the evening networking was really loud, and part of it was the room size … We had planned to have it outside and then the weather wasn’t cooperating with us every night. Part of it was that I think maybe at an outside space the noise would have disappeared a little bit more, but people were definitely yelling to have a conversation, and that’s not ideal. I mean it’s like that awkward when you are yelling and then the music stops and you are still yelling.

Steve: Well it’s funny; we didn’t have any music either. It was just pure talking noise.

Toni: Yeah, so there wasn’t really … There was no background sound just people, which you know part of me is like when I walk into a room and it’s really loud, I’m happy because it means everyone is talking, but then you feel bad because that, I think you and I both stopped on this second, the first real morning our boys were already going from talking so much. One of them was just coming out that you don’t normally talk that much in real life, but then also just having to talk at this other volume to be heard.

I think the amount of networking we gave people was awesome. Could it have been … Is there a way you do where people don’t feel like they are yelling? Maybe it’s different spacing, maybe it’s … Who knows, but I think that that would be something we can definitely do a better job of next year.

Steve: Yeah, and then I was thinking also that maybe we can do something for maybe the introverts. A little bit more just to maybe like pair them up ahead of time with other people who they can hang out with at the conference. I don’t know, I’m not an introvert, so it’s a little hard to relate, but I don’t know, what do you think?

Toni: I do, I’m not– but I asked on Facebook after the conference, I said, “Hey introverted friends.” Because I apparently have a lot of them. What makes you feel more comfortable? For us, I think you are willing to walk up to me in the middle of Portland square, you don’t know who I am and just interrupt me and to meet me, and I’m willing to do the same too, but for most people that would be terrifying if you are not an extrovert.

A lot of things we did and I think we did accidently, like did the Facebook group. We didn’t do the Facebook group because we thought we have a bunch of introverts. We just did the Facebook group because we thought it would be fun people to connect, but it helped a lot of people in the end to connect.

I think be more purposeful in that. Trying to really think about like, “Hey if I may be talking to some of our attendees from this past year, how can we make it more comfortable, how do we get you connected earlier.” I think there is a lot of things we can do to help people feel like they are coming in already a part of something.

Steve: That’s a good segway into what I wanted to talk about next which was kind of tips on getting the most out of the time in the conference. There are some conference super stars, and I just wanted to give a shout out to Barry real quick. Barry, like pretty much documented the entire conference on the Facebook group, and he immediately stood out for at least me, because there was no way I was leaving that conference without knowing Barry.

Toni: Yeah, for sure, I think he did a really good job of just connecting with just about everybody. It’s just like every night in the Facebook group after the conference was over, I would see a post from Barry saying, “Hey, I’m at the pool, on my computer, who want to join me?” My room overlooked the pool, so I’m like opening my curtain and there was like 15 people at the pool and they were with Barry. He did a really good job of making the effort to meet people and get out there and definitely, I think everybody knew Barry by the end of the conference which is awesome.

Steve: I also want to give a special thanks to William who took so many wonderful photos of the conference, and he stood out to me also because he was just so selfless. I want to say that, he was taking shots and not paying attention to some of the sessions. So big thanks.

Toni: I think, and we had several attendees, I know Cindy. One of our attendees was just very, “Do you need any help? Is everything good? Is there anything I can get for you? Do you need coffee? Do you need water?” There were several attendees like her that just came with another one, “Hey, how is it going? How are you doing?” Not just, you know can we turn the air conditioning up or down although we should have been able to do that more often in some of those rooms.

I think that’s another way to set yourself out, and just offer help. I don’t think, obviously people are buying a ticket and paying to attend, so I’m not saying you need to go and work, but it definitely appear if you say, “Hey, can I send you the photos I took?” “Sure, I’d love it even if they are in your iPhone; we would love to have as much.” You and I have time to take the photos.”

Another thing too and you stressed this a lot in your keynote, and I think we pushed it in some of the emails, but introduce yourself to the speakers. I mean people get a little star struck sometimes at conferences, and they don’t want. I think if someone even came up to you and was like, “I can’t believe I’m meeting you.” And it’s like as someone who …

Steve: I think I turned around I was like, “Are you talking to me?”

Toni: I’m like I know him; it’s not that big of a deal. I get that way with certain people, so I know that it’s just common to– because these are people you’ve probably followed online or listened to their podcasts, or read their blog or whatever space that they’re in, so to meet them it’s kind of, “Oh, I’m meeting one of my idol or someone I look up to.” They are all just really just normal gootsy people.

I think when you go, introduce yourself to definitely the speakers, but it’s really as many people as you can, and I think the connecting in the Facebook group a lot of people, got in there and shared their story. Then when you get there, you have a connection with someone else who is there, like “Oh, I like to rescue pets too, or I live in the Pacific North West.” Or whatever the connection is, you’ve got this immediate … I’m with the person we were there, we were there at the … The little unofficial event, we were at the bar.

Steve: The warrior’s game, yes.

Toni: Yes, and I was taught … Nick was there talking and all of a sudden I heard him say something about sports center, and I was like, okay we have a connection, we can talk about sports. I think you look for those ways to have …

Steve: I think he regretted that decision, but yeah.

Toni: He did, I’m sorry …

Steve: He probably talked to zero off.

Toni: I think you got to look for those commonalities because it might not be, you might think to look at somebody and think we got nothing in common, but then once you start talking to them, you realize that there’s a lot more, and yeah there is probably some ways you can partner. I think we had people talking about partnerships.

Steve: Actually, it did happen. I just can’t remember the names off head, but oh I think I know what happened. There was a product, and I think it was Nick’s product, but Daniel was thinking about selling the same thing, so now they are partners.

Toni: Okay, yeah but you don’t know that until you have that initial,” Hey I listened to Mike and Mike too.”

Steve: Yeah, I just want to give a special thanks to Mike Jackness also, so technically he wasn’t a speaker, he was just an attendee, but man, he was dropping knowledge bombs left and right, and there was swaves of attendees just hurdled around him like soaking in all his knowledge, so that was pretty awesome.

Toni: I think that was really helpful to have people like Mike that weren’t there as a speaker, but were really willing to mentor other attendees.

Steve: Yeah, totally. Yes, because the tickets sold out so fast over the holidays. I think they sold out in like the middle or end of February, that left like a good 3 months of people who were just hammering us for tickets, and unfortunately we didn’t have any left to sell because we wanted to keep the events so small, and so I thought about this for a long time and what I ended up thinking about was offering all the sessions out as a virtual pass with a little bonus.

Instead of you guys having to come to Florida to attend the conference, I thought that I would try to bring the conference to you, and so an as an added value, we are going to start releasing these virtual passes where you can get access to all the recordings, but I have actually talked with some of the other speakers who spoke at the Seller’s Summit, and we are going to go ahead and do a live Q&A webinar for anyone who decides to purchase a virtual pass.

Toni: Yeah, along with the live Q&A that we going to have with some off our Seller’s Summit speakers, we also have a Facebook group dedicated to virtual pass holders, so that way you can connect and network with other virtual pass holders, and hopefully learn something in that group, build relationships, be able to network, possibly find a partnership. That’s a huge value add to be able to have those conversations in a meaningful way with people that are all trying to do the same thing which is sell online. We have that; we also have MP3 recordings, right Steve?

Steve: Yes, that’s correct. A lot of times people want to, thanks to this whole podcast boom, a lot of people like to listen to their stuff on the go, and that’s why we are offering high definition videos in addition to the MP3, so you can consume the content in any way that you want. Here is a couple of things I just want to share. All of the sessions at the conference are just very practical and actionable tips. I just want to mention Ryan Gomidy. He actually came to my Google shopping session, and he said that one session paid for itself, because I went into such detail on how I run my profitable campaigns online.

Toni: We are including all of these Seller Summit sessions in 2016 will be in this virtual pass along with the MP3s which Steve mentioned as well as all of the slide decks from the speakers. That will give you the opportunity to go to those decks, grab the information from the slide decks, and really help you take a deep dive into some of the session topics that we presented there.

Steve: After you’ve gotten the chance to go through all the videos, we will go ahead and schedule that live Q&A session with the speakers, to answer any questions that you might have had on any of the given sessions.

Toni: Who is going to be there? Who is doing the Q&A?

Steve: So right now we have Greg Mercer, we have Scott Walker and we have Mike Jackness. Depending on– what I’m going to do is I’m going to actually survey everyone who purchases, and ask them which questions they have, and depending on the questions, I might go ahead and invite the appropriate people to come in and answer those questions.

Toni: Awesome.

Steve: It’s not set in stone, but the virtual pass is going to be offered at sellersummit.com/virtualpass. If you’re interested in getting access to the sessions and the live Q&A session, go to that URL and go ahead and sign up. Once again that’s sellerssummit.com/virtualpass all one word. All right Toni thanks a lot for coming on. I know that the running a conference has been just a tremendous experience for me, and I’m very thankful that I met you, and you nagged and pounded me into submission to actually start this thing, and we are definitely going to have another Seller’s Summit next year for sure.

Toni: Yes, I think I have a contract on your desk, don’t I?

Steve: Yes, you do and we are probably going to discuss it right now because there is a large upfront cost, and I always get nervous about all this stuff, but I think I’m a little more confident this year that we will be able to have another successful event.

Toni: I think so.

Steve: All right, take care Toni.

Toni: Bye.

Steve: There you have it, a behind the scenes look at how Toni and I started my very first conference the Seller’s Summit, which ended up being a huge success. And if you are interested in getting access to the session videos, please go to sellerssummit.com/virtualpass. Once again we will be offering that live Q&A session with some of the other speakers to answer all of your questions live and in person.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode121. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.myifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

120: How To Rank In Amazon And The Right Way To Solicit Reviews With Jeff Cohen of Seller Labs

How To Rank In Amazon And Get Legit Reviews With Jeff Cohen of Seller Labs

Today I’m thrilled to have Jeff Cohen on the show. Jeff is someone I met at the Import Summit last year and he’s the director of business management over at Seller Labs.

Chances are if you are selling on Amazon, you’re probably using one of their awesome tools. For example, Feedback Genius which is a tool I use heavily, is a must have tool that automates the acquisition of customer reviews.

And they have other awesome tools like Snag Shout which help you gather additional reviews and discover profitable products to sell on Amazon. All of these tools have tens if not hundreds of thousands of users and they are awesome.

Anyway, I wanted Jeff on the show today because he has access to a lot of Amazon data and works deeply with a wide variety of Amazon sellers. In other words, he follows the industry closely and knows a ton about what’s going on.

What You’ll Learn

  • How they come up with the idea for their software.
  • The current review landscape on Amazon. Are paid reviews ok to have?
  • The strategies that used to work on Amazon but should be avoided today.
  • What successful sellers are doing to launch their products.
  • The best practice for feedback emails and what’s working today

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Jeff Cohen on the show. Now Jeff is someone who I met at the import summit last year, and he is the director of business management over at Seller Labs. Now chances are if you were selling on Amazon you were probably using one of their awesome tools. So for example Feedback Genius is a tool that I use heavily, and it’s a must have tool that automates the acquisition of customer reviews. And they have other awesome tools like Snagshout and Scope which help you gather additional reviews and discover profitable products to sell on Amazon.

Now all these tools have tens if not hundreds of thousands of users and they are awesome. But anyway I wanted Jeff on the show today, because he has access to a lot of Amazon data, and he works deeply with a wide variety of Amazon sellers. In other words he follows the industry very closely, and he knows a ton of what’s going on. And with that welcome to the show Jeff, how are you doing today man?

Jeff: Great Steve, thanks for having me, thanks for setting me up. I guess I have a lot to live up to now; I’m going to try to deliver.

Steve: Yes, so before we begin give us the quick background story and tell us how Seller Labs got started, and kind of how you guys all came with the idea of Amazon automation software.

Jeff: Yeah, so if you go back into the history of Seller Labs our two co-founders were working on a physical product business. So they were buying books at retail auction, so all the books and products that literally fall off of the truck and never get delivered to you by USPS ended up in a warehouse outside of Atlanta Georgia. And they would do auctions on a weekly basis, and Brandon and Paul kind of got started in the industry doing some online arbitrage with books, and then got into buying physical books from the USPS auction.

And I think when they started it was out of the basement of their house which quickly grew into about 3000 or 4000 square foot storage locker, which within about six months grew into a 10,000 square foot warehouse. And from auction they were really buying everything from books to batteries, to lagos [ph], to precious metals, right? So you…

Steve: These aren’t textbooks right, these are book books?

Jeff: No, they weren’t — so we — they kind of got started in the textbooks space, but it was also regular dollar books. Text books obviously have a higher profit margin.

Steve: Sure.

Jeff: Yeah, but it was everything from that to precious medals. And the USPS auction was really fun and people that kind of were involved in the internet back in those days, they didn’t knew how this worked, but you walked into a huge warehouse right. And everything was in gaylords [ph] and for those that don’t know what a Gaylord is imagine like a wood skid with like a four foot wall all around it, and then inside that wall is just piled with stuff right?

And you walked around and everything was in lots, and so you couldn’t see anything beyond the top layer of that box. So you had to like make this educated guess as to the retail, or online value of the box that you were going to buy and then you bid on it. And the more boxes you bought the better you got it estimating their cost and such like that.

And Brandon is a programmer by nature, and so he was programming all of our inventory and shelving, and deciding what went into FBA and what stayed at our warehouse. And we had this problem, and the problem was that we would properly describe books, but we would still get negative seller feedback. And so Brandon was trying to solve a problem of how do I get seller feedback on my good books, because I only seem to get negative feedback on my bad books.

And that was really the initial build of Feedback Genius was solving that problem, so that we could target messages specifically based on condition type at that time. Or length of delivery so people that got their books they were in good condition and got them first. We were asking them for feedback to combat the people who got books with water stains and couldn’t read, then it had water stains and then wanted to complain about it.

Steve: I see so this is for seller feedback or product feedback or both?

Jeff: So the system was really built– if you go back into like 2011, 2012, seller feedback was what everybody needed. And the concept of product reviews didn’t really exist in the way that it does today.

Steve: Okay, and so are those guys still selling any physical products, or is it just all software now at this point?

Jeff: Yeah, so in 2013 we attended a conference looking for software to build our business and we realized that we had better software than the software that was out there. So we transitioned at that point in time and started shuttering our warehouse, and moved to a full blown software company. So in 2014, a little over two years ago or almost two years ago we left the physical product space, and now we are just a fully fledged software company with over 30 employees out of Athens, Georgia.

Steve: So you actually developed the tool out of your own needs, and then just kind of adapted it for the masses?

Jeff: Yeah, and I think what most people find in most of the tools that are in the market especially the Amazon market, that’s how they were designed. They were somebody’s spreadsheet, or they were somebody’s internal tool to help them with their problem. And then they were kind of who were built out to scale. And that is one of the tricks of the Amazon world is building a tool that can scale properly to thousands of customers.

Steve: So was that the same thing with Snagshout and Scope?

Jeff: Yeah, so Snagshout was actually a funny story. So Paul’s wife was starting to get involved with buying discounted products online, and writing reviews for them. And she was mad because whenever she would go to get a product they had already given away their 20 or 25 of them.

So Paul really kind of designed Snagshout as a way for his wife to be able to get access to more products to test and write reviews on, and because he was like, well I could just build one of those, and we could have people list products on it and you could get access to those products, and we could build a better system.

Because back in those days, this was in like October of 2015 you had to post your item up for review, and then you had to collect all of this information back from your reviewer to understand who the reviewer was. And there was nothing automated about the process. So we really seeked at that point to automate the process, but typically good software is designed to solve an internal problem that you have, that you feel the market is having as well.

Steve: So interesting Snagshout was developed for his wife, and then they later decided to prioritize it, or was that the intention all along?

Jeff: That was the intention all along. It was — we saw the growth of the Amazon reviewer market growing obviously with everything we have within Feedback Genius. We saw the number of sellers requesting product reviews increasing significantly, the number of sellers moving to the private label industry increasing significantly.

And as we were making changes to the Seller Lab — the Feedback Genius platform to be more product review oriented, we built out Snagshout. So we kind of looked at Feedback Genius as your way of developing organic reviews. And then Snagshout is your version of Amazon lightening deals, or Amazon vine, so it’s your way to kind of jump start your campaigns.

Steve: Okay and so both of your top products Snagshout and Feedback Genius involve helping an Amazon seller get more feedback for their products. But recently in the past few months I would say Amazon has been cracking down on artificial reviews, and kind of degrading the value of giveaway types of reviews. So can you give us some insight on what the current review landscape is like?

Jeff: Yeah, so I’ll take a little bit of – Let’s go back, I’m going to first say there’s nothing artificial about the reviews, and I’ll explain the difference between artificial and fake reviews, and the review landscape as it exist today, so let’s hit that up first. Amazon had a law suit that was in probably about a year ago in 2015, where they sued a company that was selling Amazon reviews. And flat out if you went to their site, it said buy an Amazon review, I think it was like $50 or something like that.

One of the courses that sells in the market place, or was sold in the marketplace was telling people the value of the review was $50, and then magically this company started charging $50 for a review. But what they did they became highly illegal besides charging for a review, is they never actually physically shipped the product to the end user.

So the end user would go online and they would buy the product using the coupon code, but the product would never be shipped, they would ship actually just an envelope with nothing in it, so that Amazon believed that a shipment took place, and so the seller was never having to actually give up the physical product, so that was totally fake reviews.

The second totally fake reviews that Amazon cracked down on were the Fiverr websites where you could pay somebody on Fiverr to just go on and write reviews. And Amazon explicitly states in their terms of service, that you should not and cannot write reviews for products for which you have not used. So you can’t ask your best friend to go write a review for your product if they’ve never used your product.
And so obviously that’s hard for them to crack down on, because there’s no way for them to know that’s the idea of the verified review, but when there’s people just flat out selling reviews, they can trace it and track it in that way.

In August of 2015, I’m trying to keep my calendar straight in my head, Amazon made an update to their terms of service, and it really sent the whole industry into a bit of a teasy, and within that update of their terms of service, they made a couple very slight wording changes that really made everybody unsure of what was happening, and so they added a terminology that said that you cannot provide excessive couponing, and that you cannot intent to manipulate the sales algorithm.

Those two things really sent everybody into this world of trying to understand what does Amazon mean, and everybody from that point forward has been looking for Amazon to say can I do this, can I not do that, can I use a super URL, can I not use a super URL. We in the Amazon world as sellers are looking for this black or white, tell us what we can do, tell us what we can’t do.

Prior to the update in 2015, any purchase, whether the purchase was free or full price, they got a review qualified as what we call the verified review. One of the things that was noticed immediately after that update was that if you gave a product away for free, the verified review badge disappeared from the listing, and Amazon has gone back within their algorithm and cleaned up some things.

Essentially what Amazon was saying was you need to really purchase this if you got it for free, and a lot of people get hanged up on the disclaimer, but understand that the disclaimer that Amazon requires you to leave, you have to leave a disclaimer that says you received the product for free or just counter exchange for your honest opinion. Well there is an Amazon rule that’s also a federal trade commission rule.

Steve you probably know this from your blogging days, if you go back in the history what happen was we would send products to bloggers, and we would ask them to write about it, you might even pay a blogger to write about your product.

Steve: Right, and it has to be fully disclosed.

Jeff: Right, and that’s all federal trade commission, and that’s the same thing that Amazon is trying to implement within their reviews.

Steve: Okay.

Jeff: Now it’s August of 2015, the whole world is kind of turned upside down, and everyone is trying to figure out what the terms of service changes mean, and we made a couple of changes at Snagshout in the intent to protect our customers. So we stopped using super URLs and for people who don’t know…

Steve: What if you decide – Yeah, I was going to say please just define that for the listeners.

Jess: A super URL is a link that sends you to Amazon, and it is adding information to the link so that Amazon believes that a search has occurred on their sites. So I just gave you the really basic version of it, but I could share a link to a blog post.

Steve: That’s good enough.

Jeff: It gives you a very technical explanation of it.

Steve: Okay, I’ll link that up in the show notes.

Jeff: What Amazon was saying, was hey we know you are doing this, and you are doing this with the intent to manipulate, so we are going to say there’s no more intentional manipulation of the algorithm. Our personal interpretation of that was that that’s what a super URL was. We subsequently had a meeting with Amazon in Seattle, and we flat out asked them and they said we do not recommend you use super URLs.
Now we all know Amazon and they cannot, they will not come out and publically state anything like that, but we feel very confident that super URLs are bad, and that whether they are negative to the seller today or will be in the future, we are positive that they are bad and they will negatively affect the seller either today or in the future. It might not lead to an account suspension, but it could lead to a downgrading of your search results or some other type of penalty like we’ve seen in the Google…

Steve: I see Amazon walking in Google’s footsteps really. Google went through all this before in like 2013 I think, and Amazon is just catching up with their own internal product search stuff.

Jeff: Exactly, I mean Panda, Penguin, Kangaroo, all the animals that utilize the sites who were doing it bad, but weren’t breaking the rules, found out that in the long run they were breaking the rules, and went into a purgatory that was realty hard to get out of.

Steve: Okay, so no super URLs. Can you comment a little bit on just like the weight of these give away type of review now.

Jeff: Yeah, so nobody knows the answer, and that’s the one thing I always like to state from the beginning. I love websites that say we are 100% Amazon compliant. Understand that what that means when a site says that is that they believe they are 100% Amazon compliant because they didn’t get a stamp from Amazon telling them that they are compliant. The weight of the reviews, they are different thoughts and strategies in the market as to what now constitutes a verified review.

We have seen products given away at an 80% discount that still get a verified review, and we’ve seen ones that don’t. And so I think it’s very – Our believe, just our general believe is that products given away for a discount of 50 or 60% off are in the realm that will most likely still get a verified review. Now there is no way to know whether that number is 52 or 48 or 61, but that’s our general belief is that that is a discount that is not excessive, and that is not raising red flags with Amazon, like the people who are giving their products away for a penny at 99% off.

Steve: Do you still have to reveal that you received it for a significant discount if it’s let’s say at a 30% discount?

Jeff: That is a great question, and one that I have argued that you don’t, but technically per Amazon’s rules, any discount that you receive you are supposed to state, because it’s not like a deep discount. It’s just I received this product at a discount, but my argument Steve if you just kind of play with me here is, if you get a coupon to try a pizza company, you are not required to go on Yelp and say I only tried this pizza company because I got a coupon.

Steve: Yeah, exactly which is why I asked you this question, was there was like a grey area here, right.

Jeff: I think there is, I mean there clearly is because Amazon hasn’t defined, and what I like to tell people is understand Amazon’s intent, right? And Amazon’s intent is to maintain the validity of their review system, because that’s a cornerstone and a backbone of their whole ecosystem. And so if you are giving away – Because the other thing is the word excessive, how many products can you give away, and I also think it matters who you are giving the products away to.

So I’ll give you an example if you are giving the products away to somebody like my wife. My wife buys and shops on Amazon, and reviews products on a regular basis, so if you look at her review profile, 70 or 80% of the products that she buys are full price products without a coupon, and then she picks up some items from Snagshout every once in a while to try as well. And if you put that in comparison to a heavy reviewer who is picking up 95% of their products from review sites at discounts that are 90 to 95% off, and everyone of them is a 5 star review, there’s ways in the algorithm to detect and validate it or add a weight to that. How the algorithm works I have no clue.

Steve: That brings me on my next question, how do you seek out the real reviewers, and does Snagshout do anything about that?

Jeff: Yeah, I would say that it depends what you are trying to do and how fast you are trying to do it. So if you have a broad use product, a flashlight, a garlic press right, isn’t that the one everyone likes to use? If you’ve got a general use product, because what’s at our disclaimer just because we mention a product doesn’t mean you should go source it, I got to do that right because that’s what people do. If you got a general use product, then I feel you are okay using a site like Snagshout because you are talking about general use products, and most people are general use people and are using them.

If you have a very niche product, you have a product geared towards camping, or you have a product geared towards having a baby, then if the person who is reviewing your product hasn’t had a baby, and isn’t buying other baby products they are probably not the best person to be reviewing your product. So it’s almost using common sense and I think it’s using pricing right?

So as an example we had somebody on Snagshout who had a baby product, it was a $40 retail value. I like to talk about perceived value, meaning what can you buy that product for on average on Amazon, and the perceived value of this product was around $35, meaning that if you went to page 1, most every product on that page was in the $35 range, and they gave that away on Snagshout for $15.
Somebody who doesn’t have a baby isn’t going to spend $15 just to get a product for review. That is a great way for you to protect yourself and the people who really want to be using your products that will give you real reviews for your products.

Steve: Let me ask you this follow up question then, so do you still recommend giving products for free in return for a review, or is everything leaning more towards like heavily discounting an item today?

Jeff: I think you have to look at – One of the things we’ve learnt from Amazon by watching the– So Amazon has a group called the product review suspension team, and that team is – I normally get their title wrong, but their job is to look through the reviews, and look for inconsistent behavior, so what’s inconsistent behavior? If you are selling a vitamin supplement, and you are giving 5 of your products away every day for free, you are excessive and trying to manipulate the system.

If you are doing a new product launch and you give away 50 of your products for free, because you are trying to get people out there and talking about your products, there are people who could argue that’s manipulation, but that’s also marketing. And that’s how you launch a product, right that’s what you would do if you were launching that product locally.

And if you have a product that has a – If you continue to do that for a long period of time, then you might be manipulating and being excessive, but if you are doing it because it’s a new product and you are trying to get some attention to that product, I don’t believe you are violating the system, I believe that’s exactly what the system is there for.

Steve: If I can interpret your answer, what you are suggesting, and it’s like a grey area, is you want to just think about what Amazon’s interest are in preserving their review algorithm when you are taking action.

Jeff: I think you really want to do that, and you want to look it like what’s the– How do you really need to market your product. So what we recommend is you first start with optimizing your listing, okay so you got to have a rock solid listing, you got to have photos, bullet points, and everything needs to be feature benefit, right? What’s in it for the consumer?

Then after that, you need to get your baseline reviews, so you need to have 10 to 15 reviews so that when somebody lands on your site, on your product, they actually can understand that that product has value to them, and that other people have agreed with that. And so that’s a great way to use Snagshout is get those initial reviews.

Steve: Are these free reviews like complete give away reviews or?

Jeff: I believe you should sell your product for as much as you can get for your product, and so it comes down to if you have a garlic press, you probably need to give it away for next to nothing, but if you have a high perceived value product you should try to get money back for your product and sell it. I know that’s a very vague answer, but I think there’s millions of products on Amazon, there’s 60 million search terms on Amazon or something crazy like that, so it’s hard to say there’s one path that you should do.

Steve: What is your feeling on doing a really mass give away in the begging to launch your product?

Jeff: I would try to use – Mass meaning? Do you have a number in mind?

Steve: Hundreds of thousands, I guess hundreds, let’s do hundreds.

Jeff: I would use external sources for driving that traffic.

Steve: Can you be more specific.

Jeff: Facebook campaign, right so let’s go back to the baby product. Run on a Facebook campaign that’s targeting people who have recently had a baby or have a child under a certain age. I think you are going to be better off to get that kind of volume coming from outside sources than trying to give that many products away. I also believe you should stair step it, so you’ve got your product optimized, you got your initial reviews, the next thing you should do is optimize your sponsored ads, because sponsored ads are essentially legal super URLs.

Because somebody types in the word garlic press, your ad shows up, they buy it, Amazon is connecting the word garlic press to your garlic press, and you just created a super URL. You could run sponsored ads at a loss or at a break even, but you should maximize those. Then you’ll have a deficit, so you’ll know that you are looking for 50 sales a day, you are able to generate 20 sales a day from sponsored ads. Now you can use a tool like Facebook or a tool like Snagshout to generate the missing 30 sales that you have, using coupon and discounting.

Steve: Okay, so what I want, and I don’t know if you can give me a straight answer here, but in an ideal launch, let’s say you had a product that you wanted to launch, what would be your step by step strategy just to get that thing launched?

Jeff: Okay, so let me give you an example that we have documented on our website, so and please don’t go source about – It’s an apple slicer, don’t go source the apple slicer.

Steve: Okay, I think no one is going to do that, but okay – Actually, yeah.

Jeff: It’s kind of funny because one of the things we should have tracked was we should have tracked how many people were selling apple slicers before we started documenting the process, and how do people sell them today, because it clearly has increased. After Amazon made their algorithm updates, we worked with a guy on a product to get it launched with the intent of demonstrating how Snagshout still works without super URLs.

And so we did an apple slicer, and the apple slicer is a very competitive product, it’s a very competitive space; there’s over almost 3,000 people who have a product that ranges for the word apple slicer, according to Scope and other tools. You are looking at estimated sales of 30 to 50 units a day of the product if you are ranking high on page 1, so fairly descent opportunities selling an apple slicer.
We launched our product and when we initially launched our product we gave away 182 products on Snagshout over a 10 day period. So we didn’t go for 30 which is what you mathematically need to rank up at the top, we went for the bottom of page 1, and we gave away 18 a day for 10 days.

Steve: Just for free, right?

Jeff: I think we sold them for a dollar.

Steve: Dollar, okay got it.

Jeff: We were able to generate out of 182 we were able to generate 161 reviews out of 182 giveaways.

Steve: Okay and did those turn out to be verified purchase reviews?

Jeff: Yeah, but obviously things have changed since August, and so we are actually about to run another test to do the exact same thing to kind of see, we constantly are testing the system to see how it works. We have looked at everything within Snapshot to see what percentage are verified and which are not. How many people lose verified reviews and they change to non verified?

Unfortunately there is no primary reason, you will find people with 50% discounts that are not getting verified reviews, and you will find people with 70 or 80% discounts who are getting verified reviews. The only thing that I can think of, and Steve you will probably agree with me, the only thing I can think of is the Amazon algorithm very similar to Google is influx, and so it’s going to take it a while to get through and clean up everything.

Steve: Sure, and I’m sure things are changing everyday over there as well.

Jeff: Right, and like we saw with Panda and Penguin on Google, it went in waves right?

Steve: Yeah.

Jeff: It didn’t just all happen at one time.

Steve: Right, those are very painful waves, if I remember.

Jeff: They were and more painfully than that was if you got put it in the purgatory from one of the waves, it could to take you a year just to be re-indexed to get back out of it.

Steve: Exactly yeah, okay sorry keep going.

Jeff: We gave away the 182 products, and we ranked I think, we got up to number 7 ranking. We then stopped for about a month primarily because our velocity picked up so fast that we needed to get our inventory to catch up, right? Because the last thing you want is to get your velocity moving faster than your inventory turnaround time. Because pulling out of stock is one of the worst thing you can do for your ranking.

Then about 2 months later we started writing more sponsored ad campaigns, and we did another small giveaway on Snapshot. I think we give away 50 units the second time, and that boosted us from the 7th position to the 4th position. We got as high as I think the number 1, we were as high as the number 1 position, I think right now I’m looking and we are in number, spot number 3.

Steve: Okay, so it’s held even though you stopped doing the giveaways?

Jeff: Yeah, and once you get into your spot, you really have to start messing, not messing with, playing with your price and optimizing for velocity and profit. We found that if you lower your price a little bit, you can increase your sales and off to where the profitability still makes sense. And then again once you get into a strong position, you can actually your raise your price and maintain that position while making a higher profit margin.

Steve: Okay, and since we are kind of on the topic, so can you comment a little bit about all the different factors that affect search on Amazon, with respect to this experiment actually.

Jeff: I will caveat this and I’ve said it a couple of times that this is just our opinion, but I think it’s pretty widely accepted amongst most people in the space. Your title, your bullets, your keywords probably have a small piece of it. Your price, your inventory, both your quantity of inventory, your history of inventory and your location of inventory. Let’s kind of break that down, so your quantity of inventory is how much you have on hand, and how long Amazon believes that inventory remains in stock, your history is your demonstration on Amazon that you replenish your products and you replenish them on time.

Amazon, we believe actually gives you– the more inventory you have Amazon gives you credit for that. That kind of makes sense, they don’t want to support somebody who is going to run out of stock, and then there is not more to sell. They want brands that are going to be around for some period of time. Then your location meaning are you doing merchant fulfilled, or are you doing FBA.

Steve: Right.

Jeff: Your photos have a significant value in the search and even more than that they have a significant value in the conversion of those search pages to your listing page, that’s what is going to catch somebody’s attention, and your price. We call those your direct factors, those are all things you can control.

Steve: I’m just curious, have you done the experience where you’ve increased the amount of inventory and saw your rankings rise?

Jeff: What we have seen is that it’s not necessarily about increasing your inventory, right? I don’t want to make a blanket statement and have everybody go out there and just order more products.

Steve: Well you have to have the sales velocity to support the increase in inventory, right?

Jeff: Right, Amazon wants to see– so if you know that your replenishment time, they don’t want to see your inventory dwindling low for a long period of time. So if you are restocking at the right intervals, you are getting credit from Amazon by showing your history. This is not an experiment I have done, but I do know somebody who has done this experiment, and what they do is they maintain their own warehouse where they hold larger supplies of their inventory, and they are constantly shipping to Amazon to replenish inventory based on 30, 60, and 90 days sales projections.

Steve: I was just wondering if this is like a chicken and egg thing. You could be artificially limiting your sales by shipping in less stuff. You see what I’m saying?

Jeff: Yeah, like if you are doing kind of an intro to private label where you are ordering in 100 products, and your reorder is going to be 12 weeks. Yeah, it’s a chicken or egg thing. I do believe the people who bring in larger inventories from the get go to support, can move up the velocity faster, because Amazon doesn’t want to sell your products faster than you have on the inventory.
Steve: Right, exactly.

Jeff: If you have 100 items in inventory and your product on page 1 is going to sell 25 units a day, Amazon is going to just by logic,
Amazon is going to slow you from getting it back because you are going to be on page 1 for 4 days, and then you are gone.

Steve: Yeah, and so that makes total sense. That implies that if you are going to launch something you should have sufficient inventory to not artificially limit yourself. In case it takes off, right?

Jeff: It’s definitely a challenge and part of the risk of building a brand on Amazon. One of the strategies I have seen … I know a seller who projected his inventory and thought that he was ordering 3 months worth of inventory, and then once he started selling he realized he had 9 months of inventory. And obviously there is the opposite side where you thought you ordered 3 months worth of inventory and you ended up with 3 week worth of inventory.

It is a guessing game, but if you are projecting your inventory based on a 3 month approach, I think you are starting okay. Especially if you are importing your products from overseas where it’s going to take you 16 weeks or 12 week to get that turn around, you don’t want to be bringing in a product in and only have 3 week worth of inventory unless you are planning to airship more products in. You are just going to spend all this effort to get ranked, and then you are going to fall off the face of the earth when your product goes out of stock.

Steve: Right, plus doing air shipment is not economical there.

Jeff: No, one strategy I know that a lot of sellers do is though if they see their stock starting to dwindle they might place the order and send 3 weeks’ worth of inventory air, and send the rest via sea. There’s a lot of strategies that can be employed, it’s really a matter of you having a comfort level and it comes down to– in a lot of cases it comes down to the amount of cash that a seller has available for making the investment.

Steve: Sure, right. Hey Jeff I wanted to talk a little bit, just a about reviewing. There is a whole bunch of these private Facebook groups that do reviews. I know that Amazon has been cracking down on these things, and they know who your friends are and they know whether you have any relationships with them, so what is your take on them?

Jeff: It is scary huh?

Steve: Yeah, it is scary, so is your take these days generally to avoid, and how does Snagshout kind of get around this?
Jeff: Yeah, Snagshout has 130,000 reviewers on our platform, so just by the nature of how we release products on our site it kind of spreads them out across more shoppers. We also limit shoppers so that they can’t have– Some of the other review clubs, one shopper might have 25 items at one time, and so by limiting the number of items that a shopper can have, you create an environment where it is shared and is fair across the board.

I think that, I guess ultimately the answer is I don’t know what one is good and what one is bad. The problem that you have with review clubs in general is I think going back to the idea that the same reviewer is potentially reviewing all of the products, and it just
doesn’t look as natural as if you had a larger pull of people who have the potential to do it. If the review club is required– so there are some review clubs out there that are there [inaudible 00:40:24]. We personally believe that is a bad user experience from the aspect that how many merchants are going to pick somebody who’s given a 3 star review to try their product, right?

Steve: Right.

Jeff: We believe Amazon is watching that, we have seen that in suspension letters around product reviews. Amazon has named some of these clubs, I’m not going to speak to that, but as you Google it you can probable figure it out, and a lot of these clubs have changed their policies because of that. We tend to air on the side of our shopper.

The attitude that we take with Snagshout is very simple whenever we develop any products or feature to the site. If Jeff Bezos was to use our site, would he feel we are trying to manipulate the system or violate Amazon’s terms of service. And if we can honestly answer that question that he will not feel that way, then we continue forward and if we honestly answer that question and we are not sure, then we stop.

Steve: It seems like any review club needs some checks and balances to kind of go over the listing, make sure it’s a sound listing, and maybe a solid product to kind of improve the integrity of both parties to prevent any problems from happening, right?

Jeff: Well, I mean what we tell anyone that signs up for Snagshout, the first thing I tell them is if you are not using Feedback Genius you are wasting your money. Why would you not set up a system to automate review solicitation from organic sales, before you start worrying about generating sales and reviews?

Steve: Well plus it’s free to start; it’s like a no brainer right?
Jeff: It’s free to start and it scales economically based on your orders, but it’s the idea that those are the reviews you should be focusing on, and then you should be using a system like Snagshout to help to kind of spur your sales along the way. And I think where sellers start to get themselves on trouble is where they became reliant on a system like Snagshout to generate all of their velocity. And so the success of your products is going to come from your listing, and your ability to convert people from your listing to sales. A tool like Snagshout should be a jumping off point; it should not be a necessity for continued product success.

Steve: Let me ask you …

Jeff: Your product has to stand on its own.

Steve: Sure, and so is getting the initial birthday [ph] reviews, is that just like a onetime thing, or is there something that you should continue to do at certain intervals?

Jeff: Yeah, I mean I think you have to constantly you know, products have life cycles and you have to understand your product’s life cycle, and you have to understand when your product is and is not being used right? So the apple slicer for instance is probably going to be used a lot more in the fall when it’s apple season. I know that sounds silly, but that’s when people are thinking about apples, right?
Think about like is your product a Mother’s day, a Father’s day, a St. Patrick’s day, like what would spur sales for your product, and if you are using Snagshout to boost your sales during a time when your dales are naturally boosted, because the search for that product is there, it makes sense if you are … That is something we recommend.

So you can use us for your initial launch, and then like let’s say for instance for whether to use the apple slicer maybe like 2 or 3 weeks before apple season, I might want to do an extra little bump because I know there is going to be an increase in search volumes on my terms.

Steve: Sure, okay.

Jeff: I think where people get hang up is they are not watching the right data, and so they are trying to use reviews, and review clubs and couponing to make up for other mistakes within their product. And so if you have people coming to your listing, then you have what is called a session within the Amazon data, right?

Then your sales are your conversions, and so what you actually should be looking for is your problem that your sessions aren’t increasing, or that your conversions aren’t increasing. Because you might be increasing your rank on keywords, but you are not converting them into sales. Then your problem is your listing right? Your problem isn’t reviews, you got enough people coming, you are just not getting enough people to convert.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. I mean you have to take care of all different factors in order to be successful. Jeff, I want to touch on one thing before you go, and this is the notion of sending out the feedback emails like on Feedback Genius. What are your recommendations these days for the number of emails to actually send, because I have heard anecdotes that certain buyers are kind of getting annoyed with the amount of email that’s getting sent to them these days.

Jeff: Yeah, so the way I answer that is every product is different, but if you don’t have a purpose in sending the email, don’t send it. So 2 is probably the number you should shoot for unless you have a good use case for sending more than 2.

Steve: Okay and these 2 are for what purpose?

Jeff: Typically all of your messages should be to enhance the customer’s experience, so it should be part of your product’s life cycle to the customer. It should not be repeating the message that Amazon is already sending, so you don’t need to tell them that their order has been confirmed, they already know that. Let’s say the apple slicer for instance, I can enhance the customer’s experience by delivering a message based on the product being delivered, and I can include a recipe book for my favorite apple, my grandma’s famous apple pie.
I have now given them something, and haven’t really asked for anything in return, and then I can back to them another day or 2 later and say, “How is the apple slicer working for you? Did you have a chance to try my grandma’s pie recipe? If you wouldn’t mind can you leave a review?”

Steve: That’s borderline email marketing, is that a grey area in terms of what you can send a customer through Amazon’s email?

Jeff: Okay, so it’s not, it’s part of the– if it’s part of the product that they are purchasing, it’s not considered email marketing. So if I was to say, “Try my grandma’s recipe, and buy her baking dish.” Now I’m in email marketing, and I have violated Amazon’s terms of service. As long as I’m not talking about anything about buying other products, I’m just talking about the use of my product, it could be.
I always make recommendations, how to clean your product, how to use your product, best recipes for your product, shopping list for you know how to make those recipes. Those are all good, anything that’s saying that if you have this product you should buy this product, though or come check out, you know here is a coupon to try something else that I sell. Those are all violations of Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: So it sounds like your recommended flow right now is to give some sort of thing in your first email, and then ask for the feedback in a subsequent email.

Jeff: Yeah, so there is a couple of different flows that can work. Again, you got to know your product. So I’ll give you an example, we had a guy who was selling a product, it was a powder, and what happened with his product was his powder settled during shipping, so when you opened up the bag, the top like 30% of the bag was filled with air. A lot of sellers started to think, I’m sorry a lot of shoppers started to think they were getting ripped off.

And so he used Feedback Genius to send a message when the product was being shipped before delivery that just said, “Hey, when you open up your product it settles during shipping, and it’s going to seem like there is a lot of air, but understand the weight is still the weight that you bought.” That reduced his customer service complaints significantly, and then he came back and he followed up with an ask for a review.

If you having a customer service issue, you can use Feedback Genius to actually address the customer service issue. We had somebody else who sold a product that was based on size, and it was not returnable once you opened it. So she sent actually 3 emails, she sent one based on the product being shipped saying, “Don’t forget, here is how to measure properly to know that you got the right one. And if you open it, it is non returnable. She did that same message again based on delivery. And then she wrote a few days after delivery to see how the product was being used.

So how can you improve your customer’s experience through messaging, and that’s a great example. If you have a food product or a kitchen product or a camping product, be a brand to these people. Talk about your product in the lifestyle, and in the framework of how they are going to use it, right? And by giving them information you now create a dialogue and a relationship with them, so that when you are asking for the next piece of it, it’s a natural. I’ll give you one more example, I recently bought a product on Amazon, it was a magic product.
And when I got the email from the guy, it was all about like extra tips. Like if you are having trouble doing the trick do this or try this or — so he was trying to help me understand how to use his product better, which made me not only want to give him a good review, but if I’m going to buy another magic trick I’m going to buy it from this guy, because I know that he is going to help me succeed in trying to do magic.

Steve: So it sounds like what you want to avoid is like repeated feedback request messages, right? I mean you want to always to be giving value to your customer with every send?

Jeff: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Jeff: Yeah.

Steve: Jeff man we’ve been talking for quite a while, and everything that you’ve provided has been very helpful. Where can people find you if they have questions or want to check out your products?

Jeff: Yes, so I’m sure we’ll have a link in the show notes to get to a special offer on Feedback Genius, but we are at feedbackgenius.com, or sellerlabs.com. And I would be happy to — you can always find me on Facebook or as you mentioned I attend a lot of conferences. You are welcome to come up, and say hi and ask questions. I love talking Amazon.

Steve: Yeah, and for all of you listening who are going to be at the Seller’s Summit, Jeff is going to be there also and he is going to be talking as well.

Jeff: Yeah, we are going to get into some of the concepts we talked about in here a little bit more in depth with some examples, and some survey data that we have from real shoppers on what gets them to buy.

Steve: Cool man, well Jeff hey thanks for coming on the show.

Jeff: Great I appreciate it, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Jeff is incredibly knowledgeable about Amazon, and he is got tons of user data to back it up. Not only that, but the tools that Jeff’s company Seller Labs offers are must haves if you plan on selling on Amazon. For example I have been using Feedback Genius for quite a while now, and Snagshout is a great tool for giving your listings a boost with reviews.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode120. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

119: How To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Store In Just 4 Months Selling Coloring Books Online

119: How To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Store In Just 4 Months Selling Coloring Books Online

Today, I’m thrilled to have Michael Jackness on the show. Mike is someone who I met on a recent ecommerce mastermind trip and after hearing about his successes, I knew that I had to have him on the show.

Mike runs a bunch of ecommerce websites which include Icewraps.com, CuttingBoard.com, ColorIt.com. And he also runs his own business blog at EcomCrew.com

Anyway Mike is a gold mine of information and what I like about him is that he’s constantly trying new strategies to boost sales. For example, his most recent store ColorIt.com is only 4 months old and is on track for a 7 figure year.

What You’ll Learn

  • The importance of having a premium domain in terms of ranking in the search engines
  • Mike’s strategy for ecommerce SEO.
  • Why dropshipping sucks as a business model
  • How Mike has seamlessly interleaved email marketing with his strategies.
  • How Mike has scaled his business so quickly with Facebook ads

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the mywifequitherjob podcast, we will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Michael Jackness on the show. Now Mike is someone who I met on a recent ecommerce mastermind trip, and after hearing about his success, I knew that I had to have him on the show. Now Mike runs a bunch of ecommerce websites, which includes icewraps.com, cuttingboard.com, and colorit.com, and he also runs his own business blog at ecomcrew.com.

Anyway Mike is a goldmine of information about ecommerce, and what I like about him is that he’s constantly trying new strategies to boost sales. So for example his most recent store colorit.com is only 4 months old and is on track for a 7 figure a year already, and with that welcome to the show Mike, how you doing today man?

Jackness: I’m doing great, thank you.

Steve: Give us the quick background for those of us who don’t know who you are or your background about how you got into ecommerce in the first place.

Jackness: It’s an interesting road, and we weren’t really focusing on ecommerce to begin with. We were affiliate marketers and had domains like treadmill.com and cuttingboard.com, and one day just decide that we don’t want to do affiliate marketing anymore, and it’s going by the way of the dodo bird …

Steve: Why was that by the way?

Jackness: Well, I think that if you have an affiliate site like yours, there’s definitely still room for affiliate marketing, sorry. What I’m I saying …

Steve: We shouldn’t have talked so much on the pre interview.

Jackness: I had just eaten strawberry before we got started, and the seed like when I started talking went down … Sorry hold on just for a second.

Steve: Okay.

Jackness: Sorry about that, you probably need to start over the meeting, but or I can just start…

Steve: Just start talking about the affiliate marketing or why not affiliate marketing?

Jackness: Yeah, sorry, let me get started right there. So why not affiliate marketing? We were doing affiliate marketing for years; our background actually was in online poker affiliate marketing. That’s how we got started, and we made a lot of money during online poker affiliate marketing. In 2010, I decided to get out of that business, there was a lot of back story behind that, but just really sick of the industry and wanted to get into more “mainstream affiliate marketing.”

I started doing keyword domain investing, things like treadmill.com was one of the domains we got, but we also got things like graphicdesign.com, onlinedegree.com, and a couple of other, wordpressthemes.com, a couple other really high powered affiliate marketing type related domains or things that we decided we want to do affiliate marketing with.

In 2011, 2012, Penguin and Panda started coming out. The writing was really on the wall that affiliate marketing sites were going to have a very difficult time. Non-affiliate marketing sites like My Wife Quit Her Job I think that there is still a really good place for educational sites and even review sites, but these major head terms, Google is going out of their way to make sure that affiliate sites can no longer rank for things like WordPress themes for instance.

When we bought wordpressthemes.com something like 6 out of the top 10 listings were affiliate marketing sites. Now if you were to do that search, we are on the 3rd page and I think that we’re the highest ranked affiliate marketing site. My favorite book is Who Moved my Cheese. I don’t know if you’ve ever read that book, but it’s basically talks about people hemming and howling and not embracing change.

In our opinion, affiliate marketing was going to start struggling quite merely and our prediction was right. Fast forward 4 years later, and we made a decision, a bold decision of just basically transform all of our sites into a product or service that we can offer directly to the end user, and that’s actually how we got into ecommerce. It wasn’t really by design, it was okay well we have this domain treadmill.com, we have this domain cuttingboard.com, and we think that we can develop that into an ecommerce site, and the first one that we did was treadmill.com.

Steve: Would you say that the domain itself has very little bearing on ranking these days?

Jackness: No, it’s interesting, I get asked that question quite a bit, and I’m of the opinion that it actually makes a big difference. If you have a keyword domain, a premium keyword domain, I think it makes a very big difference. For instance cuttingboard.com ranks number 1 for cutting board and ranks number 1 for cutting boards, and bamboo cutting board and all these different things. We’ve been doing SEO for 12, 13 years now, and I know very well how many links it takes to get to number 1 for related searches, and I can say definitively that we have a fraction of the back links to curttingboard.com than we would have needed to rank number 1 if we had something like mike’s-best-cutting-board.info, or something like that.

We’ve definitely seen that this premium keyword domains are still doing quite well, because Google wants to let brands rank, and if your brand is cutting board, you’re really ranking for your brand and the keyword at the same time. We’ve noticed that also with icewraps.com. Now with colorit.com obviously we went a different direction, we didn’t get adultcoloringbooks.com or coloringbooks.com, and the main reason is because I don’t think that’s a good brand name for coloring books.

You would never want to brand your adult coloring books adult coloring books, it doesn’t make sense, so I thought that colorit is a nice short and easy to remember domain, so that was the reason behind that.

Steve: That’s the main reason for that is because you were trying to establish your own brand where as with Ice Wraps and Cutting Board, are they your own products or other people’s products?

Jackness: So I mean they started out as other people’s products, that’s how Treadmill got its start, and when we bought icewraps.com from another company, they were all other people’s products, and when we developed Cutting Board it was other people’s products, but we’ve gone through an evolution of okay we’re going to start doing ecommerce, and we’ll just … We’ll have a site like treadmill.com and because we’re treadmill.com and pounding on my chest like a gorilla here we’ll rank and we’ll sell a lot off product and we’ll do well.

What we discovered that drop shipping sucks. It’s an awful business to be in. You are relying on others all the time to make you successful, which I don’t like. I like being in control, and then on top of it, we were shipping heavy equipment that doesn’t end up at the end user on time or it ends up damaged or whatever, so that you guys assume less control. So our next step in the evolution of ecommerce was to do icewraps.com and cuttingboard.com with other people’s products that we could at least ship ourselves, and that was great.

We got a lot of control for that and we loved it, but then you start realizing there’s things like pricing issues and you are not really differentiating yourself from the market place, and PPC is really tough and if you are doing any type of advertising campaign for yourself, you are helping your vendors more than you are helping yourself, and your interests just don’t align with … Your business interests are aligned with your partners.

So we started developing our own products for all those brands, and we discovered that just we really like having the control, end to end control of the channel, almost like Apple does with its products.

Steve: Sure. Would you say that … Are you still selling other people’s products today, or is it mostly your on stuff on Ice Wraps and Cutting Board?

Jackness: On Ice Wraps and Cutting Board the majority are still other people’s products. I don’t know that that’s going to change. It may be over time, we’re slowly starting to introduce more and more of other people’s products to our … I’m sorry, our own products to that, to those sites, but I don’t really see us stopping selling other people’s products on those domains. They’re just too valuable as a reseller, but we can definitely get our house brand in there and do quite well.

Steve: Do you run special promotions for your own stuff, or do you favor your own stuff over some of the other brands or is it …

Jackness: We have … We’ve been walking a thin line because we don’t want to take off our manufacturers that we’re working with. We are making good money off those selling other people’s products. We treat it like a CVS does or a Walgreens, you walk in there and they have … They’re bringing the contact solution or whatever. We don’t ever disparage any of the other products that are on there, or even really try to say that ours is better, but we do have at a lower price and the reviews are good and we let people make up their own mind.

Steve: Okay, there’s a number of things I want to talk to you about today. First off as you mentioned you are raking number 1 on the front page for a lot of tough keyword terms like cutting board and ice wraps is a pretty hard to rank for. I want to talk a little bit about your strategy for SEO, and you already mentioned that your domain helps, but obviously that’s not the entire story right?

Jackness: Definitely not the entire story, and if you want to talk about SEO, one thing I want to really make clear here is that we do the [inaudible 00:10:31] these days. To the point where we’re paranoid and probably leave behind opportunity that is still considered white hat, but when you wake up one morning and you find your site delisted or penalized, it’s an awful feeling, and when you have a …

Steve: Did that happen to you?

Jackness: It did, it happened a couple of different times actually, and basically at this point really leant my lesson. The first time like yeah I learnt my lesson I’d do this again, and then you slowly but surely you’re nibbling around the edges of doing grey hat stuff, and then next you are really in the grey hat area. We never really did any black hat stuff, but we were definitely aggressive about getting links or writing thing content, or just writing stuff just to get content up on the internet that would rank.

The stuff worked for quite a while, but now I take the approach of, okay if I was in the Goggle board room, you were with Matt Cutts, the Google spam team, what is it that they are really trying to look for here? What are they really trying to have rank, and at the end of the day, they want to be legitimately the best search engine. When you type in something in the Google the number 1 result, the number 2 result should be the answer to your question.

If they don’t do that, their product ends up being Yahoo or Bing. It’s crappy results, that’s the reason why I don’t use Bing or Yahoo. It’s just the results are awful, so why not be that site, why not do everything that you can to legitimately be that site versus trying to cut corners and get there artificially, so that’s the approach that we take.

Steve: It’s interesting; I’ve recently rewritten some articles on my blog to make them more comprehensive. They were already on the front page, and I was just trying to raise their rankings, and by making their article more comprehensive, it’s actually jumped up about 4 spots for this article that I’m thinking about. I don’t know if that was just a fluke, or whether Google is actually really paying attention.

Jackness: I don’t think it’s a fluke at all, I think that there’s 2 things that you probably noticed. There’s one thing called a freshness update. Google has been pushing articles down that have been stagnant for years, so if it was something that hadn’t been touched in a long time, it could have been a freshness update, but the only thing is Google was like really giving preference to articles that are or what I call skyscraper posts which are basically 3, 4, 5000 words long, and you mentioned ecomcrew off the top of those.

If you are on there, we do that type of thing there. I mean every post we write is a minimum of 2000 words. It’s not a bunch of filler crap, just to get the 2000 words, it’s legitimate content and the idea is that you write something that’s so profound, just answers questions or blows people away in a way that they want to share it with their friends, that’s kind of litmus test that I use.

There’s so many pieces of content that I’ve consumed on the internet that I’ve done in 25 or 50% way through it and been like back, this is awful. That’s not what you want, you want people to read the content, scroll down to the end of it and then want more. They’ll be like, “Wow that was the most amazing thing I ever read.” That’s obviously a high bar to get to, and it’s hard to generate that type of content on a weekly or daily basis, but we end up putting something like that up about every 2 to 4 weeks, and it’s a lot of work, but everything we put up get’s a lot of attention.

We do that same thing on Cutting Board, on Ice Wraps and we’re doing it on ColorIt. For instance on ColorIt, we just wrote several thousand word piece about the benefits of coloring. We have a fulltime copywriter here and she spent about a week writing this article, and doing research and linking out to resources that are like hospitals and researchers and things like that.

The article really answers the question versus just some BS basically. We’ve done the same thing on Ice Wraps, for instance we wrote an article about little league and pitchers and why it’s important to ice your shoulder and your elbow, and it really gets into the technical reasons of why that’s important, and isn’t just a 300 word piece that doesn’t even answer the question. It just says shoulder icewraps are great, you really should buy a shoulder icewrap, we sell lots of shoulder icewraps, you can get a shoulder icewrap, and it just has a keyword stuffed in there a zillion times and doesn’t actually answer anything, and we stay away from that.

Steve: So it’s one thing to put out good content, but then you have to get people to link to you too, so do you have any strategies for that?

Jackness: We do. With the content itself, I mean we actually take … We have lots of strategies. And the first off every industry is different. So anything I’m going to mention here isn’t going to work for everyone. For instance with Treadmill that was one of our biggest challenges ever because that’s not a very interesting business. I mean you are not going to write about treadmills and get people to link to that content. It’s hard to write a fitness article and get people to link to it because it’s just so saturated.

So we did some interesting thing. First off we reached out to a lot of influential people in the industry. We were like okay, what does that actually mean. Who can we get to write for us, who can we actually get to participate in something like this. So what we ended up doing was going to fitness bloggers, because that’s a close enough industry or topic if you will that’s relevant and that’s how Google looks at it its relevancy. It’s relevant to Treadmill because you can train for a marathon on a treadmill and actually quite a few marathon runners train on treadmills in inclement weather, especially if the live in a place like Chicago or something where it’s cold and snowy.

In the winter time they’ll do their training indoors in the winter. So we actually contacted lots of fitness and running blogs and got them to start writing for us on our site. We never sent that spammy email that just basically says like, we are the greatest thing, we’ll pay you, or we’ll trade content with him. We’ve all gotten these awful emails or just immediately go on the spam box.

We basically approached them and say, we are interested in having you write content for our site and we are going to pay you, and make it clear that we don’t want it for free; we are just going to pay you. We start the relationship typically off like that and that way we are not asking for a link, and we are not asking them to do anything except give us content and we’ll pay you. And we were able to get about 10 or 12 influential people in this industry to write for us, and we put their content on our blog.

So we had a benefit of getting good content written on our site that we hoped that they would share for us. That’s basically you are doing it on a hope and a prayer. Obviously it’s going to be pretty high percentage of people that are going to be willing to do it, because if you paid someone you have a relationship with them, then you had an opportunity to talk to them, you’ve actually given them some money after you put the article up and you send it to them and say, “Hey look your article is up, feel free to share it with your community if you want to.” That type of angle.

80% of people are probably going to do that and that gives you more exposure. Then you get them to write a second article if they assume that they are going to work with you, then it’s okay well let’s take it a step further. Let’s get them to write again and then again. Then after like the third article we would say, “Hey look, we want to give you this badge to put on your website that says that you are a post contributor … That was the name of our blog because we call it treadmill post.

Then we got them to put our badge on their site and we would link it to their profile page. So it was very not spammy and every one of those was going to a different place. And that was kind of one of the strategies we took with Treadmill. Then I’m sorry were you going to say something there?

Steve: Yeah, I was going to ask, so what is the incentive of the blogger to write for your site? I mean were you paying them a lot of money?

Jackness: We were paying between like $100 and $150 per article. A fair price basically. They were writing 1500 to 2000 word article that was good content. They were either talking about their training routines, or they were talking about a race that they ran or something like that. It was good content that was on our blog. I mean not something that was going to necessarily directly convert into a transaction for us, but it was getting us links and getting us attention.

Steve: Okay, and then these people, I guess they weren’t thinking about getting traffic from this, right? It was purely for the money?

Jackness: Purely for the money yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Jackness: Another thing that we do when we did this is we had a profile on the article that they wrote about them, and link back to their site. So they felt like that they were getting the attention they deserved. I think that’s really important, and we talked about that in our preposition when we were offering to hire them.

Steve: Okay and then how many of those ended up linking back to you of the people that you guys paid?

Jackness: So about 80%.

Steve: Oh wow.

Jackness: Yeah. We would know usually within the first article if it was going to work or not. We didn’t really ask for a link until about the third or fourth article, but you could tell off the first one, like if you asked them to share it with their social media, and they would be like no we are not going to do that. We are okay thanks for the article, and you just never talk to them again.

Steve: Okay, yes so this is kind of like a long term strategy, right? This probably happens over the course of like weeks or months?

Jackness: Yes to … Even more specifically as far as the SEO strategy goes it’s an 18 to 24 month preposition that we are looking at. We are trying to really get like 1 or 2 quality links per month, and that’s all we really look for. We definitely are and the quality over quantity space and it just slow consistent pressure of getting more links and that really makes a difference. In the beginning you see no results. Your organic traffic like with ColorIt right now for instance it’s only been up for a few months. There is no organic traffic. I’m not spastic about it, because I know that it’s going to take 12 to 24 months to start seeing any results at all. Yeah, I mean it’s a long-term strategy.

Steve: Is this the similar strategy that you’ve taken with Cutting Board and ColorIt as well?

Jackness: It’s not, because it’s a little bit easier industry. Let me tell you just a few more things that we did with Treadmill real quick. Or actually one more specifically because I think this is really important for industries that are hard to SEO for. One of the other things that we did with Treadmill is we came up with this promotion to give people up to a $1000 cash back if they bought a treadmill. If they lost weight after they bought our units. The idea here was like for multi prone approach kind of thing.

So the idea was okay, well first off we are being held a MAP pricing here. We can’t sell this treadmill for less than the next guy. So what’s our value preposition? It was, okay well if you buy our treadmill most likely you are buying it because you want to lose weight. If you lose 100 pounds with our treadmill within x amount of time, we are going to send you 1000 bucks. If you lose I think it was 20 pounds, we’ll send you … I forgot the exact amounts, and I think it was $100 if you lost 20 pounds and if it was 50 it was $500 or something. I forget the exact numbers but it was something along those lines.

It became first of a great ad campaign because it did help convert some of our traffic and people were like okay well I need to lose 20 pounds. If I buy this $1000 treadmill from the treadmill.com versus walmart.com or sportsauthority, treadmill.com is offering a $100 rebate if I lose 20 pounds. We knew that very few people were going to actually fall through with that, these were New Year’s resolutions, or I want to get a beach body.

The reality is that most of our equipment unfortunately became the most expensive clothes hanger they ever bought, but it did help convert traffic but the SEO angle of it was, okay well now we have this really unique promotion that no one had ever done before in the industry at least that we knew off. We had to run it through legal and it cost us a few thousand dollars in legal fees to get the terms and conditions written in a way that complied with all states.

Which is really difficult because there is about 5 states out there that are notorious for coming after you for things like this. So we made sure we had all the bases covered. Once we did that then we contacted more fitness bloggers or newspapers and other media outlets, and this guy created a few links for us. It was just basically like treadmill.com is going to pay you to lose weight. It made for a compelling story, so that was another SEO angle that we took.

Steve: Interesting, so you mentioned earlier that you know exactly how many links it takes to get on the front page, so for something like a cutting board or an ice wraps or a treadmill, what would be your estimate?

Jackness: So for those keyword domains it’s been like 30 to 40, I mean very few. Again it’s just been getting 2 per month for a couple of years is basically what it takes. Now if we had a less keyword domain I think that it would probably take four times that many.

Steve: Four times that many? Wow, okay.

Jackness: That’s just basically what we’ve seen. Now your mileage might vary kind of thing, but we’ve seen … I think it’s going to be about four times harder for us to rank for adult coloring book for instance with colorit.com, than if we had adult coloringbooks.com as our brand, and that’s a long brand name and that’s not really like an actual brand name. So it’s not like a great example, maybe if it was more like mikesicepacks.com versus having icewraps.com, all right it definitely makes it more difficult.

Steve: Interesting, even if it’s just a little word like Mike in front of it, like Mikestreadmills it would make it that much harder, okay.

Jackness: For sure yeah I mean that’s what we’ve seen. Now again there is a lot of controversy about this you get … it’s kind of like talking religion with people, everyone kind of has a different opinion. For sure I can say definitively is what we’ve seen is that ranking for that specific word, whatever your keyword as in the plural doesn’t matter there. So cutting board versus cutting boards we see equal results, but we for sure we are definitely going to weigh less links that we would take if we had less keyword of a domain.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit because I know that you’ve had a lot of success with ColorIt. I mean you are not getting any search traffic right now you said, right? So the way you’ve been getting traffic to ColorIt has been through Facebook ads, right?

Jackness: Yeah so I mean mostly Facebook ads and social media in general. I mean the only organic traffic we get to ColorIt, is for our brand name, which is actually getting to be higher and higher which makes me feel good that people are typing in our brand name. We are not ranking for any other organic terms.

Steve: Yeah, I mean at the same time the brand’s only like four months old at this point too, right? So I was hoping you could break down some of your Facebook ad strategies specifically for ecommerce, and what you’ve been doing with colorit.com. So what would you say is your best performing Facebook ad camping to date?

Jackness: So by far in a way our best campaigns have been video ads. We first started out with a bunch of static images and they were doing well, but the video ads by far in a way have done the best. We have two different angles that we take with video ads. The first one is my cousin Ericka who is my partner in the business, and we’ve made her the face of the brand, because women are our audience.

We’ve split test this on Facebook and we can’t get a single male to convert on our site. So I mean we know definitively that it’s a female audience. So it doesn’t make sense to have me as the brand on the site. So we’ve used her to do the videos. The first video that we have that’s done really is basically it’s a two minute long video of her just talking into the camera with like our brand name behind it.

I’ll give you a link so you can put this on the show notes; we have it up on YouTube. It’s just basically her talking about the brand, just genuinely sitting down and talking about why ColorIt came to be. There’s a lot of imagery in the video about the hard back covers and the spiral binding, and the artist quality paper and all that type of stuff.

That video has done incredibly well for us, I mean just absolutely incredibly well. It’s the one that sustains having a CPA that makes sense. It started to lose some of its performance, and then we changed the landing page, and then we were just talking about that page before we started recording here today. That’s actually kind of boosted our conversion rate back up again and got our CPA down which is great. That video has done really well for us.

Steve: Can you give us some metrics on like what your click through rate is and … Well I want to talk about targeting a little bit also?

Jackness: Yeah, unfortunately I don’t have it like up in front of me, but I do know that like our CPAE that’s the one number that I’m always looking at the most. Our CPA on that video right now is running about 12 bucks which is right about the level where it makes sense for us to run it. We are always like throttling up our budget to kind of be right there, we are looking to get as many conversions a day as we can.

Steve: And your average order size is a multiple of that or?

Jackness: Yeah, so our average order size was $41, and this is something else we were talking about before the call, but that’s dropped quite a bit right now because we are out of stock on our highest ticket item on the site. So our average order volume … Our value has dropped it has hit the performance of our Facebook ads, and kind of thrown things out of lack for the time being until we get those back in stock.

Steve: Okay, so in terms of targeting now what is your best target? Obviously there is a lot of iteration involved, but in terms of your best targeting group what has that been?

Jackness: Yeah, so the best targeting group is just basically been an audience on Facebook that likes coloring books. Surprisingly enough there is an interest on Facebook that’s called coloring book whatever reason without the ‘S’. It’s like 2.2 million people in the US, and we’ve filtered it out to just females, again because we know that females are our audience, so it’s about 1.8 million people. We’ve been just going through that audience as much as we can right now and we haven’t fully exhausted it yet.

The great thing about that is that we are getting so many customers from these Facebook ads that we’ve now been able to build a look-a-like audience; it’s starting to actually perform fairly well, too. I found … Excuse me, that you need to have probably about 3000 or 4000 people in your converted customer list to use a look-a-like audience to base that off of, because you don’t get real good data off of like 100 people obviously or 500 people.

Yeah that audience has done really well for us, and we split test everything to the nth degree. When we launched a new ad campaign, like the video I was just talking about with Ericka the intro video, we used … We probably have had 50 different iterations of that video up at this point. Where we are using different headlines, different ad copy, actually just found out the other day that you can add images into your little icons or emoticons into your ad copy.

We’ve been testing that stuff now and we just are constantly testing. Split testing landing pages, split testing stacking audiences on top of people that like coloring books. For instance people that like coloring books and Prisma color pencils, which is like the number one pencil company in the industry. Or people that like coloring books and Ellen Degeneres, or one of the ones that we’ve done that’s done really well is that people like coloring books and wine relaxation and meditation, that’s done really well because these are people that have seen like our books.

Steve: So what’s interesting is you’ve said your best converting audience right now is literary just everyone in the US that likes coloring books, right?

Jackness: Yeah, exactly yeah.

Steve: So and then you probably sort by gender and age I would imagine right, because younger people probably don’t like coloring books?

Jackness: Yeah, I mean it’s interesting. I think there’s a lot of people … Younger people that like coloring books, because we can see that by just typing into the box like it really is age empty. For instance it’s like 1.8 million women, but if we filter by 35 to 65 plus it goes down to like 1.2 or something like that.

That’s actually the audience that we target because we found that the really young crowd either isn’t able to afford a $16 coloring book, or they don’t really care about quality and they think it’s something that you kind of discover as you get older. You get more into higher end stuff; you have the money to pay for it.

Steve: Do you ever target based on income level?

Jackness: We did do that and interestingly enough actually, we’ve used Facebook insights. I thought the higher income people would convert better, and it just naturally seemed like the obvious thing. It did awful, and I was like man this doesn’t make any sense. When our look alike audience got big enough that Facebook started showing the income groups, it actually turned out that our bread and butter was actually lower income people, which I still don’t quite get.

What we discovered about our audience is and again because our look alike audiences got big enough for Facebook to share this data. For anyone that’s listening, you can go to Facebook insights, and pick a custom audience and it will tell you all this data about your audience. It will tell you their gender, their age, their income levels, whether they drive a van or a sports car.

It’s pretty crazy the data that you will get on them. One of the things that we discovered is that it’s basically home owners. It’s people that have grand kids, and there’s a couple of other things that are really interesting, but the income level one what I thought was really interesting is people basically in that like 30-75,000 thousand dollar bracket, and not the 75-150,000 dollar bracket which is what I would have guessed.

Steve: Interesting. Let me ask you this. If you were to start, or if you were to teach someone how to start their own Facebook campaign from scratch, how would you have them begin?

Jackness: Yeah, first off it’s important to not give up. Really before you … Obviously it’s not how you begin, but you got to sit yourself down and say, “Look, I’m not going to run one ad and have it under perform and then just give up.” That’s what most people end up doing because your first ads are going to be awful. It’s just the way it’s going to be. You got to get some initial data.

We set up … Basically what we are doing now is we set up at least 4 different images, and we try to have them be very different and we also use four headlines and four ad copies. And we are using a product called AdEspresso to help with that. Basically we were doing it on manually through the Facebook ads editor before, and it just would take a half a day to set all that up and with AdEspresso you can do it in like 20 minutes.

That creates … It will let you do up to 50 variations of an ad, and we typically will push it to its limits. Then we set a budget of at least $10 per day per ad. If it’s 48 ads, we’ll run $480 a day which is obviously quite high. We’ve gotten the confidence to be able to do that. I certainly wouldn’t recommend it to someone getting started to go right for that type of level. I mean maybe you do 12 combinations and you do $120 a day. The reason it’s important to do at least $10 a day per ad is that Facebook just can’t give you good data on $3 a day or $2 a day. You got to get good data. Basically run those ads and give them at least 3 days to run.

Steve: Are you bidding by impressions at this point or conversions?

Jackness: That’s actually a really great question and very important. We optimize for website conversions which for us is a purchase. Obviously if you are trying to get leads you would optimize for getting a lead. Let Facebook do its thing. Every time I try to outsmart Facebook by doing bids and things like this, or trying to just optimize for website clicks, I lost. Facebook just has too much data and they are too good with what they do.

So we optimize for website conversions. I set a $10 a day budget to start with, and I use automatic bidding and let them do their thing. I notice that to start with, the performance is poor and then over the first couple of days magically it’s just improves. It’s been really interesting. We let those ads run and then through either AdEspresso or through ADS Magic if you don’t do use AdEspresso; you can then look at all your demographics.

For instance I was just helping someone today before this call that was doing a legen [ph] campaign. They had hired an agency to help them and they were paying $6 per lead. I was just like, “You are crazy dude. You got to pause that thing and let me just do a test and see what I can do with this.”

Steve: You will only charge him $5 lead, right?

Jackness: I was like I will do it for half. I will go out of the corner and get leads for 3 bucks. [inaudible 00:34:52] take me to your email address, I give you some pizza. Anyway, we ran that for just a couple days, and what we found by letting that data run is that, and again I don’t know this is just interesting because it’s … He’s in a pet space. I don’t want to talk too much about it and break his confidence, but he’s in a pet space. What we found is that immediately within the first 2 days that males were greatly underperforming females by a lot.

What I do then is I set up what I call a refined campaign. I take the images that were performing the best, the ad copy that’s performing the best, and the headline that perform the best, and then stack that on top of the genders that are doing the best if that is an issue. The age groups that are doing the best and interests that are doing the best, and do a refined ad. Now we’ve gotten him down to under a dollar per lead which is still high. I mean we are generating leads for some of the things that we are doing for 17 cents now.

Steve: That’s ridiculously cheap actually.

Jackness: It is. I mean I made a post about this that we were doing 22 cents everyone was flipping out, and we’ve actually cut down up to 17 cents, but it’s all on refinement. We continue to refine our landing page, do AB testing, we use lead pages.net. We’ve actually done 4 different lead pages. The first one bombed. I was like let me try another one. That one did a little better.

You kind of learn about what’s working and what’s not. We do AB testing on every single one of them on the copy, on the button text, on everything until we find what’s working the best, and the one that we have now performs exceedingly well. I’m happy to share that with you as well Steve. We can put that in the show notes so people can see that landing page. It’s done well for us.

Steve: Okay cool.

Jackness: It’s not just the landing page, but it’s also the ad copy. We ran a bunch of different ads and different imagery and different headlines and stuff until we found the one that worked. What seems to work the best is the tip for your audience is always that scarcity. The headline I believe that’s running right now, that’s doing the best is something along the lines of this week only. Get 4 free drawings, or this month only or something along those lines, and that’s the one that’s by far in a way done the best. Wherever you say this is going to end, you got to click on this now otherwise you are going to lose it, that seems to do the best. Yeah we are paying 17 cents a lead.

Steve: Are your best offers tend to be the ones where you are kind of giving something away as opposed to content?

Jackness: Yeah, either way I would say that what we are giving away with the free drawings is content as well. You could argue that. We are doing things like an icewraps for … We are working on getting stuff refined and doing better, but we are doing things like advertising the little leagues or parents that have an interest in little league and say we’ll give you a free report on pitching on ice.

We’ll advertise to tennis fans, to people that like tennis and talk about like how to prevent tennis elbow, and give them a free report. The key here is you just want to get their email address. Off of those, like off the 4 free drawing for instance is the one that we refined the most now. It’s a 13 part series that goes out over 5 weeks.

Steve: Can we just kind of breakdown what goes in some of these sequences like a main gist of your 13 part sequence?

Jackness: Yeah, for sure. The first thing that we’ve done that’s helped the most to get us the most value out of it is it’s 4 free drawings. We’ve actually instead of giving them all four drawings at once; we broke it out over a month. So we send them 1 drawing now per week. The reason that that’s important, there’s, with email marketing, the number one thing that you have to strive for is a high open rate.

You want to also train people to open your emails, because if you just email them once and they get it and they just kind of forget about you, that’s not going to generate sales for you.
Our target is to get a high open rate, because high open rate means a high delivery rate across all email service providers. If your open rate is 5% or 10%, Google and hotmail and outlook and all these different online email service providers will just stick your stuff right into spam. It will never get into anyone’s email box. They’ll go in promotions, they will never get there.

We break it out over a month, and basically we are trying to train people to open our emails. It’s like they want to open and then they look forward to this free thing every week.
The first email we send out actually when they sign up for this 4 free drawing promotion and again I will share the link and anybody wants to sign up for it they can get the whole 13 part series if they’re patient enough and wait for 5 weeks.

The first email actually doesn’t give them anything. It’s an email that says, “Hey, like starting tomorrow we are going to start sending you 1 free drawing a week. Look out for the email tomorrow.” The reason we do that is we know they are going to open up the first email. We are going to have a very high open rate on the first email, incredibly important.

We use it as an opportunity to be like, “Okay here are some frequently asked questions about this promotion.” Why are you giving these drawings away for free, how do I print them? Do they work on windows or Mac? We answer a few FAQs in the email. We just, like I said, we say, “Starting tomorrow, you are going to start getting these free drawings once a week.” That way, the second email has a high open rate as well. Then what we do is we alternate each email … First off we, if they don’t open, the first drawing we send them a reminder. That’s part of the 13 part email series.

The email with the drawing goes out and if they don’t click on it and open it or actually click on the button to download the drawing, they will get another email that says, “Hey don’t forget your drawing,” which is really important. That email gets a high open rate as well because people dismiss emails. We do that as well and Klaviyo allows you to do that. Then what we do is we basically alternate between sending them a free drawing, and then in the middle of the week we send them some promotional thing about our brand, just trying to soften them up a little bit for a sale.

Steve: What’s the frequency that these emails go out?

Jackness: It’s every third or fourth day depending, because there are seven days in a week. You can’t quite do it equally apart, but it’s every 3 or 4 days depending on … So we send them and we just like I said we alternate. It’s a free drawing about the color brand. Another free drawing to check out whether our customers have been doing with our stuff like the social proofs stuff, another free drawing, then they get another about the color brand type email, and it just goes back and forth like that for a month.

Then what we do is if they haven’t purchased by this point. By the way, we get a lot of purchases throughout this funnel. We see the biggest conversion when the free drawings go out. We are lucky. We are in an industry where there’s a direct correlation of, okay I get this drawing, I print it out, I like coloring, I want to go by more of those. Not everyone can do that. You can for instance can’t send someone a free handkerchief or whatever. Get more creative and use content …

Steve: We can send them a craft that uses handkerchiefs and then tell them to go, right?

Jackness: Yeah. Then the last thing that we do is we give them a coupon. If they are at the end of the phase and they haven’t … At the end of that series I should say and they haven’t purchased and we filter it out by that by the way. We don’t send a coupon to people that have purchased. We actually use like a gift card on this promotion. We say, “We hope you enjoyed the 4 free drawings. ColorIt is full of surprises. Something along these lines, we want to give you another surprise. Here’s a five dollar gift card.”

People, I think treat that differently than a five dollar off coupon. In their mind, they now have $5 in cash that they can go spend in our store, and they don’t really think about the fact that there’s nothing for $5 in our store. They got to go spend at least 16 bucks, and then hopefully once we get them to buy something, they become a customer for life. That’s basically the gist of that series.

Steve: Okay, and then once they actually make a purchase; you have another series, right?

Jackness: Yes, and that’s actually, that’s a series that we just … On ColorIt, it just got in place because we were spending all this time on pre-purchase series and trying to get people to become customers, but now that we have a lot of customers and a lot of orders coming through, we put together, I think it’s a ten part series, post purchase. The first email that goes out is basically just a thank you for your order. It’s a personal note from Erica. Then we actually send another email while the package is in transit, and that’s actually done quite well for us as well.

We basically say, “It’s time to get excited.” We want to get people … Again we are training them to open up our emails. Anytime you can send an email out and have a high open rate, we are going to take advantage of that. Anytime we can get our brand in front of them, we want to do that. Surprisingly enough, that email has actually generated quite a bit of business for us. I don’t quite get that one, because people don’t have the product in their hands yet, but for whatever reason it’s still converting traffic for us.

Steve: I’m sorry, what does this email do?

Jackness: It’s just a tiny … The title of the email is time to get excited, and it’s basically … It goes out I think 2 days after the package ships. Maybe it’s one day after the package ships. It’s basically just letting people know the package is on the way. It’s going to be delivered in a few days and it’s time to get excited about the product you are about to receive.

Steve: Interesting, and then there’s a link back to the site and then they go back and buy some more stuff?

Jackness: Yeah, I don’t quite get it. No coupon, or actual offer but yeah, they are going back and buying stuff from that email.

Steve: Okay, and then what about the remaining emails?

Jackness: The next one that we send out is once the item arrives, we use something called after ship. That has a web hook with Klaviyo. We know when the package has been delivered. We actually send out an email the following day, because we don’t want to send out the email until we know that they actually have it in their hands, because it could be sitting on their door steps. We wait until the following day.

We just basically send out an email that says, “How’s your package been delivered, we want to make sure that you are happy,” that type of an email. That email actually has the highest conversion rate of all the emails that we send out in the post purchase row. People once they get the product in their hand and if it’s their first time ordering from us they are like, “Wow, this is really amazing, I want to order more.” It does quite well for us, and I’m actually pulling up Klaviyo just so I can remember here in my head what the next email is, so just give me 1 second to pull that up.

Steve: Sure.

Mike: You can cut out the dead space I guess. Okay, the next email that we send out on the series is a referral program email, and we actually just instituted a referral program for ColorIt. We get all these amazing testimonials coming in. It was like all right well we might as well get them to become ambassadors for us, and give them some motivation monetarily to want to do that. We actually pay referrers 5$ for every customer they send to us which is a lot of money, but it’s significantly less.

I mentioned earlier that we are paying about $12 CPA for some of these Facebook ads. So I find our referral fee is actually quite good for us, and we only pay it once. It’s up for any new customer. We hope that our average life time value of a customer is going to be way higher than what they you order, so paying 5 bucks is really nothing for the lifetime of that customer.

Steve: Do you use a plug-in to do that?

Mike: We do, we use a … It is a Shopify thing called like referrally or something like that. It is doing pretty well. We just launched it. We have got in several hundred affiliates already, and we have got in quite a few orders off of it, and it was something we just launched actually this week or last week, it was like a Monday of this week. It is doing pretty well for a new program.

We have that referral program email, be early in the sequence because we want people while it’s still fresh in their minds and are loving our products to be more up to want to tell others about ColorIt. That goes out 2 days after the purchase, and then on the 4th day we send out an email about social media submissions, so we basically say, “Hey, if you love ColorIt and you are enjoying the product, post at the social media with the hashtag #mycolorit.”

That’s the hashtag that we developed, and basically share your submission or your drawings with the world. This email is generating a bunch of revenue too, and the insulate benefit of that is that we are getting a ton of submissions to that hashtag and we built a landing page around, just to having all these different submissions and they are really pretty.

I’m not really in the coloring myself, but you look at some of these, things that people have done and they are really pretty. They have done a really great job with our artwork. It makes us really proud to see what they have done, and basically we just take that stuff and make it social proof for our future customers that are people that are just landing on our site for the first time. Having that as a part of your conversion re-optimization tactic is really important.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: The next one we send out is 7 days after purchase, now we ask for a testimonial from the customer. This email says basically we will give you a $10 gift card if you send in a testimonial. We just ask … It only needs to be a couple sentences; you take a picture with yourself with 1 of our products and allow us to use it on our website if we want to, and we will send you a $10 gift card.

Overtime we have gotten quite a bit of testimonials from those, and we are also generating more money in sales off of these emails as well. What we really have learned is that just keep sending more email. Never stop sending email, and every one of them is making money and that’s really what we have been doing.

Steve: Is this only for 1st time purchasers?

Mike: Yes, we have only set up for 1st time purchasers right now. Actually the way we have it set up and I’m actually looking at the rules right now, is that if they haven’t made a purchase … If they made a purchase before, but it’s been more than 120 days and this will go back out again. If they are buying for a 2nd time within 4 months then this will not go out a 2nd time.

Because we are new, we haven’t set up … We are going to have emails sequences for frequent buyers, so anyone that has spot more than 3 times or 5 times we will send them a special sequence that says, “Thank you so much for being in our valued customer client,” kind of email, because we are still new, we just haven’t had a chance to set that up yet. We haven’t had enough people that are falling in that bucket.

Steve: Cool.

Mike: Moving on with this email sequence is a few more that we send out. At this point now we go to every week, we don’t want to keep the frequency up to every 3 days, and we don’t want to annoy people. So we send out an email after 14, 21, 28 and 35 days and to quickly review those without spending a bunch of time here. The one that goes out of the 14 days is more about the ColorIt brand, exploring the brand. We tell people we also offer journals and sketch pads, pencils. We are going to have jelly pens soon. People who aren’t aware that we have these other things, then this reminds them.

This email again, just likes every other one in the chain is generating money. The next one is now we go to reminders. A lot of these next emails are reminders, so we do a social media submission reminder. Then we do a referral program reminder, because these are things that are really important to us. Now that we are at the 35 day mark, which is about 5 weeks I should say. We do a monthly special email, and we are constantly running a monthly special and we can have a link in this email to our monthly special page.

We don’t know what the monthly special is going to be because this is a part of the flow, but we know that there will be a monthly special there when they run there, and legitimately those special is different every month. We sit down, a few days before the end of the month and dream up what combination of products we want to give away or sell I should say at a discounted price, and we direct them there. Basically our hope is now that it has been 5 weeks maybe they are now ready to go buy something else again, or be gently reminded about the special, and that’s doing pretty well.

From there we have actually started developing this; we haven’t even implemented it yet. Basically starting at the 2 month mark we have a 4 sequence email trying to go out, and I don’t have the results for this yet, but basically it’s just a discount ladder. If they haven’t purchased in that time frame, let’s give them a coupon, maybe it’s 5% off, if it’s after 3 months it’s 10% off and maybe after 4 or 5 months, if it’s been a lot, so it’s like what do we need to do to get you back, here is a 20% off coupon or whatever it might be. Then if they just don’t buy at that point, we probably remove them from our list.

Steve: Okay, cool. It sounds like you got a lot in place, and there is a lot to be put in place as well.

Mike: Yeah, it can be overwhelming, at first I’m sure I have been rattling off a lot of stuff here, I apologize for being long winded, but there’s obviously quite a bit to it. You just have to start somewhere, right? Write that first email, then write the second email. We basically, we are trying to add at least 2 emails per week, that’s kind of our internal policy here whenever we’ve sat down and set a goal of getting at least 2 more emails written per week as a part of some chain.

We are just slowly adding on to it and the great thing is all the emails that we wrote 3 months ago, they are still going out. This is all automated, so every month we are building the number of emails that we have sent and we are building the revenue that we’ve received from email, every month, month over month it is increasing.

Steve: That’s awesome. I like that slow and steady approach where you just have a goal and overtime you going to have a ton of … Getting a lot of stuff done overtime.

Mike: Yeah, definitely.

Steve: Cool Mike, we have been chatting for quite a while, and I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people find you if they have any questions about what you are doing?

Mike: Like you mentioned before we have an e-commerce specific website called ecomcrew.com. You can hit us up over there on the contact form, or you can contact me directly if you wanted to at mike@terran.com, Terrence or LLC Holding Company doesn’t really mean much of anything. It’s just a site that we have, but either ecomcrew or mike@terran is the best way to get me.

Steve: Awesome, hey Mike thanks for coming on the show. I’m sure the readers, the listeners learned a lot today.

Mike: Yeah, thank you so much, it’s been a pleasure.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Mike is a good friend of mine who really knows his stuff, and what I like about him is that he is willing to try every marketing tactic very thoroughly and he has an open mind. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode119, and if you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

118: How To Transition From Amazon To Your Own Ecommerce Store With Kurt Elster

How To Transition From Amazon To Your Own Ecommerce Store With Kurt Elster

Today, I’m thrilled to have Kurt Elster on the show. Kurt was introduced to me by my good friend Nick Loper who I had back on episode 80 of the podcast. Kurt runs EtherCycle.com where he helps private label sellers launch their own ecommerce websites.

Specifically, he’s a Shopify platform expert who helps Shopify users uncover hotspots in their designs to improve their conversion rate. Anyway, I’m a firm believer you really need to own your own platform in addition to Amazon which is why I brought Kurt on the show today to discuss the transition.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get traffic to your site.
  • How to create a high converting website
  • The biggest mistake that new store owners make
  • How to transition from Amazon to your own site
  • Kurt’s recommendation on shopping cart platform
  • Whether Kurt recommends working with the spouse.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Kurt Elster on the show. Now Kurt was introduced to me by my good friend Nick Lopa who I had back on episode 80 of the podcast. And Kurt runs ethercycle.com, where he helps private label sellers launch their own ecommerce websites. Now specifically he is a Shopify platform expert who helps Shopify users uncover hotspots in their designs to improve their conversion rate.

And incidentally I’m a firm believer that you really need to own your own platform in addition to selling on Amazon, which is why I brought Kurt on the show today to kind of discuss the transition from Amazon to your own branded website. And with that welcome to the Kurt, how are you doing today man?

Kurt: I’m doing great thank you for having me, it’s my honor and pleasure.

Steve: So Kurt how did you kind of get into ecommerce, and why did you decide to start a consultancy and specifically a Shopify based on?

Kurt: Sure I mean so — I mean I have been involved in ecommerce in one way or the other over the last decade. I was selling counterfeit t-shirts on eBay in college. I didn’t know enough to know that there was like intellectual property was a thing, and then from there I was product manager for a drop shipper, and then started my own web design agency. And that was its own business learning curve going from generalist web design back to my roots as ecommerce, and then finally niching down to just the Shopify platform.

So I’m biased, I have got a horse in the game, but I really, really love the Shopify platform, because they do so much to foster a community. There is always someone available be it an expert or other store owner who can help you whenever you have a road blocker problem, plus all the great apps and services that integrate with it.

Steve: So just curious, did you start out supporting a whole bunch of different carts?

Kurt: Yeah we actually — so overtime we narrowed down. Originally we were doing like — no we went from like generalist to doing work for creative agency. So I have worked with huge brands like [inaudible 00:03:15]. But at the same time we were part of the Shopify experts program, and we were getting traction there.

So I said well maybe I foolishly said let’s expand by doing other platforms, but none of them were as satisfying as Shopify. And finally about two years ago I said wait why are we doing anything other than the thing we love. And niche down to just Shopify. So even though like as a service person having a niche is great just as an ecommerce having a niche is great.

Steve: Interesting, so was there demand? I’m just trying to get an idea of like the landscape right now. Was there demand for some of the other platforms, or you did you just choose one just for the sake of niching down?

Kurt: I chose it because we were authentically happy with Shopify. Like every time we finished any project we kind of reflect, and we were a small team at the time. We’ve always been three people, five people now, but we kind of reflect on like what — was that project good or bad, how do we feel about it? And it was Shopify was like 99% of the time we are like wow that just felt easy.

And that was what we were, why we chose to stick with it. But no we had worked with BigCommerce of course, LemonStand, Magento; I think are the other ecommerce platforms we used. And they’re good. Yeah there is really no bad one, they have slightly different features. But again with Shopify I think the huge advantage we are getting is that community.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of open source is that still popular at all just based on your experiences?

Kurt: I don’t think nearly as many people are rolling their own anymore just because you get in into such — no it’s probably — its technical that as soon as you — if I’m on Shopify I worry about ecommerce. Versus if I’m on — if I have got an open source thing, now suddenly I’m in the IT business as well, so I need to worry about like setting up my server and keeping things secure and there is all these new problems that get introduced when you go open source. Not that open source is bad.

Steve: So would you say that you can do everything that you want to with a fully hosted platform that you could probably do with open source even though you own like all the code?

Kurt: At this point through all the extensions and services and apps that are out there, that used to be the critic as well. Oh you are limited, I don’t think it’s the case anymore and especially it’s never been the case design wise.

Steve: Sure, of course.

Kurt: Shopify has always said hey you can access to everything design wise, don’t worry about it. And there was kind of a misunderstanding where people were like, oh you can do responsive, what are you talking about. But no, the limitations seem to have worked themselves out.

Steve: Let me ask you that question in a different way. Is there anything that you wish that Shopify for example could do where you felt that you would need more control?

Kurt: That’s a great question. So one of the — well a couple of common feature request, there is no native wholesale solution for Shopify that maybe other more enterprise focused platforms might have. That often is a common request that tying its people, and there is ways around it. I mean my answer is run two stores and one is a sub domain like wholesale dot whatever .com.

So that’s a common request and for people who have a ton of products Shopify doesn’t necessarily do nested categories the way you might like typically think of an ecommerce set up. It’s all individual collections and that could trip people up.

Steve: Any complains on the check out?

Kurt: Well so the number one issue is in the check out that’s the one template you are not allowed of total control over, you are not allowed to mess with. There is a number of workarounds for it, so you can use translations to change labels to whatever you want. And you now could style it to match your form. But I think it’s a very clean checkout, I think it’s whether they say sort of now, I think its inspired by Amazon because you get transitioned from store into this very clean white easy to use check out. I like it a lot, and with qualified traffic it converts very well.

Steve: Okay, and so it just sounds like in general you can do most of what you want with Shopify with the exemption of maybe some major things that owning the code might actually help.

Kurt: Yeah, once until you are out like extreme some kind of like extreme Enterprise level thing with either like a million products or crazy features like, oh I want to build a market place. And there is still waste too, there is always some clever walk around like it never seizes to surprise me the stuff that people manage to come up with. So even if a feature is not native there is some clever guy out there who can do it.

Steve: Okay, and so what I was going to today Kurt was a lot of people are selling on Amazon right now. And it’s really easy to kind of get addicted to Amazon because the money just comes and you don’t have to worry about anything. But in the long run you really need to have your own platform, so from the perspective of an Amazon seller who only sells on Amazon I would like you to kind of walk me through the process. Like let’s say I came to you as a pure Amazon seller, how would you kind of guide to the right way to design my ecommerce store?

Kurt: Sure, well and so if we back up the — I get a lot of people who are — they have established businesses on Amazon. And Amazon is great because it’s a market place, they are delivering the traffic to you. But you don’t own the customers and you are at the whim of Amazon, so when people come to me and they are on Amazon and they want to move to Shopify. Often I’ll say, “Well what’s the impetus for this, why do you want to do it?”

It’s something like well I want to own my own audience, I want to build this relationship and I can’t do it with Amazon. And I have got this single point of failure, like for some reason you upset the Amazon gods. Now you’ve got this single point of failure, this single channel versus if you are on multiple channels Shopify being one of them, you are much more in control and you don’t — like it’s diversification.

Steve: Sure, sure.

Kurt: So I think that’s the reason most people want to make that switch. And it’s not that they want to switch, they run both concurrently, and it works well. But probably the biggest thing that people run into is when they switch to Shopify or rather add that as a channel to their business, is they are not used to getting traffic. Like that’s never had to — with Amazon you are paying this big percentage to them, but they are delivering the traffic to your door. Versus Shopify is like okay now you are on your own, and that’s a hard transition for a lot of people.

Steve: Plus you have to worry about conversion optimization, getting the website looking trustworthy, and all those things as well.

Kurt: Yeah, and I think, probably the biggest problem you run into with setting up an Amazon store on Shopify is that they don’t have that collateral that adds that trust, that adds that confidence, because it’s very much like I have optimized my product title. Amazon people always have great photos, I’ve got a good product description, and I can pick it from some reviews.

Beyond that there is rarely content marketing that’s come along with it for me to use. There is rarely an about page. There is all these other trust indicator pieces of a business that when you are coming purely from Amazon are often missing.

Steve: Let’s start from the beginning then. Let’s say I’m coming to you for the first time, what are some of the thing that you will kind of walk me through, or questions that you might ask me?

Kurt: Number one is I want to know who your audience is. What kind of people are buying your product? Who is it for and why are they buying it? An Amazon seller may or may not know this, but what is fantastic about Amazon are the reviews. I will go through, like when I see a product that has got 1300 reviews, I get excited, because I will start going through those reviews. First thing I could do is I get a great sense of who’s buying it, why they are buying it, because on the reviews they reveal it.

You now know the pain and the problem that you are solving in people’s lives which automatically … I want to start with; my first step is what’s your positioning, so it’s who you sell, like what are you selling to who and why? Ideally is there a unique selling proposition there, some kind of competitive advantage. Often what the Amazon seller tells me is different than what the reviews tell me. I have discovered like people don’t necessarily know what they don’t know, so going through those reviews is enlightening.

Steve: Can you give me an example of when they will be a disconnect there?

Kurt: Sure, I will use, well this isn’t the best example because they work purely on Amazon, but I have a client who sells replacement rubber straps for Rolex watch bands. We thought it was people who wanted to customize their watch, they have got a fancy, “I spend $8,000 on a watch, why not have like 6 straps, and then I can change it out depending on my mood.”

That was our thinking and that makes sense, and then when we started asking people, and we started going … They started selling on Amazon, and I started looking through the reviews. We discovered it was actually a little bit of the opposite. People, yeah they wanted to custom like customize their watch sounded cool, but what really was going on was they spent $8,000 on a watch, and they wanted to wear it all the time without scratching it up. They were saying things like, “Now I can …”

One review was really enlightening, it was a launch, she was, “Yeah, my husband bought me a Rolex, I wear it to work, I’m a nurse, and I have to run my watch through an auto-clave and I got sick of scratching up or messing up the bracelet, so I just use my evers [ph] band.”

It was this incredible thing where it’s like, “Oh my gosh, you have a literal blue collar worker using the straps so they can wear this watch every single day.” That wildly changed how we saw the product. We took the language from those reviews, and then suddenly like you get an SEO benefit and these better selling propositions when you use the language your customers are using in those reviews.

Steve: Interesting, I would imagine there were some people who wanted it just for the fashion as well, right? How did you decide to do that versus people who didn’t want to damage their watch? Did you have two separate pages addressing both audiences, or did you focus on the protective aspects?
Kurt: That’s a good question, and no because the reviews were so overwhelmingly saying things like. “Yeah, now I can go swimming, now I can ride my bike with my Rolex.” It was always about doing some, usually some kind of active sport.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: We ended up like reshooting customer action photos to include, and reusing that language and saying, “You are protecting your investment.” And using this entirely different language we hadn’t even thought of that was revealed once we had those reviews coming in and we were able to read that.

Steve: I see, let’s say you didn’t have access to these reviews, were there any other ways that you would find to get an idea who your target customer was?

Kurt: Yeah, so a couple of ways. One is, so with Amazon, let’s say you are starting with Amazon, you don’t have your customers email addresses which is a pain, but you do have their phone numbers, so you could drop, if you have had enough of them, you could drop all those phone numbers into a custom audience in Facebook. Facebook will look them up and then using a tool called Audience, to sort of match those phone numbers to actual accounts.
Then using a tool called Audience Insights, it will give you demographic information about the person. It gives you the basic stuff like age and gender, location, but then it gives you all these really fun behavioral data segments, well kind of give you an idea of what the person is like. That can be very helpful.

Steve: Just curious, did you run this process on the watch band company?

Kurt: Yeah, that one was … It wasn’t detailed enough where we got info that didn’t surprise us at all, it was like it’s men and excuse older, like that made sense.

Steve: Sure.

Kurt: But then within the demographic, you have some cute names for some of these demographics, and I think the one that we overwhelmingly have for [inaudible 00:15:35] was, I think it’s called skyboxes and suburbans, that’s their cute name for Yappy.

Steve: Okay, so there is nothing surprising there, and so it sounds like you took all that information and used that in your unique value propositions on the site.

Kurt: Yeah, you want to use … You want to tweak all your language around that. Essentially when you are talking to someone, like your website needs to be talking about the customer and not you. All the language needs to be you not I focused, and then really we want to hold up the mirror, we want to show someone a better version of themselves through our product.

And we could do that when we leverage that language from the reviews where people are saying that these are the phrases people use to describe what they like about it, what they got out of it. When you add that to headlines, taglines, titles, descriptions, all of that, it adds up into a very compelling experience where people will often want to buy.

Steve: A common question I get asked is like for people in Amazon often times they are only selling one product or a bunch of despair products. In this case was it just watch bands, or did they have a huge variety of watch bands?

Kurt: They had both, and what we ended up doing was, you want to separate not by product but by audience. So they were selling like low end replacement straps for whatever watch, and then they had this high end line for Rolexes, so we separated those into two separate brands.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: It comes down to what the audience says, so if I’m selling, you know for all my products are sporting goods, okay I could probably put that into one Shopify store, but if it’s like, one is yoga mats, and the other thing is a gun cleaner, I’d probably want those, it’s different audiences. You probably want to run those as two separate stores. At the end of the day relevancy is absolutely critical, so that’s what you want to focus on is keeping it as relevant as possible.

If you are in a situation, you are in a tunnel, like you’re kind of shoot, I got 10 products and they are all totally different, well exploit the 80/20 rule, take the two best performing products and make a store for those. If that works out then go to the next one.

Steve: Using this watch band example again, let’s say we have a store selling the high end ones, but let’s say we have only like 4 or 5, do you kind of structure the website differently depending on the number of products that you offer?

Kurt: Yeah, I actually prefer … Stores with fewer products are easier, and not just from a stand point of oh I have to copy and paste these product descriptions, but from the customer stand point. The fewer products you have, you are really presenting the person with fewer decisions, you’ve got a tighter sales funnel, you are really making life easier on the customer and thereby making it easier on yourself to sell.

Steve: In the case of these watch bands, was the website pretty much like a single sales page like format?

Kurt: No, so what we did, the issue we had was rather to increase, the same strap actually fits every Rolex, or like a majority of them, except for some oddballs, but we didn’t tell people that. We instead walked them through this process where we made them pick their watch first, so we said, “Okay, choose which watch you have.” Then it would show you that strap, because buying all these Rolexes would be prohibitively expensive. There was just a mark up in photo-shop.

But we chose the strap on your specific model of watch, so in doing this again that concept of holding up the mirror, like we wildly increased the relevancy of this to the customer and they are able to visualize it on their own watch, and then they are willing to spend 2, $300 on a watch strap.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, let’s say this particular company sold a bunch of different Rolex accessories, how would that change how you would structure the site?

Kurt: I want to make sure, if I’m adding new products to my product mix, I just don’t want to do it because it fits the audience, I want to do it because it fits the audience and compliments what they are already buying. Ideally I would look for stuff that’s up-sales, like this incredibly successful up-sale they had was one day … Everyone who buys the strap obviously has to put it on the watch. You can take it to a jeweler, but you probably you are going to do it yourself.

What they ended up doing was selling private labeling, a very nice little tool kit and it’s offered as an up-sell, and it’s probably like 90% of orders, the person will buy the strap, and the tool to change the strap.

Steve: Interesting.

Kurt: You sort of want to work backwards and look for up-sales to your existing product mix.

Steve: I’m just trying to think right now like if this person, let’s say he specializes in watch accessories of which Rolex brands are only one, and let’s say they sell replacement parts, I’m just trying to get an idea, sometimes it’s a pain in the butt to just open another store, right?

I’m just trying to get an idea of how you would integrate display of products onto a site. Would you choose one of your main sellers, and then target the whole site towards selling that one product, or if you had like let’s say two or three best sellers that were somewhat despaired, but all fall under the umbrella of selling watch accessories, just trying to get an idea of how you would structure the site in that case.

Kurt: That’s a good question. Probably I would look by use case, where at the start I want to present them like here is the pain I’m solving, so let’s say we did, it wasn’t just watch straps, it was like watch straps, watch tools and cases, so then we could sell them like watch winders, watch boxes and watch rolls, like a tool. We’d say, I’d probably present that as like 3 featured images on the home page that say store your watches, maintain your watches, and customize your watches.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I’m always doing it by what pain they have.

Steve: Sure, okay and then you would probably just have 3 choices where they could just jump to the category page, and on the category page, you would probably focus on the value proposition message.

Kurt: Yeah, once I’m in there and I would strip away everything else, like they have already self selected, they’ve told me what they are there for, so I don’t want anything else getting in the way. I want to really increase that signal to noise ratio, and then after they’ve made the decision to buy, then maybe I might offer an up-sell, or I might offer a bundle, something like that.

Steve: You’re talking about the category page; you would remove the navigation to the other categories at that point.

Kurt: Well what I see is like, okay so let’s say the collection page or the category page, so from the homepage, we try to ask them what their problem is, so if they say, “Oh, I need to store my watches.” When they click on that, we send them to a collection page deliberately, a paragraph or two about the proposition, about the description, and then our selection of watch boxes or whatever.

Then in Shopify actually I would sort them by bestselling, as one of the nice options. So essentially you have self optimizing category collection pages, because you can always list. It will automatically take the thing that sells the most and push it first in the list.

Steve: Right, okay. In terms of just SEO and content, do you try to include content on all these collection pages? Is that important?

Kurt: Ideally yeah. I mean, is it going to make or break to you? No. Does it going to absolutely increase the chance that someone finds it in a Google organic search or someone links directly to this? Essentially if you add description to a collection or category page, its going from, here is a grid of products to landing page, and that’s how like let’s take everything like a landing page, and really that’s just a content issue.

Steve: I’m just trying to … I’m just wondering how you rationalize having content versus pushing the products further below the fold.

Kurt: I’m still out on how the fold really matters. If I have really compelling relevant content above the fold, I think that’s going to get people to scroll and really that’s kind of a design question. But ideally I’ve never shied away from long sales pages, from more content. It’s never been a problem.

Steve: Do you typically work with people who have just a handful of products versus someone who has like a library of hundreds of products?

Kurt: If someone came to me and said, “I have got hundreds of products and I want to move those to– I want to go from Amazon to Shopify I would say. All right, which 10 do you want to work with? What’s your best seller? Building a store, I mean you are setting yourself up for failure to begin with, like if you are building a store with hundreds of products. It’s really hard definitely moving from, especially moving from a market place to Shopify, I wouldn’t recommend it.

Steve: I mean if they are all related products, would you still try break them apart? Like you know watch example …

Kurt: It really comes down to how, again it’s like if they all fit the same audience, and they solve similar problems then you could make it work.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about traffic. I understand you help some of the folks with traffic, so what are some of the first things that you tell these people who are just completely not used to driving their own traffic? What do you recommend?

Kurt: Well so number one is first recognize that. I mean the thing the you’ve been paying for Amazon, the whole time whether you knew it or not is they’re delivering these wallet out ready to buy people to you? Fundamentally if I am on Amazon, I’m probably not even in research mode. I already trust Amazon, I’m there looking for a product, I’m going to add it to a wish list or buy it.

Not only do you already have the traffic, but it’s really qualified traffic, and making that mindset shift to your own store. Well it’s like okay you’ve got to get the traffic and then you have to make them trust you, and then you have to get them to buy you. You’re really moving into this concept of a sales funnel, and that’s something people aren’t used to. The first realization is someone will probably have to visit your store maybe 5 times before they buy, and they don’t know you. They have to trust you.

If I walk to a physical retail store right now, I know fundamentally like there is payroll, and business licenses and leases were signed, there is implicit trust versus your random Shopify store in the interne. If I have never heard of you it’s like the equivalent of a guy in a parking lot, popping his truck and saying you want to buy some t-shirts?

Steve: Right.

Kurt: It’s totally different, so adding those trust indicators.

Steve: Let’s talk about some of the trust indicators, let’s be specific. What are some of the things that you recommend?

Kurt: I think number one is, two things. I think there are really two parts to these trust indicators. Number one is availability, if you have got a toll free number, if you make yourself as available as possible, so a live chat with an actual person manning it, a toll free number, a public address. Those things whether or not people actually choose to reach out to you, we don’t care if they reach out to you or not, just the fact that you’ve made yourself available and professional makes you look trustworthy.

Steve: Do you think a toll free number matters anymore these days?

Kurt: It’s kind of funny; I mean you are right to ask because who pays by the minute anymore? It doesn’t matter, but I think we are still ingrained with this idea that, “Oh toll free numbers means it’s a real business.” And they are so inexpensive with services like Grasshopper, and I’m sure there is half a dozen others. I still recommend it. I think you look better with a toll free number than a local number.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I mean the image you are fighting against is you have to assume that when the person comes to your website and hasn’t heard of you, they assume that you are some guy in your mum’s basement, and you have to prove otherwise. I think a toll free number is one of the ways to do that. That availability, that trust is really it’s about risk reversal, spelling out a clear guarantees return policies, that sort of thing helps a lot.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I think the big advantage you have that a lot of people pass on, and it’s frustrating for me is be a person not a brand. People relate to people not brands, and when you leave Amazon, that’s one of the great things you get to do now, is you get to be yourself, you get to be an authentic person with an authentic voice. I always recommend people at the very least have an about page that tells your story, has your pictures, says who you are and people can relate to that.

Steve: Okay, what about getting actual traffic. These are all great I guess conversion things that you’ve been mentioning.

Kurt: Yeah, I put all that stuff, everything we’ve talked about probably it falls under conversion for sure.

Steve: Yeah, what about getting the actual people to the website, what are some of your recommendations there?

Kurt: Let’s say, the only guaranteed thing is PPC, is pay per click, and there is no one winner, but I would say absolutely for sure do remarketing. Earlier on I said that someone might have to visit a store 5 times before they buy. Well remarketing is going to help you make that happen. When someone visits the site, they get cookied, and then they’ll see ads for let’s say 30 days about the product they viewed.

Steve: Do you actually run these campaigns for your clients or no?

Kurt: Yes I do.

Steve: Oh you do? Okay, so what has been more like, so do you use Facebook and Google for this?

Kurt: I no longer … I recommend both, but I personally have focused on being a Facebook ads expert. Google is too fast a landscape, I think for anyone to really master Google you have to be doing it full time. I recommend someone else to tackle it. Google product listing ads I think is a phenomenal place to start.

Steve: Can you explain those by the way, just in case some of the listeners don’t know what that is?

Kurt: Okay, so let’s say you search for something on Google, we search for men’s wallet, and then you’ve got the first thing at the top of your search results are those text ads. That’s just a regular traditional Google ad, this text ad, they are really expensive now, they are hard to get to convert. And then, below that are the organic results, which that’s what we think as traditional SEO, and then in the upper right, you’ve got like a picture of the product with the title and the price. Those are Google product listing adds, and that’s just a data feed that your Shopify store provides to Google, and then it will just automatically run ads against it.

They are actually significantly cheaper than running the text ads, and once you’ve got the product listing ad going, really what you’ve done is Google understands your product catalogue which means you can now do what are called dynamic remarketing ads. So let’s say someone goes to your site, looks at a pair of shoes and leaves, well Google knows that’s the last product they looked at, and now an ad with that specific product title price will follow them around the web like a lost dog.

Steve: Just curious, why have you moved away from using Google remarketing?

Kurt: I still recommend it, I just don’t manage it myself anymore.

Steve: You don’t manage it. Okay.

Kurt: Just because it’s tough, I mean it’s genuinely– there are so– when you log in at the Google Ad Words dashboard, there are so many knobs, dials and switches, and it’s updating all the time that it’s tough to get it going, and say like…

Steve: That’s correct; it is quite intimidating for a new user.

Kurt: Yeah, I think it’s intimidating and then for me it was frustrating there like I had set something up and then a month later something breaks. I’m like I got to go fix this, and if you are not absolutely on top of it and I think really like sleeping breathing AdWords every day, that’s just bound to happen.

Steve: You know it’s curious that you said that like, so I run all my own campaigns, and Google like what you haven’t set up it’s a lot more hands off than Facebook in my opinion. I was just curious what your opinions were on that, because Facebook you constantly have to be rotating your creatives and testing new things, whereas AdWords which is like search based, you can pretty much set it and then check up on it every couple of months.

Kurt: That’s a solid point. Yes, I think especially when dealing with Google product listing ads, that’s absolutely true. You set it and then you are good, until it breaks, and ideally usually it shouldn’t for months if it’s set up once correctly. Verses Facebook ads, you get into this problem of ad fatigue, but I think it comes down to having highly relevant customer audiences, and then really reducing the length of time they can run.

So if I set, I could set a window where I say all right I’m only going to show people, assuming I have enough traffic to pull this off, you could build the sales funnel where like a person sees an ad only within 24 hours of visiting your site, and then from 24 to 48 they see a different ad. You could run that out to a week, where you have– they see a different ad everyday for a week, and then if they haven’t bought after that, we can assume they probably weren’t going to begin with, and stop showing them ads.

Steve: Let’s talk about your Facebook ads strategy actually since you seem to run those for clients. Let’s take this watch band example again; can we just talk about how you would structure the campaign?

Kurt: Yeah, absolutely. I think the more segmented you can make it obviously you are going to increase relevancy, but with, and that really comes down it’s like a function of how much traffic you have. But the basic, the most basic sales funnel in Facebook that I would recommend people setting up, has four steps in it. The first is we want to bring people who’ve never heard, we’ll call them anonymous people, people who have never heard of the brand before, and we could do that using a look alike audience.

A look alike audience being we give Facebook, let’s say we have 1000 customer email addresses, and they’ve opted in to our email list. So we give that to Facebook and we could show Facebook will find those people and we could show ads to them if we’d like, or Facebook based on that amazing and kind of creepy behavioral data will target up to let’s say like a million to 2 million people in the same country that look like your customers.

And they buy mailing list form big box retailers and credit card companies, they know everything about you, like if you bought a pregnancy test, they assume okay here’s like parents who are trying to get pregnant, like everything they know it, it’s creepy. But it means we can have very relevant ads, and we can do it on autopilot. So the first one would be ads just introducing people to the what we are doing, to the brand, to the product, to the problem, and getting them to the website.

Steve: What would the creative look like in that case?

Kurt: That’s a good question. We want, generally I’ll try and pick something that’s like an action shot that shows someone using the product, so really hold up the mirror and have that customer avatar out there. And especially because we’ve got it in their news feed, it’s less disruptive and fits into their news feed, and that’s actually they are more likely to check it out and read that headline, read whatever our tagline is.

We just– all we want for them to click through and visit the site, because then we’re going to cookie them, and once they are cookied, we’ll exclude them from that prospect list where they are seeing their first ad, and instead show them ideally probably like a carousel ad, so our 5 they got these sliding carousel ads, they are wonderful. So we show them say our 5…

Steve: Can we back up a little bit, sorry so that first initial ad, like what would be an example of a headline for watches let’s say just off the cuff, to get them to click?

Kurt: Good question, since I’m assuming you are editing this later, let me look it up.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Kurt: I would literally do like for that and say something like, we may say something as simple as Customize Your Rolex, and then show a photo of a watch on someone’s wrist. What’s nice about Facebook it’s especially organized with Shopify, it does conversation tracking, and it tracks value of sales, you could figure your cost per acquisition.

Let’s say you give it 5 images for 1 ad, it will know which ones are converting, and then start showing that the most. So after a week of running the ad, I will just go back through, turn off the 4 that didn’t convert well or the 4 post converting, keep the top one and then like try like 4 variations on that, and you just keep going like that in a cycle.

Steve: The reason why I asked that question is do you entice them with some useful piece of content for that first ad, like what is the landing page of the carousel?

Kurt: Good question, so it depends on the product. You often will use, will take the product page and make like a really long form version of it. Much like Amazon we’re trying to bust every objection, so I’ll have kind of like a more narrative product description, ideally a video, customer reviews, just like a very, a longer sales pages is going to work better here, or even advertorial content. Maybe like a blog post, an article, something talking about the problem and walking through like this story of the narrative, like here’s how the inventor came up with this problem, and then had a successful kick starter, and you get them involved in the story.

Steve: Okay. You absolutely don’t want to send them like just straight to a product page, right?

Kurt: I think the worst thing you could do is just drop them on the home page or drop them on a traditional product page. You could make it like a very long form sales page will work well, or sometimes collection pages that have a really long description. Like we’ve made 10 collection pages and 2 decent landing pages, but no you are right, I mean just dropping someone on a whatever page and crossing your figures isn’t going to be the best.

Steve: Just curious, do you use incentives to get them to buy right then and there, or is the whole purpose of that first ad just to get them aware of your products?
Kurt: I assume, well I mean if they buy that’s fantastic, but I will generally, I just want to build that awareness. At first it’s worth it just to have I think a longer sales funnel and then I’ll be pushing, I try not to push especially discounts at first. I want to save those to later and not leave money on the table.

Ideally though if you have a lead magnet, like in an ideal world we could do, we introduce them to product via an article, so we’ve got like a 1500 word article with an interesting original story, and then that also probably includes the inventory, really makes it very personal. And then in there at the end we’re still not necessarily going to try and sell them anything, but if we can get them to opt in to a newsletter, now we can show them our Facebook ads, plus get them on an email list, and really rump up those numbers at touch points.

Steve: How do you calculate conversions and the effectiveness of the ad, given that like that first ad really isn’t meant to convert a sale, so do you measure the effectiveness of that ad based on like email opt-ins, how do you do the measurements?

Kurt: Well, in this case you can do it based on page views, you could do it based on opt-ins, but what Facebook does, you could define the attribution window. So if they view that ad, let’s say they click the ad and bought within 7 days, we would count it as a conversion like an assisted conversion, but a conversion nonetheless because the first ad was involved. And ideally like I had put one funnel into a single campaign, so that way I can track the whole thing holistically.

Steve: Okay. We’ve got them to our site, let’s say they haven’t bought yet, but we have cookied them, and then you mentioned the second ad is more of like a carousel ad displaying different versions of the product?

Kurt: Yeah, so let’s say for the second ad I love to do carousel ads, I just they are a little more engaging, and a carousel essentially it’s like 5 tiles, and each one can have a different link and it’s a different photo. And Facebook will reorganize them based on conversation. In there what we do — so if you had like, we could put your top five selling products in that category, or we could do the same product but have each of the tiles be one of the benefits of owning the product. Or we could do it go even broader and do it by category.

We are like all right here is the three categories of products we are selling, something where we just want to sell — we want the person to segment themselves. But if we are only selling one product yeah you just do five benefits of the products and a carousel ad, and that’s where we might — at this point we would send them to the product page, or an extended version of the product page.

Steve: Okay, and then still any incentives to buy at this point or?

Kurt: Not yet, no at this point we probably want to talk about a lot of times like the content or using those ads, or the landing page both are reviews. I always go, at this point once they are aware of it I just need to convince them with social proof; I think it’s the best way to go about it. We’ll do a lot of like quotes from customers and testimonials and reviews. And if we’ve got like big blogs or magazines that have reviewed the product, we want to include those logos and quotes as trust indicators in the ads or in the landing page. At that point…

Steve: So once gain this is like a separate landing page again, right?

Kurt: Yes, yeah we can either do — usually what it is, is a product template that we’ve made, that’s in an ideal world. I think you could get away — we’ve absolutely done this with a regular product page so long as it’s got a lot of content on it. And at that point we just — our goal then, so in our first our intent was get them interested. And now with this our intent is just get them to add it to the cart, and if they buy that’s fantastic, but if they don’t and they’ve add it to the cart we can actually segment them again.

At this point I’m just going to show them an ad that links them back to slash cart, and say something like your cart’s waiting for you, we saved it. And then we want to get into a risk reversal where we will talk about return policies and satisfaction guarantees. And this is the first time that I might introduce, if it makes sense for the brand that I would introduce a discount code.

Steve: Okay, and just curious how often do you rotate these ads, like what do you let the frequency get up to?

Kurt: So on Facebook we’ll do — like for that first ad we would set it to daily — we wanted to go for daily impressions for reach. And the worst it’s going to do is show them each one person one ad per day, supposedly what Facebook should do for us. And if I have got five ads in there, then I could show them essentially five different — I could show them five different ads for one business week which is that should be more than enough.

Steve: So that first add really you’re not even doing anything for conversation, it’s really just straight impressions, then maybe clicks?

Kurt: No, the first ad is just straight up like I don’t want that hard sale, I just want these people to opt-in to my funnel is how I look at it.

Steve: Okay, and for your best converting campaigns like what is like a typical cost per acquisition, let’s take this watch example.

Kurt: So this is the one issue with doing the sales funnel the way I have suggested it is you have to have the margin on the product that can support this. So if you’ve got a very inexpensive product with a very slim margin PPC is already going to be a problem, but doing these long Facebook campaigns is going to be tough.

And especially you can still do like the remarketing, you could probably still do it, it’s just that step one of getting new people into the sales funnel, that’s where you are spending a lot of money. But presently in my campaigns I’m shooting to get my cost per acquisition under $10, off top of my head the last couple I have worked on I have been in like probably $5 to $9 range.

Steve: That’s actually pretty good.

Kurt: Yeah, it works; it sounds a little crazy in that far — like a lot of people brace off that idea of like well the first ad we don’t actually expect to sell anybody anything. But when you make it part of this longer experience, it works well plus we are then — our third ad is that cart abandonment.

So people who just happen to visit the site for other means, they are still going to see those cart abandonment ads. And then afterward we can segment recent purchase service into an up sale campaign, where we try and sell them additional products. When you add all that together that’s when it really drives the cost per acquisition down.

Steve: So in your cost per acquisition calculations you are kind of including email also it sounds like?

Kurt: Yeah, in my ideal universe those are the two channels you want. You need some — I love Facebook for the segmentation. And then email works phenomenally well for turning people into brand evangelists. Like typically we’ll look at email as a thing that starts the moment they buy, because I want this very — I want to increase lifetime value of a customer. And again this is where we really give in to the advantage that you’ve lost with when you are on Amazon. Like the person buys from you and then they are gone, and you could follow up for customer service and that’s about it, versus…

Steve: I know for me I have problems like kind of tracking email conversions versus Facebook conversations. Even though I might have like just like a separate list or tag just for people who sign up through Facebook. It’s not, like I have to go out of my way to calculate that. Is that something that you do or?

Kurt: The only way around it, I don’t unless it’s like until you are spending — I mean it really depends on how much you are spending. But the solution to that is through UTM tagging, adding — just adding core strings so you could separate out who is buying from where.

Steve: So for all your emails like every link in your email is — okay so you tag it.

Kurt: Yeah, and the issue is because you are right, if someone like got an abandoned cart email and click through that email and bought let’s say you use I like Klaviyo for email, so Shopify because it integrates the best.

That might like that for sure will take credit and say, oh yeah this abandoned cart email earned $300. But then if they had clicked any of my ads in the last 7 days Facebook is going to say, oh they fall on the attribution window and they clicked our ad. And it’s going to take credit too, and it’s like oh you…

Steve: Yeah, it gets all like a little hairy at that point.

Kurt: But then the question is like well would the abandoned cart email have worked had they not seen the Facebook ad. So you get into — and it’s really, it’s hard to know like I mean you start getting to questions of human psychology and behavior.

Steve: Sure, sure, sure. I was just wondering of you had…

Kurt: Like at some point you are just like you could dive so deep that things start to get crazy.

Steve: Cool, Kurt hey we’ve been chatting for quite a while now. I also wanted to give you an opportunity to kind of talk about some of the other web properties that you have, and where people can find you.

Kurt: Sure, probably the easiest thing Google my name kurtelster.com. Sign up for my newsletter and I run my own podcast, the Unofficial Shopify Podcast, we talk about stuff like this once a week, and I send that out as an email to my list. Or if you are looking to DIY, DIY store of ecommerce bootcamp.com is a book on the topic that’s essential, a knowledge transfer to get all these thoughts out of my head into you. Or if you have an existing store and are just looking for ways to optimize my video series called ecommerce X weekly.

Steve: Cool man, hey good thanks a lot for coming on the show, it’s always interesting to see how other people run their ads and how they design their sites. And I think that the listeners will find your insights very useful.

Kurt: Yeah, I hope so. If anyone has questions that’s why sign up for my list and reply to it and I always — people who reply to my list I always make sure to answer.

Steve: Cool man, well Kurt thanks for coming on the show.

Kurt: Yeah, my pleasure.

Steve: All right, take care.

Kurt: You too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. If you are only selling online primarily on third party market places like Amazon, you really need to own your own web property. And I hope Kurt’s traffic strategies are useful for you going forward.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode118. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page and I will send you the free course via e-mail immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

117: How To Create A 20M Dollar Company With Only 2 Employees Selling Vacuum Filters With Chad Rubin

How To Make 20 Million Per Year With Only 2 Employees Selling Physical Products Online With Chad Rubin

Today I have Chad Rubin with me on the show. Chad is an ecommerce veteran who has been selling online for quite some time. He’s the founder of Crucial Vacuum which is a company that is worth 20 million dollars with only 2 employees.

He’s also the creator of Skubana which is software that will pretty much manage your entire ecommerce operation.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chad got into ecommerce and why he decided to sell vacuum filters.
  • The challenges of selling on his own site.
  • How he exponentially grew his business by leveraging other marketplaces.
  • How he established a recognizable brand.
  • Why he decided to outsource his warehouse
  • His best traffic sources for his website

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Chad Rubin with me on the show. Now Chad is an ecommerce veteran who has been selling online for quite some time now. He is the founder of Crucial Vacuum which is a company that’s actually worth $20 million, but he only has 2 employees which is pretty impressive. He is also the creator of Skubana, which is software that will pretty much manage your entire ecommerce operation. It’s been a long time, Chad and I had been communicating via email, but I finally was able to get him on the show and with that welcome to the show Chad, how are you doing today man?

Chad: I’m doing great, thanks for having me on.

Steve: Tell us the back story for Crucial Vacuum because like me who sells handkerchiefs, I think vacuum stuff is pretty random also, how did you get into this industry?

Chad: Yeah, completely non sexy niche. So my parents when I was growing up, I used to work in my father’s vacuum store. So he repaired vacuums, he sold vacuums, I was the under paid child. I would be working for him and I saw them struggle through the years and thought to myself I’m never going to be an entrepreneur, because if this is what an entrepreneur is like, I don’t want to do it.

So I decided to work for the man I went to college, I was first generation college grad. I went to Umass Amherst and went on to Wall Street right after college. So I majored in finance which was a deficiency my parents had. Then I got fired from the Street in 2009, early 2009 I was covering internet stocks. So I was giving advice to hedge funds and social investors to buy, sell, hold, Amazon and eBay and all other different internet stocks.

And my parents had a vacuum store; they were going out of business, so I said, “Mum, dad you guys need to be on the internet.” And they said son no one is going to buy vacuum parts on the internet. And I was like, I wouldn’t be too sure about that, and I started my own direct to consumer vacuum company called Crucial Vacuum, selling replacement parts and accessories direct consumer.

Steve: Was your parent’s store like the source of your products, or were you working together?

Chad: No, we weren’t working together. So initially I actually — I took their products and I listed it on a store front called Volusion, a really bad store front, but it was all that was available at the time. And then I also listed their products on Amazon. And when I went to go buy them from the distributor and sell them, I couldn’t get them at that same price.

Steve: Wow okay.

Chad: Because I was buying for 20 and selling for 24, I thought to myself wait a minute, this thing is made of like plastic and paper, why does it cost $20 and why can’t I make money on it? Why is there no margin? I started– really this was before direct consumer was the in vogue or the cool thing to do.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: So before Bobobos or Warby Parker or Dollar Shave Club, like the direct consumer game erupted yeah.

Steve: So for your parents though they were selling these same filters and such right, were their margins that low as well?

Chad: Well they had a brick and motor store, and they are located in a Wal-Mart shopping center. If you think about where do you buy a back TV, you buy either Target, Wal-Mart or you buy it on Amazon. So it wasn’t really a need to have a brick and motor like sell Mom and Pop store anymore. Well so my parents, their store was struggling to exist, and nobody was really shopping in a Mom and Pop vacuum store to buy their vacuum anymore. When was the last time you bought a vacuum at a Mom and Pop store? Likely you would probably go to Amazon or you go to Wal-Mart or you go to Target.

Steve: That’s true yes.

Chad: So they were struggling and like they just didn’t — they didn’t want any piece of the internet game. And I saw an opportunity to go direct to consumer, nobody was doing it, and the market was ripe. And I think there is a lot of naysayers in my life, they were like wait a minute, so your parents own a vacuum store, they were struggling and you think that you could actually make money doing this and be successful? And I was like yeah, I think there is a massive opportunity that nobody has conquered yet.

Steve: Okay so you noticed the margins were pretty low, and so I guess you just went straight to manufacturer?

Chad: Yeah, so the margins were low and I started sourcing products in Asia kind of– well initially I went on Alibaba and I started looking at — I compiled the spreadsheet. I had all these factories, I started sending them samples and comparing prices. And the goal of course is to get as close to the manufacturer as you can get. So there is trading companies out there, there are agencies, but I started building relationships and really started weeding out different factories in the process. It was based on price; it was based on the time to get the product, the lead time, the price and just I would ask them questions, like a great question is this– so I mean a simple question I started — I asked early on in the game is who do you sell to?

So if they tell me who they sell to I already know there is a trust factor. They tell me what they sell to the person, or hey here is the catalogue or here is the invoices we sell to the– that we give. Here is the invoices from this company that buys from us in United States. I immediately know that they are not the most trustworthy company to buy from. Well I’ll get like pictures of the factory and make sure they are a factory. I was really starting to build a relationship and Skype with them.

Steve: Did you ever have to fly over there at all, or you just everything would be on Skype and email.

Chad: Oh yeah, flying over there is fantastic. So you spend time with– like going to KTV to karaoke with the factory manager, it’s probably the best thing you can do in business. It’s like the ROI is tremendous.

Steve: Okay, we never did the karaoke thing, but we did go to dinner and lunch with our vendors and you are right. The quality of our stuff drastically improved after we did that. Cool, so okay so you got your vendors and so you started creating your own stuff, and then did you sell in your own website in the beginning or?

Chad: I did a mix, I did — so I started off on Volusion. Before Volusion I was using FrontPage, but Volusion…

Steve: Hilarious, okay.

Chad: Yeah, I guess I’m dating myself now, but Volusion I started playing around on Amazon and noticed that I would be just competing — when I was re-selling I was just competing for the buy box. And I didn’t really see an added strategy there. I just thought I was like — I was playing musical shares on Amazon with different sellers for different listings. I really wasn’t interested in that game.

So right out of the gate I literally immediately built a brand, and I always viewed selling on ecommerce like playing monopoly. You want to be on every part of the board to win, and that’s the flow I’ve always used. Now I sell online now, and I’m on 15 different channels.

Steve: Okay and so what was your first channel? You said Volusion, how did you drive traffic to your Volusion site in the beginning?

Chad: Volusion was a lot of AdWords, so I bought my first — so I started really small, I always started scrappy. I bought my first min, minimum requirement from the factory was one filter and I loaded that up on Google AdWords and I sold that right away. Then I did a couple of cases, and then I did a pallet and I did 2 pallets. I started with Volusion on Google AdWords.

Steve: Okay, and how much was your ad spend in the beginning?

Chad: That’s a great question. I was tracking at the time; I don’t remember what it is or what it was now.

Steve: Are you guys using AdWords still today?

Chad: Of course yeah, we do a lot of Google AdWords; product listing ads of course has taken over from text ads.

Steve: So in terms of your ads spend, do you do Facebook ads as well like what’s your — like what do you spend your ad dollars?

Chad: Ad dollars is really on Google AdWords, just on sponsored ads, now Amazon has something called Amazon spon [ph] like did plus I believe, where you can bid on certain keywords which is fantastic. But if you think about it with social media nobody really wants to go on Facebook to see a deal for a filter.

Steve: Yes, that’s why I was asking yeah.

Chad: So and I read Gary Vienna charts book back in the day, [inaudible 00:09:48] which I think set my perspective correct on social media. You just have to pick the appropriate channel. So for us like people who go to Twitter, and they yell about their vacuum all day long. Those are great opportunities for us because they are like, “Oh my vacuum smells, oh it stinks, or it doesn’t pick up anything,” and those are ripe opportunities to go in and talk to the customers.

Steve: So that’s interesting, so how do you find these complaints? You just do searches on Twitter or?
Chad: Yeah, you can search for vacuum sucks, vacuum cleaner, of course now we got like I mentioned before when we were chatting before the call, I’ve moved into a lot of new products. So I have moved into vacuums, coffee, air purifications, humidification, marijuana filters, pool filters, you name it, like we are just nailing every vertical possible, repeating that same success.

Steve: So back to Twitter, so it sounds like — I’m just trying to get an idea of what your main channels are. So you said AdWords which is a large portion. And then let’s not talk about Amazon yet, we’ll get to there in a little bit. And then you have Twitter, does that mean you have just like someone full time monitoring these Twitter channels or?

Chad: No, we just — I think we — Okay so if I have to break it down it would be Google AdWords, Fixya, which is like a repair site where people go on to ask repair questions. So we come across as a thought leader. We do a lot, we did a great job with YouTube videos, and YouTube videos ranked really well on Google, so it’s like free …

Steve: So videos like how to replace your filter and that sort of thing or?

Chad: Yeah, the whole bay. Yeah, with very keyword dense titles, playful videos and conversions are fantastic.

Steve: Interesting, so how do you get the person from the YouTube video to your site? Is the link underneath the video or a call to action with video?

Chad: Yeah, so the link is underneath the video. We did a couple of videos where the link is actually in the video itself. So it’s just like anything else. Like we are trying to provide value to people, and when they see that you are a thought leader and you are a fun company and they respect you, they are going to want to buy from you.

Steve: Okay and did you — have you …

Chad: So it’s no different on YouTube.

Steve: Have you run any YouTube ads or is it just straight organic?

Chad: Straight up organic, no YouTube ads.

Steve: Okay, and the way you got those videos to kind of rank was just through keyword research?

Chad: Well, no one’s doing it. So we do keyword research, we obviously already manufacture the part and we just, we invested in all the equipment. And we started just doing — we also had an actress come in and then we had an internal employee do it. So we just had fun with it, we bought the vacuums, we tested the filters, we threw them around, we catch the bloopers and we — and flew them in the video.

Steve: Kind of like the Will It Blend videos right, so to speak?

Chad: I don’t think I’ve seen those.

Steve: Oh well it’s just like shove an iPad in a blender and it blends.

Chad: Oh really.

Steve: You haven’t seen those?

Chad: No.

Steve: Okay like they shove like random things into a blender, they sell blenders obviously, and those videos started going viral because they were blending like all sorts of random stuff.

Chad: That’s cool.

Steve: Okay, so we got YouTube, any other channels that we haven’t talked about?

Chad: Affiliate marketing.

Steve: Oh okay, let’s talk about that. So do you use a standard network like ShareASale or?

Chad: Yeah, so we use ShareASale.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: And it comes back for a vacuum — like no one really wants to promote vacuum filters on their blog.

Steve: Yeah, exactly okay.

Chad: So but the interesting thing is that when you think kind of one step or move from what you sell, so for handkerchiefs I think about like Chivalry, right? So I would approach an affiliate blogger and say, “Hey like you are writing a blog on Chivalry or something, somewhere there and like I do handkerchiefs, so why don’t we integrate the two together?” So with vacuum filters it’s when I think about vacuum filters I think about two things. I think about mothers who are nesting, and they are having children at their home and they are concerned that children are going to like lick up dust bunnies, or I think about allergy sufferers.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: So you approach this like mummy bloggers, the allergy sufferers, and it’s a great network and niche to focus on.

Steve: So for your affiliate program, it’s actually quite a bit of work, because I run a small affiliate program and I noticed that you end up with just like a couple of good ones and then you end up with a bunch of crappy ones. Was there a lot of work involved in doing the outreach?

Chad: There is a ton of work on affiliate marketing, it’s not like you build it, you store it up and people will join.

Steve: Yeah exactly.

Chad: Like if you look at who is probably in your affiliate program right now, it’s likely like these deal sites like RetailMeNot who you are probably giving 5% affiliate commissions to, and if you lower them to a half a percent they’ll be fine with it.

Steve: So I was just curious how you got your affiliates. Like do you have like a dedicated person running your affiliate program or?

Chad: Well yeah, I mean we have people that are multi-faceted that are — I mean look I only have two people at Crucial now.

Steve: Yeah I know that.

Chad: So I do a lot of outsourcing too. I want to mention I do a lot of outsourcing on top of it, but higher value activities are kept in house, things that I don’t want to outsource. So on the affiliate program, like have you ever signed up to — do you use ShareASale?

Steve: I am an affiliate on ShareASale, I don’t — I’m not the like the store that runs an affiliate program on ShareASale.

Chad: So you are part of the network, right?

Steve: Correct, yes.

Chad: So that’s great. Actually you are on the other side of the equation which is fantastic, because now you can actually start looking at all of the competitors or all of the other affiliates in your space, and what are they doing and you can look at how much they want as a commission. There is a lot of research you can do on the other side on the back end, not as a merchant. So if you hit it from both sides.

Steve: I was just curious like what it takes to build up an affiliate program from scratch.

Chad: To build it from scratch, well it takes a lot of outreach, that’s …

Steve: Was that something that you outsourced? Like you only have two guys right, and then …

Chad: Well I didn’t always have two guys, so let’s back it up.

Steve: Okay all right, okay.

Chad: I did not always have two people at Crucial. I used to have 15 warehouse employees, maybe a little more and roughly about 10 clerical workers.

Steve: Okay, and so back then you probably had one of them do outreach for a while, okay.

Chad: Oh yeah, there has been a lot of work and there is a lot of cross pollination. So the people that used to be at Crucial that are awesome employees, I’ve now put on to Skubana to help me steer all that business.

Steve: I see, okay, interesting. So how are you able to go from what is it — it sounded like 30 people down to just two then?

Chad: So I would say the first thing is that I outsourced my warehouse to what’s called a third party logistics company, a 3PL.

Steve: Okay which one are you using, just curious?

Chad: One in New Jersey and I’m happy to — if anybody wants to contact me after this they can. You can reach me @chadskubana, also — so I did that. That took care of whatever, 15 employees, so I’d have to deal with managing certain individuals at a different economic status, or people that were smoking weed in the back of my warehouse or slipping like Irish whiskey into their coffee.

Steve: Okay, these things really happen I gather? Okay.

Chad: Yeah they do, there is a lot of things that happen, a lot of interesting things that happened.
But you know that was my core competency right. I was never trained to run a warehouse; I was trained, like for me I just — I thrive on the thrill of building businesses. So to me that was not focusing on what I was good at.

Steve: Were you using FBA at all?

Chad: Yeah, of course yeah we would bring the containers into the warehouse, and I would even be in the back once in a while labelling products. I’d put on the Beatles, my father-in-law would come in and prep FBA stuff and warning labels and suffocation labels on the packages too, like it just wasn’t good use of my time or his time or anybody’s time.

Steve: So can you comment on why you wouldn’t just send all your stuff to Amazon and fulfil from there versus going a 3PL and Amazon?

Chad: Because firstly Amazon is like a gateway drug, and they’ve made it really easy to sell in their platform but they have also made it hard to ever leave. So multi-channels fulfilment through Amazon is very expensive, and I never believe in a one channel strategy. That was never ever my intention to build — like there is a lot of sellers out there, and I was just at the Crossbar show and they have built channels. I call them channels.

They have built channels, they don’t build businesses, so they just are focused on FBA, that’s the only thing that they do, but for me there is a diversification strategy. I come from Wall Street, I always thought to myself they’ll never invest in a stock that has one customer. Hell no, there is too much risk. So why would I ever invest — why would I ever just invest everything, all my eggs in one basket on Amazon.com?

Steve: Okay, so you probably ship everything then to your 3PL, and then from there you ship stuff to Amazon?

Chad: Yeah we do a mix. So we’ll do, everything comes to the 3PL, they unload the containers and then I’ll do some stuff to FBA in the US, I’ll do some stuff to Canada. I have a 3PL in Ireland, and then we have obviously inventory here for our off channel sales.

Steve: Okay, so that sounds like you got rid of like more than half of your employees?

Chad: Yeah roughly, and then — I then kind of this opportunity with Skubana fell in lap. So I’ve automated, I took care of another seven employees with technology.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk a little — I’m sure the listeners don’t know what Skubana is. So you want to just give brief intro and how that came about?

Chad: Brief intro would be it is a software to manage everything after the checkout. We sit in the center of a market place or shopping cart and the customer, and we do everything in the middle to run your entire business. So any way or just quickly any way you fulfil like printing shipping labels, drop shipping, 3PL connectivity, multichannel fulfilment, FBA etc. Inventory, purchase orders, vendor management and analytics, and we do it all in one unified place, so you don’t need to use unbundled fragmented apps to run your business.

Steve: So while you had all of your employees you were silently creating this system on the side?

Chad: Actually it all happened at the same time. So obviously like there is a very rich history here, right? Like that’s what business is all about. You go through the struggle and the negatives become opportunities over time. Anything that’s painful becomes an opportunity. So I got rid of my warehouse. I had a lot of warehouse issues, warehouse employee issues. We got rid of that and at the same time I was unloading my warehouse. I couldn’t find technology to run my business.

So there is a lot of entry level software that’s out there, but I do a lot of order volume. I do about 60,000 orders a month. So for me I’m an enterprise seller, but there is these fragmented software that exist out there, entry level software that exist out there, but nothing that could actually run my business. I tried a lot of software, there is a lot of noise, and it’s kind of like — it’s all into — it’s like getting into a car and realizing there is no engine.

So I lost a lot of money, I lost a lot of hair and time using these shitty solutions. So and of course you can go with a different solution and they cost a lot of money. There is an implementation fee, there is custom development and there is channel advisor that takes a percentage of the revenue, and I’m really against percentage of revenue. So I decided — I just wrote an email to a bunch of buddies, I said, “Guys who can help me find an enterprise developer here in the United States to help me build what I think is the next generation e-commerce operations platform?”

And I found D.J. Kunovac to found the business with me. He came to my warehouse as I was getting rid of it. So he expected, he used to come to my warehouse and he thought it was going to be like Amazon with cranes and like robots. And my warehouse was a freaking mess, it was a jungle. And he was like there’s got to be something else out there, and we tested all these solutions and they all sucked, so we decided to build our own. So this all happened kind of at the same time and just, the opportunity was just too good to pass up on.

Steve: Okay, and so were you kind of debating whether to go with this software versus a 3PL, or were you going 3PL all the way?

Chad: So 3PL was happening no matter what. It was like my wife; she was like, “Chad you need to do something about this warehouse. It’s like it’s coming down to the wire here, and you need to get rid of this warehouse. It’s causing so much aggravation.” So the warehouse was already on its way out, but in the mean time I was using a shipping software, ShipStation to just gather all my orders.

And then from all my channels and I was still missing some channels, and then I have to export the orders to the 3PL. And then I would have to import them into ShipStation, but I would have to import Amazon-UPS, Amazon-FedEx, Amazon-USPS, and then all the other channels. And I had a full time employee just doing that. And yeah so that’s kind of how everything evolved, and that’s how we have 3PL out of the box, 3PL connectivity now for any market place seller with Skubana.

Steve: So you keep mentioning all these different channels that you sell on. So what are some of these channels outside of Amazon in your own site?

Chad: So to break it down Amazon does 40% of product searches, 40%. That means that there’s 60% that’s happening off of Amazon. So a lot of sellers are like well is there life off Amazon, and I’m always like look man the barrier is worth the squeeze, right. 60% of searches are happening off Amazon today. That means you are missing 60% of searches.

So I like to focus on Amazon, I think it’s a great channel, but the second channel I think that is fantastic if you are looking to migrate off of Amazon is building your own website, and leveraging product listing ads with Google. So Amazon off channel, Google which is your own website, you can do Sears, Newegg, Rakuten, eBay, I do all the international properties; Overstock, Wayfair. I think I got most of them.

Steve: Okay and then so managing all those is a pain in the butt and that’s why you needed to develop this software?

Chad: Well, I think managing a business just even if you are just selling on Amazon it’s actually a pain. But yeah so if you are a multi market place, multi warehouse, and you have different fulfilment methods, and you want to accelerate and automate your business, you need to have a software in place, like it’s just not scalable.

Steve: Just curious what is the percentage breakdown for sales for your own site?

Chad: So I would say that Amazon used to do 100% of my sales, I’ve managed to get it down to 60%. So I think that’s a good number. I think that’s a good goal for people to aim from a 100 to 90 to 60. I’d like to get it down to about 50%. If you think about Amazon it’s just massive and they are becoming more and more massive. They are a monopoly.

Steve: Yeah for sure. Okay and then so the other channels plus your site kind of represent 40% then?

Chad: Yeah, but my second biggest channel is my own site.

Steve: Okay, that was important to know. Yeah I was going to ask about — because I think I read some interview that you did where you basically started on Amazon right; for the most part?

Chad: Yeah, I mean there was Amazon Volusion; I’d mix it up a little bit. But I saw a lot of power in Amazon, I kind of used Amazon as a feeder system to build my own stuff and invest a lot more money and time into that.

Steve: Would you say that most of your customers are consumers or businesses?

Chad: Consumers for sure.

Steve: Consumers for sure. Okay so let’s talk about how you reach these consumers and how you get them to keep coming back for more right. Filters– some of the stuff that you sell is consumables, right?

Chad: It’s all consumables.

Steve: Okay and so what — do you do a lot of email marketing? Like how do you get people come back?

Chad: So we have subscription on our site which was not easy to develop. So it’s subscribed and saved to a degree. So you subscribe …

Steve: Okay, how is that structured?

Chad: It’s structured, you subscribe, you can pick how many months you want to go out and you get 5% upon check out for subscribing. So that’s one way. All of our packaging is driving traffic to our site. We do email marketing; we do have automated drip marketing to our customers with filter reminders to their emails.

Steve: The reason why I’m asking is inherently what you are selling isn’t that sexy, right? As you stated earlier. So these emails, I’m just kind of curious like do people open these emails like for filter reminders and stuff about vacuums equipment?

Chad: So I don’t send people — I’m not like sending them like an info-graphic on vacuum filters right?

Steve: Right.

Chad: I’m literally just– they have a need and I’m solving their need. So you are supposed to change your vacuum filter every six months. So if we email them with a reminder that says, “Hey you purchased from us, it’s about time to change your filter,” like I’m just trying to take a product that’s not very smart at all and make it smarter. So just helping customers change their filter is important, because they need to change it.

It’s either they received our filter in the mail and open up their calendar on Gmail and put in their calendar. but most of them, 99% of them aren’t doing that. So we are just sending them a reminder, and so we have those types of campaigns. We also have win back series of you leave our — if you leave our site it’s likely, and you only halfway went through the checkout, it’s likely you are going to get an email with a deal that says, “Hey by the way …

Steve: Okay, the reason why I’m asking these questions Chad is because I can’t even remember the last time I changed my vacuum filter. It’s like not something that I think about.

Chad: Do you know what kind of vacuum you have?

Steve: I have a Dyson.

Chad: Okay, so every Dyson has two filters in it. And do you vacuum though?

Steve: That’s even a better question. Yeah well we vacuum, yeah.

Chad: Okay I hear a “We” so it’s likely that you are probably one step or move from the vacuum if I had to guess?

Steve: Sure.

Chad: So and likely your clean ladies or whoever is doing is not telling you to change it. So yeah I feel like I built a pretty successful business. I promise you that people in the world, in the United States particularly with — essentially the vacuum penetration rate is higher than internet rate. People are changing…

Steve: No, I believe you, it’s very hilarious though. This makes it more interesting to me because you’ve taken something that’s relatively not sexy, and you’ve made a lot of money doing it, right? So in that respect it makes it a lot more interesting to me.

Chad: I love unsexy businesses. But the thing is that and I think I was mentioning this earlier is that we’ve taken the same success and I’ve moved, like it feels like vacuum, selling vacuum filters online isn’t the most fulfilling.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: But building a business is really fulfilling for me. But like I wanted to move in a direction that would take what I’m passionate about, and then combine it with what I know. So I moved into coffee filter. I love coffee. I’m a huge coffee enthusiast. So I kind of try to like spice it up a little bit, and made things exciting by adding things that I’m interested in into our portfolio.

Steve: Okay, but this is on a separate side obviously.

Chad: So that’s a really good question too. You are asking very good questions though, I’m liking it. So when I started Crucial Vacuum it was a very — my vision, I didn’t like think, like I guess my suggestion to people listening to this would be if you are starting a brand you got to think big.
So when I started Crucial Vacuum I had this myopic vision. It was going to take me six years to disrupt the vacuum space. But I did it in such a short amount of time, and I was always looking behind me to see who is copying me or who is– because I thought I only have like a six month window. So now I mean if you ask me if I would move to vacuum filters now I would say hell no, because there is a lot of imitators in the space.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: Then I was like let me move into the next thing. Okay I need to create another brand which means I need to have another social media strategy, I need to have another LLC, just another layer. So I started Crucial Air which was for air purification, humidification. And then I started Crucial Coffee, and then I decided I was like you know what, why don’t I just create one brand to house it all in one place? So I’m now — we’ve already launched it, but we haven’t launched our site yet. It’s called Think Crucial which is essentially everything that’s replaceable for the home, that’s what we want to sell.

Steve: I see, so if you were to start all over again you would have just started this Think Crucial brand?

Chad: Think Crucial would have been it, yeah.

Steve: Okay, and so how are you going to — are you just going to move everything over and do redirects? Like how is it going to work?

Chad: So I think that’s one of the scariest thing for ecommerce people is re-platform because I’ve done it once already. So I went from Volusion to Magento, and now I actually just downgraded from Magento Enterprise to Community. So I have three properties on Magento and my other property, now I Think Crucial is being built on Shopify.

So right now I’m really just getting unique — I’m building unique content. Really, really thoughtful like I’m putting a lot of money into this venture, but thoughtful content that’s going to end up super, super well with a beautiful sleek design, it’s intuitive, it’s beautiful, it’s going to be powerful. So we are really just building, we are building right now. It’s actually almost done.

Steve: Okay, can we talk about your shopping cart choices real quick? You said you were on Enterprise, Magento Enterprise and then you moved down to Community which I found that the support for community isn’t all that great in my experience at least. Maybe you have a different experience. It seems like they put a lot of their effort on Enterprise and the Community was kind of buggy the last time I used it.

Chad: When was the last time you used it?

Steve: It was probably a year and a half ago, two years ago.

Chad: So look Magento is buggy whether you are on Community or not, it doesn’t really matter. It’s written PHP and it’s really — I mean people have built careers around 15 bugs on Magento. So what I would suggest is finding a good developer, but I don’t even think that — I think Magento is a platform of the past if you want my honest opinion. And right now you’ve got really two choices in the shopping cart world. They are both SAS and it’s either Shopify or BigCommerce. It’s Coke or Pepsi right now. So those are the two platforms I would say are the winners in the space.

Steve: So you are moving all of your stuff off of Magento then?

Chad: I am not moving yet right. Right now I have finished building, I’m almost done building the shopping cart, and making it beautiful, but I have not made the decision if I want to redirect right now. I said to myself …

Steve: That’s a huge decision.

Chad: Yes, and it keeps me up at night, so I’m like you know what, why don’t I leave it right now and let’s just see how my site can do on its own. There is no rush, there is no rush.

Steve: Sure. That’s interesting because you’ve kind of done a 180, I think I read some other interview with you where you are really pushing Magento and maybe this was a couple of years ago.

Chad: So I mean like the thing was is that when I left Volusion, Volusion was like burning cash. And I had so much traffic coming to my site that they literally turned off my site overnight, and they said it was D-Dos attack. So I had to re-platform, I said okay never again am I going to a SAS platform where someone can do that to me. I want to own my own store.

So I started hosting my own store from Magento on a server, and I thought that was the direction for me. But now there is like really great technology out there that is disrupting Magento, which is why Magento tried to come out with Magento 2.0, eBay just spun off Magento. So it’s just right now I mean Shopify raised a billion dollars, and they are really focusing on adding features and making their platform number one.

Steve: Okay, and so you’ve found that your feature set of your shopping cart has been falling behind, and that’s why you’ve kind of been looking to fully hosted carts?

Chad: Well, so like if you were to do a side by side comparison between crucialvacuum.com and Think Crucial which is not live yet but will be, you’d see the difference right away in the check out, the seamless checkout, how quick it is, how responsive it is. It’s like a completely different feel. It’s like next generation e-commerce versus I’ll grow ecommerce.

Steve: Okay, all right let’s switch gears a little bit and kind of talk about branding, because I know you talk a lot about establishing your own brand. We are talking filters in this case. So what were some of the things that you did to kind of establish your brand? So like let’s say I want to replace a filter on my vacuum, and from what I understand most people think of your brand these days, right? So how did you make that happen?

Chad: How did I make that happen? So it takes time. So the success you see right now is not an overnight success. We’ve invested a lot in — and we are always evolving. Like we are never staying constant, we are never just existing. That would be my recommendation. I mean that’s always what we are doing. Like I’m ready — I just moved to Magento like maybe four years ago, and I’m already looking at the next platform and the next thing and the next product and the next everything.

We are constantly looking at changing things up a bit, whether it’s our messaging inside of our packaging or it’s our email marketing blast. Like we are constantly having weekly planning meetings, going through what is the narrative that we want our customer to have about our business.

Steve: So what is that narrative? Like what is your value preposition?

Chad: So the value prop is first of all we are free shipping free returns no matter what. Like all day long 24/7. Our phone number is right on our page. 80% and if we are just looking at the vacuum filters 80% of our filters are washable and reusable. We plant a tree for every 1000 filters sold, not that that really moves the needle that much, but it’s just our signature gesture.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: But yeah I mean I think free shipping, free returns, having somebody to answer the phone, an expert to walk you through replacing your vacuum filter on the phone is a classic differentiator. Like you can’t call up Amazon and be like, “Hey I bought this vacuum filter from you, how do I put it in?”

Steve: Right.

Chad: They are not going to help; they are not going to walk you through that. So it’s focusing on like, so when we do these videos for example they are hosted on our own website, they are not on Amazon. So it’s adding more value, more unique content to your own site because when people go to Amazon they are going to a vending machine, do you want paper or plastic. But when you are coming to Crucial you are coming to us because we’re experts, and we’re going to be there. We got your back, and our phone number is right there.

Steve: Do you find that a lot of your phone calls are how to related phone calls?

Chad: I think there is a good portion of them that are definitely how to phone calls, but there is also a good portion and they are like, “Hey I don’t know how to check out online, I’m not like internet savvy. Let me just place this order on the phone.” And then we’ll say, “Oh fantastic, you are on the phone? Perfect where are you from? Where do you live?

Oh you are replacing your vacuum filter? Cool, well you know what while you are replacing your filter you have another filter on there, and by the way since you are touching your slimy vacuum why don’t you replace your vacuum belt.” So there is a lot of like up selling, there is a lot of magic that goes on behind the scenes to like build that relationship with the customer.

Steve: So for your Amazon sales though do you try to steer some of those customers over to your site as well?

Chad: No, that’s against Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: Okay, so let me ask you this, when people look on Amazon, are they typing in Crucial Filters?

Chad: Yeah, I mean if you actually were to go to Amazon and type in CRU into their search, I’m pretty sure you are going to see Crucial vacuum pop up. So it’s an index, it’s like an indexed word that Amazon is serving to people that are typing in, or trying to recognize what they are typing to help them with their search query.

Steve: Are you selling to Amazon as a vendor or FBA?

Chad: I sell to Amazon as a vendor and I sell on Amazon, so I sell on the 1P, which is as a vendor and sell 3P, I sell on Amazon.

Steve: Can we talk a little about some of the pros and cons of doing that?

Chad: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay, so, I have had other people on the show who are vendors for Amazon, and they were always conflicted, right? They were conflicted at Amazon, like if you didn’t agree to sell to them, they just find someone else, and then your ranking through existing products are lower. So, what was going on through your head when you were approached?

Chad: So firstly, I had been suspended on Amazon, and I have been suspended twice, so I sell replacement filters to feed brands and if Dicing [ph] complains to Amazon, which probably it does; I don’t know, probably close to a billion dollars with Amazon maybe more, I have no idea.

If Dicing says,”Hey, these guys Crucial Vacuum are making replacement filters and they’re knock offs of ours, take care of them,” Amazon in India is not going to think twice about it and do something about it, right? So, we’ve had like complaints before and I went away with my wife, we were on vacation. We were going on our way to Greece and my account was suspended, and I was freaking out.

Steve: That sucks.

Chad: It sucked really bad, because I was like finally taking a break and my mind was preoccupied, it was painful. So, by that point I was never again am I going to be so tied to Amazon that they can take everything away in seconds. So, that was– so in my mind I was like, “How am I going to diversify?”
So yeah, I condone multiple market places which I have done, but also I can start building a relationship with Amazon and sell two times since I’m the brand owner. And they have to approach you, but luckily I have really nice relationships in the Amazon world that I was able to get in with the entire management team there. So that was what was going in for me, so I gave them a handful of excuse and I used it as a hedge.

Steve: Now that makes sense. With the idea that if you’re selling to them as a vendor you’re probably not going to be suspended based on product alone.

Chad: No, you can always get suspended, but the idea is and Amazon can make it themselves; which they are doing with Amazon basics, but the idea here is that I have someone to talk to in Amazon, that’s not in India and 3P and 1P are kind of like the congress and the senate, like they are meant to compete with each other. They are kind of like a check and balance, so if God forbid something happened to one, I have a hedge, I have a back-up.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So, I was just, when we were chatting before this interview, you were talking about some pretty killer growth numbers like double digits year after year. How have you managed to do that? Was it introducing more products, or just selling in more market places over the years?

Chad: I think it’s a combo, the combo of both so going deeper in our product price, going to different categories, thinking outside of the filter space, and going on other market places and going internationally.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about international. Was that kind of scary, did you do that early on or?

Chad: Actually I think it’s still early on, most sellers are like, they think that the US is where it is at, and there is a lot of things happening internationally and nobody is really focusing on.

Steve: Okay, and so was that something you did right away then, with your business or?

Chad: I was always thinking international, but I think I have been getting more heavy in our approach probably in the last two years or so, really thinking about how to sell overseas because there is different expectations, there is different fulfilment rates.

Steve: Taxes, yeah.

Chad: I mean there are taxes, there is a lot that goes into it, different languages, different brands are in the US versus in the UK or Germany for that matter, but…
Steve: I guess what I was trying to get at was, is international like your biggest place of growth right now?

Chad: The biggest place of growth right now is coming from all over, I would say that they’re posting higher growth numbers because there is a smaller part of my business, so there is a lot more room for growth there, but I was recently reading a Reddit, someone on the Amazon community just had a Reddit. They asked him, “If you were to do it all over again, would you start in the US or would you start intentionally?”

And he wrote, “I would start in the US, there’s not really a whole lot going on, the international doesn’t excite me right now.” And I actually commented in the post and I was like, “That’s crazy, if I was to start right now, actually I would start where the pack is going and there’s so much happening internationally, like you don’t really need to play with the heap in the United States, you can literally have a whole market to yourself internationally where nobody is focusing on, because it’s hard, because it’s harder.

Steve: It’s harder for someone in the US; presumably it’s not hard for somebody who resides in that country, right?

Chad: So, the second biggest channel internationally for Amazon is Amazon Germany. People actually think it’s the UK, it is Germany. So, is it that much hard to take your product, to take it and translate it on Fiverr, or one of these other translation services, and to post it on Germany and to get your product FBA there, or to– I found a warehouse in Europe that has been helping me significantly, but it’s not so hard, right? It’s just you are faced with…

Steve: It is just leg work.

Chad: Yeah, it’s just leg work, it’s just business, it’s just obstacles and there are challenges and you overcome them.

Steve: So, let me ask you this, a lot of the listeners of this podcast are people who are just kind of trying to get into ecommerce, and so for these people who are kind of starting out, what would be your advice on how to just kind of gradually grow into a thing Crucial.

Chad: Well, hopefully there are no other vacuum filter companies that are listening right now. Come up with their own thing, but to grow into, when you are starting, you need to have the proper foundation, for sure and I think a lot of sellers focus on the top-line without thinking about how is this going to scale. So, it’s not like building a house, but realizing there is no foundation, you build it on sewage. Now that works in New Jersey…

Steve: You are from New York, right?

Chad: Actually, one of my offices is in New Jersey, but it’s not built on sewerage, so I have an office in New York, office in New Jersey. So, I would say building a proper foundation, so getting your infrastructure set up correctly and professionalized from the onset. So, for me I probably wouldn’t start again ever, in my doing my own pick and park for my FBA prep ever.

I would immediately outsource that activity. I would have the right technology to automate and run my business, one that actually can take me multi-channel, so if you’re going to invest in a software, you don’t want to invest in a software that’s may give you a glass ceiling, or be what I call, a one trip pony, because it limits…

Steve: It’s hard to predict though early on, but I guess you just have to go with what you think is the best at the time.

Chad: Well, is it hard to predict that you are going to want to expand to other channels? I mean if you really want this to be a serious endeavour, you have to treat it as one.

Steve: Yeah, that’s kind of hard to do for some people though, right? Because if some of the enterprise stuff or some of the better stuff, cost a lot more on a monthly basis, I guess you’d have to be willing to put a lot more money upfront to invest in that then, right?

Chad: Well, luckily Skubana starting price is 500, so…

Steve: See, I led you right there.

Chad: So, the thing is, actually when I started Skubana I had this dream of democratizing ecommerce, so I did not want to leave any fellows behind, but what I quickly realized was that there are entry level software for people that are just casual sellers, that don’t see this as ever becoming a full time thing, that are there for them, to help them. But, if you really are serious about growing your business, you got to get into the right technology from the onset, it’s an investment.

It’s like investing in a stock, and so enrol like if you’re going into the gym, you have different choices when you are at the gym, you can go to Equinox since you are in New York City or you can go to wherever, some sort of cheap fitness club yeah, Gold or Retro or Barleys. So you have choices, but you can choose to– first of all you have to go to the gym, that’s half the battle.

Steve: That’s the hardest part, yeah.

Chad: That’s half the battle, but also if you really want to up the game you can go to a serious gym, so I guess I call Skubana like the Ferrari of operation software. It’s really a one stop shop. It’s really meant for high value merchants, but we’ve kept it a low price point to allow other people to enter in. So now people can access, and so a lot of our customers are top 200 Amazon sellers, but now for the first time ever, smaller sellers have access to what the one percent only had.

Steve: Okay and just be to clear; let’s say I’m selling in all these channels like Sears, EBay, Amazon, Wayfair, Skubana just manages all that, and all the inventory as well. Is that accurate?

Chad: Inventory, yeah any way you want to fulfil whether you add it through EPR or you print a shipping label, so we take care of– like there is no ERP system out there that combines shipping with ERP, we do that, so you don’t need a ship station or another shipping software at all. So, any way you fulfil, but the nice thing, the huge differentiator, that’s the word, so it’s commodity shipping, inventory, purchase orders, but by unifying everything together, you now have data, business intelligence that you have never seen before. Sellers know more about their car than they know about their own business, and our software changes that in a drastic way.

Steve: Because all the analytics across everything is stored in your platform.

Chad: Everything is stored, so you literally have every touch point after that person checks out, including all the hidden FBA fees as well. All that stuff is coming into our software and being sucked in, and now on the analytical section, you push the button and boom! You can see every street you have, which one is profitable, which one is not profitable, which channel you’re not profitable on, what’s dragging down your profitability. It’s really the holy grail of what we do.

Steve: Okay, cool and if there is a platform that you don’t support, you guys will code that up or?

Chad: We have an API ,we support the major market places, but we have an API, so we can communicate with any platform that has another API, but back to your question, so it’s A Foundation, B I think thinking about what your core competences are, and having a– everyone has a to do list, but I encourage everyone to have a don’t do list, like things you don’t want to be doing, and to make sure you find somebody to do that what’s their core-competency.

Steve: Right, it makes a lot of sense. Chad, we’ve been talking for quite a while. Where can people find you, and get in contact with you, or if they are interested in Skubana?

Chad: So scubana.com, you can email me if you have questions at chadscubana.com. I’ve really become more of an educator and helping sellers. E-commerce Renegade is my new property that I just launched, so I’m really trying…

Steve: Is that a blog?

Chad: It’s a– I’m doing videos; I have a book coming out. I’m really trying to cut through a lot of the noise in the Amazon group, and not just Amazon, just ecommerce space in general. People are taking suggestions from people who haven’t been there and done that, and they’re leading them down the wrong path, so I’m coming in to change it up and to remove the noise. So yeah, so I’m launching that so you can find me on E-commerce Renegade, you can sign up for a newsletter where I drop a lot of golden nuggets and things that I think are going to change the way you do business.

Steve: Sounds good Chad, thanks a lot for coming on the show man, it was good.

Chad: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

Chad: All right.

Steve. Hope you enjoyed that episode, Chad really knows his stuff and his entrepreneurial path is kind of what I want to be going forward. Run a successful ecommerce store, understand the problems that ecommerce store owners face, and then write software to solve their problems.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode117, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by the far the best way to support the show, and please tell you friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

116: How To Rank Any Website In Search With Brian Dean Of Backlinko

How To Rank Any Website In Search With Brian Dean Of Backlinko

Today, I’m thrilled to have Brian Dean on the show. Brian runs the incredibly awesome site Backlinko.com where he teaches others how to get their sites ranked in search.

And unlike other SEO gurus out there who make ridiculous claims, Brian totally walks the talk. He’s got an amazing array of articles (and by array I mean 30 or so) that go into incredible depth and he ranks for super competitive keyword terms on the front page of search.

For example, just now, I typed in “how to generate backlinks” and guess who popped up? Now I actually have never met Brian in person. And usually I don’t interview people I don’t know personally but Brian is so awesome that I knew I had to have him on.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Brian decided to start a blog about SEO
  • Brian’s main strategy when ranking a site in search.
  • Where Brian promotes his content.
  • Brian’s view on removing bad links and using the disavow tool.
  • What’s working in terms of search engine optimization today

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Brian Dean on the show. Now Brian runs the incredibly awesome site backlincko.com, where he teaches others how to get their sites ranked in search. Unlike other SEO gurus out there who kind of make ridiculous claims, Brain actually walks the talk. He’s got an amazing array of articles and by array I mean like 30 or so that go into incredible depth, and by incredible I mean these posts are ridiculous. He ranks for super competitive keyword terms on the front page of search.

For example, just now I typed in how to generate back links and guess who popped up in the top 3? Now I’ve actually never met Brian, but we were introduced by our mutual friend Divesh. Usually I don’t interview people I don’t actually know personally, but Brian is so awesome that I knew I had to have him on. With that, welcome to the show Brian, how are you doing today man?

Brian: I’m well. Thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: It’s funny, I actually meant to interview you last week, but we ended up just chatting for like an entire hour, and we had to reschedule this whole thing.

Brian: Yeah I know, but it was good because we got to know each other and then now we can just jump right in.

Steve: Now I can actually ask you the more difficult questions that I probably wouldn’t have asked you before.

Brian: Right.

Steve: A bunch of people in the audience probably know who you are already. If you wouldn’t mind just giving a brief intro about how you got started online, and the history behind Backlinko, that would be awesome.

Brian: I got to started online in 2008. I had just quit graduate school because I didn’t really like it, and I wanted to get a job. Unfortunately I quit in 2008 and this was right when the financial crisis was happening. Unfortunately because of that, I couldn’t find a job. I was leaving in my parent’s basement. I had no job, no money, no nothing. I think because I had so much free time, I came up with my first business idea. So I was like, wow I actually have an idea for a business.

Basically what it was, was sort of a search engine, but instead of typing in a keyword and getting 10 blue links, you type in a keyword and you’d get the answer to your question. For example, if you typed in something like how many calories are in an apple, it would just say 293 or whatever. I studied nutrition in school, and that’s what I wanted to make the search engine, a nutrition search engine where you just get your answers. This is basically what Google has now with knowledge graph. And to show you how naïve I was like Google just came out with this like 2 years ago, the biggest most valuable company in the world, just 2008 and I thought I could come out with it, do the same thing. Obviously it wasn’t going to happen.

So anyway, at this point I was still pretty naïve and thought I could do it. I went to a bookstore and I just grabbed my first business book off the shelf that I saw, because I knew nothing about starting a business, called the 4 Hour Work Week which is obviously very famous now. It was like a mind-blowing experience to read that book. It was crazy. It totally changed the direction of my life. Basically in between 2008 and 2013 from when I started Backlinko, I did a combination of things like freelance writing, affiliate marketing, a lot of black hat SEO, and I sort of learned the hard way from a lot of failures, how not to do SEO.

In 2012, that summer, I put the pieces together and finally created a site that ranked well and was way high, and it was a real branded site and made legitimate money. At that point I was really into white SEO. I had sort of dabbled in, in the past, but I never really had success. I always end up going to broadcast stuff. And it was my first time white hat SEO was working. I was like, this is cool. Let me learn more about it.

When I went to read more about white hat SEO, I couldn’t really find anything. Everything was all, things like create great content and you get links, and just basically create great content and phrase a million different ways. I wanted some good, actionable stuff and I couldn’t find it. I decided to create Backlinko basically to create the blog that I wanted to read. That’s why I started it.

Steve: It’s interesting though. Did you have luck with the black hat stuff in the past?

Brian: I had mixed results. I had some luck, but it never lasted long. I was really late on all the trends. Like whatever trend was happening, by the time I heard about it, I got in and it lost like a month. Whatever kind of loophole worked for a while, people were gaming it, the word finally spread, I heard about it and got in at the wrong time. Kind of like the stock market. By the time you hear of stock that you should invest in the stock, it’s probably too late. It’s the same thing with me and black hat SEO.

Steve: So just curious, those other sites that you used black hat on, are they still around or did they get killed by like the different algorithm changes?

Brian: They got killed. I had– I built over 200 sites during that time.

Steve: Holy crap, wow!

Brian: And they are all gone I think. I don’t even know, maybe not. But I haven’t checked.

Steve: That’s like one a week.

Brian: It was pretty prolific. At one point, I had like 150 active sites going. That was in 2010 and Google Panda wiped that one out. That was like one day all gone.

Steve: Oh my goodness. That’s crazy. Why SEO of all the possible topics that you could have written about because you are going up against like Mars [ph], Search Engine Land and some of the big guys and yet you outrank them today.

Brian: Well I think it did– I didn’t go into Backlinko thinking like I’m going to beat these guys because like you said, I’m one guy, running this blog on my home office. Mars for example has 200 employees. It’s like, wow, how could I ever compete with these guys. I didn’t really go in as I’m going to go head to head with Mars and all these guys. Instead I decided to focus on one little thing that I could write about better than they could, which at the time when I first started Backlinko I wrote all about link building. That was the one topic that I really focused on. Everything was about link building; the site was about link building.

That way I was remembered for one thing, and that was my differentiator. That’s really what made me different than other blogs because like I said, they did a good job with some things but when it came to link building, they were really lucking. I come in and fill that need. I didn’t think today that for a lot of these terms, a lot of these topics, I’ll also be competing with them outside of link building, but when I first started, I decided to focus on that one thing.

Steve: Let me ask you this, so you got Backlinko and it actually ranks for a lot of keywords related to search. Do you feel like now that if you wanted to expand into different topics now that it will be difficult on that particular blog?

Brian: That’s a really good question Steve. I think that it’s not that I’ve dabbled in it, so for example I actually see [inaudible 00:08:00] someone is on my door.

Steve: Okay, you want to go grab it?

Brian: Yeah.

Steve: If you are listening to this at six minutes 50 seconds, edit this whole section out because someone is at the door.

Brian: Steve, sorry about that. I do everything, put the phone on silent all that stuff, but that’s the one thing I don’t know how to shut off. All right, so I think– oh my god, hold on a sec. I don’t know what the person wants. What is that honey? No I looked them in already.

Brian: Steve? Sorry dude, I don’t what’s going on, someone keeps ringing my door bell, I’m getting like ding dong ditch over here.

Steve: You are a popular guy man.

Brian: I guess so, I think actually it happened kind of during the questions, so I think you just ask the question, right?

Steve: Yeah, so we were just talking about whether you could expand beyond back linking and SEO with your current blog, or we just start from there.

Brian: Okay so I’m going to just…

Steve: Yeah just start talking.

Brian: Okay, well Steve I actually have dabbled in this and tested it. And recently or no it wasn’t recent, it’s about a year ago, I started writing about conversion optimization. It was something that I was really interested in because SEO is great, but I also wanted to convert these people. And I realized I didn’t have a lot of knowledge about conversion optimization, especially when it came to conversions for blogs, so basically building your email list.

And I just started to test a bunch of different strategies and write about what I was experimenting with on the blog. And in terms of reception because there is a lot of overlap with people who are interested in SEO are usually also interested in building their email list, it was very well received and I do rank for some competitive key words in that space like list building.

Google doesn’t really care if you branch out into other topics. Of course for your core competency on your site I think from what I have seen you definitely rank better for the keywords that are more closely related. But if you created a single page that’s outside of your niche a little bit, and it’s really well received and has those signals that Google wants to see, they don’t really care what the rest of your site is about. That page is going to provide a good user experience for their users, so they are going to show it to a lot of people.

Steve: And do you plan expanding the number of posts on your blog to significantly higher than what you have right now?

Brian: Not really, so I mean I’m obviously going to expand it as I publish more stuff. But I don’t have a plan to switch to some like a weekly schedule or anything like that, because this really viewer post, but in depth has worked a lot better for me, so I’m just going to stick with that.

Steve: Yeah I mean just for all of you guys listening out there, Brian’s post, he doesn’t have a whole lot of them, but each one is like equivalent to like 10 blog posts in terms of depth. So that’s how he’s been able to just kill it in the white hat SEO world. So I want to get this question out of the way first, because a lot of — I have been approached by SEO agencies, a lot of my students get approached by these guys. What is your opinion on having someone else do SEO? Just curious what your opinion is?

Brian: My opinion is don’t do it, because it’s a mine field, it’s literally like a mine field. Like you can get to the other end okay, but the chances are very slim.

Steve: Yeah and I have a couple of stories to share too, like I have had buddies who’ve used outside SEO agencies and they worked in a short term, but then once Google changed the rankings their site basically tanked. And you never really know exactly what they are doing.

Brian: Exactly and if you don’t understand SEO, even if they show you everything they are doing you don’t know whether it’s good, bad or in between. So I think even if you are going to hire someone I recommend trying to do a series out that way. If you do hire someone down the road you can say, okay they are doing a good job, they are doing a bad job and you can separate the leaf from the chaff.

But if you’ve never done SEO and you are just like I don’t want to learn it, I don’t have time I’m too busy, I’m just going hire someone, it’s a recipe for disaster, because unfortunately most — not most, 90% plus of SEO agencies are just bad in the sense they’ll actually do more harm than good. There is about 7% or 8% that will give you a short term boost, but they won’t do enough to make it worth your time, energy, and money that you are giving them.

Because the agency models basically they don’t want to give you too good results in the first month, because then you are going to expect that for the next few months. If they double your traffic on month one, you are going to be like, wow this is amazing these guys are great. And they can’t follow that up with all the other months. So what they do is they purposely will kind of drip value so that you are increasing your traffic 10% month every month instead of getting a huge boost. That’s like 7% or 8% will do that which is good, it’s better than getting hurt, but it’s not really what you are looking for. And about 3% in my experience will care and they’ll actually do a really good work for you, so and yeah.

Steve: You used to work for one, right?

Brian: I used to run an agency.

Steve: Run it okay, yeah okay. So I’m just curious like can an agency really take the time and depth necessarily to produce awesome content that will actually get your site ranked? Like I can’t imagine an SEO agency writing the post that you’ve been writing.

Brian: It’s a good question, I have seen it done, but like I said it’s the 3% of the whole group that can do that, because what it takes is basically is a couple of things. One you need an expert onboard, so for example you run ecommerce site that sells some sort of high end coffee. You might be really knowledgeable about coffee, so the agency will actually have to work with you to extract your knowledge about coffee to create a piece of content about coffee that’s going be really unique, and it’s going to bring a lot of value.

If they just try to do it in house and use second hand sources and information it’s possible they can create something great, but it’s very unlikely. So you either need to have the knowledge or have them work with someone where they can hire an expert to consult with them on every piece of content. Because like you said one of the reasons people tend to enjoy the blog posts at Backlinko is because they are written someone who does a lot of SEO. I do SEO all the time. So I can write about that.

If I all of a sudden try to write about health and fitness, I know little bit about it, I eat healthy and exercise, but no means an expert, and I would have a hard time writing something that would stand out. It would just be like another blog post that will get lost in the sea. And if I hire an agency that wasn’t going to work with the expert, they are not experts, that’s type of content they’ll produce. So you definitely want an agency that’s going to be like, look we are going to work together and create something awesome, or we are going to hire an expert to create something awesome.

Steve: Yeah, and that doesn’t sound inexpensive either, right?

Brian: No, it’s definitely not cheap, so that’s the thing for everybody. I mean the agency is expensive for them. It’s not only do they need to get this expert on board which isn’t achieved. They need to hire someone to extract the knowledge from you if you are the expert or get an expert, then they need to write something amazing, edit it, sometimes have a costume designed, promote it, it’s really expensive for them to even do with their stuff. Plus they need to make money, right? So their margins need to make sense.

So I think for a good SEO agency to even talk, to even get a meeting with them, it’s only at least $3000 a month. And that’s just like the base, I mean that’s if you want to think out like one great piece of content a month, and they promote — create and promote it for you.

Steve: Okay, yeah that actually probably puts it out of the reach of a lot of small business owners I would imagine.

Brian: It definitely and that’s why I recommend doing it yourself because the problem is that three grand also is going to the 97% most of the time. That’s just you find the 3% that’s great, you can do well with the three grand assuming you have it to spend, but if you don’t definitely do it yourself. And even if you do I recommend doing SEO yourself.

So here is something I have sort of changed my mind over the years, I used to be like yeah agencies are good, they definitely come with their risk, but they know what they are doing. They know SEO and most small business owners just don’t have time to learn SEO. I have since changed that stance, I have just seen so many hurt stories of people who just hire agencies and have a bad experience. I mean it’s literally three out of 100 that say this worked out well. So that’s why I recommend doing it yourself even if you don’t have time.

Steve: So can we talk about what is and what is not working in terms of search engine optimization today. It sounds like you’ve done black hat and white hat, so it would be interesting to hear what you had to say?

Brian: Well you know what it’s funny Steve, I would say in April 2012 is when Google rolled out their penguin update. And that update basically targeted sites that had– that used manipulative link building. Basically people that used exact match anchor texts. So if you had a ecommerce product category page that sold coffee mugs, you would want to get all the anchor texts in every link saying coffee mugs, and that was really good for SEO.

And actually I just ran the biggest search engine ranking study ever of a million Google search results. And we found that the anchor texts still helps with SEO. So having that exact match anchor text still can boost your rankings. The problem is if you do it in a manipulative way, or you do it on purpose you can get penalized by the Google penguin update. I would say from that day forward SEO changed very little.

After that it’s pretty much all about creating the best resource that you can create, and getting links to that resource. For an ecommerce site it’s a little bit different, because very few people are going to link to product and category pages. I do have strategies for doing that, but for the most part with e-commerce sites what I recommend is they create an awesome piece of content and promote it, get links to it and then use that authority to funnel to their products and category pages and get those to rank.

That strategy works really, really well and it’s underutilized by ecommerce sites because most of them if you look at them they are just 100% product and category pages. And just no reason anyone would run a link to something like that unless you use some stuff we can talk about the moving method which is what I use for product and category page link building.

But even then you can only get a couple, this is not happening on a mass scale. So that’s why I recommend that piece of content and that’s basically what it comes down to in terms of what’s working is getting a lot of links to your site from really high quality sources just like it was back in the day. The only thing that changed in that 2012 was the links have to legit, they can’t be built in the sense like you can’t build profile links or blog comments or article direct to your links, all that stuff doesn’t work anymore. So it’s really hard to build links now, it’s tricky even if you have a great piece of content but if you don’t its next to impossible.

Steve: So let’s say you get a back link, do you even try to get your anchor text in there since you said it still works?

Brian: No, it’s not worth the risk. If I get it, the difference is when I get one I say great. Like I know that’s going to help me. But if I don’t get it, I just say I think it’s not — it’s better to look natural than to have anchor texts that’s really over optimized.

Steve: Okay, and so I would imagine then that you don’t really pay attention that much anymore about the links that you get, like how they kind of structure the link, right?

Brian: No, because they are more or less naturally, either someone links to me just spontaneously or I reach out to someone on email and say, you have this page that lists resources, I have good one, do you want to add it? That’s really over simplified, but that’s basically how outreach goes, and they add my link. And I don’t ask them to anchor texts or put it anywhere, I just recommend the resource and they put it in on the page however they feel like. And over time you’ll get some anchor texts in there that’s exact match, and overall look natural because it is.

Steve: Okay and so let’s talk a little bit about just in the context of ecommerce once again. So it sounds like your strategy is to write articles that kind of rank and build up your domain strength, and then that kind of just pushes the tide for all of your product and category pages naturally on your ecommerce store?

Brian: Exactly Steve, there is a little bit more strategy involved, but that’s the basic gist. But it’s not really articles because for ecommerce site it’s really difficult to get those links directly to products and category pages. So you have to create these ridiculously awesome guides, that’s what’s going to generate enough links that — the domain authority increase where you can rank on domain authority alone.

That’s basically how Amazon ranks, if you look at Amazon and you go — almost any keyword in Amazon and you grab one of their product pages that are ranking and you put it into a tool to look at how many links are pointed to the page, it’s almost always zero, almost always zero. But they are always ranking right for everything, annoyingly enough they are always there and it’s because of domain authority. But instead of just posting the resource, another extra step I recommend is to internally link from that resource to your product and category pages.

And here is where you can use exact match anchor texts it’s okay because of the internal. So if you have this category page for coffee mugs, that’s where you can have a resource, it’s like 50 things you never know about coffee. Inside that resource you can link back to your — whatever you mentioned like coffee mugs, just put a nice link back to your category page. That will send users directly to that category page, and it will boost the rankings for that category page and the product pages. Assuming you have all the other factors Google looks at, but that’s the most important one.

Steve: I actually take that a step further and I actually put a physical add to cart buttons on my content pages.

Brian: Wow, that’s cool so you close from the content?

Steve: I try to close, hey so I’m curious actually. So a lot of these fully hosted shopping carts, I don’t know if you are familiar with them like Shopify or BigCommerce. They basically if you run your own separate blog they force you to put on a different sub domain. So it sounds like this whole domain strength doesn’t work as well in that context right, you want everything in the same domain, right?

Brian: That’s true so yeah, sub domain is not ideal for that reason, because I mean Google is much smarter than it used to be. So I think they understand that the sub domain is part of the site and they treat it not like a sub folder. But it’s not which is a forward slash, so like if you had mywifequitherjob.com/blog is better than blog.myquitherjob.com. So I think now they are getting so sophisticated that sub domains are treated similar to sub folders.

But they are not really there yet because they are in a lot of ways usually some separate entity, that’s why they exist. Besides www, and that’s why people make them is because they are so different than the rest of the site, they need their own sub domain, that’s why people use them. So actually it does signify to Google and people that this is something that’s really different. So from an SEO standpoint Goggle views them the same way.

So it’s definitely not a deal, it’s something that’s a bit frustrating with Shopify because to create really nice looking content that’s awesome you need WordPress, there is no way around it. So at some level you need to install WordPress. If you have to do it on a blog self domain, it’s better than not doing it at all. If you can somehow hack Shopify or Magento or whatever you use into making the content look great, then go right ahead, I have seen it done, but it’s tricky. So that’s why WordPress is great because it’s out of the box, you can do a ton cool stuff to it, easy to optimize all that stuff that you can’t really do with a lot of the big ecommerce solutions.

Steve: Okay and so let’s talk about just ranking an ecommerce site or ranking an article. Like you’ve gone over several strategies on your blog that I have read through, but for the people who are listening what is like your – it’s still all about back links for most part, right?

Brian: Yeah, I mean well really it’s all about keyword research to start. So we’ve put the cart ahead of the horse a little bit because…

Steve: Okay, yeah let’s start from the basics yeah.

Brian: Okay yeah I mean link building is everything because the problem is even if you do all your keyword research right; you optimize your pages perfectly, if you don’t have links you are not going to rank. On the other hand if your keyword research is just okay, the optimization is so, so and you get a ton of great links, you can still rank. It’s like this old SEO saying, most SEO problems can be solved by getting more links. So that’s like technical SEO problems, on page SEO problems.

I think people shouldn’t rely on links to solve their problems, but the point is that it’s so powerful that it can help you overcome any deficiencies you have in other areas. So basically SEO comes down to three things. There is keyword research, there is on page SEO, and there is link building. And there is a fourth thing that’s becoming more important which is user experience signals, which we can talk about later which directly impacts ecommerce sites.

So keyword research is basically find the keywords as you all probably know that people search for. It’s an art and a science, it’s pretty — it’s almost as tricky as link building. And with ecommerce sites it’s especially important, because you need to know not only what products are people searching for and what volumes, but also things like the commercial intent, the domain authority, the competition, all that stuff, it’s important.

Steve: Well, let’s talk about that a little bit because you kind of tackled back linking for your blog which is a super competitive keyword, right? So what were your thoughts about going for that particular set of keywords I suppose to something that might be easy to rank for?

Brian: Well, at first I went for the easier keywords, so I think when you are starting out and you don’t have a lot of domain authority and other signals like Google may look at like your brand, how big your brand is online. That’s when you definitely want to go with this the longer tail keywords or less competitive key words, because it’s better to be number three for a long tail keyword than number 12 for a really competitive keyword. Because number 12 is basically number 80, it’s the same.

So when I first started I went over these kinds of longer tail keywords, and as the site built up authority I was able to tackle these more competitive keywords. And that’s basically the strategy that I also recommend that ecommerce sites and blogs do. So if you have a product that could be called a few different things or category that could be called a few different things, I do recommend going with the less competitive version if you are just starting out. If you have some domain authority already ranking for stuff, that’s when you can switch in to something more competitive stuff and see how it goes. You can always switch back later.

Steve: What tools do you use to determine keyword competitiveness?

Brian: I just use the moss bar [ph], so using the mass bar you can see the page authority and domain authority of the competition on the first page. And that pretty much tells you all I need to do; especially when it comes to ecommerce you can pretty much throw out page authority, because most of the pages will have hardly any, it’s a domain authority game.

Now that being said if you are somehow able to get a lot of page authority, it’s a competitive advantage for you. You can get that by getting links directly to the page or using that funnel link technique that I talked about earlier. That way you are the only guy in the first page with a lot of page authority, and that’s an advantage for you. But for most part I look at the domain authority as like how hard is this keyword going to be.

Steve: Let’s say you have no domain authority whatsoever, you are just starting out, what are some good guidelines for keywords that you should go for like in terms of number of searches and what you see on the mass bar?

Brian: That’s a good question; it’s hard to get specific numbers because every niche is really different. So for something like a B to B company, or let’s say even like something life insurance. Life insurance keyword that’s really profitable could get 100 searches a month, because every lead is worth a lot of money and every customer is worth a lot of money. On the other hand something like pillows probably gets a ton searches, but your margins on a pillow probably aren’t going to be that great.

So it’s hard to be like it needs to have like this many searches and the competition needs to be domain authority of this, it’s just impossible to say. Basically when you are first starting out…

Steve: Well, let’s just take a pillow example though — for example yeah.

Brian: Okay, in general the lower the better when you are first starting. If you could find the keyword in the pillow space that’s getting like any searches and has any commercial and it’s done in the sense that there’s AdWords advertisers bidding on that keyword which is a sign people buy when they search for it, then I go for that key word. If you find that it’s even a little bit competitive, I’ll try and stay away.

Steve: Do you have like a low threshold for the number of searches that even makes it worth your while at all?

Brian: No, especially for — and today because now Google is basically able to understand the intent behind their keywords. If you target a key word that say only gets 20 searches a month, you may say, well that’s not really worth it, but not only will you rank for those 20 searches, but you might also rank for several other keywords that are related because Google is smart now.

For example if you have like black throw pillow, that used to be considered a separate keyword than like throw pillows that are black. Now Google pretty much consider those the same keywords. If black throw pillows only get 20, you can also rank for this other keyword like throw pillows that are black that might be 10, another one that might be 30, another one will be a 50, and then all of a sudden can add up.

It also depends on the commercial intent of that keyword and how well if fits with your ecommerce site. If you sell pillows and you guys are like amazing at creating pillows and selling pillows, 100 visitors a month directly to a product page, someone who’s basically got their credit card in their hands, I wouldn’t shy away from a keyword like that. It may not seem like a lot, but it can convert really well for you.

Steve: What about in terms of using synonyms for your products in like the title tags or your H1 tags?

Brian: You can definitely do that stuff for on page. For the title tag I do recommend just going with the exact keyword as your targeting. Google will kind of take the synonyms from there; you don’t really need to do it. In terms of the on page stuff, yeah, that’s definitely a great place to use synonyms, and in the content especially in the H1 as a way to reinforce what the topic of the page is about in a way that’s not being spammy in trying like keyword stuff.

Steve: And what’s your view on just like category pages. Typically category pages on ecommerce store is just listings of products. Do you recommend some content in there also or it doesn’t matter?

Brian: I do, I definitely do because it doesn’t matter if you are Amazon, if you are the Amazons of the world or the Best Buys or the Zapples. But if you are just trying to have on your ecommerce site that can be a competitive advantage for you because most of these big commerce sites have too many category pages to even think about writing content for it. It can be an advantage for you to actually put some content on every category page. The flip side of that is that the point of getting — embedding the content is to get higher rankings which is to get more traffic, which is to get more customers.

And a lot of times putting content above before this is the last thing you want to do, because that’s actually going to hurt your conversions. You have to also kind of balance the two things. That’s why I do recommend putting content below the fold about that category. If you have the pillows, black pillows, on the bottom you have a little blurb about black pillows or something you put in a couch [inaudible 00:33:14]. That will help Google understand the topic of that page a little bit better.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, do you recommend like hiding half of the content with like JavaScript?

Brian: No.

Steve: No, okay. It sounds like if I can just summarize you, you want to just start out with easier to rank keywords even if they have lesser amounts of searches. And just kind of gradually build your way up to some of the more competitive stuff once your site starts getting more domain strength.

Brian: Exactly, and you start ranking for stuff. The domain strength, domain authority is a way to measure domain strength using Moss’s tools. It’s a great number; it’s usually pretty reflective of how well you rank. But it’s not an official Google number. You can have a domain authority of 100 out of 100 and not rank for anything. The most important thing is, is that number going up, but more importantly are you ranking for stuff. Are you getting organic searches that are around the keywords that you are targeting, are your pages high priority pages, are you are building lists, are you getting more traffic?

That’s shows that Google is starting to recognize your size, starting to show you to the users. Then after that happens for a while and you start having good success with those keywords, then you can start moving onto the more competitive stuff. But I wouldn’t just be like looking at this semi arbitrary number versus the number that matters, which is like how many people from Google are coming to your site.

Steve: Okay, I’m going to link to that article that you recently wrote about what’s working and what’s not. But it seems like from that article for the listeners who haven’t read it yet; long form content is what’s working the best these days, right?

Brian: Definitely.

Steve: What are your recommendations? So any post on ecommerce site should just go into great depth on whatever the topic is about?

Brian: Yeah, I do recommend that.

Steve: Okay, so for an ecommerce product though, it almost seems like some of the choices might be limited. Is it okay to start writing kind of tangentially about what you are selling?

Brian: That’s a really good question. It’s tough one, yeah you are right. Product pages are tricky, because the point of the content is to make the sale, not really educate as an SEO. Fortunately there are ways that you can do both with the product page. Now, one is to give more information about the product right off the bat. I feel like a lot of sites do this well and some don’t. If you go and you want to buy a pair of shoes, all the information you really want above the fold is like the size, and how it looks right and the price. You don’t really care much about it.

But for other products like a laptop, you want actually more content above the fold describing what its features are, why it’s different, not just a list of how it compares to other laptops, but really like what’s the deal with this laptop. Like why is this laptop around. Like is this Samsung the gaming laptop is for hardcore video gamers, because it has a really great graphics card and fast processor and all the stuff. That’s really good content for the user but also for Google. Then as you get below the fold which is usually what people are trying to learn more about the product, they are not going to buy right then if they scroll past that.

That’s where you can educate them and that’s where you can provide user reviews as a great way to add content to a page. You can add more information, you can add reviews from around the web as long it’s not duplicate content. You can write maybe some quotes that other people have said along with your own commentary. There’s a lot of opportunities with product pages, but the key is to know where to put it to not hurt conversations. Generally that’s just like with categories pages, that’s below the fold.

Steve: So it sounds like you are advertising like you are advocating the Amazon model, right? To have bullet points like right at the top and then in the add the cart button. At the way bottom there’s the description where you can get more in depth information about what you are buying.

Brian: Exactly, and I think Amazon does it pretty well. The only issue is like I mentioned is that for some products like a laptop, I would appreciate actually more information above the fold and they don’t always do a good job with that, or books. They are also don’t do a good job with that, just usually a blurb and then you have to scroll down to learn more.

A lot of times, maybe not for a laptop, but for some products where there’s some impulse buying, you can actually convert them right then and there. But you need to give them enough information to do that. And it’s also good for SEO.

Steve: It sounds like though that the long form content that’s basically how you’ve been able to get Backlinko to rank is really more fit for like a blog, right?

Brian: Definitely, but for product pages you can apply some of those principles and turn your 200 word product page into a 800 word product page for example.

Steve: Okay, but in the grand scheme of things, the product pages and the category pages are going to be harder to rank. And your overall strategy should be to put out really comprehensive post on a blog and link them over to your product and category pages.

Brian: Exactly.

Steve: Okay. All right, let’s talk about back linking which is your specialty. How does one –like what’s your best strategy today for getting natural back links. Let’s say if you run an ecommerce site.

Brian: It’s actually the same for an ecommerce site or a blog or a service based business. The first step is to create something on your site that’s worth linking to. That’s number one. So a lot of people– this is a mistake, I made one when I first started. I would try to get links and I didn’t have anything that was worth linking to, and of course I didn’t have a lot of success. So I emailed people, and say, “Hey will you link to me please, because I have this great article,” that wasn’t really that great compared to what was out there.

I think the first step is to create something on your site that’s worth linking to. I have a lot of students in my course that run ecommerce sites or work for ecommerce sites, and that’s how they’ve had success lately is creating great resource that’s like best in the world on that topic. Emailing people, and the right people and asking them to link which we can talk about more details in that. And then getting links to that page and funneling that authority to those product and category pages. That’s basically the step by step that works really well enough for ecommerce.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about the outreach part, because I get emails like that almost every day and I don’t link out to anybody no matter how good the resource is usually, unless I know the person.

Brian: Yeah, that’s– luckily not everyone is like that or else…

Steve: Like I would link to your stuff because I know you, but if it’s just someone random approaching me, like I wouldn’t even consider it.

Brian: Yeah, there’s definitely two ways to overcome that problem. One is to actually build the relationship with the person or the people in your industry that aren’t direct competitors, which they are — in every industry there’s plenty of people that aren’t competing, that are for example bloggers that write about your topic. So if you have a site about coffee or ecommerce that sells coffee stuff, there’s tons of blogs about health, and there is coffee [inaudible 00:40:01] blogs and all that stuff that you can get foodie blogs, that you can get in touch with and build relationships with.

Then when you do down the road ask for a link, or a lot of times you don’t even have to if they like you enough, you can get the link pretty easily. The other is just to go the numbers game approach which is fortunately there are enough people that aren’t as picky about handing out links, assuming the resource is amazing. There are enough people locally like that. That’s how I build most of the links to Backlinko when I first started. I didn’t build relationships with everybody, it wasn’t impossible. I built relationships with the people that I thought were cool and doing cool stuff, and I got some links that way. But I also got links just from emailing a ton of people and saying, “Hey you have this page that links out to great resources, I have a great resource here.”

The key is really to make it a natural fit and find a way where your link adds value. For example, if I go to mywifequitherjob.com, and I look at one of your blog posts, and I’m like this is a great blog post that has a lot of comments, it has a lot of links, it should be perfect for my link. And I ask you to add my link to your blog post; you are going to be really reluctant to do it. It doesn’t really make sense for you to go back to an old blog post and find a place for my link and add it, even if the resource is great. The key is really to find pages where they exist to link out.

For example, resource pages, there’s tons of these. These are pages where the point of the page is to curate content that’s really good, and they link out to other content. That’s the whole point of the page. When you email them basically say, “Hey you have this list of resources, I have a resource that’s really good, you might want to consider it.” It makes a lot more sense and they are much more likely to do that, because that page exists for that exact reason. You are actually helping them by sending them your content because your link adds value to that page and makes it a better resource, because it curates another piece of great content.

Steve: I see, so on Google do you actually search for like resource pages?

Brian: Yes exactly. So there’s search terms you can use like, your topic in quotes plus resources plus useful resources plus helpful resources. They bring up these exact pages. They are in SEO main step because these pages have been around for like since the web started. People have been curating content, because right away when the web got big like there’s just so much content. People are like, well we have to find out — find the best of it and put it one place.

Even more now today, there’s so much more content even though search engines can solve some of the problems, people do want hand curated content. Content curation is really big for that reason is because there is so much, they want experts to be like, okay, here’s the best stuff about this, here’s the best stuff about this, here’s the best stuff about this. These pages are all over the place in every industry. If you reach out to them with an amazing resource and you ask them in a non pushy away, a lot of times you get your links.

Steve: Can you give me an example of a non pushy way of asking for a link?

Brian: No problem, so say you found — you have a great guide on your blog. You just published about 50 things in about coffee. And you find a coffee related resource page, actual real one that recently went down on my course that some post in the Facebook group was about tea. So they had a tea resource and there was some tea resource page. And they reached out to the lady who ran it and they were just like, “Hey I know you run this resource page about the best tea resources online, I just published this thing about tea, do you want to check it out?”

So by not even asking for the link right away, you are respecting them. You are not pushing anything, you are not throwing your content in the face, you are just saying, do you want to see it. That way, I like to do that because if they say yes, you can send it and if they ignore you, you can move on. And you never even ask them to do anything. If they say yes, then you send them the resource, they look at it and a lot of times naturally, they’ll put two and two together, like, wow okay he sent me this resource after looking at my resource page, maybe I should add it. That way, it’s kind of like inception. Like they thought they thought of it. You know what I mean? I don’t know if you saw the movie.

Steve: Interesting, watched the — I did today, awesome.

Brian: It’s kind of like inception, like they thought it was their idea. On the other hand, you can be a little bit more direct and say something like, “If you would add it to your page, it would make my day. I’d be thrilled if you added it to your page,” something like that if you feel like the message won’t get across that way. I’ve found both approaches work. You will be surprised how many people think of it themselves, but when in doubt you can always ask.

As long as you ask like that, you didn’t really push anything, you basically left it up to them, respected their decision yes or no. And you didn’t go, hey, you never had him before, add this fizzy content, can I have a link. There’s a little bit more of a back and forth and then you are leaving it up to them up saying, “Hey if you wouldn’t mind, if you would add it to your page, I’d be thrilled.” So it feels like their decision and there’s nothing pushy going on.

Steve: Just curious, what are your percentages when doing it to a cold person like the way you’ve done versus just building the relationship first?

Brian: If you’re really good at it like you have enough resource that’s really amazing which I think a lot of people underestimate how like crazy good it has to be for people to want to link to something. Because when I first started Backlinko, my first couple posts weren’t very good. Actually a lot of my earlier posts were really bad, but in my mind, they were great. When I showed them to people and try to build links, they would be like this is pretty good, but not really worthy of my page. In so many words they would say something like that.

That’s when I learned you really have to step it up for this sort of link building to work, which is the only link building basically that exists that works. You need to go and step it up. So I had to learn the hard way like really step up the content game. Even if you have like the best resource on that topic in the world period, like not just you saying it because you wrote it, but like really people think that. And you find exactly the right people, that’s a perfect fit. That resource page is exactly about your topic. You wrote about coffee, this is about coffee.

Then you find the person’s email, you find their correct email address and you email them the exact time they are going — they are likely to open it which is a whole another game. People that do a lot of link building, they focus on like when the email goes out to when they are awake more likely to open the emails [inaudible 00:46:27]. You don’t have to worry about that, it doesn’t make a big difference. We’re saying even if everything is done right, you are looking at about 11%, 10% conversion.

Steve: That’s actually not bad.

Brian: Yeah, and everything that goes that isn’t perfect after that chips down the percent. But if you just like blast, you don’t even worry about the page, if it’s decent fit, it’s about tea, and your thing is about coffee, and you think you have the right person, but you just send it to the contact form. You didn’t use their name, all that stuff; you can still get like 2-3%. But obviously the more you do in terms of the work beforehand to get to know the person and get to know everything, it’s going to be a lot higher. You can definitely get to 10%.

Steve: Okay, what about some other ways of getting your content out there. Do you use like social media, Reddit [inaudible 00:47:11], do you pay for ads?

Brian: I’ve experimented that stuff, but I haven’t had a ton of success with it. I think like anything in marketing, you kind of have to be good at it for it work, and I’m not good at it. I never really had a lot of success. The most– the best I did for content promotion is just building your email list. Because then every time you publish a post, you can email X amount of people however many you have in your list and they are going to open it. And that’s what even ecommerce sites a lot of times; they build the list that’s specific to their blog. Maybe these people will buy from them, maybe not.

The point is they are on the email list and you can send it to them. You can get really, really quickly potentially if your email is big, thousands of people to your content in an hour. And they’ll usually take it and spread the word, because they are committed and interested in you and your topic. So there’s no need to even promote your stuff, because even if you spend a lot of money on Facebook ads, just the numbers of people that are actually click on the post and go to your site compared to an email list is insane.

Steve: Sure.

Brian: You’d have to spend like a couple of grand per post just to get as many people clicking. Those people aren’t going to be as engaged as someone who’s on your email list. So for me the biggest thing I did for content promotion is like get my email list used to hearing from me especially about blog posts, and also writing the blog posts, writing the newsletter emails in a way that gets them enticed to click through and read the blog post. And then when they are there, it’s the content job to convert them, at times they’ll write comments and sharing and all that stuff.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about just user behavior in terms of factoring into the search rankings. Are there any particular things that you do with your blog post to kind of keep them on your site long? First of all what are the factors, and then what do you do to promote them?

Brian: So it’s basically two factors. Like I mentioned Steve, there’s the keyword research and then there’s on page SEO optimization. Which is basically just have your keywords a couple times in a page and like you had mentioned using synonyms intelligently in places like your H1.

Steve: I meant like the user behavior.

Brian: No I know, I’m just saying, then there’s link building. Even if you just do those two things you are going got be good. But there’s this fourth user experience signals that Google is using more often. It’s becoming more and more important because it’s a great way for Google to determine if a piece of content is quality.

All this stuff that they are looking at with links and keywords and on page; Google’s job is basically saying this person is searching for this thing, we want to show them the best result for this search. How can we do that? What’s the best page? If you can make their job easier, they are going to rank you. If you can be the answer to that question, they are going to show you. That’s the real secret to SEO. Now, well there’s other ways of using that to do this now.

For example user experience signals, the number one is the click through rate of your result in Google organic search. So if someone is searching for like searches for black throw pillows and you rank number one, and no one is clicking on result, they are all clicking on two, three, and four, usually everyone clicks on number one. Google will say this page must not be a good fit for this keyword; we are going to drop it.

On the other hand if you are ranking number seven and you are getting a lot of clicks more than the typical number seven result, Google will say, hey people are really — they want to find this number seven result, why is it number seven? We need to make it easier for people to find, and they’ll give you a boost.

Steve: Does that imply that you should write your titles in a clickability sort of way?

Brian: It does imply that, and in fact I’m not going to imply, I’m going to say you should do it. So it doesn’t have to be the buzz fees style like and what happens next will blow your mind sort of thing, especially for ecommerce so it doesn’t make sense. But even things like an ecommerce title tag like say 25% can really dramatically increase your organic click through rate.

And if you are in doubt and want to put in your title tag or description tag, you can just get the AdWords ads around that keyword. That usually tells you everything you need to know, because those guys know from back and sideways what gets clicked on. And you could just take the elements that make sense for your page and put them in your title and description tag and you’ll usually get more clicks.

That’s a big one yeah, that one is used – I’ve seen case studies where it can make the difference between ranking seven and one, and I have my own experiences and experiments where I’ve ranked for keywords that just didn’t make sense. So for example, I had a page about a year ago that was ranking, targeting the keyword high quality back – no, yeah high quality back links, and the tile was how to get high quality back links. And because the page got a bunch of links from the links I was building, it started to rank for all sorts of stuff, not just back link related key words. It also ranked in the top 10 for the keyword how to get high.

Steve: Yes, I think I saw — you wrote about this I remember, yeah.

Brian: Yeah, I wrote a newsletter, wrote the same as email ones. And of course people that clicked on that result were like what is this? I mean I cannot and they would click the back button, people were searching for how to get high. And even though I was building more links, all the signals that Google wants to see like especially more links to that page, it dropped like a stone for the keyword how to get high.

It went from six to 12 to like 33 and 35; I think it’s on the fourth page now. And from my target keyword high quality back links is number one. So Google basically just based on that one user experience signal which was how long people spend on the page and the click through rate, they dropped it. So we don’t really talk about spending time on the page, that’s the other thing, it’s when someone clicks in your result how long do they spend there.

If they spend a long time on that page even if they hit their back button which is technically known as a bounce, you are still in good shape because it says, hey that person was reading, they spent some time there, maybe they got what they wanted and they hit their back button. But if they click on the result and hit back right away, that’s a clear sign that this isn’t a good fit. Despite all the other 200 signals a year, that one signal is enough to really show them this isn’t a good fit and they’ll drop you.

And that’s what happened with the keyword how to get high is that I ranked for that for a while. People were clicking on it probably less often than usual, because it said something about back links instead of the other keywords that you would expect to be around that keyword. And then when people did click on it they left really quickly, and Google dropped me. So that’s another thing you definitely want to keep in mind for product and category pages, but also for content pages is to really maximize the clicks you get, and then the people that stay on your site.

If you can do that, it’s a huge competitive advantage to be on the first page, because you don’t need as many links to rank and you compete against some of the big guys. In fact that’s one of the reasons that for a lot of keywords I can outrank these bigger brands, because they ignore these signals. They have all the other stuff in their favor, they have domain authority that’s way higher than me, they have page authority that’s way higher than me. They have brands that are huge that Google recognizes as big brands, and I’m this one man shop. And one of the reasons I’m able to do that is because I really focus on getting clicks on my result and getting people to stay there. Which is basically a lot of it is no real tricks, a big part of it is providing value so people want to stay.

But there is also things you can do like copy writing to keep people on your page, so compelling writing, so they’ll continue scrolling down the page, so basically they don’t get bored. If you could do those things you can have a huge competitive advantage over the people that traditionally you wouldn’t have a chance against.

Steve: Does that imply then that you should put in some sort of like podcast or video content on there to keep them on the page longer?

Brian: I’ve seen mixed results from videos, because the problem with videos is that it’s a big commitment for someone to watch. And a lot of times when they are searching Goggle they are not searching for videos or they would be searching on YouTube. So when they land on a blog post and they see a video, I’ve actually seen it hurt time on site. Because what happens is people start watching the video, they weren’t in like a video mood, and they’ll just hit the back button when the video gets displayed. They won’t stop the video and keep reading. On the other hand I have seen other people use it and have great success with it, especially with videos above the fold.

So a lot of people have the videos straight away, so they see it and they are like, wow, okay so this is a video and they can just scroll down and read the rest of the content or watch the video right away. That’s something I haven’t done, usually I have tested it like kind of half way down, put a video there and I haven’t seen that work. So it’s definitely very specific to like a million different variables, but I’ve seen people have great success with adding video for that exact reason.

Steve: How much work do you put behind your meta descriptions?

Brian: I put quite a bit just to optimize that click through rate.

Steve: Okay, and so you make it kind of the description sound really enticing for someone to click?

Brian: Exactly, so the never way of doing that it’s like AdWords ads for that keyword. Those people have really tested it to depth. So I just say okay so for example I had this post about list building that I didn’t have a good ton of description tag, my click through rate is really bad. And I was on the first page, but you know your page doesn’t have good user experience signals when it hits the first page and drops back to the second. Like if you go from like 8 to 12 or 13, then back to 8 and back to 13.

Now a lot of times I could just be like Google turned their dials on the algorithm, but I’ve also found a lot of times it’s because it’s just not a good fit for that keyword and they are trying to — they are kind of testing it out see how it performs at number 8, number 9 whatever, and then putting it back. I noticed that was happening with this particular post about list building.

So when I looked at the actual result in Google it was a mess. Like the title tag was cut off, it had too many characters in it, so it got cut off. And the description tag I didn’t put a description tag, so Google just pulled a random text out of my content, and just looked terrible. So I decided to strategically add content to my title and description tag that would get clicks. And I noticed that even though my content was about list building, and I know and you know that’s about building an email list, I dint have the words email list anywhere, it didn’t have the word email in the title or description tag in almost every AdWords I did. So I made sure to include the word email list in the description tag. I also noticed to use the words like build and grow and I didn’t use that.

So I threw those words in there. And I also just put words that I know people just loved to click on which is anything that’s going to promise fast results. So if you can say it works quickly, today, step by step, all those things that make things sound really fast, you can put — you’ll get a better click through rate. So I put these are strategies you can use today, so people understand this, it doesn’t sound like esoteric. Have a great newsletter and people will hear about it and they’ll sign up for your list, so like a real strategies you can use.

And when I did that my click through rate went up by a lot, and now it’s in the top five for my target keyword. Of course I build links and all that stuff, it’s not the only reason, but it definitely helped.

Steve: There is always this fine line between putting keywords in your title tags versus making it really clickable, can you comment a little bit on that?

Brian: Yeah it’s tough, honestly it’s an art. Because basically it gives you this constraint that you have to put your keyword in there, but you also have to write a title that’s compelling. The best marketers that do SEO really well can do both. But it’s definitely tricky, because in some keywords it doesn’t even make sense to write something good. A lot of times that’s where you just want to throw the keyword out of the window and write a title that make sense.

Steve: Interesting yeah, because when you said like keywords like step by step or quickly, I mean those stick a valuable characters in your title tag, right?

Brian: Definitely and that’s why a lot of times you can do all this stuff in your description tag. So you can have your title tag just — if you have a title that already has your keyword in it, that’s like for example this link building post, I don’t think I — I think it’s exactly the same as it was. It was cut off so I just cut it down so it fit within the limits, but it didn’t add any of this AdWords stuff to it, it was just as the title was and description is where I added all that stuff. But luckily the title was already compelling, it was designed to get clicks already from people tweeting it out on social media and stuff like that, it was designed to get clicks. So it’s just a matter of cleaning it up so it fit within the character limit.

The description tag was sort of just like didn’t make any sense, so I could do whatever and that’s why you put it in there. It’s definitely a tricky thing especially the title tag if you don’t have a lot of real estate there; you want your key word there. You probably want something else just to describe what the topic is, what you are writing about. And then you also may not have room for all this other stuff, and that’s where a description tag can come in handy.

Steve: Okay, this is actually something that I do not do very well. I should probably go back and re-write a lot of my description tags for all of my posts and make them more clickable actually.

Brian: Yeah, I can help you with that, it’s really especially helpful if you are on the first page because that’s where Google can get a lot of data to see how many people are clicking on it, and if they are — yeah and how long they stay. But especially how long they are clicking on it, how often they are clicking on it. And if you are on the first page they’re saying they get tons of data. If you are on the third page they don’t really know how many people are clicking on your result. But for those first page keywords, the ones you are already kind of like 9, 8, 7, I’ve seen that make a massive difference.

Steve: Awesome Brian, hey we’ve been chatting for almost an hour now, I didn’t even realize, the time kind of flew. I want to be respectful of your time, where can they find you, do you have any product offerings that can help people with SEO, just tell me where they can reach you?

Brian: Okay cool, so the best place to get more helpful actionable tips about SEOs is to head over to my site backlinko.com, and sign up for the newsletter. That’s where you get updates about new blog posts, but also exclusive strategies and case studies.

Steve: Awesome, and just a quick warning if you end up going to backlinko.com, you’ll probably stay there for a couple of hours just based on the content that Brian puts out there. So and his general mind tricks work, because I’m actually going to link to his blog even though he didn’t explicitly ask me to, so his techniques work.

Brian: Inception technique, it was your idea Steve.

Steve: Well, I like how you had these terms like that you use that are memorable. Like skyscraper technique or moving man technique, so this is like a new one, inception technique yeah.

Brian: Yeah, it’s a new one.

Steve: Cool man, well thanks a lot for coming on the show, it was a pleasure.

Brian: Sure, thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, there are actually a lot of people out there who think SEO is dead, and it’s definitely not dead. You just can’t game the system anymore, and it’s to your advantage to follow Brian’s techniques, to get a source of free traffic in the long run. I know for our store SEO makes up about 30% of our sales.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode116, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via e-mail immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

115: How Ankur Created Teachable, An Easy To Use Platform To Create And Sell Online Courses

How Ankur Created Teachable, An Easy To Use Platform To Create And Sell Online Courses

Today, I’m really happy to have Ankur Nagpal on the show. I met Ankur after being introduced to him by my buddy Jeff Rose who recently started his own online course.

Anyway Ankur runs the company Teachable.com which is a platform that allows you to create your own digital courses online without any technical hassles whatsoever.

If you’re into ecommerce, you can think of them like a Shopify or a Big Commerce except for digital courses. Anyway, since I make a lot of money off of selling digital courses online, I thought that I’d bring in Ankur today to talk about the digital course landscape and why he created Teachable. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Teachable works and what it does.
  • How Ankur came up with the idea for this platform.
  • What Teachable offers that the other platforms do not.
  • How Ankur developed his unique value proposition.
  • How Ankur generates recurring revenue.
  • How he got his early customers
  • How he markets his business.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really happy to have Ankur Nagpal on the show. Now I met Ankur after being introduced to him by my buddy Jeff Ross who recently started his own online course. Anyway Ankur runs the company teachable which is a platform that allows you to create your own digital courses online without any technical hustles whatsoever.

If you are into ecommerce you can kind of think of them like a Shopify or a Bigcommerce. Anyway since I make a lot of money off of selling digital courses online, I thought it would be interesting to bring in Ankur today to talk about the digital course landscape, and why he created teachable. And with that welcome to the show Ankur, how are you doing today man?

Ankur: Thanks man, I’m really excited to be here.

Steve: Yes so give us the quick background story regarding teachable and how you decided to get started with this, because it is a pretty competitive market.

Ankur: Yes, so it’s funny. I started this literally as a project for myself. I was doing a little bit of teaching on Udemy. For people that aren’t familiar, Udemy is a market place for online courses. I started doing a little bit of teaching on Udemy about two years ago and I liked a lot what I saw with Udemy, like I liked how easy it was to create a course that looked good.

It kind of made me believe in the power of online education, and how this could be something we could all do five years from now. What I didn’t like is as a teacher I had no control at all, like I couldn’t control the branding, I couldn’t get paid on my own terms. Every time I worked hard to bring a student to my Udemy course they would cross over to another course. So there is a lot of stuff I didn’t like.

So I ended up creating, at the time it was not called teachable, it was Fedora. But I ended up creating this platform to sell my own online course with my buddy Conrad, to create some platform just for ourselves. So it’s something that we did for ourselves first, and a few weeks into it we were like, okay if you find it useful chances are other people will find it useful too.

So it kind of organically evolved into a company which is something that I think is really funny because a lot of people talk about, oh I want to start a startup, I want to build this. For us it was almost incidental, it was just like a side project that then kind of became something much bigger.

Steve: Did you code that up from scratch then?

Ankur: Sadly I did, I say sadly because I’m a terrible, terrible developer. But it was enough to kind of validate the idea as soon as later in the year we ended up kind of becoming a real company and hiring developers. The first thing they did was throw out every line of code I wrote.

Steve: So just curious what year was this?

Ankur: So this was in the fall of 2013, fall of 2013 is when we started this, we kind of we incorporated it in May 2014 and that’s sort of when we became a real company.

Steve: So here is the thing, so I started my class in 2011 and there were still a whole bunch of plugins out there. So I’m just curious why did you decide to create your own platform as opposed to for example using WordPress and a membership plug-in?

Ankur: I hate WordPress man, what can I say.

Steve: Oh you do, okay.

Ankur: Honestly I looked into it right, and it seemed like WordPress plug-ins is where the market was today, but that’s not where the market is going to be five years from now. We want it to almost set the path for what is to come, and we looked deeply into a WordPress plug-in, we just found there is too many interdependencies we could not control.

It was definitely the path of least resistance. Like if you wanted to get set up quickly, WordPress plug-ins were the most logical choice. But thinking in a longer term time frame like thinking three years from now, five years from now, it was just never going to be where we wanted it to be.

So that’s why we made the decision like it is more painful, but let’s do this the right way, let’s remove all dependencies as you probably know with WordPress there is a lot of kind of madness trying to balance different plug-ins with each other. And like just hoping it doesn’t all go belly up, we wanted to make it just stupid, stupid simple, and didn’t want to — and that’s why we chose not to use WordPress.

Steve: Just curious so what were some of the things that were missing that you found?

Ankur: With word – honestly the…

Steve: Without the WordPress or any other platform?

Ankur: Just the fact that you couldn’t have one solution right, even the best WordPress plug-ins might need you to have a shopping cart, they might need you to have a video hosting platform. They might need you to have an email client. Like there are some people and granted these are– this is not the majority of users, but we have a substantial percentage of our users that only use Teachable. That means they don’t even use MailChimp, they often use anything for email delivery. So we wanted to provide something that of course we can plug in to more advanced tools as per needed, but it should be self contained if necessary.

So right from video hosting, payment processing, it’s a fully self search solution for someone that literally starts to use one tool, upload all their stuff and go. Which was not possible on WordPress, on WordPress there is MMS plug-ins, there is membership site plug-ins, there is a lot of different plug-ins that have parts of this functionality. But even then they generally have dependencies on using video for video hosting and just other tools.

Steve: Sure, no that totally makes sense, so does that imply that you guys do email marketing also then on your platform?

Ankur: We do it; we do the minimum viable version. What that means is you can’t do any automation without plugging into an automation provider. But you can do one off email marketing pretty easily, like you can easily say, hey I want to send a coupon to anyone that bought one course, not bought another, and is not logged in five days. You can do that super easily, you just can’t automate it.

Steve: Okay got it, okay and so how did you know that there was actually demand for this platform, because in 2013 still there was probably like a half a dozen plug-ins for WordPress, a bunch o other fully hosted platforms, so how did you kind of know that?

Ankur: Honestly, honestly this what’s funny is like we didn’t. The real truth is we got super lucky, we were being very reactive, we were taking what the market gave us. And the truth is what the market gave us for the first six to 12 months was mostly just Udemy and other market place instructors.

So it’s not people that even heard of WordPress or ever used a WordPress plug-in, or early on it was almost entirely people on Udemy, or Skillshare, or other platforms that had, had success, but realized that they were also being held back by Udemy, or being held back by Skillshare because they didn’t own their audience.

So our early audience was just people using kind of a self hosted — going self hosted route for the first time ever. I think the point at which we raised our seed round just yeah May 2014 about half the people — we had about half of Udemy’s top 20 instructors at the time. And that was all for a real attraction just like people on these other platforms that wanted to run their own business and own their own audience.

Steve: So does that imply that — so I’m just curious how did you get those people, did you poach those somehow, or did you take their class and contact them? Okay.

Ankur: So again I think we got so fortunate, I look back, what happened about a few weeks after we launched this platform and I hit up a few people, being like hey you want to try us out? No one replied like people just didn’t care at all. But then Udemy changed their revenue share structure midway through.

I don’t know if you remember this, there is a point and I want to say October and November 2013 where Udemy said, hey guys we’ve been paying you 70% so far, but guess what, we changed our mind you are now only going to get 50%. And that pissed a lot of people off. I think what all — and the other part that really pissed a lot of people off was not the fact that their revenue share was being reduced, the way Udemy tried to spin it with as a positive for them, it’s like guys you don’t know why this is better for you, and that just made people feel insulted.

And it just created this exodus of teachers or instructors that wanted to look for an alternative, and guess what we just happened to be there. So that was one of the very significant points early on when this wasn’t a company, this was my side project to kind of get us our first wave of instructors just disgruntled teachers from Udemy who just felt slighted by the system. Who felt that we’ve invested in building our business on this platform, but you just changed the terms right under us, that was the first realization that, okay I need to do this my own way.

Steve: How did you get these people?

Ankur: So it started off slowly. It started off with people that had never replied to my email starting to reply. But what happened is Udemy instructors always self congregate online, it might be Facebook groups that have discussion forums. Word started to spread that hey three of the top 10 instructors whatever are using us. And then it was all inbound. Our system was so bad then, for the first six months you couldn’t even sign up directly you had to email me and I had to create an account for you.

Steve: Okay. So you– it sounds like your strategy was to get the top guys who would then spread the word for you.

Ankur: Yup, and even then it was small. In the first, after 6 months, we maybe had 15 to 20 people making money every month. It was still tiny.

Steve: I’m just curious what the outreach kind of looked like. You would take their class and then reach out that way, or how did you get even amongst these people to actually email.

Ankur: Lots of different things. One was yes outreach wherever we could find an email address, we would reach out to them directly. The second thing was obviously inbound from people seeing what other teachers are doing, and the third thing is because they self congregated in Facebook groups which was not possible at the time, but by very targeted advertising to all Udemy instructors. There was just like– I mean we probably couldn’t spend more than literally $5 a day because it was such a small audience, but everyone who was in that small audience found out about us.

Steve: Interesting. Let’s talk about that. You targeted a Facebook ad to just like a handful of people and groups?

Ankur: Yup, which worked so well. It’s super sad that Facebook now has made it completely illegal. But yeah with $5 a day we could reach everyone we wanted to.

Steve: Can you just kind of describe that ad and like what the copy was like just…

Ankur: Yup, basically I think, I’m trying to think of what these ad copy was. It was predicated around the idea of like in very direct response like “Hey you know post your Udemy course here to control your audience.” That was– it was super, it was just super targeted and it was amazing because we were spending five bucks a day, and we tried to see like okay, can we spend 10 dollars a day, but there was no difference. Like at five dollars a day we were hitting absolutely everyone in our target group.

Steve: Interesting. Once you got those top guys, did you do anything special then like any special deals with them to kind of influence them to spread the word, or did it happen organically.

Ankur: We just went out of our way to be amazing to them. For instance for a lot of people, I personally uploaded all of their course content. They would literally just send me like access for their course. I would manually download everything, re-upload it to ours because we were small, and we did this kind of stuff.

We just went above and beyond in just being incredibly responsive. I’m using the word we out of habit, at this point it was me. I was sales, I was customers support, I was developing, I was product. It was a one person– it was a one person shop that pretended to be this entire company.

Steve: Interesting, so you didn’t have your partner at that time.

Ankur: Conrad was my, so he and I were teaching together and he went on to become the first customer. Our relationship, he eventually joined the company full time, but only after funding. For the first nine months, our relationship was primarily of a customer and service provider.

Steve: Okay, interesting, then he just joined on. Actually before we go too much, I’m very curious why you decided to get funding as opposed to just continuing on. It sounded like you were tagging along in the beginning just fine.

Ankur: Yup. I think there was a point where I actually realized, for the first few months I was never sure like is this a real business or is this my side project? As soon as it became abundantly clear that this was a real business, we had to hire developers, we had to do things to make– because as I mentioned earlier, the code I wrote was terrible. I’m not an engineer. We had to hire real developers, get a team in place and that cost a lot of money.

We could have tried to bootstrap it because we were making some money from what I remember. I was not paying myself anything. When we raised money we were making I don’t know 5, 6K a month. It was just so painful to kind of– we actually could have hired contactor and help with that and eventually try to grow that up. But the fact is after a few meetings, we were offered money at terms that were completely reasonable. Bear in mind this was early 2014 when the fundraising market was about as good as it’s ever been.

Steve: I see. So did you hire people after funding or before funding?

Ankur: After funding.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Ankur: It was the right balance where before funding. But before funding we still had enough traction that this was more than an idea. Because I remember at the time we’d– the month before we raised the money, we processed close to 50 grand in core sales that month which bigger picture is nothing. For a seed company, it’s like okay, these guys still– there’s still some kind of dollars entering their account every single month.

Steve: Yeah, so basically that translates into the five or six K, right?

Ankur: Yup, correct.

Steve: You guys, okay. I’m just curious, how much upfront investment did it take for you guys to launch Teachable or Fedora I guess.

Ankur: Honestly, it’s a rounding error outside the fact that I didn’t pay myself anything. I don’t know I would have probably– on the assumption that I’m not paying myself and my time as working on it I would guess I don’t know, a thousand dollars. Nothing really– it was just the value of my time.

Steve: Wow, so this really was like a small scale project from the beginning. You literally were just trying to use it for yourself.

Ankur: Yeah, I had no idea this would become what it is today which is what’s super cool, because I just get annoyed with the Silicon Valley narrative of people that always wanted to build an education company. No, things happen and as they evolve your thinking evolves and then you finally crystallize the vision for the company.

Steve: Just curious, did they approach you, or did you go out specifically looking for funding.

Ankur: I went out specifically looking for funding.

Steve: Okay, and at what point, this was at your 50,000…

Ankur: In monthly sales. This was, I went out in May is when I think I went, I made the trip to San Francisco, May 2014 and we closed mostly around during 4th of July weekend is when– by 4th July weekend we had closed it around.

Steve: Just curious, how many customers did you have when you asked for funding, and how many do you have now?

Ankur: So in terms of– then it was interesting because people couldn’t pay for a plan. I guess we’ll define our customers by the percentage of– by the number people making money every month which at the time was mid ten, so I would say 40, somewhere in that range.

Steve: Wow, that’s not a whole lot. Okay.

Ankur: And right now we are at about 2000 paying customers. In addition we have some customers in the free plan that still pay our transaction fee, excluding them we are at about 2000.

Steve: Okay, and then I’m just curious how things had changed once you got the funding and then how do you market your business now?

Ankur: So for the first six months it was painful, because we were in technical debt. I had built this version of Fedora at the time that worked, but no other developer could be productive on it. As soon as we hired real developers is like we have to discard this now. Then, that was very painful because our customers are still using a version while our development team was building it from ground up.

From about July till December was an incredibly probably the most frustrating time in the history of the company, because yes we were marketing it, but there was no active work being done on the software we’re marketing. Our marketing was good and we still kept revenues growing slowly, very slowly but it was just frustrating because the entire team was working at something else. Most of 2014 kind of went in that. It was only starting in 2015 that we really started growing.

I want to say the end of 2014 we probably– we had gotten to making few hundred thousand dollars in monthly sales, but it was just driven by a couple of strong customers. We were still as the company making 15 to 25K a month. Starting 2015 is when things started growing. We finally rolled out this new version that was substantially better, and we actually had an active development team working on it.

Steve: Just curious, what was– so after you got your first couple of Udemy people to talk about you and word of mouth, what are some of the other advertising methods that you used?

Ankur: We never, we still like to date have not figured out how to spend money to grow, which is kind of our big project for 2016. Word of mouth was the big thing. The other thing was basically people would use us to sell courses. Their students would come to the site, some of their students in turn would be like, oh powered by Teachable, or powered by Fedora, come to our homepage and then sign up again.

There’s an inherent kind of very small organic loop inside the product that were done really well. Then we also did a lot of like unscalable kind of outreach. I’ll give you a couple of examples. One is we went to Ryan Holiday who had a book launch, and we convinced him to put it– and we built an online– we helped him build an online course version off his book and ended up mailing out over a thousand copies of his book to anyone that bought the course.

We would go to people on YouTube with a large audience saying “Hey can we kind of re-factor your YouTube videos and make it into an online course?” We did a lot of these kind of very unsustainable outreach type of things to convince people who already have an audience to start selling courses. Very soon that we found all of those efforts kind of were rendered not– were rendered kind of useless relative to just the organic that started picking up.

Oh, another thing we did is we partnered with Y Combinator, they had a how to start a startup class. We hosted a version on Fedora and that in turn drove many thousands of students signed up. So it created a small trickle back effect for people like, oh what technology powers this, and then them signing up for the product.

Steve: You actually went out to I guess influencers and you offered to create a course for them based on the content that they had already put out.

Ankur: Yup. We also went to, even though it didn’t work out, we would literally go to conferences, and, “Hey can we take your conference and package it into an online course?” The other thing we did that worked out amazingly well is we had an automated import from Udemy button. That was a technological thing. So technological thing and that just helped us grow so fast. Well, because in the past what would happen is if someone’s interested in coming on board from Udemy it would take them days, maybe weeks to re-upload everything. This is a one click solution. They just pulled all your content over.

Steve: Wait, so Udemy lets you export everything in a nice format?

Ankur: I mean we had to be a little bit creative.

Steve: I mean are you scraping them or?

Ankur: Basically people entered their credentials then authorized us to act as their agent. So we effectively automate the process of downloading everything and re-uploading it to our server.

Steve: I see, yeah that’s ingenious. That was a huge driver then I would imagine.

Ankur: That was a huge driver. That was a definite very, very big driver. It helped a lot, it didn’t help with acquisition because it didn’t help us get new people, but it helped us activate people really fast.

Steve: Well, yeah, if I’m on Udemy and you are trying to get me into your platform, it has to be really awesome for me to go through the painstaking of transitioning, but with this one push button thing I might actually hedge my bed and sell on both platforms.

Ankur: Yup. And we always had a free plan too which made it easy for people to try us.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about that because I’m kind of curious. I was just looking at how you do your pricing. How did you decide– so first of all what are you pricing plans and how did you decide on those plans in first place.

Ankur: Yup. So right now we have a free plan where we charge 10% plus a dollar of every sale. Then we have three plans. Basic at $29 a month, professional at $99 a month and our kind of high volume plan at $299 a month. Each of them have varying transaction fees, the $299 a month having no transaction fees at all. In terms of how we came up with our pricing plans, I will be the first to admit like dude we don’t know.

We’ve literally– we modeled our original pricing plan a lot based on what Shopify had kind of their tiers, since then they’ve updated it. Right now one of my grievances is I think we are long overdue, some kind of intelligent test on our pricing. Like I’m not 100% happy with our pricing as it stands right now. I’m not sure which direction we’ll go in, so chances are when someone is listening to this our pricing might a little bit different. Whenever we do it we will obviously grandfather everyone in.

There’s a couple of things that concern me about our pricing right now as it stands. One of them is I think our free plan is almost too good to the duty that one of our biggest reasons, well our biggest reason for churn right now is people dropping down to our free plan, could use indefinitely. I also feel like, we also have a few people sensitive about the transactions fees on the $99 plan because they feel like $99 is still enough, I want to give up marginal kind of share which we get, but the other side is we also have a lot of fixed cost because we pay for unlimited hosting and video band.

Steve: And the video too, yeah.

Ankur: Unlimited band which is some people are technically losing money. There’s a lot of kind of weirdness on our pricing, but we decided very early on to try and keep it simple, so have people not worry about bandwidth, have people not worry about hosting. Don’t worry about number of students. We have no traditional limits. So no limits on students, courses, hosting, bandwidth whatever. That’s all unlimited in every single plan including the free plan.

Steve: Just curious what are the break even points from the free plan to the next highest plan?

Ankur: So, it depends on how much your average course price point is because the free plan is a dollar plus 10% on every sale. While in general a few hundred dollars and the basic plan makes sense. The basic plan is also where you get a custom domain. For most people for $29 bucks a month like it’s just worth it to have your own domain name.

Steve: I see, otherwise it’s what? Just something.teachable.com?

Ankur: Yup. The professional plan breakeven is about couple of a thousand dollars, a little less actually a few hundred dollars and the high volume breakeven point is $4,000.

Steve: So here’s kind of a complicated question that just popped up into my head. You mentioned that Udemy pissed a lot of people off when they switched around the pricing. Couldn’t that essentially happen with your platform as well? We were just talking about pricing and how things might change.

Ankur: The reason that wouldn’t happen with our platform is we would always grandfather people in. When I say we’ll change our pricing, it would apply to people moving forward. Anyone who signs up before we change the pricing will always the choice of do I want the old pricing or the new pricing. No one is going to have their pricing changed. They will always have their original pricing. It’s more of what we do for people who come after.

Steve: What kind of influenced your decision? We chatted earlier but Udemy is like a market place. If you put something on Udemy they’ll find customers for you, but on your platform it’s not like that, right? What specifically kind of influenced your decision to do it that way because it seems like you could drive some customers to other people courses, right?

Ankur: Yup. The primary reason was the fact that as I said, we were teaching at Udemy and we didn’t want our customers to be driven to other people’s courses. Our goal is to allow people to make that choice. Technically every Teachable school comes with an inbuilt affiliate program. We do have people cross marketing courses, except now it’s something to think about versus something that happens automatically.

Steve: I see, I see. So I might not want like my customers to know that there’s a competing product out there. That’s kind of your rationale.

Ankur: Yup. And there’s well if you are building a premium brand selling a premium course, like you want it to be your brand. You don’t want them to be destructed with– like if you are selling a thousand dollar product and they see a five dollar product next to it, in the market place that might not be the best.

Steve: No, no that totally makes sense. So in Teachable when you have your own domain, no one even sees anything about Teachable at all, right?

Ankur: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Ankur: Yeah, Teachable does not have– any of the students we have no rights over them. We are just a technology provider. We can’t contact your students. We don’t even own the data. You own that data.

Steve: You mentioned these problems on the free plan people dropping out on the free plan not wanting to pay, can you just kind of comment on what your distribution looks like between free and paid?

Ankur: Right now in terms of the active customers, we have about a little over 5000 active customers. Off that, about– and we have like 2000 paying customers. Of course we have a segment of paying customers that are not monthly active, but in general on any given month about 75% of our active customers are not paying.

Across the entire lifetime of Teachable accounts created, there have been about 45,000 accounts created of which 2000 are paying us right now and about 2400 to 2500 have paid us at any given point. In general we convert about, hopefully we’re converting about 7% of people from free to paid.

Steve: So 2000, does that include like the free guys who’re actually selling stuff?

Ankur: That does not include them.

Steve: Okay, so 2000 on the monthly plans.

Ankur: Monthly or annual.

Steve: Okay so the remaining 3000 are just people that might occasionally sell something.

Ankur: Or they could be people in the process of setting stuff up. We also have a customer segment. It’s not super common, but from people that have no intention of ever charging money for their course, and also don’t care about a custom domain, for them they effectively have unlimited everything for free.

Steve: Yeah, except they have to pay a dollar, right?

Ankur: Yeah, but if you don’t want to sell anything, you don’t have to pay anything. If a course is given away free right now, you pay zero.

Steve: Okay, but meanwhile they are sucking up your video bandwidth, right?

Ankur: Exactly.

Steve: Okay, so how is that sustainable in the long run?

Ankur: For now we just kind of let it be as the cost of doing business, but that’s what we are thinking about. Basically what it comes down to is we are not profitable on a per customer basis, but we are still profitable across the entire spectrum of customers, but yeah, so right now for instance, and it’s slowly starting to happen. Right now we don’t know, we’re spending $7000 a month on video bandwidth, and that’s already because our marginal bandwidth cost has become super cheap.

Still we’ll see how that goes up or down as a percentage of our monthly recurring and then decide what to do. For now, a lot of people do stay, just the fact they don’t even think about it is worth so much more than even if they were paying for what they were using. Just a fact it’s one less thing to think about.

Steve: Here’s something interesting. I offer a free course with my class, and it’s driven via email mainly, but you are saying that I could take this course, package it nicely in Teachable and offer for free and not have to pay anything?

Ankur: Correct. If you want to put it in your own brand and stuff, then you can do it on the basic plan, but that’s it.

Steve: That’s sounds very appealing.

Ankur: Yeah, and there’s a lot of people that do that. Bigger picture, I want more of that to happen. Like, as I said, we are venture bat. We are the only venture bat company in this space. If we lose a little bit of money because too many people use us, because our bandwidth costs are free, I think that’s a long-term battle, we are okay with it.

We are okay if we are marginally unprofitable on some customers, but say you– for instance you are a great example, imagine new users for your free course, I bet you someone in fact more than one person in your course is already targeted towards people wanting to make a side income. Some will be like, “Steve this is in Teachable, that’s kind of cool, I wonder if I should use Teachable and we’ll get paying customers through that.

Steve: How do you quantify those people?

Ankur: We have ads [inaudible 00:30:23] we have no great metrics on it right now.

Steve: Okay, so let me ask you this question, how many people who are on your free thing eventually go on to paying?

Ankur: Right now that is more of the bigger improvements is it used to be about 2, 2.5 % but of late we have gone up to about 7 %. We would love to get it to 10.

Steve: So what are specific things that you are doing to encourage that to happen?

Ankur: The biggest thing we have done so far is a weekly webinar where we kind of go over exactly what the platform entails and generally end with a time sensitive offer to upgrade to appeal to a paid tier.

Steve: Okay, so how do you get the word out? You just e-mail people?

Ankur: Yup, these are people already in our funnel, so this is someone after…

Steve: Oh, I see.

Ankur: Just to our own free users.

Steve: Okay, so you this weekly and…

Ankur: Yup.

Steve: Is it the same exact webinar each time?

Ankur: Yup, it is slightly customized based on what the questions are because the first 40 minutes are like “Hey here” – it’s just a technical walkthrough, it’s not content based. It’s all technical like here’s how you set things up, this is what you do and then the last 20 minutes content is different based on where people got stuck or what specific questions they have, but it’s the same template. We occasionally experiment with what the offer to upgrade now is, and that’s not– there we always try different things, but it’s all around the same presentation.

Steve: Is this a human giving it or is it a recording?

Ankur: Human.

Steve: Human, okay because there is Q&A I would imagine at the end.

Ankur: Yup, and I mean we could do an automated thing, but it’s so high leverage, the leverage on this is we convert 2% more people than normal or whatever, from a lifetime value perspective it’s worth having someone do it– doing it themselves.

Steve: Interesting, I am just curious what your conversion rate is for a webinar to upgrade people?

Ankur: It’s like it’s dropped now and we are trying to figure out why, but we would at one point get almost a third of people to convert.

Steve: That’s amazing, okay.

Ankur: Yeah, it was bizarre but then again you’ve also to remember this is a webinar at a $29 price point at its base level.

Steve: Sure, but it’s recurring.

Ankur: Yup, it’s recurring. Our conversion rates are incredibly high and then there is a lot of people kind of the marketing space that would say, “Don’t do a webinar for a $29 price point,” but for us one it’s recurring and two it’s also gets people activated and gets people excited.

Steve: I imagine your lifetime value on those guys is at least like $300 or something, right?

Ankur: It’s a little bit under…

Steve: Little bit under okay.

Ankur: Then again, that’s lifetime value as measured by monthly billings only, does not include the transaction fee.

Steve: Sure, which is the huge chuck, right?

Ankur: We don’t have a good blended LTV number yet.

Steve: Okay, so let us talk about– we talked about churn like 20 minutes ago, so what are some things that you do to kind of reduce churn?

Ankur: Honestly not enough, like now our best bets to reduce churn are one, provide value, two try and identify what makes people less likely to churn. So far the biggest take away is as soon as people have their first sale, they become absurdly less likely to churn, which follows common sense.

Steve: Sure, sure.

Ankur: So internally we are trying to see what can we do to take people to their first sale as first as possible. So we are trying to surface the right information at the right time. One of the challenges that we are struggling with is there is still a lot of people that don’t succeed at getting to their first sale. I guess it’s true, I’m sure you have seen the same thing with people trying the e-commerce stores as well.

Steve: Absolutely, yes.

Ankur: So that is something that we are struggling with, if you have any suggestions let me know.

Steve: We have an e-mail sequence that kind of walks people through, and I know a bunch of other course people that use intercom.io.

Ankur: Yup.

Steve: Like triggered e-mails, are you guys doing any of that stuff?

Ankur: We used to use Intercom, we just move to HubSpot. We have the right e-mail automation set up, obviously it can always be better, but yeah that’s one of the challenges we are having is like we are investing a lot into education, but we’ve personally found a higher ROI from finding people that do education well, and partnering with them. For instance, anyone in [inaudible 00:34:25] online courses program gets a few months at Teachable. Mariah of course has a signature course on launching course. Partner with people that are doing that training and giving them the software and kind of figuring out how we get paid on the back end has traditionally led to better outcomes because there’s people that are just so laser focused on the training that they are just going to do a better job than we can because our focus is going to be on the product.

Steve: So how do you convince these big guys like the [inaudible 00:34:54] to actually use your platform in the first place?

Ankur: Honestly there is a [inaudible 00:34:58] it’s actually pretty easy; I think we have the best technology and most people that do their due diligence land up there as a logical conclusion. The only people that don’t are those that want a really large kick back, or they want something in addition to the best product for their students, but at the risk of sounding super arrogant it’s not been very hard, it’s often very hard.

Steve: Because they don’t want to deal with any– but I would imagine those guys already probably have something that has been working for a long time.

Ankur: Most people are immensely frustrated though with whatever solution they have set up right now which is the other interesting thing that’s it’s not been that hard to get people to switch. No one wants to switch on a random day of the month, but whenever they are launching a new product I found that people are surprisingly open to switch especially if you ingrate with their current marketing set up. Most of them are pretty set on how they do their marketing, they don’t really– they are not set on what tool they use for fulfillment yet. They are still not 100% convinced.

Steve: Just curious then, what is your kind of on boarding process like? Let’s say I have signed up, do you kind of hand hold me through everything?

Ankur: No, in general for us to be a successful company, as I said we have 2000 paying customers, we try and add about 100 paying customers a week. We don’t have the skill to on board everyone personally. So we try and do as much in-product as possible so everything from kind of contextual pop ups and videos trying to make it as absurdly simple to set up a course as possible. With that said that’s our biggest challenge and will continue to our biggest challenge is how do we do that.

We also offer something; we are experimenting with offering something called [inaudible 00:36:42] on boarding where anyone on a professional plan gets a 2 hour on boarding session. What’s interesting is that it is largely peer to peer. We are trying to identify people that are suited to use our platform and paying them to conduct these sessions. It’s something we used to ourselves in-house and just got like stupidly unscalable.

Steve: Sure.

Ankur: So we are trying to see if we can do this in a scalable way. The jury is allowed, I’m not sure how it will turn out, but if it works out well it’s going to be super promising, because then we can theoretically start offering this to more and more people, and it is the community kind of providing these on boarding sessions.

Steve: Just curious, for a company your size, how do you distribute the resources versus ease of on boarding, versus like a conversion script like the Udemy to your platform, versus just getting more customers. How big is your company?

Ankur: Absolutely, we are 16 people right now.

Steve: Okay.

Ankur: Our growth and marketing team is 6 people, our operations team is 4 people, and our product team is 6 people. Operation support is owned by operations, all growth related activities. Since we don’t have a sales team, it’s right now shared between operations and kind of our growth/marketing team, and 6 people on product.

In terms of how we would like to scale the company moving forward, I think we always want to maintain a similar kind of ratio, and we are going to be probably looking to hire about 2 positions a month for the next 3 to 6 months.

Steve: That is crazy, okay.

Ankur: Yeah, right now it can be argued we are not deploying our capital efficiently, because we’re– we raised 2 million dollars, we still have well over 1 million dollars in the bank and on a per month bases we are– on a good month we are losing less than 20 to 30K, we are almost at brake even with a ton of capital right now, and potentially there is a little bit more. We have room to spend money faster; we just haven’t found smart ways of doing so yet.

Steve: Yes, so on the market, what have you tried? So you mentioned Facebook ads, and those worked out for you, before they didn’t allow you to target groups, what else? Have you tried Adwords?

Ankur: Influencer marketing has been huge, so going to people’s audiences, doing webinars has been massive.

Steve: What’s your pitch for that? Like what’s…

Ankur: We have a webinar that converts roughly on—I mean it’s actually crazy, we’ve actually had times when it’s converted at close to 100 dollars in attendee, but in general it converts about 50 bucks in attendee. Including one time when we had a 6 figure webinar, which was super fun.

Steve: Is this like an affiliate arrangement with the audience?

Ankur: Yeah, it’s an affiliate arrangement, so basically for instance, with Mariah Coz from Femtrepreneur. We had a six figure webinar where she brought me to her audience. We ended up selling a year of software as well as some kind of content from her; we split that 50-50. So it’s a tried and tested webinar that we have done plenty of times, it just works; it’s almost kind of an elite pages play book that works really well.

That’s something we try and do about anywhere from 2 to 5 times a month. The biggest thing for me over the course of the next couple of months is removing myself as a limiting factor, because until now all of these events I do myself which is just not sustainable. The other thing that has worked really well is we had a summit last November where we sold 500 annual plans over a 2 week period, which was super fun.

Steve: Nice, how did that work? So you just had your own conference or?

Ankur: Effectively an online conference brought in a bunch of people we really respect in the online course space, they all taught a free– they offered a free workshop. At the end of the summit we had an offer where each of these people that taught a free workshop gave a piece of premium content to the offers. The overall offer is that if you bought a year of Teachable, you got a piece of premium content from each of these 8 people.

So it was actually an amazing offer too, because for a lot of that just the training itself is worth thousands of dollars, but with an annual plan of Teachable you get all of that included.

Steve: And the people contributing the content, they would get an a affiliate cut of whatever you sell?

Ankur: They would get an affiliate cut to their audience.

Steve: Okay right.

Ankur: If we drove the sale, we pay them a small bounty just for being on the webinar or whatever, but in general they got a real 50% commission of everything that they sold as well as– most of these workshops like the good ones, we got like 700, 800 people live. One of them over a 1000 people live, so it also really helped enhance– it helped grow their audience pretty considerably too.

Steve: That is pretty ingenious. What about the YouTubers, have you had any luck with those guys?

Ankur: Not as much luck as we would like.

Steve: Okay.

Ankur: The big challenge seems to be they want it to be completely done as a service, they want it to be done for them, and we are effectively a self serve platform. So anyone listening, I think there is a big business opportunity if you are willing to work with these YouTubers and do the work for them.

That’s literally the only thing, they are happy to experiment, they are happy to send traffic and a few of them are succeeding, but at large they want you to take care of everything. They are like “I want to send content and tell me where to link, and you do all the work,” which doesn’t work for our model, but it could well work with an intermediary kind of acting in between us.

Steve: Is there like famebit.com is a sponsor of this show, and they provide you guys with– people with access to influencers.

Ankur: Nice.

Steve: Just curious if you– do you guys use any services for anything like that, or is it just all outreach and legwork?

Ankur: It’s all outreach and legwork, also what helps is like the space that influencers want in general are incredibly nice and helpful people, and once you know– it’s a small world at the end of the day. So it has not proved to be especially challenging.

Steve: It just so happens that online course are exploding right now, so it sounds like it’s a really good time for a service like yours.

Ankur: My bet and I could be wrong is like this is still so early in terms of what online courses will become. It seems like exploding now, but my overall kind of bigger bet– maybe you disagree because a lot of what you talk about is predicated on selling physical items, but I think 5 years from now or ten years from now more people are going to be selling information in some from online rather than physical products.

Steve: I believe that.

Ankur: That’s kind of the big bet, big long term bet behind this company that, it’s like we were facilitating the sales information and that is only going to keep growing, and the number of self supported entrepreneurs that sell information for a living will only keep growing.

Steve: Can you just kind of comment along those lines about some of the bigger guys out there, and kind of how you guys are each targeting something different. Like Udemy, Coursera, Lynda.

Ankur: Absolutely. So, Udemy I think is going to be very successful, I don’t agree with their way of doing business because you they have effectively built you know they came out of foreign education, they are like the place to go to get commoditized like $10 courses on any topic.

Steve: Yeah, exactly.

Ankur: I still think they are going to be very successful, because they are solving a problem we are not, which is if you are a student that wants to learn– like if a student wants to learn X topic, we do not help that at all, our platform is not for students. Udemy has cut a nice little niche for themselves kind of being the skill based version to get cheap thrills and like buy 10 courses, watch one, but that’s still a big market and it’s still something they’ll be successful with.

Coursera has gone the interesting route of taking college level courses, so Coursera is different from Udemy because Coursera is very academic focused, not really focused on skill based stuff and making that accessible to everyone, and that’s what we try to monetize at, it’s again a completely different kind of field to play in.

Lynda.com is interesting because I guess Pluralsight and Lynda are about– I can talk about them together, because they are both doing effectively the same thing where you build a really large content library, so you have a content company and then you sell it. Most of Lynda’s business and Pluralsight is driven by enterprise sales versus– they are a sales driven company rather than a marketing driven company.

Steve: Interesting.

Ankur: It is interesting because, personally in the data we’ve seen whenever people are selling courses monthly to consumers; it’s really, really hard. Almost always they churn through consumers too fast. Lynda and Prularsight are the only companies I know that are successfully selling courses on a monthly model, and it is because they are selling to enterprises and larger companies where if you sell to someone on a monthly contract, chances are that will never expire.

When people sell month courses monthly from what I’ve seen, so no payment plans but this course is $10 a month indefinitely, you are better– the data just doesn’t back out, you’re better off generally charging a lump sum upfront or doing payment plans the traditional way.

Steve: That’s an interesting model because once they have one of these customers, it seems like the money isn’t that big of a factor either right, it just keeps coming.

Ankur: And we’re not pricing, it absolutely is not, like Lynda has many 7 figure annual contracts and they even have 8 figure annual contracts.

Steve: Interesting, what about Skillshare?

Ankur: Skillshare is interesting. I think they have definitely missed a couple of tricks in the book, because they first started off as offline classes that were doing really well. Then they moved to online classes except the online classes were less than an hour long, and sold for $120. They would sell one off classes. That created a little bit of early success, one of my friends [inaudible 00:46:32] was a top selling Skillshare instructor.

But what happened there was the same thing as Udemy is all the top guys stated kind of going their own way. Then Skillshare decided, “Okay let’s just try the Netflix model,” where it’s like I don’t know $8, $9 for all of these courses. I’m personally pessimistic on that, but we’ll see how it plays out. I do know for a fact just based on traffic according to any estimate we have, we are substantially bigger than Skillshare, and bigger picture you know, we are not that big .

Steve: Yeah, in the grand scheme of things, because they are also still young.

Ankur: Yup, so yeah, so I think I don’t personally with a lot of decisions Skillshare has made, and I would have made them differently, but I also don’t know what they know.

Steve: Okay, hey Ankur this is really enlightening. I actually did not know that much about just the entire landscape even though I sell my own digital course. Thanks a lot for coming on the show and being so open with your numbers and everything.

Ankur: Yes, it’s been a blast.

Steve: I’m sure everyone is going to find this valuable.

Ankur: Yup, it’s been a blast. It will be fun to see how this year turns out. Thank you so much for having me, and for anyone listening at all. I would love– I just love if more people started creating courses, because I’m such a believer in the future of online education.

Steve: Where can they find you Akur in your platform?

Ankur: Platform is at teachable.com, the best way of finding me is probably on Twitter, I’m at twitter.com/ankurnagpal.

Steve: You’re a Cal [ph] grad right? Is that…

Ankur: Yes, sir, class of 2010.

Steve: So, I wouldn’t hold that against him guys, but yeah, all right. Take care.

Ankur: Have a good one Steve.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. When I developed my course way back in 2011, platforms like Teachable actually were not available, but similar to e-commerce, putting up a course for sale today is actually a whole lot easier, so there is no excuse not to give it a try.

For more information about this episode, go to my mywifequitherjob.com/episode 115. If you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via e-mail immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

114: The Right Way To Outsource And Scale Your Business With Chris Ducker

The Right Way To Outsource And Scale Your Business With Chris Ducker

Today I’m happy to have my buddy Chris Ducker on the show. Chris is someone who I met at FinCon a few years back and we got a chance to hang out while we were there. If you don’t know Chris, he is the CEO of VirtualStaffFinder.com where he helps business owners get matched up with virtual help.

He’s also the author of the popular book Virtual Freedom. In fact, as many of you probably know from mywifequitherjob.com, the blog portion of my online business doubled in the past year and I was able to hit $700,000 in revenue for 2015.

But now I need help to take some stuff off of my plate. Anyway, I was on the can the other day reading Chris’ book and I was I like, why am I reading this when I can just talk to the real thing?

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chris got his first few customers.
  • How many VAs he employs himself.
  • The early challenges with his business.
  • His leading source of customer acquisition.
  • How his business model works.
  • How he reduces churn.
  • What sets his service apart from competing services.
  • The right way to hire virtual help

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have my buddy Chris Ducker on the show. Now Chris is someone who I met at FinCon a couple of years back, and we actually got a chance to hangout while we were there. And if you don’t know Chris he is the CEO of Virtual Staff Finder, where he helps business owners to get matched up with virtual help.

And he is also the author of the popular book Virtual Freedom which instantly right now is probably being displayed in my bathroom also known as the library. And in fact many of you know from mywifequitherjob.com the blog portion of my online business doubled in the past year and I was able to hit 700K in revenue for 2015.

But now I need help to take some stuff off of my plate. Anyways I was on the can the other day reading Chris’s book and I was like why the hell am I reading this book when I can just talk to the real thing. And with that welcome to the show Chris, how are you doing today man?

Ducker: I’m good to be here man, that’s a unique introduction. I have probably done over 300 podcast interviews now, that’s probably one of the more unique ones.

Steve: So I figured I know you and you can take jokes, so I figured what the hell, right?

Ducker: Absolutely I mean if you are going use the can for anything other than what we usually use it for, why not pick up a good book, and read it when you are there as well, right?

Steve: Dude it’s an honor man, it’s an honor to be there I’m telling you.

Ducker: How are you doing brother, how’s everything going with the fam and — I mean obviously the business looks like it’s doing great, how’s everything going with the family?

Steve: The fam is good, my daughter she is selling girls scout cookies right now, so I may hit you up a little bit later. I don’t know how I’m going to get them to you in the Philippines but…

Ducker: You’ll have to send them by FedEx otherwise it will never get here.

Steve: Or I’ll just eat your portion.

Ducker: They’ll seize them, ask them — yeah you can do that too.

Steve: All right Chris everyone out there who doesn’t know you, give us a brief intro of how you founded Virtual Staff Finder, and what you are up to today?

Ducker: Well you know the core things man, I’m just the sales guy. I haven’t sort of given myself any kind of delusions and grandeur on that. I’m a sales and marketing guy originally from London. I came over to the Philippines in 2000, and started my first business over here in 2000 and [inaudible 00:03:31] looking at now 2004. 12 years in as an entrepreneur and there is several businesses under the umbrella.

We employ around 450 full time employees at our three floor facility here in Cebu in the Philippines. One side of the business is a corporate call center working with corporations, many of whom are in the US, but we also are sort of elsewhere in the world as well.

And then there is Virtual Staff Finder where we really focus in on like you said match making busy entrepreneurs with virtual assistance here in the Philippines. And then obviously we have youpreneur.com which is my online mastermind community as well as all the other stuff that I do with the events and everything as well. So it’s all good firm, keep yourself busy.

Steve: I didn’t know about the call centre, is that for like companies that handle like tech support and stuff?

Ducker: Yeah tech support, customer support, we do car abandonment; we do a lot of outbound lead generation. We are one of the very few midsized call centers here in the Philippines that truly specialize in outbound lead generation work and appointment setting.

One of the reasons for that is because of my background in the telesales game. So yeah it’s tough to do that, you’ve got to know how to train people and look after people in that kind of environment from a commission perspective and all rest of it. So we are one of the very few people that can do it properly and we’ve doing it for a long time now.

Steve: So like my business I sell linens, so if I were to — want to hit up like event planners and wedding planners I could use your service and have them do the outreach for me, is that kind of how it works?

Ducker: That’s exactly how it works; I mean as long as you had a big enough requirements we could potentially do it for you. We don’t work with very small businesses because honestly it’s very hard to — this business is all about volume. Volume [inaudible 00:05:27] that’s what it comes down to. So we have a minimum of 10 full time employees required to work with customers, and so we work with a lot of internet firms, a lot of insurance, a lot of education, a lot of travel and hospitality and that sort of type of thing.

Steve: Interesting, so a lot of the people who are listening are actually from overseas, some of them are from China, Hong Kong, and Thailand, a lot of they come up to me and they say hey, it’s really hard to start a business here. There is not a whole lot of ecommerce profits to be made, and here you are starting what I consider a really tough business to start, right? How did you get started early on with Virtual Staff Finder?

Ducker: Well we decided very early on, when I say we I mean myself and my wife. It’s funny how behind it all — or to the side of every successful man there is always a beautiful woman, isn’t that funny, isn’t that how it works?

Steve: That’s true.

Ducker: It’s true it works well, but no I mean we decided early on that if we were going to be living in the Philippines and we wanted to have a lifestyle that we craved that we should do two things. Number one we should truly maximize the potential or the talent of the Pilipino, because they are very, very talented workers, hard workers, really loyal workers, very God fearing, trustworthy etcetera.

So we said that we must get to the point of truly capitalizing on that from a manpower perspective. But secondly we also understood that the local market here in the Philippines is not the most buoyant in the world, it’s very tough to make money if you are selling stuff whatever it is to the local market. So we decided very early on that we were going to utilize the manpower and the strength of that and focus on getting clients and customers outside of the country.

Over a period of time it just developed into the businesses that we’ve created now. Virtual Staff Finder specifically actually came out of a blog comment. So I’m always a big advocate of saying you are going to listen to your audience, and I wrote a blog post back in 2010. I think it was August 2010 where I was talking about working with virtual assistants to help market your business. This guy replied his name is Michael. I remember him because I pulled out the comment and used it in presentations as a specific example of listening to your audience and what it can lead to.

His name is Michael; he had a Johnny bravo at the top in each which I thought was great. And he said I have read the forum, I work, we’ve got a lot of work with VA’s, I tried working with a couple, it’s been a complete disaster. Chris if I’m going to have you as a source that I can trust, that I can genuinely trust to be able to find me good quality VA’s, hey I would pay for that, and four weeks later we launched Virtual Staff Finder.

Steve: So you threw it together in four weeks?

Ducker: Yes, I mean we are blessed to the point where we already had a business up and running locally. We already had the infrastructure, obviously we had the staff to be able to get this out as an MVP and look at it and try it out, and send some — I already had a bit of a following online with my email or rather with my blog and my podcast, there was a bit of an email list there.

So we did it, we just did the MVP, the minimal viable product option; we slammed up a very crud looking website. I mean as I look back on it now I’m probably ashamed, but you do what you got to do. You get it out we validated it, it was very competitively priced, since it has gone up by about 70% in terms of — over the period of time obviously. But yeah I mean we are now five and a bit years in, and we’ve helped over 4000 I think the counts is over…

Steve: It’s crazy man.

Ducker: It’s just over 4000 people, insane.

Steve: So you said you had infrastructure already, what business was that for?

Ducker: Well, it was for the call centre, we had the facility, right? We had the facility up and running, we had the staff onboard already. We had web developer onboard, we had a designer onboard. So it wasn’t like I had to go out and find all these people then work with these people, and then try and release something all in a short space of time. A lot of the leg work had already been done so to speak.

Steve: Okay, so you got your first few customers then I guess based on your blog audience, is that accurate?

Ducker: Yes, correct.

Steve: Okay. Now I’m just curious about the call centre, like when you first started that, how did you get your first customers for that business?

Ducker: Well, I had actually been in the call centre business for a while as a consultant. I was working with pretty large US companies, some of them logo brands like you would know them, which I can’t mention because of nondisclosure and everything. I mean big firms. I was basically working with them as a very, very well paid consultant on the ground here in the Philippines helping them set up call centre facilities.

And so I knew all the local industries, I knew everybody I needed to know. I had all the connections I needed to have. That was kind of how I got involved with that industry. Although at first I was more than happy to just work on the three north projects here and there, and make a good sizable chunk in change for helping people set things up.

The catalyst for me to be able to break away from that was when I was doing consultancy work for a company over in Miami, not in the call centre world, actually in the infomercial world. I have been over in Miami for about a month working with this guy. And he was pretty much my exclusive client at the time. Lovely guy man, like super cool dude to hang out with, multi, multi millionaire, very successful entrepreneur, full seats at the hit games, VIP super bowl ticket, the whole [inaudible 00:11:41].

He booked me up. But when it came to work, he was the biggest pain in the butt micromanaging payment. I mean just the worst I’ve ever worked for. That was really the catalyst. I was on the way back from Miami on an airplane, I said I’m done, and I dropped him an email and let him know that I was going to be breaking the loose, and that was when we set up the business.

Steve: For me at least, your name is like synonymous with virtual staff and outsourcing. It’s kind of interesting how you built that up. Was that based on your blog or? How did you get your name out there, because a lot of the people who listen, they are kind of afraid of being able to actually get the customers in, but you somehow and even though you are in the Philippines and a lot of your customers are in the US for example, you’ve managed to get your word out. What strategy did you use to do that?

Ducker: What I started doing was in January 2010. I started blogging about my own struggles as an entrepreneur, and how I had burned out at the end of 2009, and I was on this year long mission to become what I was calling a virtual CEO by the end of 2010. So I started writing blog posts, I started doing monthly reports on what I was doing each month, month by month to remove myself from the business.

People liked that window. They liked the window and to other people’s world. You bring a room of a thousand people together, they will be way more voyeurs in there than will be exervisionists [ph]. People liked what I was doing. They subscribed to my email list. They listened to the podcast, they commented on the blog, and I just started building up these relationships over the period of the first six months or so.

A lot of those people, they are still clients of mine today. They are still blog readers, they are still in the mastermind communities, they are still ordering conversion stuff. All I really did, I wish there was a magic pill that I could say you could go out and buy and pop, but it’s not that simple. I mean, I related with really just focus on my content and creating relationships. I think relationships are– this is the single most important thing in the business hands down, and not just relations with customers, but also with vendors and suppliers and prospects and your team and everything else.

Steve: You didn’t use any other avenues like advertising, pay per click advertising, Facebook, nothing like that.

Ducker: Nothing.

Steve: It was just straight blog outreach, email list, podcast.

Ducker: Blog, podcast, lots of social media. By the end of 2010, because of what I had done to remove myself from the business utilizing virtual stuff, I had like you say, I’d sort of build up this bit of a brand as the VA guy. It was good timing. The 4 Hour Work Week was still rolling along really nicely in 2010, and people were taking the whole kind of virtual business and everything. It was just good timing from my perspective. It’s been great; I mean we’ve launched a successful business. I got a book deal out of it from Virtual Freedom. It’s been great. It’s been great.

Steve: If you were to start all over again, would you employ the same strategy today, because there’s a lot of bloggers today. It’s kind of little more saturated.

Ducker: Sure. I would. I would employ the same strategy. But what I would do is I would niche down as far as I possibly could. I see a lot of bloggers starting new blogs or starting new podcasts or starting a new YouTube channel, or a new periscope show or whatever the case maybe, a lot of new content creators come along every day.

It is tough. It’s tougher now to stand out quickly in that broader scope. But I think if you niche down as far as you possibly can with whatever market you are trying to attract, you can get the same results. You might be a smaller crowd, but the conversion on this will always be higher than if you were trying to have a global reach.

Steve: Let’s talk about platforms real quick. Blogging versus podcasting, I know you usually do a lot of periscopes; I actually had to turn you off because you kept like buzzing my phone. You do it really often.

Ducker: I was periscoping everyday last year. I went for a round six months where I was periscoping Monday to Friday last year. Going to the last quarter, I took a bit of a break and I’ve been stagnating once a week or something. However that being said tomorrow, literally, I start back with two shows a week format on a Tuesday and a Wednesday every week at 9 pm eastern time.

It will be a 30 minute show but it’s, we are going a little pro with this. We are going a little pro and really focusing in on repurposing the content properly and trying to make it a little bit more interactive and a little bit more pro and everything. It’s going to be interesting to see how it comes together.

See, periscope is all about platforms. Blogging is great, podcasting is great, YouTube videos, everything is great. Don’t get me wrong. You got to do a little bit of everything, but I believe that you should zoom in on those two or three things that you feel bring the most benefit to you, your brand your business. For periscope for me, it just, I fell in love with it immediately. After my first blog cost I knew that this was a platform that I was going to spend time on because number one, I have no problems ad living. I’m happy to ad live.

Steve: Yeah, you are good at that. I mean that’s a talent that you have for sure.

Ducker: Thank you and it’s not something that has come very easily. It is something I’ve worked on, but now I feel really confident ad living whether be on a periscope for a podcast, or even live on stage in front of an audience. Number one, I don’t want ad living. Number two, I have a bit of an ego, right. I built a personal brand. That’s what I do. I do my businesses based around me, my vibe, what I’m all about, my expertise, my message and how I want to serve others. So I’ve got a personal brand.

Anybody with a personal brand is going to do well on periscope, because it’s those p to p connections that you create with your audience, those people to people connections that are just so valuable. And then number three, man, it’s just so freaking easy dude. It’s just so easy. You don’t have to sit and write a 2000 word blog post for four hours. You don’t have to worry about editing a tone of video or audio content, you just click broadcast and you talk, and you interact and then you finish your broadcast and you are done.

Steve: You mentioned you are going to go pro with this, what exactly did you mean by that?

Ducker: The additional lights in the back drop and micing up on the phone and using a higher quality phone and generally spending a little bit more time putting together the show content, and understand we are also going to be recording all of this in HD as well off camera.

You see those cool videos of like DJs in their radio shows and stuff like that, they are being spydom almost. They are not physically looking into that camera, but they are focusing on other things whether it’ll be the mic or another camera in the room or whatever. It’s going to be that kind of fly on the wall sort of type of recording, where we are then going to repurpose that, put it on the YouTube channel, slam it up on the blog for weekly content and [inaudible 00:19:25] as well. So go a little bit more pro.

Steve: Let’s talk about repurposing. So you are just going to take that exact video and then you are going to put it on YouTube?

Ducker: We’ll edit a little bit. When you do a periscope, there’s, inevitably 2 or 3 minutes of BSing right at the beginning, where you’re kind of welcoming people and you are getting people left out, and you are asking people to share. There’s many people in areas you can before you get into the hardcore content. That’s sort of stuff we won’t repurpose. It’s pointless. There’s no value there really. It’s purely for the live audience. That will be edited out.

But you know, there’s other things that we can do post recording that you can’t do yet on periscope, like having text flash up on the screen with a call to action for example. And in that ground music that we want to maybe add or a nice video bumper at the beginning and the end or that sort of type of thing, a few things will be happening in the post.

Where as a scope show itself will probably last around 30 to maybe 35 minutes or so, we’ll probably end up finishing up with like a 12 or a 15 minute version which will be edited down, which will then be like I said up on YouTube and on the blog as well. And we might end up actually turning it into a video or podcast as well at some point, but it’s still early based on that decision. I really thought like you know, we work so hard man, and you know what I’m talking about from a blogging perspective, that’s the toughest kind of content to create because you have to type. It’s very unfluid for a lot of people.

Steve: Dude, the writing is the worst.

Ducker: Yeah, right. If there’s anything we can do to repurpose our content, anything we can do, not only reselling ourselves better, but we are serving our audience better as well. I think it’s very important to keep that in mind no matter what type of content you are creating.

Steve: You mentioned you are going to put it on the blog, does that imply that you are having it transcribed?

Ducker: That’s a possibility. When I said that I mean the video more than anything else, but we will probably, I don’t know whether we will transcribe, but we will do some kind of a show note type of recap I think, a handful of paragraphs, something like that.

Steve: Okay, and then, so the reason why I’m asking all these question because I don’t know if you follow Shailyn Johnson?

Ducker: Of course I know Shailyn, yes.

Steve: But what she does is she does her periscope which turns into a YouTube video. She has it transcribed, and then formatted nicely for a blog post and she also takes out audio and turns it into a podcast as well.

Ducker: Yeah, very, very important to repurpose that, all of them one piece of content. I love it.

Steve: Exactly. I would imagine that she uses VAs for all of these things as you do.

Ducker: I know she does because she’s got them from me. I mean, she hasn’t got her entire team from me; a lot of the team, almost all of that team is based in the US. I know for a fact that she’s got at least two VAs from me. One of them actually lives right here in Cebu. I’ve met her.

Steve: I see, so you are kind of doing, I don’t know who came out with the first, but you are doing a similar thing. You are taking one piece of content and just splitting it as many places as you possibly can.

Ducker: Yeah, I mean, I’ve been doing this for a while. This is not new. I’ve been doing this for a while. What is new, and you can go up to my YouTube channel right now and see scope recordings from four, five, six months ago literally. What I’m doing now is really honestly I’m taking it way more seriously. That’s what it comes down to.

Steve: Okay, just more polished basically.

Ducker: Yes, more polished, more serious in terms of the prep work of the content and that sort of type of thing.

Steve: Okay, and I was just curious, and I’m going to be asking this questions later on, but what is like the going rate for a VA to do all this work that you are talking about for repurposing?

Ducker: Well you got to be careful because there are different types of VAs with different roles. You can’t and you should not hire one person to edit video, edit podcast, run your blog, run your social media, run your kind of– that’s not one person, that’s three, or four people. The analogy I like to use is when you build a house. When you build a house, you have an architect designer, then you hire a head contractor, and that head contractor is there to ultimately oversee the building off the property.

But he will then subcontract the planning, the electrical work, the roofing, the bricks laying, the plaster and everything else that goes along with that. You wouldn’t have a plumber put your electrics in, it will be a catastrophe. Therefore you wouldn’t have a web developer trying to run your calendar and vice versa. You got to be very careful with how you hire people. You’re going to hire for the roles and not for the task, that’s what I always say.

Steve: Let’s break down the task that you have and see– I remember in your book you mentioned that everyone should have a general VA, a general purpose VA, what is the role of that general purpose VA then?

Ducker: That person is really there to help you on a day to day basis with the running of your online business, really focusing with online tasks. This is actually the biggest huddle. A lot of people struggle right here at the beginning, because you’ve got to let go of what you’ve been doing and in your own mind, you’ve probably been doing it absolutely just fine. The fact is should you be doing some of these tasks still as somebody who wants to build a business, that’s the big question.

So, I look at things such as managing my email and filtering my email. I get about 200 emails a day. By the time I’m actually getting to my inbox, for the first time each morning and around, usually around 9 am, my VA Mitchell has been up since 7 cleaning out my inbox for me. So those 200 emails have dropped down to around 30. I only check email once a day. I only go in and check email first thing in the morning.

My business is not going to implode if I don’t check email every three hours like some people do. Day to day organizational work with my team is done by a slack, so I don’t get destructed in the inbox. The email management is just one thing. Mitchell will go in first thing in the morning and she will reply to anything that she can with canned responses. We get a lot of enquiries, a lot of questions covering the same things. These canned responses I personally written so they are getting a personal reply but just not personally sent from me.

A lot of canned responses, a lot of– we follow the three click rule, when you open up an email you do one of three things. With A, reply or forward it. You either B delete it, or you either C, you go ahead and authorize it for later years. We have a rule in our business that you only open an email once. Once you open an email, you’ve got to do one of those three things. It’s the only way to stay super productive. You cannot put your to do list in your inbox. Don’t do that. It’s stupid.

Steve: That’s what I do Chris. I actually– you are going to kill me for this, but I have 26,000 unopened emails in my inbox right now.

Ducker: How many?

Steve: 26,000.

Ducker: Okay, I’m going to give you the biggest tip and the easiest tip for you to follow if you follow it. Declare email bankruptcy. Delete the whole bloody lot and start over again with a few select rules and processes like the three click rule for example, and your email hell will not come back to you, I guarantee it.

Steve: Let’s talk about your VA. How would I go about getting a VA that will go through my emails like yours?

Ducker: Well, I mean obviously understand that nobody is going to come out of the box perfect for you even if it’s like the right kind of skills set, the right kind of experience, the right kind of mindset and attitude to you and what you are all about, they never worked for you before. They don’t know how you want things done. Hiring a VA is not a magic pill. You’ve got to have your processes in place, you’ve got to make sure that you spend a little bit of time on boarding them and training them up so that they know what you want, and how you want things done, and at that point you start stepping back.

These general VAs do a lot more than just manage email. They can handle management of your autoresponders, like Aweber and Mail Chimp for example. They can manage your calendar. They can keep your drop box organized. They can upload videos and audio files for you. They can do small amounts of transcription. I don’t suggest that you spend too much time on getting them to do that because they are not transcriptionists. They can be very slow, but a 2 minute YouTube video, not a problem. That will take them probably 30, 40 minutes or whatever it is because it’s not what they do.

They can prepare simple PowerPoint or keynote presentations for you. They can manage your blog, so keeping plug-ins up to date. Help draft blog posts for you off the content you provide them in say a word format, they can then go ahead and take that, stick it into WordPress, embed some images, embed some call to action, put in some links, that sort of stuff. Real time saving life creating tasks, and that’s why I love the GDA so, so much.

Steve: So I’m a big believer in outsourcing, but I’m a little hesitant just about outsourcing to the Philippines. What are some of the main differences between getting someone over there versus an American? Under what circumstances would you choose one over the other?

Ducker: I don’t think there’s any differences. I don’t think there’s any difference for anyone based anywhere in the world. I believe that we are at a time as entrepreneurs where we can truly capitalize on the global economy. I mean this is [inaudible 00:29:31] at its finest. You are no longer constrained by geographical areas.

For me it’s not a matter of necessarily hiring somebody in the Philippines over the US or vice versa, it’s about hiring the right person for that role, for that job, for that project, for that task. My web designer for example is based in Australia. My web developer is in Slovenia.

Steve: Interesting okay, how did you find those guys?

Ducker: I found them through a combination of online searches; mutual contacts and people that I know, like always look to hire people through your extended network first and foremost. Because after our own opinions we’re way more likely to believe the opinions of the people that we know, love, and trust. That’s the reason social media is so damn good; all right for recommendation and referrals, some things like that. We try to find something through your network regardless of how small or big it is.

Then you can go to websites like Upwork or Freelancer. If you’re just looking for quick tasks to be done 99 Designs is where you want to go for anything graphic wise, don’t waste your time going anywhere else, it might be a little bit more expensive but you’re going to have such a massive collection of designers you can potentially work with, all of them with different levels of varying experience, and it’s just going to be just so much easy for you to find somebody to truly do the work you need done.

If you don’t want to have to go through the hustle of posting job descriptions, going through all of the arc rotations to come your way, getting on the phone and interviewing all these people, and doing all the additional work involved you come to some like the Virtual Staff Finder, and we do it all for you, and then we’ll present 3 final candidates after we’ve done our IQ tests, after we done background check, work through down referral checks and all the rest of it. We’ll present you with the 3 best people, you get on the Skype, and then you view them 15 minutes, pop and boom, hire the one you like the most.

Steve: The intention here is to hire them like for a consistence basis right like a full on employee of your business? Okay.

Ducker: Yeah, Virtual Staff Finder only works with full time requirements. We’re not the place to come and find somebody to design 100 social media images for you, or to find somebody to change certain content on your optic landing page or something like that. They are run off tasks or projects, that’s where you go to places like upwork.com, freelancer.com. If you’re looking to bring somebody on fulltime as part of your team, virtualstafffinder.com is where you want to go.

Steve: By fulltime you mean just consistent work, not necessary 40 hours a week work, right?

Ducker: No, exactly. I mean 40 hours is kind of classified as fulltime position, but if you’ve only got 20 hours worth of work for them on a weekly basis, but you’re happy to pay them a fulltime wage which is on average a 1/3 of what you will pay domestically, then everyone is a winner. The average starting salary of a general virtual assistant here in the Philippines is around anything between $600 to $800 for the month…

Steve: That is crazy.

Ducker: Yes it is. Now it is going up with every passing in, it goes up obviously the rate of inflation is what it is. 5 years ago that number was 400 to 500 dollars, so it is going up, but so is the experience level of the Filipino over the years as well. You can quit easily find somebody with a couple of years of really good quality, online work and experience under their belt for 700 bucks a month.

Steve: That sounds really attractive because like I’m just looking at my business right now, and I work fulltime still, and I’m doing my blog and ecommerce store course and all that stuff. I think I just haven’t really experienced what the possibilities are in, just even talking you about email. Email is like a huge time suck for me, if I can just outsource that, that would be like major relieve for me.

Ducker: The reminder that is not what I will class as a simple outsource task. That is something that needs to be created, that you need serious processes in place. Real step by step stuff, and you can’t just turn it over one day and then be free of it the next. You need to work on that VA, you need to fine tune processes, you need to see what works and what doesn’t work, and you need to expect them to screw up because the going is not simple.

Once they screw up a couple of times and learn by those mistakes that they make and things like that, but ultimately if you got 26,000 already emails in your inbox, the chances are you’re only paying attention to the ones that you want to pay attention to that you know you need to pay attention to.

Steve: Absolutely.

Ducker: The others can only be managed by a VA, and I’ll tell you right now the 26,000 there is probably stuff in there right now that has missed your eye balls that are everything from business opportunities to speaking opportunities to affiliate partnership and JV opportunities. You’re probably sitting on a spring fold area, you’re probably sitting on like 100 grand in your inbox, and it could be even higher.

But no, but that’s the whole reality of it. I mean, how much work do we do via email every day? Everybody is on email. It’s the first thing that we check every day. It’s the first thing we check every day. The chances are you probably lost out a little bit of business because you are not on top of it. And that’s another reason why you should be on top of it.

Steve: Let’s talk about low hanging fruit. I mean, email is obviously going to be more involved, but what are some simple things that everyone should outsource in your opinion?

Ducker: Social media. Social media is a massive time suck. I hate Facebook. I think Facebook is evil. I wouldn’t trust Mark Zuckerberg as far as I can throw the guy. I’m sure he’s a lovely guy in real life. Honestly just social in general is a big time suck. I’m not necessarily talking about the interaction side of things, but what I am talking about is the publication of your content on social media.

For example, I don’t work Fridays. I haven’t worked a Friday for three and a half years and my wife is very happy for it. I work Monday to Thursday from around 8 in the morning through to around 4 o’clock in the afternoon. That’s my working time. That’s it. On Thursday after lunch time, one of my other VAs Marie, she will come to me with 10 Facebook status updates. They’re just very simply in a word document and she sends them through to me on slack. I open them up and I tweak any wording that I want to tweak, and then I send it back to her.

These status updates are things like just plain images to links that hold content to links to upcoming podcast content for example, maybe there’s a YouTube video, maybe there’s somebody else’s eBook I want to promote, or whatever the case maybe. 10 status update, Monday to Friday, 2 updates each day. That’s it. What happens is once they are approved, Marie goes in through our business page on Facebook, and she will schedule those out for the coming week. I don’t have to worry about it.

Steve: What is Marie’s contact information?

Ducker: That is 100% classified.

Steve: It’s a deal. The rate you said is $800; I will give her 2,000 and see what happens.

Ducker: I mean, these are people that are– I want to clarify, these are people that have been with me for a while now, okay? But it doesn’t mean that you can’t find somebody to help you with this stuff. Twitter, meetedgar.com, one of the best pieces of Twitter auto generation or whatever you want to call it out there. We use Meet Edgar. We love it. I gave the task to one of my VAs about six months ago to go through my Google analytics, and to pick out my top 20 blog posts, my top 20 podcasts episodes, and my top 20 video embedded blog posts as well, so something with my YouTube videos on there.

She picked them around, and then we wrote tweets for them. Then, she scheduled them all into different categories inside of Meet Edgar and every day, six or seven of those get tweeted out automatically on my account. My blog traffic has increased by almost 30% in six months, because I’m driving traffic back to my older archived content. Again, talking about repurposing, we work so hard on our content, why are we publishing it, promoting it for a week or two max, and then forgetting about it? I’m sure there’s content in your archive from 2 years ago that is incredibly helpful and incredibly ever green. You should be promoting that content Steve.

Steve: I’m a big fan of Meet Edgar as well. I use it. In fact when you mentioned social media VA, Meet Edgar has essentially replaced that position.

Ducker: To a certain degree you’re right yes, you are absolutely right. But the thing with Meet Edgar is the time consuming part is inputting all the updates. It’s inputting all the tweets, inputting all the updates. I don’t have time for that. I pay someone else to do that for me.

Steve: Yeah, yeah, I actually sucked it up and did that for all of my blog posts podcasts and everything because I saw it like a onetime thing, but yeah. So you haven’t answered the question yet for me. How do I get one of these and how long is it going to take, and how much is it going to cost me. You mentioned 800 to 1000 general VA, low hanging fruit is social media, what else?

Ducker: Man, managing your blog, managing your calendar, setting up podcast interviews, filtering your blog comments, getting rid of spam, doing research for blog posts and podcasts episodes. Booking hotels and your flights from when you travel to events, all that sort of stuff.

Steve: It’s interesting when we booked this podcast interview; I think I got you directly, didn’t I?

Ducker: Yeah, because we are buddies. You sent me an email and said, hey, I want you on my podcast. And I said hey, let’s do it. But the usual process will be that you will go to chrisducker.com/contact. There’s a link on there, if you want to interview Chris, click here. You click there; it takes you to a separate page, a little form you’re going to fill out.

Then you fill out the form and that goes to one of my VAs. We have a number of different criteria that we need to match for me to take time out of my schedule to become the guest on somebody’s show. Simple things like you are going to have a minimum of 50 episodes. You’ve got to have X amount of people following you on Twitter and all this sort of stuff.

Because, look, the way I accept podcast interviews is this, if I already have a good relationship with that person, regardless of how many episodes they’ve got, regardless of how many followers they’ve got, I’ll do the show, because relationships are more important than anything. But if I don’t know you from [inaudible 00:41:06], if I have no idea who you are and you are just another podcast host, that you feel like I can bring value to your audience, I’m pretty thankful for that.

But unless you have a certain number in that audience, unless you have a certain reach with that audience, I cannot put 40 minutes or so of my time to one side for you based on somebody else coming to me who does have the following, who does have the audience. I’ve got to go to where the audience is.

Some people might see that as little pig headed. I just see that as being extremely time valued focus. I only do 3 podcast interviews a week. So it’s 12 a month I do. They’re booked out now right all the way to the end of quarter two. I’m doing just fine with this system, and it’s something we’ve been following for a while and it worked very well. Again, you come to me directly, we’ve already got a relationship with each other, and I say yes right away because relationships are more important than anything.

Steve: Of course I threatened to expose that photo I have of you.

Ducker: Yes, you did that too.

Steve: I did that too, that helps guys if anyone is listening out there. Actually I’m the same way and in fact I think I have a whole bunch of podcast interview requests buried in that 26,000 somewhere. Like if I don’t recognize…

Ducker: Yeah, and some of them are probably for big show this week if you can. I want to try and do my best to make you feel as bad as possible man.

Steve: You already sold me on Maria; I just need to get her digits now. All right, let’s switch gears a little bit, talk about You Preneur. What’s up with that because I feel you just recently rebranded that or at least relatively recently, or it used to be just chrisducker.com.

Ducker: Yeah, I mean, chrisducker.com kind of reshaped and reformed as a personal brand show, or just a hub really in the middle of 2012. I started to do a lot of these one day mastermind events as always travelling around the world.

Steve: Yeah, we’ve heard of it.

Ducker: Well, myself in part one where we had the one day business breakthrough event. I actually was doing ones on my own for a few years even before we impacted that for the first time. It would be me and sort of 10 or 11 people in a conference room in a hotel or whatever co-working space or whatever. We would sit and it was very high level, very intimate business discussions.

I would charge royally for a sit at that table up which was $1000 a day and I would always sell out and I’ve done them in– I mean everywhere, London, LA, New York, I’ve done one in Miami, I’ve done one in Melbourne, I’ve done one in Sydney, I’ve done one in Frankfurt, allover. I’ve been travelling and speaking. I’ll just set another day on the trip and do one of these. It’s my way to be able to build those P to P relationships even further, make a little bit of money, and help people.

There was two things that were coming out of these masterminds that obviously over and over and over again. Number one, nobody’s got monopoly on good ideas, zero, nobody. You put a group of entrepreneurs in one room, someone somewhere is going to drop a value bomb on you and vice versa that you’ve never had before. It’s very important to surround yourself with the right people, like minded people, people get, you know what I mean.

The second thing that I saw was that even though at first people were a little shy and a little meek and a little slow to work, by the end of the day, it was like they’ve known each other their whole life, and they were helping each other solve problems. They were switching phone numbers and becoming accountability partners, and they will be doing all this other really exciting business stuff. They were no longer lonely in their pursuits as an entrepreneur.

It is a very lonely journey sometimes. That’s what I saw, nobody got monopoly on good ideas and we were killing ultimately entrepreneurial loneliness by putting these events on. It was July 4, I remember like it was yesterday, it was July 4, 2014, I was in San Diego at [inaudible 00:45:07] having a water balloon fight with our children as you do on July 4th. That was the day where I pelted April Flynn in the face with water. Pat got it on video and decided to turn it into slow mode.

Steve: I need to see that video, okay.

Ducker: I’m happy that he’s never launched it publicly, because I would be hated instantly by flynnatic child there. Let me tell you something, she got me back good and proper. She got me back good. After that whole kind of shenanigans and back home, we went in and the kids heard that we were coming down from the sugar lashes and the ladies were chatting in the living room. Pat and I made a cup of coffee and went to his office.

And we were sitting down and he said something what do you want to do for the next ten years? What’s your deal? What are you all about? Within an hour or so, the idea of You Preneur was basically born. This is what I really enjoyed doing. I enjoy helping business owners that want to be able to build business based around their personal brands, solo preneurs, creators, speakers, authors, coaches, consultants, experts, bloggers, podcasters, people that are building businesses around them and what they stand for and those that they want to serve, that’s what I want to do for the next 10 years.

That’s when the idea of an online community was born. I never even given one [inaudible 00:46:33] to that point to run a membership community. It was born right there in Pat’s office. It shows you how long we were planning it. That was July 4th 2014, we launched September 1, 2015.

Steve: Sept 1st?

Ducker: Yeah. But a good amount of planning in there. We did it right, we launched right and it’s become very successful very quickly.

Steve: Would you say that Virtual Staff Finder and your other businesses are kind of playing second fiddle? Like you are more passionate about this aspect of your business over what you’ve already created?

Ducker: I mean I’m passionate about all my businesses. I’m just smart in the way that I’ve set them up. I’ve processized them as much as I possibly could. I’ve hired people to come in and ultimately run them for me, so I can go on to the next project. I must say that youpreneur.com for me right now is my focus, it would be my focus for quite some time, and it’s honestly something that I have very long term aspirations for.

Steve: So on that note, for people out there who are trying to get started as a solo preneur, what is the best piece of advice that you can give them on how you get started?

Ducker: You got to be you. That’s it. That’s honestly it. You got to be you all the time. Don’t hide behind any smoking mirrors, don’t hide behind another voice, don’t try and be something that you are not just because you think that’s what society wants from you or what your clients want from you. Be you all the time. And understand when you do that, something very, very magical happens. I mean that. That’s the right word to use. Something magical happens when you are you all the time from a business perspective.

Number one, you attract the absolute best of your tribe into your life. You attract the absolute best members of your audience into your life. They become friends, they become clients, they become your raving fans. Number two at exactly the same time, you are repelling away the people that will bring you down, that will waste your time, that will never spend any money with you let alone share a piece of your content. What you are doing, and the analogy that I use is that you are marketing like a magnet. You are attracting the best and you are repelling the rest at exactly the same time. That is absolute gold. Just be you, be you all the time.

Steve: That’s great advice Chris. I would also add that just pick one platform and just focus on that until you’ve mastered it before branching out to a whole bunch of other things.

Ducker: Hey man, totally agreed.

Steve: All right, dude, Chris. It was a pleasure having you on the show.

Ducker: My pleasure.

Steve: Next time I’m in the bathroom, I will be thinking about you. Yeah, I will probably be hitting you up for some virtual staff. Our conversation really kind of got me excited about the whole thing.

Ducker: Good well I’m glad. You should be excited. It’s really where the true business growth that every entrepreneur is aspiring to achieve. I explain what really happens is when you start really truly delegating is when you stop being a micromanager, when you stop drinking your own coolaid, and understand ultimately that there are people out there that can do things just as well as you if not sometimes even better than you. They are waiting to help you build and run and support your business and you are a fool if you don’t go and chase them down.

Steve: Awesome. All right Chris, you call me a fool, so I guess it’s time to sign out.

Ducker: What a great way to end the show.

Steve: All right dude, take care.

Ducker: Thank you man.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’m getting a lot better about outsourcing but mainly only tasks that I already know and understand how to do pretty thoroughly. If any of you are feeling swamped or burned out, I highly recommend that you go and pick up Chris’ book as it actually helped us with hiring our physical employees as well.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode114, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business, so go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course right via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

113: How Andrew Warner Created Mixergy And The Secrets Behind His Successful Show

How Andrew Warner Created Mixergy And The Secrets Behind His Successful Show

Today I have my buddy Andrew Warner on the show. I met Andrew at an entrepreneurial mastermind in San Francisco last year run by John Corcoran.

And then he had me on his show Mixergy where he grilled me, asked me all sorts of tough questions, made me uncomfortable and basically tried to make me cry.

Fortunately, I held it together and now it’s payback time. Anyway, I’m really excited to have him on the show because while he does a ton of interviewing of other entrepreneurs, he rarely gets interviewed himself. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • If Andrew were to start Mixergy all over today, what would he do differently?
  • How Andrew marketed Mixergy early on
  • How Andrew got his first listeners
  • The traffic sources that Andrew focused on
  • Andrew’s business model for his interviews and how he morphed it into courses.
  • The revenue breakdown between sponsors, mixergy platinum and courses
  • Andrew’s paid ads strategy

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have my buddy Andrew Warner on the show. Now I met Andrew at the entrepreneurial mastermind in San Francisco last year. I don’t know if it was last year, run by John Corcoran. Then he had me on his show Mixergy where he kind of grilled me, asked me all sorts of tough questions, made me uncomfortable and basically tried to make me cry.

Fortunately I held it together, but now it’s payback time Andrew. So I’m really excited to have Andrew on the show because he does a tone of interviewing of other people, but he actually rarely gets interviewed himself. With that I want to welcome the Howard Stan of entrepreneurial interviewing, Andrew Warner. How are you doing man?

Andrew: Good, did I really ask you stuff like who you slept with? Is that where the Howard Stan stuff comes from?

Steve: You know what’s funny is I forwarded that interview to a bunch of friends and they were like, “Wow Andrew really grilled you in the beginning.” He was really trying to crack you is what they felt. I didn’t actually really notice it, because I’m kind of used to your style. You tried to ask questions that are a little bit more uncomfortable I feel, right, on purpose, right?

Andrew: I want to get really personal. I want to get to know the person, but I do sometimes, I wonder if sometimes I walk over the line because Alex from WP curve is a guy who lives locally and I asked him to do an interview, and he wouldn’t do an interview with me. Then, I asked him why we hadn’t gotten together more and over dinner he said to me, “You asked me really personal questions, and I don’t like to talk about this stuff.” I said what? “You asked me who I slept with first, like who I lost my virginity to.” I realized all right maybe I wasn’t fully paying attention to how sensitive he was to that stuff, and I thought maybe he was okay with it.
I’ve been more cautious lately. The reason I want to know that stuff is I feel like we are shaped by more than just our drive. I think our drive is incredibly important, but I feel like what drives us, where the drive comes from is personal issues, like how long did it take you to lose your virginity, or were you a dock in high school? Were you like me where at first I will say I wasn’t a dock in high school, but second I grew up in a city where everybody was freaking rich. Of course that is the direction you want to go to.

Steve: It’s interesting. I mean, I tend not to go on to anything personal. I’m more like interested in like the how-to-gets sort of thing, but you are right. The psychological aspects do come into play. I’m sure we’ll find out some of the reasons why you did what you did. Let’s start with that actually. You first business Bradford and Reed, it did 38 million in revenue, then you sold off for a pretty decent payoff, right?
Andrew: We did okay. What we did is we sold it off in pieces, and yeah it wasn’t as great as I hoped it would be, but it was good, the bigger the … Yeah.

Steve: Well I mean the point was you started Mixergy; you already had a pretty decent windfall of money at that point, right?

Andrew: Yeah, I did well.

Steve: Yeah, so most people would take something like that happening and just kind of relax a little bit, but then you decided to start Mixergy and so kind of what was going on in your head at that time?

Andrew: You know I did want to relax. For a while there I didn’t want to do anything else for the rest of my life. I really enjoyed reading. I love reading anyway, so I had a lot of time to read. I enjoy that. I really enjoyed the coffee that I got when I lived in Venice Beach. It wasn’t especially good coffee, but maybe because I had no care in the world it was a great walk two blocks in the sun to go get my morning coffee. I didn’t think I ever want to work again. You really could live pretty decently in parts of the world. I was living in Venice and I could live there for maybe forever unless I screwed up somehow.

Steve: So why did you start Mixergy then? Did you start getting bored or is that …?

Andrew: At some point I saw myself start to inch back into business. I saw myself saying, putting posts up on Craigslist saying I want to just coach people for free. If you are interested just let me know, and I will get on a call with you. I started just inching my way towards it a little at a time, like an alcoholic who would say, you know just one drink after dinner with friends is okay. Just one drink on my own to go to sleep is fine. And then go and then you get got caught back in it. So that’s what happened.

Steve: So the money wasn’t really the intention then?

Andrew: No, for the most part it wasn’t, but at the same time I remember saying, I got a dog and I remember saying I should name the dog Billy to remind me that I’d like to be a billionaire. There must have still been some of that financial drive.

Steve: Okay, interesting. I don’t think Mixergy is going to take you to billionaire status, or maybe it would along the way I guess. Okay, you were again bored, you had this itch, you started Mixergy, what– so your purpose really was it to meet people or was it to make money?

Andrew: My purpose initially with Mixergy was to create a movement. I thought all right, I did business, the next thing after that is you just live your ideas behind. The people who I admired, Andrew Carnegie is the guy who I named myself after out of very weird fine names I said I needed a better name. I said I really admire Andrew Carnegie. I read about him for years. I took his name. Then I said, one of the things I learned about him was he built up his business and then he wrote a bunch of books that I was moved by.

He left– beyond the books that he wrote himself, he didn’t write that many books, but beyond the books he wrote himself, he also inspired other books because of the philosophy that he put out there. I thought that’s the path I would like to follow in my life too. I would like to make some money, and then I would like to live a legacy and books I don’t think are the ultimate answer, because they kind of disappear in a world of lots of books. I’ll start a movement and I started it, but I was never clear about what the movement was about. It kind of fizzled out. Then I said, all right this thing fizzled out, I’m a little more humble now. Why don’t I learn more? I think the best way for me to learn is to bring on people who I admire, ask them questions and just get the things that I’m curious about answered.

Steve: I’ve actually been a fan of your work for sometime even in the early days I think when you were just audio only, then you kind of evolved to video and now you are doing courses, communities, masterminds. There’s a lot of people who’ve kind of tried to follow in your footsteps, and I don’t really think that a whole lot of people have actually achieved the same level of success.

What I kind of like to cover today is, I don’t know if you listen to a podcast, just like a tone of interview shows, my show is like an interview show. If you were to start Mixergy all of over again, in today’s age, when everything is kind of saturated, how would you go about doing that?

Andrew: I wouldn’t pick start ups as the topic. I think I went too broad. I think I needed to be a lot more targeted. If it was about how to build a business, then maybe what I would do is say this is me over the next year going to work together with everyone listening on a framework based on the interviews that I’m doing. And I’ll just keep reporting back on what I learn. It’s a podcast about creating a framework for starting a business.

I’d even get tired of that what kind of business I wanted to start, what kind of framework we were looking for. I would do it because I wanted to have ultimately a movement and a framework that comes from that. If I was doing it for money the way that other people are, I would pick a much narrower topic and obsess on that. I think the idea of just start ups is just way too broad. Then if you think about it, it is.

Steve: It is.

Andrew: What am I selling to this audience of people? Some of these people have businesses already. Some don’t. Because they are just listening to other entrepreneurs tell their stories, that appeals to people who have big companies and also people who are just starting out. Some of them are really into marketing, others have people who do that and don’t care about marketing. Some people are really into a software, some of them just don’t have any software experience. Some of them are coaters. There’s not any one group of people in there that is highly represented and that needs one thing.

If I would start over, I might say to myself, I’m going to focus on just let’s just build something out there, community. It’s going to be a podcast about how to build communities online and using specific kinds of tools. I’m only going to interview people who host communities, and I’m only going to reach an audience of people who want to start their own communities. Then there’s a natural product that you can start creating from that. People who need communities start to need things like maybe a course on how to create a community, or how to get people to talk more in the communities, or how to hire people to run those communities.

Steve: So I’m just curious then, with Mixergy, have you kind of gone that route a little bit with the people that you interview, or is it still just anyone who has a business who’s successful?

Andrew: I feel like– I was just talking to someone on my team today about how we are going way too broad. We are allowing too many different kinds of people on. We should narrow more. I don’t think that we could narrow down to one specific thing like community leaders at this point. I think it’s too far.
What we need to do instead is having done over a thousand interviews, do a better job of curating, so that if what you are into is just educational products, you should find just interviews that relate to that and just the courses on the site that relate to that. Almost not see or know that the others exists, almost.

Steve: Actually what is your curation process like, just curious?

Andrew: What we do now is we have two different ways to do it. One is called tagging or standard tagging. We have a team that helps tag up the old posts. It’s hard because in an interview, I could be talking to someone about how he started both a software company and then how he moved to an information company. It’s very hard. We would tag it as both info product and software company, which would make it hard.

Steve: Then like in terms of getting new people on, how are you screening people?

Andrew: That we have gotten really good. I will say just the other way that we are curating the content on the site is we’ve also created collections and now anyone can create their own collections, and those collections will be public. So if for example you wanted to start an ecommerce collection, we would allow you to easily create an ecommerce collection for yourself and you could share it with other people if you wanted.

For us, the way that we do it is we started out by writing out the steps that it takes to book someone on the site, and then created this flow for it in software called Pipedrive. Each one of our, we had at the time five steps to booking a guest, you know you find a guest, you find their email address, you invite them to do a pre interview, you invite them to do the interview and then you do the interview.

We had those laid out in columns in Pipedrive and then anytime we had a suggestion for a guest, we would lay them in, we would put that guest in the first column, and then we just keep moving them through a process. Very much like a sales team would. If you operate in a really good sales environment, they would have a multistep process for closing a sale. Find your prospects, turn them into interested clients, then sell them etcetera.

Steve: This wouldn’t be something that you would do early on, like when you are first starting out.

Andrew: Oh, I will tell you what I do when I started. I would ask my friends to do interviews if I knew that they were good fit. Then in the interview itself, I would say to them who else do you know that I should be interviewing. At first people would say, well I know Donald Trump. You should have Donald Trump on.

Then I changed my language and you could hear in the other interviews me saying, “Who do you know well, like a well enough that you can contact and you admire that you think I should be doing an interview with?” Then they tell me and I’d invite them. Again, that goes back to old sales techniques, that a salesman would close a deal and then soon after say, who else do you think should be buying this? I interviewed Sky Hal Elrod who used to close tones of…

Steve: Is that the Miracle Morning guy?

Andrew: Yeah, right. He used to be an ex salesman. I asked him how did you become a top night salesman where you just go into people’s home and sell them at night? He said every sales man would ask for referral, so I had this sheet that had 20 lines on it that were blank.

The assumption was we were going to have 20 different people that you were going to recommend for me. And I’d say who do you know that I should be asking and talking to about these knives, and then he said, and he filled out this list of 20 referrals with them. The fact that it was a page with 20 gave people the sense that they have to come up with 20.

Steve: So you had that side of the equation down, but how did you actually get the listeners. Was just kind of natural, or did it gain traction all the way.

Andrew: The best way to get listeners is to have guests who have big names, or guests who are in the news. I’m looking at your list, who are some of the biggest people that you have on here?

Steve: Good question. Let’s see I have had Noah Kagan, Emmy Porterfield. I mean these are just friends.

Andrew: Yup, so Noah Kagan would be good. You can ask him then to tweet afterwards and ask him to post it on Facebook. Ideally he might even promote it to his mailing list and say here, this is the story of how I build up my business. But there are people who are even bigger names than that who draw in a much bigger crowd. Like, Barbara Corcoran for me. There was a period there where she was doing interviews and I had her on. Actually John Corcoran is her friend, no relations.

Steve: They are not, yeah, okay, I was about to say they are not related, are they?

Andrew: He is the one who introduced me. But she’s a much bigger name. I feel like the bigger names are the ones that bring in the biggest audiences. I used to spend a lot of personal time doing it, and I never created a system for how to get the bigger names on. One of the things I’m doing this year is I’m working with someone on the team who can own that, and start going after the bigger names for us.

Steve: Interesting, but you have to have to actually have something established in order to get the bigger name, right?

Andrew: Yes, that’s not hard. You don’t necessarily have something established. I didn’t have something established when I asked Tim Feriss to do an interview for example.

Steve: Okay.

Andrew: What I did in the early days was, I went to Mashable and said, “If I get Tim Feriss to come do an interview with me, can I write a post for you about his seven tips for working four hours a week or something?” And he said yeah, because he’s a good name for them and so I go to Tim and I say Tim, can I do an interview with you, it will also be the next update for Mashable.

Steve: On Mashable, okay.

Andrew: And so there are people who have huge followings. I’ve actually seen the e-mails that Product Hunt, if you look at them, they have really big names for their podcast, so I went to Eric’s office and I talked to him about interviewing. I told him– I gave him some tips. I gave him some feedback on his process, I told him it worked for me and then I said, “Can I see how you get guests on?” He has guys like Tony Robinson; he has huge venture capitalists on. I saw the email he sends out; it’s– do you want a reach?

Then he has a number of people that he has in his audience and then he says, “Here is the site, you want to come on and do an interview?” He has huge audience. Product Hunt is huge, and so people say yeah, so you may not when you are starting out have a huge audience, but if you can partner up with someone who does and create an interview for them or accept their blog post based on an original interview, they’ll be open to having you do it.

Steve: How did you get Barbara Corcoran?

Andrew: It was just John. That’s another great thing that helps us. John is an incredible friend for doing that.

Steve: Yeah. One thing I’ve noticed, and the reason I started my podcast wasn’t for money. It was just to reach out and meet people, and then the money just naturally comes in, like people want to sponsor you and what not, and so is John someone– actually how did you meet John?

Andrew: I have no idea.

Steve: I don’t either actually.

Andrew: I have no idea. I think he was in the audience; I know he was in the audience. I know that he was a member of the sayeed [ph] I think that must be how it was, but then I think we’d discovered that we were in the same city, and so I invited him over for a branch at my house. He and his wise came over, then his son popped in and that helped us connect.

Steve: Okay, and so outside of just getting big names, did you do any advertising or some …

Andrew: No.

Steve: No advertising? Any other sources of traffic?

Andrew: Oh wait, I’m looking at my inbox to see who else is referring me to people and suddenly John is inviting me, here’s one of John’s great technique’s.

Steve: Okay.

Andrew: It says, “Do you want to get together with me and Zvi Band of Contactually for dinner?” He’s coming to town. He’s done this before. So then I say yes, and then he goes to the next three people and says, “Do you want to come to dinner with Andrew from Mixergy, Zvi from Contactually and me?” And yeah, then you end up in this great group of people who are all getting together for dinner. It takes some effort, he’s good that way.

Steve: You know what’s funny about that is, sorry to interrupt, but yeah, so with my conference, when I was trying to get speakers, I started out with one guy. I did the same thing as John did, and then once you have like critical mass, like getting the last speaker is a lot easier than getting the first couple.

Andrew: Yeah, and the cool thing is that he’s saying to me, this guy is only going to be in town for this one day or for a short period of time, so now I’ve got some deadline that I have to jump on.

Steve: Yeah, a sense of urgency.

Andrew: I can’t say it right.

Steve: That guy is genius.

Andrew: He’s good. Actually, there’s nothing in here that is brand new. He’s not creating anything that wasn’t in the Never are you Alone or other books. What’s impressive about him is that he does it, that he actually uses it, and I’m finding that a lot of the ideas are really out there. I can talk all day about how to find get great guests; I can talk all day about how to build an audience.

Ideas are out there, but most people don’t end up using it, and using it consistently and improving them to small degrees that most people won’t even know exist, until it actually works. I can tell you, our booking process was a standard salesman booking process. We laid out our steps for booking guests, we started putting a lot of people at the top of our funnel, we kept adjusting the way that we ask people to come and do interviews, we kept adjusting the way we found peoples email addresses. It was a small twist and nobody would ever discover. That nobody would ever pay attention to, that made all the difference for us.

Steve: Such as? You can’t make a statement like that without revealing something,.

Andrew: I’ll give you a really good example. We had to start this five step process that I described earlier, and we still were losing people, so we wanted to see where we are losing people? It turns out we would ask them if they want to do an interview, and then they wouldn’t respond and that’s where we stopped, so I added a sixth column to our steps. One is, ask them to do a pre interview.

Then if they don’t respond, the next step is, send a reminder. That little thing made a huge difference. It got us from, I forget the exact numbers, but it was something like 20% of people would say yes to doing interviews to suddenly 60% said yes, because the follow up email almost makes them feel a little guilty for not responding to the first one, so it has an outsize performance.

It delivers outsized performance, so that’s really big. We then did the same thing for people who did a pre interview with people on the team, with Jeremy Wise, so the mastermind that you did. They did a pre interview, then they wouldn’t book the interview because stuff comes up in life, so we had a reminder calling them to that. Suddenly, our numbers improved even more.

Steve: Wouldn’t it be more effective to cut out all the steps and just have just one step instead of the three or four or five that you have?

Andrew: No. I’d love to cut out more steps, but I can’t cut out steps like the pre-interview for example. You don’t do pre-interview with me, I feel like that’s one of the best parts of doing a Mixergy interview. For example, I just interviewed a founder, Graham Cochrane, he runs the Recording Revolution. He’s doing six hundred thousand…

Steve: What’s with all these Cochrane people? Yeah sorry, go on.

Andrew: Yeah right? It’s interesting, he spells his name differently– and he had the story where, usually when I ask people what did you do before you started your business, there’s some exciting thing that they did. He was talking about how he worked for three years at Rosetta Stone, and the more that Jeremy was talking the more– he got the story, but I don’t think that’s interesting, that’s completely left out of our interview.

I don’t think that’s interesting, it’s completely out of it. There is one thing that he didn’t mention until much later in the conversation with Jeremy, because you can see even before the interview when I brought it up to him, I could see that he was a little embarrassed about it. He was on food stamps. He’s a proud guy, Christian guy, feels like he has a responsibility of his family. He didn’t want to go on food stamps. His wife urged him to do it and he did it back then.

He’s not especially proud of it. That came out at the second to last or third to last question that we asked him. I made that the focal point of the intro, how a guy who…

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay.

Andrew: So now there’s a hook, and so the pre interview process is where we discover that. Where I neglect things that people think are really interesting, and where I hit on stuff that really is going to be fascinating.

Steve: Was he uncomfortable that you revealed that or …

Andrew: I wasn’t sure and what I did was I test the waters before the interview starts, and I also know what am I going to ask him before the interview. I wanted to see, did you go on food stamps after you started the business, so that maybe the business led to that, right? I checked it out and then I looked at him because we were on camera, to see how uncomfortable was he about that, and I saw he was okay and if not I would have had a way of getting him to feel more comfortable with it.

Steve: I see, interesting. From what you’re telling me here is that Mixergy just kind of took of on its own.

Andrew: No.

Steve: Okay, all right, so you didn’t pay for any advertising, you got great guests, so what’s the missing link here?

Andrew: The guests are where we get our audience. We are paying for advertising now. We tested a few different ways last year, 2015 … for advertising to get people to listen to the podcast specifically is something that…

Steve: Actually I just saw a Facebook ad where you were advertising your Barbara Corcoran interview essentially.

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: And so how do you quantify the return on that? It’s just landing straight on an interview, right?

Andrew: I actually don’t know how you can quantify podcast listeners. I’ve seen people do things like by cheap clicks. They go to their sites, auto play their audio and then they get it counted as a listener. And that you can actually quantify because advertisers are paying per listener now, and if you can get your clicks cheap enough, then you could increase your numbers and then hopefully you said something that would get that person to also listen again in the future.

Steve: Is that your goal? Like what’s your Facebook ad goal? Is it a newsletter sign up, a listen or…?

Andrew: A subscriber, so I’ve never really paid much attention to the podcast audience, not enough. We’ve done podcasting; I’ve been podcasting for years, since 2008. I didn’t pay much attention to it. Then last hear, 2015, this guy [inaudible 00:24:26] said, “Andrew, can I sell ads for you because I think can do a better job than you’re doing,” and then I said, I think am going to stop selling ads because I don’t care about that revenue, I don’t care about it and it’s a distraction.

He said I think there’s more here. So I said okay, do what you want. I don’t even want to know what you do because you know me well enough that you know not to pick bad advertisers, and you know how I work, I’m very systemized. You create the system, so he did. Then his ads were selling for– I was hardly selling them frankly, for like a 1000 bucks a month, he’s doing 50,000 a month.

Steve: Really?

Andrew: 30,000 a month.

Steve: Wow.

Andrew: I don’t know the exact numbers. Somewhere like that, yeah. He slowly ratcheted up the numbers to make sure that we were worth it.

Steve: This is just from your podcast.

Andrew: Just for the podcast.

Steve: Outside of Mixergy, Mixergy is the podcast, right?

Andrew: Mixergy is just on the podcast. Advertisers get a link on the site, don’t quote me on the exact numbers there, but I’m not too far off. I want to be as accurate as possible, but I don’t know the numbers exactly, and he just took it and he went with it. Throughout the year, he kept saying now I’m bringing you new money. I said yeah, because you’re excited, he goes yeah, he goes, so can we grow the podcast audience and I said “Yeah, what do you have?”

Then I’d vet his ideas, I feel are a little too much, or I’d interfere a little too much, and I finally, at the beginning of this year, he and I went out to work together in person at the Fairmont hotel which I like working in. And I said, “You know I trust you, you’ve gotten me here. What if we take,” I forget the number but I think it was like 20,000 a month, “Can you do– how much is it going to cost?” I think I started with 5,000 and he ratcheted me up too like he did to the advertisers to 20,000 a month in advertising.

He said, “I think I could grow it for you,” and I knew that if I was going to ask him, how are you going to measure the results? I knew the response wasn’t going to be something that was especially helpful for me, so I just said, I don’t even want to know. Tell me what you need from me and just go do it. He needed a couple from things from me, and I couldn’t even respond on those because I’m so overbooked.

He wanted to know, he had a list of questions for me about who the Mixergy audience is and so on. I said I don’t have time to even respond to that. He said, “Okay, I know you well enough. I could respond to it myself,” and he went on and bought the ads. He didn’t even show me the Barbara Corcoran ad. I had sensed that’s who he’s going for.

Steve: Okay. Can we talk about your revenue breakdown? I don’t need specific numbers, but I’ve always been curious. You mentioned there’s sponsorship revenue, there’s the membership, and then you have courses and what not. And you just mentioned that you are thinking about dropping sponsors?

Andrew: I was, at the beginning of last year.

Steve: Okay. Well, does that imply then that, that wasn’t really a major revenue source or you thought it was interfering with…

Andrew: It was horrible, and frankly I also wasn’t also running it well because I never thought the podcast ads would do well. I just couldn’t imagine it. You think about it, how many times have I listened to a podcast where I remember the sponsor name at the end of the podcast? Hardly ever.

I never remember them. I’d like say close to never. In order for the podcast go even get credit, the listener has to remember that they heard it, remember that they heard it on this specific podcast, and then remember the code, so I just didn’t think anyone would do that, but they are doing it.

Steve: They are.

Andrew: They are doing it, so that’s why you never, hardly ever heard me mention a discount code within the interviews. If an advertiser said, here’s the discount code, I’d say I don’t think you should give a discount code. Why give people two things to remember, just give me your name, and sometimes I’d like do it, but grudgingly and I didn’t care about it, they didn’t care about it.

Steve: By the way, when you are talking about podcast right now, you’re talking about just everything, right? Like the Mixergy interview.

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Andrew: Here’s the thing. Everyone thinks that me reading the video, the video counts, videos chuck [ph] now, it’s not worth anything, really. For revenue, it’s not worth anything.

Steve: Interesting, the Mixergy premium memberships?

Andrew: Oh no. Premium members do listen to it, but as far as ad revenue, as far as viewership, it’s just insignificant, because no one goes to websites anymore to watch content. You go to YouTube if you’re going to watch videos, right? And we don’t put our stuff on You Tube because it’s for members only.

Steve: Of course.

Andrew: Right? So if you want to look at pictures, you go to [inaudible 00:28:38] you go to Reddit. You don’t go to some guy’s website where it’s going to be interesting, right? There was a period where you might go to failblog.org and watch it there. Nobody does that, right? You’re just going to go to Reddit and you’re going to find it there, so platforms are where it’s at. Mixergy is not a platform on its own.

People aren’t coming to watch videos on our site. This is something search would help me realize, podcast is big because podcast is on iTunes platform, and so that does well. So when we sell ads, our advertisers sometimes get excited about being in this video interview, we have to tell them look, you’ll be there, but it’s the audio that’s really going to give you the big bang. They want the links to their sponsorship on the page.

Steve: Sure.

Andrew: We do that, but in reality it doesn’t really matter much because people aren’t coming over and clicking. I would always have some link to it, but not the long descriptions that we have because someone could forget. Who did Andrew mention, I know he mentioned some hosting company, I know he mentioned some developer company, who was it? And they want to go over to the page and click on it, but they are not coming to the site, they are not coming to watch the videos.

Steve: Has that eaten into your membership revenue then? Because your podcasts are free, right? It’s the same interview.

Andrew: It’s the same interview and then a few days later it goes in behind the pay wall.

Steve: You take it off the feed for the podcasts?

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, I see, and when did you come to this realization, just last year?

Andrew: Frankly too late, it was end of last year beginning of this year, the day that [inaudible 00:30:12] and I sat together at the Fairmount. I like him because he keeps pushing me to think differently. I like crazy people like him, because he always has some crazy new direction and so he says what if you just kill all the video? Why kill all the video? And we started talking about it, because he is just throwing stuff out there to see what happens. And we looked the numbers for the videos and they were insignificant compared to podcast, and then that made me realize wait, what if people aren’t going to the video anymore? And maybe the video is destructing them making them think that it’s only a video site.

Then I emailed our developer and I said, can you take down the video for everyone who is not a member and see if anyone complains. I learned that from David Cowen the founder of [text stars] [ph] the investor. He said, if you want to know if a future really matters to users kill it, and then see if they complain.

If they complain you can always bring it back, if they don’t then you realize it doesn’t really matter that much to them. So I killed it, no one complained and then I had second thoughts about it, so I said Michael deemphasized it just put audio first video second, but no one is coming to websites anymore.

Steve: Here is the thing like we are talking to each other and usually I don’t turn on video for these interviews, but we have video on. You don’t think that the ability to see a person’s face matters in an interview?

Andrew: I never did, but I know that there is an audience for it. I’m just saying that if you really want to build an audience for people watching an interview, you are better off putting your stuff just on YouTube. I don’t want that, I find that — I pick the platform that I want which is podcasting, and that’s where I want the new audience to come from, and then videos available for members.

Steve: So percentage wise then would you say that your podcast has over taken your membership revenue?

Andrew: No, so what happens is people will discover — people used to discover me by going to mixergy.com, and watching a video there. And then seeing that I also have a membership site and signing up. Now the way they discover me is by going into the podcast, and they go to the iTunes store or something, they discover the podcast and then they sign up. And then they get into my world and then they come to the site to see who I am.

Steve: And then did they watch the video on your site at that point, like do the premium members watch the video?

Andrew: Premium members do watch the videos, and then the course is a video based still. So what happens is you get the interviews for a few weeks for free, if you are happy with them and you want more you can come back to the site and pay for membership and get access to all the older interviews.

And when you pay for that it as part of your monthly membership you also get access to all these courses. And the courses will teach you things like how to get traffic to your site, how to grow sales, how to automate your marketing, and the whole thing is taught by real entrepreneurs they turn on their screen etcetera.

Steve: Can we talk about how you evolved the courses, because it wasn’t something you added until what two or three years ago or something like that?

Andrew: Somewhere around there.

Steve: So how did you get the idea and it just at the time it seemed kind of random, but it’s clearly working, right?

Andrew: Yeah, I did know that people don’t pay — people pay for results, they don’t pay for just entertainment. So I kind of had a sense that that’s also where I want to play in delivering some kind of result, and I wanted to be in education because that’s the stage of my life where I am, but I wasn’t sure where to generate money from it.

And I was much more excited about selling to my audience than selling ads. I finally just admitted I didn’t know what to do and I did this thing called testing Tuesdays, where I wrote a post where I said every Tuesday I’m going to try selling you something until I figure out what to do.

And I did guides because I thought that was number one, I thought guides for sure. I did an online webinar with someone I think Mel Kegan was the guy who jumped in with me on that, I did a bunch of different things to see what worked best. The courses were the one that did the best. So I stuck with that, and at first I sold them all individually so I said each course sold individually and if you have a membership since I already built my membership to sell the older interviews. If you have membership you get it for free.

And dude I spent so long not just me my team even longer than me hooking up each one of these courses into a process that would let you buy them individually or buy them with a membership. Then I finally just got so tired of doing it both, and putting my people through so much work to sell them both ways that I said, all right, let’s kill it, let’s just go for membership and just go with all in our membership which is what we did.

Steve: How do you reduce churn on your memberships, like how long do people stay usually?

Andrew: That’s a good question; I’m finally now starting to get a handle on churn, let me see if I can tell you. A few things that we do, we increased prices recently…

Steve: Yeah I noticed, yeah.

Andrew: And I think that’s helpful for churn reduction because, maybe not. Churn is 7.4% right now, and that’s high for us, I don’t know why we suddenly have higher churn. It could be because we got more members recently, and maybe there different kinds of members.

Steve: You get people to stay basically by constantly releasing new courses, is that…?

Andrew: Yeah the introduction of new courses is the reason they stay, though I’ll be honest with you. I know that people know that if they cancel today they could always come back tomorrow and get whatever course was added in between the time they left and cancel. Or if they cancel today they could come back in three weeks or three months and get all the courses.

So that’s an issue, one of the things that I have been thinking is people have been wanting more of a community, and so I’m thinking the community could help to channel a lot. But I’m still trying to figure out where it is, I have seen other people, other membership sites numbers, our churn has been better than theirs which is really reassuring. I used to think that anything above 2% is awful, but it’s not true. I see 10% is standard, 20% not unusual for monthly memberships, education based.

Steve: I think it depends on — oh education based, okay. Have you talked to [inaudible 00:36:15] I was just curios what his — I forgot to ask him this question on our last interview.

Andrew: No, I wonder what it is.

Steve: Do you do any on boarding like…?

Andrew: We do, we should be even better about it yeah.

Steve: Okay, and one thing I also want to ask you is you got a lot of stuff going on Mixergy premium, the dojo, I don’t know if that’s still going on…

Andrew: That’s part of Mixergy premium.

Steve: You had an interview course is that part of Mixergy premium now too?

Andrew: No, so I did have an interview course that was part of premium, I said I’m going to teach; I’m going to have all these entrepreneurs teach what they do best. I’ll teach one thing that I’m really good at. And I know I had to do interviews, and had to start an interview business, so I’ll add and I did. I did an hour long version of that and it was really popular.

And I kept — when my wife gave birth, I kept getting emails from people asking me questions about how to do interviews, and I realized because I had some distance and I wasn’t at work that there is so much, there is so many request like this that I should just create a course on it, and so that’s what I did. A bigger, fuller course much more expensive, much more time commitment, much more engagement.

Steve: And I’m just curious, I imagine a lot of these people they are interviewing other entrepreneurs and what not also, how have they been doing since it’s a lot more saturated now.

Andrew: Some do really well, some don’t do as well. I don’t have numbers on it and I frankly I should, because that’s the way I should be measuring my success. Sorry?

Steve: Do you have any example of someone who has done really well?

Andrew: Yeah Tucker Max, he loved the course, he went through the course, he was trying to at the time create a business that mentored authors essentially. He said all these are really bright, but they are too busy working and don’t have enough time to write books. Meanwhile there are all these guys, these knuckleheads, that’s my word for it, who don’t know anything, who write these freaking books, where they sound like experts because they have all the time in the world to write their books, and all the time in the world to promote themselves.

So Tucker said I think I should turn these other guys, these experts into authors and he needed to know how to interview them, and how to have a team of people interview them in a way that lets him create these books. So he took the course, and he is really into the question process, he built it. He created a company called book in a box; if you talk to him you’ll see that he is a big reader.

And he showed me some books that he read to help him to figure out how to ask questions, how to interview, and some of them are good, but he said the course was the best thing that he had taken, the best place that he did learn to do it.

Steve: He was a rock star to begin with so right, even before he took your class?

Andrew: But his people weren’t, he didn’t know how to get his people who were just total off the street people to ask questions. But I see what you are getting at, who’s built a business based on this? Right, we had other examples that we put online, and you are right I don’t have any others that just come to mind right now. I wish we did a pre interview; I would have spent some time looking it up.

Steve: Maybe I need to add that — see I still work full time and I don’t have time to do pre interviews but…

Andrew: You should do the pre interviews. I used to think I had to do the pre interview, here is a problem with me doing the pre interview, and I did it for a long time. People would tell me things and then in the interview they would assume that they already told me, and I would be bored by it, so they shouldn’t spend too long, and so they would stop their best stories. The ones that I was most excited about, because I remember being excited which means that they remember me having heard it before.

Steve: Interesting I would think that doing the pre interview takes away the spontaneity a little bit so to speak? I don’t know if they had to tell the same story twice even if it’s not to the same person…
Andrew: I think people could use a little bit of practice when they are telling their best stories because if they are really excited about it they lose their place. They get too excited and too caught up in the moment of telling it.

Steve: I was actually looking through your portfolio products, and it seems like you are almost like in an exploration type of mode so to speak. I mean you have a whole bunch of stuff, your True Mind program. There is something I think I just got an email back today right that is closing the doors. You’ve been running Mixergy for a long time now, and I was just kind of curios what direction you are taking moving forward, and we kind of talked about this a little bit before this interview started.

Andrew: I am, you are right, I feel like I am the least clear that I have ever been all of a sudden this year. Usually at the beginning of the year I’ll sit down and I’ll journal out where I want my year to go, and 2016 is the first time I really couldn’t do that, I’m not sure, I’m not sure.

Steve: What is this True Mind program about; I mean you sounded really excited about it when you were talking about the pre interview, right?

Andrew: I am, here is what I noticed that people who are listening to my interviews, who go on to build incredible companies, none of them come to mind right now, but you’ll hear them in the interview say, that they listened to Mixergy while they were building their companies. Actually one guy is the founder of any park. The guy was listening to my interviews when he was in Japan, got really into them came back to San Francisco not too far from where I am. And decided he wanted to be in tech, because he didn’t have anywhere to live, didn’t have any entrance here, he slept in a van outside of Taco Bell.

Finally before he was due to get out of the country he said I need to meet some people here, he went to a tech conference, this strap conference from tech ranch. He couldn’t get in because he didn’t have a ticket, they are like $2000 or $3000 tickets, he didn’t have that kind of money. So he walked over to the receptionist and said, look I speak Japanese, you guys probably are going to have Japanese people in here who need a translator, I’ll be your in house translator if you let me in, they let him in the conference.

And he never needed to translate for anyone, but he did get to meet Paul Graham, he said to Paul Graham you told people who listen to your work that they should be coming to San Francisco, I’m here now what do I do, you at least listen to my pitch idea? Paul Graham said okay, listened to his speech idea, and founded his company and today any park is doing incredibly well creating parks for companies to give to their employees.

And I intentionally within my interviews say Mixergy fan whenever I remember to when there is someone who is a fan who is listening from the early days, and if you Google it you’ll see that there are tons of people who’ve listened at the time. That’s the first like thing that I want to do, but you are right it’s not enough. Oh right so there are people like them, I promise when I talk to my audience I see people who are incredibly successful like them who aren’t well known, who won’t do interviews, but I also see people who don’t go anywhere, who are just freaking stuck.

And the difference between the two of them isn’t intelligence. The people who are stuck are often brighter than the people who are going further. They are like really good developers, really sharp, they work hard. And what I realized was what was holding them back is the same thing that used to hold me back, the sense that they are not ready, the sense that its meant for other people, the sense that this inner critic. And they would talk to me about it in private, and I recognized it myself that I had that too. I said we need to deal with that.

And I tried doing it in the interviews and my interviewees wouldn’t talk about it publicly, they talk about if
you’re over scotch, but not publicly. I said let’s all work together on dealing with this inner critic. And we did, and it was just like me and a bunch of premium members who didn’t have to pay anything extra to talk to me and work with me, and I did a ton of work with them on this.

We realized it’s not just the critic, it’s this part of our minds that we all the counters everything we want to do, I’m not sitting here to do an interview with you, and there is part of me that says I’m not going to be interesting enough. I’m not directly a good fit for his audience, what if he asks me a question that makes me look bad, right? That’s counter mind that if I start to notice it you’ll see me drift of in conversation. You’ll see me not fully engaged with you; you’ll see me hold back, you’ll see me like break as soon as you ask me a tough question.

It is just there, it counters everything we do, someone who is listening to us right now who wants to start a business like you is going to think oh that’s not me; I don’t have a wife who is supportive. I don’t know anything; all the good ideas were taken etcetera. Or maybe this guy is actually, maybe Steve is actually cheating me or using me, so I don’t want to even listen to him, and it’s a counter mind, we all have it.
We also have this other part of us, this true mind. For me in this interview it’s I just want to get to know

Steve, because if I get an hour with you then you and I don’t get to spend much time together, right? It’s good for me if I get to help you out it’s a win because you are going to help me out at some point of my life, you are going to help me think through something, or I don’t know what, maybe you’ll throw a link in something a few years from now that will help me right?

So that’s something I just want to do a good job for you. There is another part of me that says maybe I want to meet someone in this — through this interview that’s going to be helpful for me. Maybe I can actually help somebody and change their lives the way that I wanted to when I was in Venice beach feeling like I’m not living up to my potential, right? That’s a true mind. That’s the part that we want to spend more time thinking about, more time experiencing, more time expressing, and that’s the difference that I noticed.

When you see someone who is building a great company, someone like [inaudible 00:45:18] who walks into a conference and says I know Japanese. That’s not coming from a guy who is obsessed with his counter mind which says you don’t even know, you have an accent, he has an accent. That’s not coming from a guy who was listening to his counter mind which would say, everybody wants to come in here for free, they are not giving you a free ticket, right? He’s expressing his true mind. Now, how do we do that more often? How do we get to focus on that more often?

That’s something that I got really passionate about and started talking about a couple of years ago, and then I created a course for it, and you can see people with their [inaudible 00:45:52] way of remembering what it’s about, you can see people with their beads, you can see people who views them, who’ve gotten results from them, who’re sharing it with their friends and getting results with their friends for it. When I told you before the interview started there’s a part of me that just wants to stop everything on Mixergy and just focus on True Mind, it’s because of the responses that I get from that.

I spoke at a conference and one of the volunteers at the conference came up to me and talked to me afterwards, and I didn’t realize that I made an impact with her on this whole True Mind thing. I gave her a set of beads and I moved on and … I just said here it is and you know the process– oh, I gave everyone at the conference beads, actually now that I think of it, but I don’t know if I had to give her a specific extra set because she was a volunteer, but I gave her a set of beads so she can use this process with them, and she emailed me at the end of last year to say how helpful this whole thing has been for her.

I didn’t know what she was going through, but she emailed me to say that she was going through a bunch of stuff, and this helped her focus on what she wanted and helped her get results in the part of her life that mattered to her. It took me a long time to get that kind of response from Mixergy. It took me a long time to get someone who cared that much about Mixergy, so that’s why I’m thinking maybe True Mind is what I should be spending more time on.

Steve: You know what’s interesting about what you’re saying is for me at least; I do get imposter syndrome sometimes, but am more concerned about not understanding what to do. I feel like once I understand what to do like I have all the confidence in the world.

Andrew: Give me an example.

Steve: For example, if I wanted to learn how to run Facebook ads for example, and I was not confident because I don’t know how to use it at all, once I gain the knowledge and actually execute on my own platform, I would feel comfortable teaching it, so to speak, or I’d feel comfortable running someone else’s campaign.

Andrew: I get that. The challenge is that, how do you get to a place where you know it well enough that you can actually do it for someone else? For most people, they wouldn’t even get started, because in their heads they’ll think Facebook is already done, everyone who’s doing it is doing it. In their heads, there’s someone who is listening to us who’s thinking, there’s someone who’s already better than me at this.

The world doesn’t need me especially if I’m starting at zero, why should I start anywhere, right? That counter mind is going to keep them from even starting. I’d also suggest to you that if you are waiting to know everything, then that’s also you giving in. Not necessarily you, but if a person is waiting to know everything that’s also giving in to their counter minds. I can’t possibly know everything going into every interview.

If I wait to know everything, then I’m not ever even going to do the interview. I get on call sometimes with customers who are upset. I can’t possibly know how to respond to everyone who’s upset. There was a part of me when I was younger which said, you have to read a book on how to handle disgruntled customers, you have to have some experience working for someone else who teaches you how to handle disgruntled customers, and then you can handle your own disgruntled customers, right?

Then you know, there’s always like one extra thing I had to do, there’s always one other book. I remember when I was growing up and I wanted to sell– to shovel snow for my neighbours for like 20 bucks, and whenever they would say no, I remembered thinking, I have to read The Art of the Deal because I don’t know how to negotiate with them and get them to say yes. Like that book was magically going to sell before me, so I read The Art of the Deal and then I said, I have another book that I need to read before I can really turn these people around.

Steve: I hear you.

Andrew: When all I should have done was had the confidence to say, really? Are you really going to spend some time going and shovelling your snow, or just being okay with it and moved on to the next person? It’s the counter mind that keeps us from starting; it’s also the counter mind that always shows us that we don’t have enough.

Steve: I get that a lot, since I teach a class. People come up to me and they’ll ask me a question that they know the answer to, and they just want me to say yes, I agree, and then they proceed. Is that kind of similar to what you are talking about?

Andrew: Yeah right, they need that blessing. They need somebody to say it’s okay. There are so many people going to business school just so they could have that piece of paper that says that they know business, and then they are going to be so, so disappointed when they leave and someone is going to ask them a question, and saying I’m a business school student isn’t enough, or they won’t remember it from business school, or it wouldn’t have been taught and covered in business school.

Steve: It will be interesting to see how your course unfolds; this is the first time you are running it, right?

Andrew: Oh no, I’ve actually stopped doing it because I kept going back to Mixergy and the only thing that brought me back is the graduates, the people who’ve been through it keep saying what’re you going to do with it next, what’re you going to do with it next. And so I still said I’m not sure to them, and then I have a team of people now who say we are going to help you keep producing new stuff, and new stuff that you care about that’s like my ideas, not me promoting someone else on my interviews.

And I said all right, here’s the next thing we are going to do. We are going to launch True Mind. It’s going to happen in January, and we are going to start it off and I said, “I think that January is a little overdone,” they said. “Yeah, but we’ll take care of it,” and so they organized it.

Steve: Now that’s cool.

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: Just curious, is everything that you are doing, is this like your calling? Like is it enough for you? Because I know last time we had talked, I told you that I need something technical in my life to keep me going. Is the stuff that you’re doing right now with Mixergy, True Mind and your other projects; is it what you are meant to do?

Andrew: I think I wanted to do better, but I wanted to be this. I don’t want to do anything else. I don’t want to start a software company, I don’t want to retire, I don’t want to do anything. I want to do this, but better. Like, more people should be moved by the True Mind process and semi-results. I should be expressing it even better than I am today.

Mixergy needs to be a lot clear as a platform, as a place to learn. You should be clear about what you are going to learn on Mixergy. You shouldn’t, you the person who just, you’re interviewing me, you looked it up. You should know more about what we are selling on Mixergy, what are those courses, right? And you couldn’t clearly say right now, because I think we need to do a better job of expressing that to you.

Steve: I think the main reason is you just have a huge breath of stuff. Like just courses on like every subject practically in your library, right?

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: So in my mind at least it’s unclear whether I should take the course from you, or I should go and find someone who just specializes in that …

Andrew: You actually would get a specialist, someone who is specialized in that. If it comes to presentations for example, a lot of entrepreneurs need to give presentations to their internal team, they want to do webinars because they hear webinars sell well, they want to speak at conferences because they know they get to meet other conference speakers, they get to meet an audience, they want to know how to do this.

Well, there are courses where you can go and take on how to give presentations. It will cost like five, six, ten, twenty thousand dollars depending on where you do it, and whether it’s in person or not, right? Or you come to Mixergy, Nancy Duarte is the woman who taught [inaudible 00:52:53] how to create the inconvenient truth PowerPoint movie that became an Oscar nominee, maybe even won an Oscar, I don’t know, I don’t remember. She’s the one who teaches the biggest people in business how to give presentations.

She did a course on Mixergy where she teaches presentation skills. Why would she teach it on Mixergy if she is also available to do it somewhere else, and why would you come to Mixergy to take that course as opposed to going to her in person thing. I think that most people need 20% of the material that will help them give the right webinar that will help them give the right presentation. That they can actually use and then decide whether they want the other 80%, and for most for people, they may not even want the other 80%, right?

So you come in, you take a course with Nancy Duarte, she teaches you presentation skills and if you want, you use it and you are good to go. If you like her style and you want more from her, she has an in person course. She has a team actually; she’s now a huge company that will teach it to you through in person classes, there are people who’ll actually create your presentation for you if you want to do that.

The same thing with Neil Patel. He teaches how to get traffic because he knows we have a big audience; they can learn from him. For most people, they could sign up for these multi thousand dollar programs that last weeks and weeks and weeks. Most people don’t want that. They want the 20% that they could use right away and get some results before they do more, and the thing that I had as an interviewer on Mixergy is, I had an audience, so if you are teaching a course, if you are Neil Patel, you are not coming in to an audience of zero where I, Andrew is saying to you, come and teach my people, but you’re saying Andrew has got this big audience, many of them are already paying him.

If they are going to paying him to watch me, many of them are going to come and pay to watch my stuff too, because they have already proven that they care enough and they are willing to pay, and I also have a bigger audience that I email every week. 70 plus thousand people that are saying, “Neil Patel is an expert on how to get traffic, he’s teaching this on Mixergy. If you have a premium membership, you can watch it. If you don’t, you can sign up. Even if they don’t sign up, in their heads, 70 plus thousand entrepreneurs now know Neil Patel is a business person. That’s the model. I need to do a better job of expressing it 100%.

Steve: Here’s the funny story on my end. I’ve in the past, given my course out to people for free. Just, these might be like friends or people who just want to learn, who know me, and everyone who I have given the class to for free has never done anything for it, and the people that I heavily discounted for, they end up doing something about it. Just the act of paying money, a lot of money has made them take action, so I was just wondering, for you, you get an all you can eat once you pay the lump sum, right? I was just wondering if that actually prevents people from taking action.

Andrew: I think in many cases it’s okay to not take action. I’m all right with someone saying, I have a membership to Mixergy, I’ve checked out Neil Patel’s stuff. It turns out it’s not for me. It turns out that really his whole attitude makes sense. I’ve learnt it, I’ve internalized it, I understand it, I’m not going to do it, but it’s good for me to know how other people are doing things. It’s okay for somebody to go watch Nancy Duarte’s course and say; I actually don’t want to give a presentation. I’m never going to do this.

My belief is that if it’s short enough and we do about an hour, they’ll watch it to the end and I’m seeing the numbers that they do watch it to the end. My belief is that, some part of it is going to stay with you. You might listen to Nancy’s Duarte’s presentation and see that she shows you how those speeches that have resonated with people for years, have these highs and lows and highs and lows and it’s an intentional process.

When you give your next presentation whether you know it or not, that’s now part of your knowledge and you are going to adjust your stuff, your style so that you can do it, so that you can have a high and then a low, a high and a low, especially if she’s convinced you that it makes sense. If she hasn’t, then why spend even more money to take a bigger course?

Steve: That makes sense; I can see it from both sides. Hey Andrew, we’ve actually been chatting for almost an hour now. I didn’t even realize that the time went so quick. I want to be respectful of your time. If anybody wants to get a hold of your latest projects, where can they find you?

Andrew: The best thing to do is go subscribe to Mixergy’s podcasts because then you get everything, all the interviews for free when they come out. You don’t have to buy anything, you don’t have to be a member, you get all the latest interviews for free. It’s in the iTunes store and if you don’t subscribe now, then whatever is free now will eventually be, tomorrow will be prepaid members only.

Steve: Behind the pay wall, yeah. Cool man. Hey, thanks for coming on the show, I really appreciate your time.

Andrew: You bet. Thanks and I love what you are doing. I’m glad to be on here.

Steve: Thanks man.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, Andrew’s success with Mixergy was actually one of the main reasons I decided to start my own interview based podcast, and even though we have different styles, I’ve learned a lot from him.
For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode113, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

112: How To Make 10 Million Dollars Blogging About Personal Finance With Kyle Taylor

How To Make 10 Million Dollars With A Personal Finance Blog With Kyle Taylor

Today I’m thrilled to have Kyle Taylor on the show. Now Kyle is easily one of the most successful bloggers I know. He runs the popular website ThePennyHoarder.com which gets an insane amount of traffic.

I’m just going to make a rough estimate here but I’m guessing somewhere in the 2-3 million uniques per month range. He’s got 730,000 email subscribers and almost 2 million facebook fans for his page.

The Penny Hoarder was on track to make 10 million dollars in 2015 and Kyle’s results have been nothing short of incredible. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • What gave Kyle the idea to create The Penny Hoarder.
  • How a blog can generate 10 million dollars of revenue in a year.
  • How he gets over 10,000 emails subscribers per day
  • How to run profitable ads on Facebook
  • How a post to his Facebook page crashed my site

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Kyle Taylor on the show. Now Kyle is easily one of the most successful bloggers that I know, and he runs the popular website thepennyhoarder.com, which gets an insane amount of traffic. I’m just going to make a rough estimate here, but I’m guessing somewhere in the three to four million uniques per month range. He’s got 900,000 email subscribers sand over 1.7 million Facebook fans for his page. Here is what’s hilarious, one day he decides to share one of my post on his Facebook fan page, and I got so much traffic from that one Facebook fan page post that it crushed my site.

Compared to my own Facebook page which generates maybe a couple of a hundred visits at most for a post, Kyle’s Facebook page was sending hundreds if not thousands of visits per minute, but of course I’ll never know since my site went down. Anyway The Penny Hoarder was on track to make $8 million in 2015, and I think up until July he was just telling me that he only had one employee. His results have been nothing short of incredible, and with that welcome to the show Kyle, how are you doing today man?

Kyle: I’m doing really well, thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: Yes, so give us a background like we are in like the same mastermind group, but we never really talked about how we all got started and that sort of thing. So what’s your background and what gave you the idea to create The Penny Hoarder blog?

Kyle: Yeah, so my passion actually has always been politics, and so for six years I worked on political campaigns and I was traveling all over the country and having a blast. But the thing about campaigns is that you are automatically fired every nine months when the campaign is over. So I was looking for ways to sort of fill the gap and get me to the next campaign, so I started doing all these really ridiculous things to make extra money.

And people would ask me how I was doing it, where I was finding these things, and I thought well it would be really fun to document the journey. So I created my first blog, I knew nothing about blogging, it was a BlogSpot domain. And I just started writing about just silly adventures I was having.

Steve: Did that turn into The Penny Hoarder or?

Kyle: It did yes so it was originally thepennyhoarder.blogspot, and I think like a lot of bloggers I’m sort of instantly fascinating, maybe when I got that first adset check of couple of dollars that you can make money. I sort of wasn’t — I was spending 30 to 40 hours a week in addition to my regular job blogging, but I just knew that if I could just get enough readers this could be a real thing. I moved it to the thepennyhoarder.com, and kept up with it.

Steve: Wait so was it your intention to create a huge blog for revenue, or did it kind of happen by accident then?

Kyle: It totally happened by accident.

Steve: Okay, so when you are on BlogSpot you clearly got a pretty decent following back then or?

Kyle: Yeah I mean decent maybe like 50 people a day that’s…

Steve: No, that’s not bad yeah.

Kyle: That’s huge, and I could just see the multiplication effect, and wanted to see how far I could take it.

Steve: Then you did not grow up in like a wealthy household either, right? All these topics that you are blogging about kind of struck home; these are things that you actually did, right?

Kyle: Yeah that’s absolutely right, I mean I grew up in a middle class family, but saving and budgeting was always a family affair. I was always joked like my mom used to really get us into like we would have competitions every month to see how low you could get the electric bill.

We would take — I’m not kidding you, we would take turns everyday going out and reading the meters on the side of the house and we would shut them. We had shut in the house, and we would challenge ourselves, and if we would beat the bill from the month before like we would all go out to dinner or something. It’s always really a family affair and same with making money, but [inaudible 00:05:24].

Steve: That is hilarious.

Kyle: My mum always had these silly things, she was a mystery shopper and so many other things, and we always did as a family, it was always a lot of fun.

Steve: So Kyle how does a blog — and this is probably going to blow my mind because whenever I tell my mum how much I make on my blog, she is always like what! How is that possible? I mean your blog is an order of magnitude larger than mine, so how does a blog generate $8 million of revenue a year, so what are you your main revenue sources?

Kyle: Yes, so we — this makes it price a lot of other bloggers, but banner ads are a very small portion of our revenue. The industry is really moving towards native advertising, and that’s where we thrive, so we build our content for our partners, and they either pay us on a flat basis or pay us based off on how many leads or sales we send their way.

Steve: Can you just define native advertising for some of the listeners who might not know what that is?

Kyle: Yeah, it’s a good question because there are a lot of different definitions for it. But the way we consider native advertising is — for us it’s content, and it’s content that is branded with the sponsor in mind.

Steve: It’s like one of those TV shows now when you are watching, all over sudden it focuses on the car and it’s like, oh I just love this cruise control of this car in the middle of the show right? It’s kind of like…

Kyle: Yeah exactly a product placement which can sound kind of nefarious, but because there are a lot of examples of really poor, native advertising on the web. But for us it’s always been really important to one, only recommend things that we would recommend no matter what. Even if we weren’t getting paid we would still write about it.

And two is to make the native content almost better than a regular content. We want readers to really feel like they were glad they clicked that headline, and that they actually learned something even though it’s sponsored and even though we are getting paid for it.

Steve: Give us an example of one of your most successful native advertising campaigns?

Kyle: Yeah, so we’ve done a lot of work with some of the market research companies like Spiebucks [ph] and [inaudible 00:07:42] dollars. Those do really well with our readers because our readers are looking for extra ways to make money. It’s one of our best, we’ve gotten really specific with our targeting, so we’ll do a state level posts like here are the best jobs in Georgia.

And in addition to sharing Spiebucks link, we’ll share plenty of other non sponsored content as well. And we hear all the time from readers who get these emails they got a job, or they made some extra money doing this and that. And that to us is the best part; I mean our success is when we get those emails that say I actually got a job from this article.

Steve: The advertisers are okay with you advertising their companies in front of potential competitors as well?

Kyle: It depends on the advertiser, sometimes there are advertisers that want an exclusivity, but that — in our opinion those actually make for often times less compelling content. I never want it to be a thousand words just a glowing review on a sponsor. We also tell our sponsors when they come on board that we reserve the right to point out the negatives, so we wanted to be a very unbiased review.

And our testing shows that those actually convert better, when you point out like the negatives that readers are more likely to take and trust you, and more likely actually try the product or whatever it is you are suggesting.

Steve: Yeah, for sure actually so would this be considered native advertising, so on my blog I often do comparisons of different services, and I get down to the nitty-gritty and I point out the flaws and the good things about each, would that be kind of considered native advertising.

Kyle: I would, I would actually consider that yeah.

Steve: Okay, and so when someone comes up, so first of all do you go out and seek these opportunities or do they kind of come to you?

Kyle: That’s changed I think in the last six months. It used to be like we wait for them to come to us, but we’ve began to hire our sales force now, so now it’s a little bit more proactive.

Steve: When they come to you is it just because they see a site with lots of traffic they want to get in front of for the most part?

Kyle: Yeah, that’s generally it, yeah generally it’s traffic, or sometimes it’s also because they might see a competitor on there, and they’ll email and say, hey I noticed you wrote about such and such how do we get that?

Steve: So I mean how did you attract these guys in the very beginning when you didn’t have so much traffic?

Kyle: Well I think every blogger can relate to this that no matter what your size is, you are always getting these emails from PR companies or from people who want to link. And even though I wasn’t willing to accept their premise and just write about them, I use this as opportunities to build relationships. So I would just respond to the PR person and then say let’s jump on a quick call and chat about this.

For me it was always about getting on the phone, and I think a blogger sometimes will lie on email too much and say X sales are made on the phone or in person. Once I can get on the phone and I could properly communicate what I was doing in my passion and who my readers were, it always became an easy sale. Even when I didn’t have that many readers because brands know the value in having influencers recommend them.

Steve: Sure absolutely, so what’s funny is you told me that you only had one employee up until like six months ago, but doing these sponsor type of campaigns it actually takes a lot of work right and a lot of communication. So how do you manage that, it’s not automated right obviously?

Kyle: Yeah, oh I wish it was. Well I have always dreamed of one of those businesses, you just set and forget it. Now it is a lot of work, it absolutely it is, and I find that the more work you do in communicating with the client the more likely you are to get a second campaign out of it, that’s how [inaudible 00:11:41] is to get another campaign.

We put together these in addition to like keeping contact. At the end of the first month we put together like just pretty little Photoshop report for them as how much traffic we send and how many leads they have. It’s often the same information they have, but sometimes just having it not only visually there, but to show that you are on top of it I think that really helps us.

Steve: Okay, so with only person though how can you possibly manage enough of these campaigns to generate millions of dollars, this was kind of what I was getting at?

Kyle: Yeah, we’re certainly out of one anymore, so we have almost 20 employees now, so that’s helped to improve, and increase our volume quite a bit. But I would be honest with you before that and I had a good team of freelancers, but it was also just a lot of hustling. It was 18 hours days I was doing what I could, I had a team helping build this as big as I could.

Steve: Outside of these sponsor type of campaign — oh actually I was just curious before we move on from sponsor campaigns. Like what is like the average rate given a certain amount traffic for like a sponsor type of campaign? I know it probably varies all across the board, but if you can just give us a rough idea of how much you can charge versus your traffic that would be great.

Kyle: Yeah, I think it depends again whether you are charging a flat fee which for small bloggers I recommend just charging a flat fee rather than affiliate. In general I think the going rate is between $75 and $150 CPM. So for every thousand people let’s see it, you can charge 75 to 150, now that’s one piece of content. So you have to kind of look at your average content. If your average gets 2000 views, then maybe you can charge 150-200 bucks.

Steve: I see, so it’s actual views, it’s not just overall traffic from…

Kyle: Correct.

Steve: Okay, what I mean by that is, is it capped or is it like lifetime views, or is it just an ongoing CPM; does that make sense what I’m asking?

Kyle: Yeah, we structure in all different ways depending on the advertiser, but I think well we are decided over the flat is we generally offer our guarantee to advertisers. So in our case we offer a guarantee that they’ll get at least 25,000 page views in the first 30 days. And for that we charge $5000.

Steve: I see, okay, and how do you decide whether to go affiliate versus CPM?

Kyle: That’s often part guide and part of what we found in the past. So our traffic is largely mobile, so we’ve learned that offers that have really long signups, so something that might be three or four pages of singing up or that require a credit card, don’t convert as well because not many people want to be doing that on their phone. If it’s a simple offer where it’s just an email address and a name, that’s more likely for us to do better on our affiliate bases.

Steve: Outside, so outside the sponsor content you have banner ads. I think that industry is slowly shifting, right? I know a bunch of my buddies who used to run sites which relied on banner ads, it’s like slowly declining over time. Are you guys still kind of showing those ads or?

Kyle: Yeah we still show. We still show banner ads, but I can tell you it’s less than 10% of our overall revenue, and I don’t think we are the only ones. When I look at really large publishers like Huffington Post and Business Insider, they are all getting into this affiliate or performance marketing game too. Have you seen these Business Insider picks where they’ll just, they review something on Amazon and they put it on Amazon?

Steve: Yeah. Actually what’s really annoying still is people still have those, they break apart the page into different pages and then– I hate that.

Kyle: Yes. I hate that too. One thing I’ll give credit for BuzzFeed is they never went the slide show route.

Steve: Yeah, I hate slideshows. Okay, sorry I cut you off though. You were saying something about native advertising in some of the larger companies.

Kyle: Yeah, it’s growing. And the other part of it that I see are more large media publishers getting into the subscription business. So choosing Business Insider again, they had this Business Insider intelligence now, and it’s weak and expensive. I think it’s like $1500 a year, but you get pre-email contact to your email.

I’ve seen like Talking Points Memo which is a big new site, they’ve done the same thing where for $50 a year, you get an ad free experience. Media is definitely getting tougher and publishers need that recurring revenue to be able to count on.

Steve: Are you guys doing anything that generates recurring revenue?

Kyle: We are certainly trying. We partnered with Erin Chase this fall on a course called The Grocery Budget Makeover. We are going to be rewriting that this spring. Just one way we are sort of dipping our toes into that and that kind of market.

Steve: So we got sponsored posts, you’ve got banner ads and then we have deals with popular bloggers like Erin Chase. Do you guys sell your own products at all?

Kyle: No, no never sold anything other than The Grocery Budget Makeover.

Steve: Okay. Those I guess sum up all of your income sources then for Penny Hoarder?

Kyle: You got it, yeah.

Steve: So it’s more like, you guys are kind of like a more traditional type of blog I guess?

Kyle: Yeah, I think we hope to eventually be in the category, be seen as a media site.

Steve: You definitely are already. I apologize if I insulted you.

Kyle: No, not at all. We are on our way. We are not quite there yet. We eventually want to be mentioned in the same graph as the Business Insider or something like that. We certainly have a lot more work to do when it comes to building an audience.

Steve: So let’s talk about building an audience. You went from zero to millions of visitors per month in like four years pretty much?

Kyle: Yes, I assume a bit more about five years now and we are around 6 million uniques a month now.

Steve: Wow, I underestimated, I apologize again. I’m just like insulting you left and right here.

Kyle: No. You can never insult me.

Steve: Okay, 6 million, that’s crazy. I don’t even know what that feels like, well I did know what it feels like when you crushed my site, but six million visitors a month. How do you– let’s go back to the early days. How do you gain traction? How did you get your early followers, and how did you scale so high in such a short amount of time?

Kyle: You mean besides just making my mum read the same article every day? I followed the same play book that everybody did. For me…

Steve: Obviously not Kyle.

Kyle: In the beginning it was all about networking with other bloggers. I was into that site [inaudible 00:18:52] building relationships there. I was commenting on a lot of other blogs. I also did a lot of giveaways. I partnered with hundreds of blogs on different giveaways. Anything I could do. I really don’t believe in that if you build a day will come. I actually believe you have to build the traffic. That was the early days for me. Then I started getting a little bit of PR. I got mentioned on Ubber.com and [inaudible 00:19:24] like Woman’s World Magazine.

Steve: How did you get those by the way? Did you actively seek them or was it just kind of…

Kyle: They came to me.

Steve: Nice.

Kyle: That was kind of a little bit of a luck. Then I started experimenting with paid advertising. I wasted a tone of money. It was a very expensive learning process, but once I started to crack that code and learned how to buy traffic that would convert on our site and pay for itself, that’s when the explosion really started to happen.

Steve: Just so you guys know out there listening, Kyle spends millions of dollars on Facebook ads every year. That’s accurate, right? Millions of dollars.

Kyle: It is, yes.

Steve: Yes. Okay, he knows Facebook ads, and I was hoping to kind of shift the conversation now and talk a little bit about that since that was kind of how you got your early traction for your blog, was primarily Facebook.

Kyle: Yeah, that’s where it really started to grow. Actually before Facebook, it was Tabula. Tabula was my primary advertising source. I couldn’t make Facebook work. This was like right when Facebook first got their ad exchange. I think a lot of other publishers experienced the same thing that quality wasn’t as good. That’s a complete turn about now, and Facebook is now our primarily source of paid traffic.

Steve: So Tabula is like Outbrain, right?

Kyle: Exactly yeah.

Steve: Just for the listeners, Outbrain and Tabula, I don’t know if you’ve noticed at the end of blog post there’s links to other publications, and you get paid per click. Is that how it works?

Kyle: Yeah exactly. We use them as a publisher too, we add them at the bottom of our articles, and anytime we sent traffic to another publisher we get paid per click.

Steve: Do you guys still use those services or not anymore?

Kyle: On the paid side? Yeah a little bit. Definitely not as much as before though.

Steve: Because I know for traffic like that it’s like all over the place right, meaning it’s not targeted, it’s random traffic, right?

Kyle: In general, it’s not very well targeted. However, they are adding more targeting options now. The problem with Tabula and Outbrain, well they are great. They have so many millions of publishers and only a small percentage of them are really high quality sites. You really have to do your homework and pick out sites that you want to target and not just let them run the network.

Steve: Let’s talk about Facebook since it’s very targeted. I actually got a quick lesson from you during our mastermind retreat last year. I actually started implementing some of your Facebook strategies earlier this year as kind of like a New Year’s resolution. Okay, I’ve run Facebook ads successfully for my physical products, but with the blog it’s a little different. So you are driving traffic to your content, and so first of all my first question is how do you know whether they are profitable? Do you know exactly how much a visitor is worth on a particular page?

Kyle: We do, yeah although not at first, so any time we publish a new piece of content, we have to figure out what that page is, it’s called our PMS [ph]. The revenue per user and so every new piece of content has its own RPU. And we do use a piece of software called [inaudible 00:22:47] to help us figure that out.

Steve: How does that work. Like how do you figure that out?

Kyle: We take out all of the different offers, all the different ways we are getting paid from that article, and we add it up and then simply divide by the number of pages we got in the same time period.

Steve: But how do you know? Like if it’s an affiliate offer, you don’t have conversion tracking information for that offer, right?

Kyle: Thankfully we do. With our platform has offer, so we actually have the advertiser place a pixel on their page, so we can track when it gets converted. That’s how to scale quite a bit. In the early days, I didn’t have that. I was a lot of guess estimating, and it didn’t always make for good advice, because I didn’t know exactly. I would say, I think the RPU is between this and this and this and this amount. We got a lot more specific now.

Steve: That was the missing piece of the puzzle for me at least. You can actually convince an advertiser to add one of your tracking pixels on their check out success page.

Kyle: Yes.

Steve: Okay, do you need cloud to do that?

Kyle: I didn’t – being a high volume partner is helpful. So you don’t necessarily need to be a big site, but if it’s a good partner for them, then yes it helps. The other easy way to do it is to go through the affiliate networks. Often times your affiliate manager can help facilitate that.

Steve: Interesting. That’s one thing that I’m definitely not doing. Okay, so you figure out how much money a visitor is worth, and then what’s the next step of the process?

Kyle: Yeah, so then really my role is to be able to buy traffic for less than that, and hope that the conversion rate stays the same because obviously paid and organic traffic can convert very differently. From there, we start testing ads. We often test hundreds and hundreds of different creatives to find one that gets us a really low cost per click.

Steve: In the beginning you said hundreds of creatives, so you just start out– so there’s different components to Facebook ads. There’s the creative, there’s the target and then there’s the bidding I guess. Let’s say you had one post that you wanted to promote, how do you tell– like what’s your targeting, like how do you start with the targeting?

Kyle: I’m sure if you ever used like the Facebook power editor, it’s a little bit clunky, and it can be really difficult to build a lot of ads pretty quickly. So we get to use another software, and it’s really affordable called AdEspresso. What’s great about it is I can just add in all of my headlines, all of my images and all the different things I want to target, and AdEspresso will build out an ad for every single variation.

If I give it five headlines, five images, and five different groups of people, I’m going to get 125 different ads. It takes literally like 30 seconds to build. That’s been really helpful for us, because then once they are alive, you can start to track to see not only what headlines they are working the best, but what groups are responding to it. That can help you narrow your targeting down even better.

Steve: What’s your initial budget during like the testing phase while you are trying to figure out what’s going to work and what’s not?

Kyle: It depends on the article obviously. In general I say that for every variation you make, you need at least 20 bucks for that variation to get statistically significant result. I don’t suggest making 150 variations if you are not ready.

Steve: Sure of course. I was just curious how you do it, so 20 bucks per variation.

Kyle: Yeah, in general that gets you a few thousand impressions per variation.

Steve: Do you just let Facebook do all the bidding for you in the beginning?

Kyle: I do. That actually is a strategy we changed recently. We’ve moved to letting Facebook optimize the bid. We found that actually in our case has resulted in the lower CPCs.

Steve: Do you have a conversion goal for this, or do you just set it to clicks for the website?

Kyle: We don’t currently use Facebook excellent conversion goals, but we are hoping to get that done this quarter.

Steve: Interesting. I was just curious when you’ve experimented whether it has made a difference in the types of people that it sends or shows the ads to.

Kyle: Yeah, I’m really curious about that too. We think that’s going to be huge for us is having these with optimized based off of conversions.

Steve: Okay, so you are bidding based on clicks to your website, it sounds like you are letting Facebook just bid whatever it wants. Given like– we had a conversation prior to recording here and you mentioned that some of your CPCs are like below ten cents sometimes as low as two cents. And in my experience at least, it has taken me a long time. Some articles I can get like, I think the lowest I ever got was like six cents, but some articles I can just never get it down to there. What is your process for getting the bids down lower?

Kyle: Well, I will say one thing that we do differently than a lot of Facebook advertisers is that we use much bigger targeting groups. Facebook is great because you can get so fine. You know you can pick out people who just watch Simpsons after 11 o’clock. It’s insane how crazy it gets. The more targeted you get; the more expensive the click is going to be. Our content, we also finance a much broader appeal or we hope it does. We don’t get too fine. We like to have groups that have at least ten million people in them.

Steve: Wow, that’s huge.

Kyle: Yup. It definitely helps with CPCs. Then beyond that, we write out, often times, up to a 100 headlines per post. We will just exhaust our creativity in coming up with different ways, and then pick out our favorite five or ten to test on Facebook, but you have no idea how important that is. I consider myself a pretty good headline writer, but when I actually get down to testing them, sometimes one headline will get CPCs at 30 cents, and sometimes I get some at a penny even though I thought they were both just as good. Writing out millions of headlines is super important.

Steve: Actually incidentally if you guys are listening, I pretty much use The Penny Hoarder now when I’m just brainstorming different headlines. Go onto his site and check out some of the headlines that he has. They are very clickable. They are not annoying ones either where like he leaves you hanging, and then you click and you are dissatisfied with the results. He actually follows through with the content that matches the headline. Anyway it’s quick log for the…

Kyle: Thank you. I appreciate it; yeah headlines have changed a lot in the last year. It used to be you could write these really leading headlines and of course they always had ellipses after them. Anybody would click anything, but I think we all got wise to that, and got tired of it. Now, the new trick is to, you still want to leave a curiosity gap in the headline, but you want to give more of it away.

I’ll give you an example; I saw a really good headline yesterday. It was, I think it was from CNN. It was “89 year old grandma graduates college. Here’s why.” Like you know exactly what happened. You know how old she is, you know she’s graduated, but of course I want to know what she was going to do with her degree like there was still curiosity there, but I didn’t feel like they were beating me.

Steve: Yeah, then you will have a headline like “Here’s like ten ways to make money just surfing the web,” or something like that and I’ll be like, oh I can make money surfing the web? I should check it, and then you’ll give all these services where you can actually do that, right? It’s important to follow through.

Kyle: Yes, exactly. I mean, your CPCs will always be high if the users aren’t sharing once they get to the site. That’s really the secret to driving it down. It’s you need people to share it. The better your engagement rate is, the more your Facebook will show your ad, and the lower your CPC will be.

Steve: 20 bucks per– so it sounds like you have different creatives, different headlines, and then do you different landing pages too? No, the pages are always the same. You don’t change the landing page, right?

Kyle: We are going to start working on that this year. We are working with an AB set software to like test different introductions and different ways to lay out the article. Because like I said, the engagement rate is probably more important than the click through rate now. We really feel like we need to test our content as well.

Steve: What I was trying to get at there was does that the headline always match the title of the post when someone lands?

Kyle: It definitely matters. The headline certainly matters. That’s the first impression people are getting of you. But if they aren’t sharing it, then Facebook will give what’s– they have this new score card called the relevancy score which is how well people actually liked the post. And Google is doing the same thing with organic now. They are measuring how long people are staying on the site, are they sharing it, are they bookmarking it. Then using that as a parameter to impact your CPCs.

Steve: Is how you manage to get such low CPCs because so many people share your content?

Kyle: Yeah, that’s definitely a huge part of the puzzle. Then that also has the added benefit of bringing in some free organic traffic which of course lowers the CPC further.

Steve: Just curious, outside of just having big share buttons on your site, what are some other ways that you encourage people to share?

Kyle: We’ve been testing a new share button now that’s really fun. It’s the Penny Hoarder. It’s now our share button at the button of your mobile screen is a penny. You just slide the penny to share it.

Steve: That’s cool.

Kyle: It’s just a little bit different. I think we all read so much content now that people get blind to the same thing over and over again. Anything you can do that’s a little bit different certainly helps. The last thing we do is when we are drafting our post, we actually write on the draft, who will share this post. If there’s nobody in our office that’s willing to share the post with their friends, it’s not a post we want to put on the blog, because if we are not going to share it, our readers are not going to be willing to share it.

We look for pieces of content that have target, like groups behind them. I’ll give you a really great example. I saw this post earlier this week about this guy who worked for Nintendo and he’s revealing 15 Mario secrets. That’s such a great targeted post, because we all have a friend that loves Mario, or we have some memory growing up with it. When you look through the comments, it’s not a bunch of comments commenting on Mario, it’s people tagging their friends and saying, “Remember third grade or whatever.” I think we look for content that does that same kind of thing.

Steve: Interesting. Actually that means it pays to kind of link different themes together and kind of mix like the guts of the content in with it.

Kyle: Yes.

Steve: It’s basically what you are telling me.

Kyle: Yes absolutely. I’ll tell you, the most viral post we ever heard was last month. We wrote this very short 300 blog post. Red robin was giving away free food, and we write about free food all the time. It does well, but this guy almost 2 million hits in 48 hours. And the reason is that the way Red Robin was giving away food was if you had a certain name. I think it was like if your name was Michael or Betty or whatever.

We got tens of thousands of people commenting because we all know someone named Michael. I think those are the posts that do well on Facebook now is it wasn’t that it was free food, it’s that we wanted to share it with somebody and let them know we were thinking of them.

Steve: That is an incredible tip actually. Do you guys find that you are doing this more now on The Penny Hoarder. I actually subconsciously didn’t even notice. I’m going to poke your site right now.

Kyle: Yeah, we are. We are certainly trying to do a better job of that, trying to figure out who it is that will actually share this.

Steve: Do you find that you are getting a lot more traffic from Facebook as opposed to like Google?

Kyle: Facebook is definitely a bigger traffic source for us, but to be honest with you the organic traffic we receive from Facebook has certainly declined. That’s something all publishers are feeling that Facebook shows organic stuff less and less.

Steve: The reason why I asked is I find that, so I get a lot of Google traffic and that’s actually where most of my traffic comes, and all that traffic tends to be really targeted and converts pretty well. I was just curious what your experience has been with Facebook traffic in terms of conversions versus Google.

Kyle: On the organic side, yes. Google is more– those visitors convert better for us. On the paid side, we’ve actually had better success with Facebook. Because with Google most – targeting options are keyword based, and with Facebook you can add obviously demographic and permission in there which we find has an even bigger impact.

Steve: And so do you actually buy AdWords ads at all?

Kyle: We do yeah.

Steve: Okay. So you have to make those profitable first. Have you found that the AdWords ads for content have been too expensive?

Kyle: They are. In our experience, they are little bit more expensive than Facebook. I think it’s largely because of the keywords that are in our category. I mean, personal finance key words are usually the most expensive keywords.

Steve: Exactly, that’s why I was asking.

Kyle: Yeah. We don’t face that same kind of competition on Facebook.

Steve: Yeah, I was just curious how you get AdWords to work for you then. Like if you are paying like dollars per click. Obviously you are not paying that but…

Kyle: We don’t– yeah we certainly couldn’t afford to pay that much. As a result we don’t get as much traffic from it.

Steve: Okay, do you guys do anything special to increase your rankings in Google, or is that not like an area where you focus a lot of effort on.

Kyle: I wouldn’t say it’s big an effort for us although we just did bring on a PR person. It’s not so much for like building targeted links and on site optimization more; it’s just getting our brand mentioned on large sites which has the same effect. I think Google has made it very clear that they don’t want us gaming. Even though everyone does, and it still works, we try to be a good partner there.

Steve: Okay. Back to Facebook, it sounds like the way you get the clicks down, and then your traffic up on Facebook is you just try a whole bunch of different things. You spend 20 bucks on a whole bunch of different permutations of everything it sounds like. Then you stick with like the best three or?

Kyle: Yeah, that’s really a good point. I don’t– once I find the winning ad, I don’t turn off all of the other ads. I try to keep, like you said maybe like the top three. The reason is, is that in our case especially people have ad blindness. Once they’ve seen the same ad a couple of times, not only aren’t they going to click it, but a lot of times they get annoyed. They may block you or block the ad. I think it’s important to have a few ads in rotation so that your frequency stays low.

Steve: When does the frequency get too high for you?

Kyle: Generally like the CPC is at its lowest when the frequency is below three. By the time frequency has gone up 6 to 8, this is every person in your target group is seeing it 6 to 8 times.

Steve: Yeah, yeah, you let it get that high?

Kyle: I do, on certain posts because they– I mean we had some ads that we’ve been running for two years, and that have been seen hundreds of millions of times, but they still convert and so we’ll never get rid of them. We don’t get it; we get much less traffic from them. They may have been a high flier once before, but now maybe we can only afford to spend a couple of hundred bucks a day on them.

Steve: Once you find an ad that works, like do you gradually ramp up the ad spend. Personally just from my experience, I find that when I do a ramp and jump and bid like the conversion just goes to crap for a little bit.

Kyle: I think that’s true with anything. As you scale it, the conversion rate goes down and same with our display ads. The more traffic we get the lower our CPNs are. You do have to plan for that. In general yes, I do. If I have something that I’m getting for four cents and then converting on my site for nine cents, I’m just going to let Facebook go.

Steve: Meaning like no budget or?

Kyle: Yeah, we are very high budget. As long as– and we monitor them. We monitor them all day long even on the weekends to make sure that our ads are still profitable. Yes, as long as they are profitable I want it to be seen as many times by as many people.

Steve: Just curious, what is like no budget for you, for an ad? Like what’s …?

Kyle: I think we– well, I’ll put it in another way. I think maybe the largest ad we have, the most is we’ve ever spent is maybe $10,000 a day.

Steve: 10,000 a day? Good lord. So these audiences have to be large for you then.

Kyle: Yeah. That’s exactly yeah, like I said, not less than 10 million. We have some ads that the targeting is completely open, which is generally a big no, no.

Steve: Open as in like no targeting, like everyone in the US?

Kyle: No targeting.

Steve: Do you target international or is it mainly US?

Kyle: We double. I’ve had a tougher time with international audiences, but we do have a couple of Canadians and Australian themed pieces of content.

Steve: Every fall out like the look alike audiences at all?

Kyle: Yes, just in the last couple of months I’ve been doing more with look alikes. We’ve been growing our email list quite a bit, and so my concern is I always wanted to make sure we kept our audience to million plus. I had to have a large enough email list to build a look alike audience that was large enough.

Steve: It sounds like so with ten million plus your budget has to be big in general to kind of hit that audience. Is the reason you choose ten million because you don’t want to manage it like on a day to day basis as much?

Kyle: It definitely makes it easier. I guess our goals are a little bit different since that– the most important metric to us is unique users. We want to see that we are growing every month. We need, we have to expand outside of our core audience. We can’t just go after people that are fanscoupons.com, that kind of is part of my thinking too.

Steve: You guys don’t do any retargeting then or?

Kyle: We do a little bit of retargeting, but it depends on the article. Often times with our paid advertising, we are promoting the same thing that we’ve been promoting for a long time. We don’t want to make our audience; our current fans see the same thing over and over again. A lot of our ads are targeted towards new readers.

Steve: What is for your best performing ads like what’s a typical click through rate?

Kyle: Best performing ads are above 10%?

Steve: Above 10%? That is insane. Let’s shift gears a little bit to emails since you have 424,000, would you say 700,000 email subscribers. When you, just for the listeners, when you get that many emails, you can’t just like blast everyone all at once because that’s crazy. How do you manage your list, and what do you choose to send to who, and how do you manage that?

Kyle: We’ve always been really protective with our list. We never rented it out. We never even let a sponsor buy it out. For us, we want to keep a really high open rate, and so that’s always meant having just as engaging content and the newsletters we do with our site. We use it primarily as a way to drive traffic back to the blog. These are our most dedicated readers.

It does get challenging when you get that many. I told you in the beginning, I didn’t know anything about blogging when I first started. I’ve had to learn a lot about even the text side, just to be able to manage that kind of list. We do use an email service provider, but we’ve had to be more strategic about bringing on additional theme, like additional IP addresses and making sure that we are spreading the send out over multiple hours, so that we don’t get targeted spam.

Steve: What’s considered a good open rate for you? What are you happy with when you send out a blast?

Kyle: Our target is 30%.

Steve: 30%, that’s really high. Does that imply then you have a very well segmented list.

Kyle: We don’t have a well segmented list, but we do clean the list quite frequently. So if someone stops engaging with us, we will send them an email asking them to please start reading us again. Do you want to stay out of this list or not? If they don’t then we remove them, because we want to keep a good open rate, and a good click through rate.

Steve: What are your metrics for doing that like people haven’t opened in six months or?

Kyle: Yeah, six months is generally the metric we use. I also– I guess the one segment we do use is we have a segment of our really engaged users, people that open every newsletter and they get the email first, because the way things like [inaudible 00:46:32] work which is this imaginary score that every email gets that tells Gmail or yahoo whether to let your email come through.

You want to have your initial emails being opened a lot, and you want to have people clicking them, because that’s a sign to Gmail that this is a trusted piece of content. We send to our engaged users first, and we let it build up a little bit of traction, and then we send it out to newer users and less engaged folks.

Steve: Interesting. Have you found the measured difference when doing this?

Kyle: Oh yeah, absolutely. You can see it in your bounce rates too and your spam rates.

Steve: Wow. I did not– I don’t do that. I did not know that. So you always do two sends for everything?

Kyle: I do yeah. Actually we do way more than that because we also AB test the email. Every email has just like our Facebook ads has multiple tasks for email subject lines, and we’ll often even AB test the images and headlines inside of the email as well.

Steve: Do you do AB testing on your loyal readers or the other guys?

Kyle: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay. So for the loyal readers, you said they open everything. Are you just testing click through rate at that point.

Kyle: Yeah, I mean even with our loyal readers, the open rate is less than 50%. It’s hard to get much higher than that unless you personally know that person. It’s still useful to us. Again, even though we think we are great at headlines, it’s not uncommon for our best email to convert twice as well as our worst subject line.

Steve: Okay, so we are talking 30 to 50% open rates. That is amazing. Before we got on this podcast, you were telling me like the ways that you acquire email addresses is pretty cool too. Can we talk a little bit about that?

Kyle: Yeah, sure we use a company called Bounce Exchange. I know like Exit Intent is really big right now, any user getting ready to leave your site, whether they’ve– when they use it by tracking your mouse. It sounds kind of creepy, but when your mouse gets close to your back button on your browser, we ask you to subscribe to our email newsletter via a light box on overlay. That’s been working really well for us. In fact the last couple of months, we’ve started collecting over 10,000 emails a day.

Steve: Just think about that for a moment for everyone listening, 10,000 emails a day. That is just insane. There is a lot of blogs out there who don’t even have 10,000 subscribers.

Kyle: Believe me; I had maybe a thousand subscribers for 4 years. It still surprised me that that many new people are subscribing every day.

Steve: You were mentioning that the service also tries different things and it tests all the different forms for you, so it automatically shows the one that converts the best, right?

Kyle: Yes, our model here is all about putting signs behind properties, so viral is something that sounds like it can be replicated. We are hoping that we can figure out, crack the code here. Everything on our site gets tested and that includes these email overlays which are always changing not only the words in there, but we test things like the button color or when to show it to you. And it’s again it’s amazing what a difference in the click through rate it makes.

Steve: What is your most dramatic difference in one of your tests?

Kyle: Last I think that maybe 18 months ago we changed the color of links on our sites. So whenever we were linking out to whether it was on affiliate offer or even just some news article, we changed it from dark pink to dark purple, and it resulted in a 17% increase in click through rate. Just one little X code we changed which also meant 17% in revenue.

Steve: That’s insane because whenever I teach like split testing, I always like don’t bother with the colors like focus on the big things like the headlines. So here you are like totally debunking that, and changing a color and making such a big difference. I think just for the people who are listening out there Kyle can do this because he gets insane traffic. If you don’t have insane traffic, I wouldn’t test colors that’s just my — I don’t know would you agree?

Kyle: Yeah, absolutely. You start with the big stuff always, but every time I think I have become an expert I am completely humbled by an AB test. And I told you at the beginning that I used to work on campaigns, and I still take so much inspiration from the way political campaigns are doing internet targeting, it’s way more advanced than most blogs or ecommerce companies.

We all know like the story of the Obama campaign for 2008 and the crazy targeting they did. But they also on their contribution page they never stopped testing different ways to lay out that forum, or different colors on the submit button. And they estimated that those AB tests equaled an additional $50 million in contributions from them, and that to me is still an inspiration to never stop testing.

Steve: That blows my mind, what software do you use for your split testing?

Kyle: Optimizely for the site.

Steve: Okay, awesome, hey Kyle I have already occupied your time for 50 minutes, thank you so much for coming on the show. I learned a lot, and I am actually going to be implementing a lot of stuff that you were talking about starting with the initial send, that’s a great idea, I had no idea.

Kyle: Yeah, I’m so glad you invited me on; it was a blast chatting with you.

Steve: So Kyle where can people get a hold of you, what should they check out on your site?

Kyle: Well of course you want to subscribe to pennyhoarder.com even if you don’t want to learn about money, making extra money…

Steve: Who doesn’t want to learn about making extra money?

Kyle: Hopefully maybe you’ll get some ads and headline inspiration.

Steve: No, the headlines are amazing, no joke, go check out the headlines; you’ll definitely learn something just through the copy alone. And plus the site is just pretty amazing from an aesthetic perspective as well.

Kyle: Well thank you, I appreciate that.

Steve: All right Kyle, thanks a lot man.

Kyle: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Steve: What an incredible episode, the numbers that Kyle have demonstrated are truly mind blowing. And I actually recorded this episode a couple of months ago, and I decided to kind of just check his numbers, and he is at 729,000 email subs now, and almost 2 million Facebook fans, that is crazy.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode112, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

111: How To Make 190K In Your First 7 Months Selling Jewelry Online With Toni Anderson

How To Make 190K in Your First 7 Months Selling Jewelry Online With Toni Anderson

Today I’m really happy to have Toni Anderson back on the podcast. Now this is isn’t the first time I’ve had her on the show. Way back in episode39, we talked about how Toni manages to run a 6 figure blog, a conference, consult on the side and home school 7 kids.

Now a lot has changed in the last year. For one thing, she decided to stop consulting and then reached out to me wanting to try opening an online store to replace the income from consulting.

So she signed up for my Create A Profitable Online Store Course and her results have been staggering. In just 7 months, she’s made over 190,000 and over the holiday season, she made 100K in just a single month.

Toni had never sold a physical product before prior to this and she did not leverage her existing audience for sales either. And today, she and I run an ecommerce conference together called Sellers Summit. Check it out!

Sellers Summit Tickets Are On Sale Right Now

What You’ll Learn

  • Toni’s motivations for starting her ecommerce business
  • Her process for product selection was and how she went about validating her niche
  • What she learned selling physical products online
  • How she found the vendors for her online store
  • Where she looked to find her suppliers
  • Why she decided to carry inventory and the thought process behind the decision.
  • How she made her first sale.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really happy to have Toni Anderson back on the show. Now this isn’t the first time I have had her on the show. Way back in episode 39, we talked about how she managed just to run a six figure blog, a conference consultant on the side and home school seven kids.

Now a lot has changed in the last year since I last had her on. For one thing she decided to stop consulting, and then she reached out to me wanting to try opening an online store to kind of replace the income from her consulting gig. She signed up for my create a profitable online store course, and her results have been incredible. In just seven months she has made over $190,000 and over the holiday season she made $100,000 in just a single month.

Now I have had students make six figures within six months before, but this is actually the first time that any student has done 100K in a single month in such a short period of time. And before you get all excited I just want to preface this by saying that Toni had never sold a physical product before prior to this, and she did not really leverage her existing audience for sales either, but she does have a special personality.

For example she is fiercely competitive, and I would personally never want to go up against this woman, because she will relentlessly beat you down until you give up. So one time we were casually chatting about getting in shape and losing in weight, and I mentioned something along the lines of I can lose weight pretty easily if I want to.

And instead of just saying cool or whatever she challenged me. She said, “Steve I’ll bet I’ll get a six pack before you loser buys dinner.” And I was like okay yeah whatever. Anyway my point is that I get a lot of questions about how long it takes to make significant money with ecommerce, and truth be told it really depends on two things. One, knowing what to do, and two your personality and your persistence. Toni just happens to have both, and I sure hope she doesn’t decide to sell hankies now, and with that welcome to the show Toni, how are you doing today?

Toni: I’m great thank you, how are you?

Steve: Good that was like the longest intro ever.

Toni: I know I was laughing the whole time, I [inaudible 00:04:18] out.

Steve: So glad to have you back. Give us the background here, so first off why ecommerce in the first place, why did you approach me, and how did you come up with what you want to sell?

Toni: Okay so why ecommerce. I had been consulting I think when I met you, I had been consulting for about three years, and I think we talked, I loved it, I loved what I was doing. But after a while I realized that consulting took me away from why I got on to the internet business world to begin with which was, I really wanted to work for myself.

In consulting yeah you are really accountable to somebody else, and you are really on their schedule, and you are really limited by the number of hours you have in a day because we are usually paid by the hour, by the project, and so you can only take on a certain number of projects, or you are trying to spend a number of hours a week.

I really wanted to get back to sort of the entrepreneurial beginning that I had had with blogging, and some of the other businesses. And I really felt like ecommerce was a logical step based on the fact that I had this large audience from my website, and really thought I could leverage that to help move a product.

Steve: In picking what you decide to sell did you choose something that you could use your audience for, because I understand when we talked earlier that you didn’t really use your audience in this initial seven months at least.

Toni: No, it didn’t work at all like my whole plan did not work out at all, but that’s okay, it worked out well. I definitely went with a product that I knew that my audience would be interested in, and so– and that was when — I think I started your course last January, so 2015. And really just wanted to — I knew nothing about ecommerce, importing scared me to death. I had no idea how to set up a seller account on Amazon, or how to you use Shopify. So I just spent a lot of time going through the videos and really trying to educate myself on this whole world of ecommerce which was very new to me.

And during that time a good friend of mine came to me with an idea for a product, and as soon as I saw what she had I knew that there was something that when I could leverage with my audience. But two I felt like it needed a lot — it met a lot of the requirements for selling a product. Being a smaller product, good margin, not breakable, things like that, things I had heard in your class and from other ecommerce sellers.

Steve: I know we are not talking about the exact product, but are you free to mention like what genre in general or what niche?

Toni: Sure I sell jewelry.

Steve: Jewelry okay, all right, and so how did you go about validating that this was going to sell? Like kind of what was your process for knowing that it was going to do well?

Toni: One of the things that we did was look at what we are deciding we are selling, so was it being sold on Amazon, was it being sold on Etsy, was it being sold on the daily deal sites. And one of the cool things about daily deal sites like Zulily or Jane, things like that is that it actually shows you the number of items that are sold of that deal.

We watched it pretty carefully on some of those sites and saw that there was actually pretty good evidence that this would sell. Even so I was really hesitant to jump in and spend tens of thousands of dollars, because ecommerce was so new to me, I didn’t want to be stuck with something.

And I know you talk about, and other people talk about being able to liquidate stock, but that did not appeal to me. I sold on eBay in the very early days, and I really didn’t want to go back to my eBay roots. I wanted to find something that would work, so we started out really slow, I think we purchased like 200 items to begin with.

Steve: What was your initial outlay?

Toni: I think we spent under $500 initially on products. Product and packaging and all that fun stuff that you realize that you have to buy after you buy the product. I think we did $500 at first, but very quickly moved to a bigger order because within the first couple — I think first couple weeks on Amazon we knew it would sell.

Steve: Well lets back up a little bit, so you looked on jane.com and then you found out that this thing was selling, were you selling something very similar or the exact same item or…?

Toni: Very similar, not exactly the same. We decided to make some changes to it because they were — we realized that there would be a lot of competition if we did something that was exactly like somebody else. We did make some modifications to it, but not very minimum.

Steve: In terms of Amazon not very many people were selling it on some of the other market places?

Toni: There was almost, I think there were two sellers on Amazon when we started.

Steve: Okay and then you mentioned early on in the interview like things didn’t go as planned in terms of promoting to your own audience, why was that?

Toni: Well we’ve — since the beginning we’ve had a lot of trouble because the item ended up being very popular, we have had a lot of trouble with our inventory. We actually — I was really excited because I had always wanted to use Google AdWords and things like that, and I never really thought it would work on a blog.

I was excited to learn about those things with ecommerce and it’s funny because I haven’t been able to do any of it, because we haven’t had enough inventory to actually promote outside of just Facebook post and very minimal. We did do some Pinterest promotions initially. I have a pretty large Pinterest following, so I did do some strategic pinning just so, because one of the hard things about selling on Amazon is that you can’t track on the other side.

So I was hesitant to spend any money to advertise on Amazon outside of Amazon’s own ads. What I did do with Pinterest was I would pin like specific skews, and that would be the only place that we would mention them. So we wouldn’t run any Amazon ads, we wouldn’t even mention on our Facebook, so we would only — that would be the place that could drive a sale outside of Amazon itself retargeting and things like that.

We did do a little bit of that, but outside of that we really weren’t able to leverage my branded Facebook fan page from my blog or running Facebook ads or anything like that, we just didn’t have the stock to really push that.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit. What was it — first of all what was the order you did everything? So first of all you figured out what you want to do, and then did you order from overseas right away or…?

Toni: No, we actually and I think you might have mentioned this in one of your office hours was to order it on Etsy. I think that was you, right?

Steve: Yeah, well for your particular thing yeah.

Toni: Yeah, so we did an order in the states on — I think when we ordered the 200, we ordered them out of California. We probably paid double what we pay now, maybe even triple, I’m not sure, but it was substantially more. But it also when we got the item, and I think it was five days and the communication was a lot easier and things that I felt were really big hurdles for importing, we overcame immediately by finding someone in the US. Now of course they are getting that same product from overseas, but it just, they were the middle man for us, so that’s how we started.

Steve: So your first order was just from Etsy, how many units was it?

Toni: The 200.

Steve: 200 units, okay and then you threw those up on Amazon first.

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: And they sold out — oh so what did you in that first batch to kind of promote it, you mentioned Pinterest?

Toni: So we pinned — so we had two skews initially, and I think I pined one of them and the other one we shared on Facebook just like on our personal my Toni Anderson Facebook page. Just shared it with friends, just more because we were excited that we were doing a new venture more than anything else, so it wasn’t really, hey go buy our product, it was, hey we are really excited having a business. So that was all we did initially.

Steve: Did you ask for reviews or anything during that period or?

Toni: I can’t remember exactly when we asked for reviews, it might have been in that order or our second order, but I basically went into your forum and posted, hey, I have a product if you want to review it, I’ll send you one, and I think we ended up doing maybe 10 free products.

Steve: Okay, I’m just trying to remember now because it’s kind of a blur, so when you — yeah did you sell out before you got any reviews, like you sold out without nay reviews or?

Toni: We had a couple of reviews when we sold out the first time, probably under 10 though.

Steve: Those were organic probably, right?

Toni: I think you left us a review.

Steve: Yeah, I did buy one yes.

Toni: I think we had a couple of reviews from friends, but it was funny is that several of the people that work for me on my blog ordered, and one of them actually got a broken product.

Steve: Oh is that right?

Toni: And I messaged her, and I said, hey are you going to leave a review and she is like, I don’t think you want me to. Anyway yeah…

Steve: Come to think of it, I didn’t get it for free; I think I paid full price for it.

Toni: You didn’t buy it, sorry.

Steve: All right, so you sold out your first batch, is it time to go to China at that point or?

Toni: It was and we had already been talking to some suppliers when our sales — I think I don’t remember what we sold the very first day, but within the first couple of days we knew that 200 would not last. Plus we still had this daily deal that we were going to do as well, like we were going to run a daily deal with the product.

So we had already been talking to some vendors and really just struggled with how many do we order, or how do we negotiate on the price, are we going to be happy with the quality, all these sorts of things. And we finally found the vendor that we felt like we could work with, and so at some point while we had those first 200 listed, we ordered I think a thousand was our next order.

Steve: Did you find these vendors on Alibaba or?

Toni: We did, yeah.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about that a little bit, so how did you screen these guys out, what was your selection process like?

Toni: We ordered samples, and that was kind of tough. Our product is not super expensive, so looking back on and I probably would have done the minimum order quantity instead of the samples, because I think we maybe got there or four. And we really needed to see a lot more than that for consistency and quality. And it’s not a lot — if you have a $20, a product that costs you $20 obviously the minimum order quantity is probably not going to work.

But when you have an item that’s much cheaper than that that seems to me looking back what I wish we would have done, because we had a lot of bad orders in our first couple of months. We did things like going back and forth with them; I think we used your email templates to communicate with them as far as not letting them know that we were the decision makers and things like that. And basically just went with the person that we felt like their samples were the best quality and that they were the fastest.

Because at this point we knew our stock was getting low, and we knew we were looking at four to five weeks between when we ordered and actually getting the product. The person that seemed like they were communicating with us the quickest, and then getting us samples and things like that the quickest was the person we ended up going with initially.

Steve: And were these samples exactly the same ones that you were getting from Etsy or?

Toni: Yeah, exactly the same.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of minimum order quantities what were they asking for, and how much did you end up purchasing?

Toni: I think the minimum order quantity was 200 or 300, but we did a thousand on our first order.

Steve: And I know because we’ve been chatting like you had some horror stories, can we just kind of talk about the whole process and like what you went through?

Toni: Sure so…

Steve: And how it could have been prevented.

Toni: Yeah get an inspector would be my number one. So in that first order we were getting very low in stock on Amazon. And we were really anxious to get our order, because we knew as soon as we got it we would need to — so what we do is we order the product, it comes to us from overseas, and then we do — we make modifications to some of them.

We package them in our own packaging which we had this manufacture doing first a little bit and then we took it back over, because it was actually harder to quality control, because it meant un-packaging things. Anyway so we package it ourselves here, and we have people doing it for us in our town.

The first shipment that we got, we were so excited, and it finally arrived and we were like getting a big crew together to get it ready to go to Amazon and it was the wrong size. We had ordered a thousand of this product that we basically couldn’t sell because the size is listed in selling for Amazon was not the size that they sent us.

That was our first big issue and we ended up buying some replacement parts and actually remaking them ourselves, because we knew that that would be quicker than putting in another order and trying to get — it would be another five weeks out to get new product.

Steve: So did you just end up junking those or — the chain was shorter, right?

Toni: Yeah, so we ended up adding different chains to everything, because it was just too — we needed them to sell like we didn’t have the choice to junk them, or we didn’t have the choice to offer a smaller size because we needed the skews that were starting to get reviews, and starting like — one of our items ended up on page one on Amazon in like three weeks. So there was no way we were going to like create a new product when that product was already picking up speed. We ended up redoing like a thousand pieces of jewelry.

Steve: Wait, so did you end up getting those parts on Etsy and kind of…

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: Okay got it.

Toni: I think from our same person in California, I think it was the same person that we used to get the initial badge.

Steve: This actually wasn’t the story I was expecting you to tell, because you this happened to Ken, right?

Toni: So we contacted the supplier and we were not happy and we said this is unacceptable like it’s very clear this wasn’t like it, we went off by like a millimeter, we were off by inches. So we went back and forth, and they were going to give us some credit, I don’t remember exactly how it worked out, but it sort of got us thinking like, hey we need another supplier because this person who seemed pretty reliable and fast just shipped us a thousand of the wrong thing.

So we found a second supplier who we were also very impressed with, who kind of met all the criteria and whenever the product was done she send us pictures from the factory. And we said it looks a little off on the color and she knew exactly what we like, we’ve been very specific on what we wanted.

She said, okay, I’ll fix the color, and I don’t know if there was a communication after that, because I have a partner in this too. So I don’t know if there is communication between fixing it and us receiving it, but we ended up receiving what looked like a charcoal mass of jewelry, which also came at a point where we absolutely needed stuff to stay in stock, and this was something that we could absolutely not do anything with to fix, like there was no replacing the chain or even a modification. We were stuck with our gothic line of jewelry.

Steve: Wait, so how did this happen again, so you got sent a picture and it didn’t look right, and it just somehow got delivered anyways or?

Toni: Well, the picture that she sent us initially the coloring actually looked too light, so we asked it to be darkened a bit. And I guess she took darkened a bit meaning burn it in the fire. So we ended up once again I think this was another order of a thousand, this is our first order from her, and so it was a thousand of this piece of jewelry that we just couldn’t — I mean we couldn’t sell under any of our existing skews.

Steve: So okay so what do you guys do now to prevent this from ever happening?

Toni: We actually got in touch with a company that does the inspections, and are working with them now to — unfortunately because we then — so that put our inventory off again. And then at this point we were budding up against the holidays. So our next big shipment we actually contacted the inspector, sent them our samples, filled out all the forms, but our samples did not arrive to them before we needed our next shipment.

We ended up kind of scrapping them, because once again we ran out of stock. So kind of just all we do, so anyway but so we actually we have an inspector that we have I guess contracted with. And they will be moving forward inspecting our products mainly for sizing, color, and quality. And then that’s really — for us that’s really the only thing we can do outside of things like sending them more pictures of what — like say if it’s a New York company like more, if it’s a company we have worked with before more pictures our products that we are already selling.

One thing that we decided we were going to do is because some of them asked for our listings and we decided not to give them to them. That we would just send them a picture of the product, because I feel like that just opens the door for piggybacking which I didn’t want.

Steve: Why don’t you just tell me your business, or you just tell me what your — yeah.

Toni: Yeah, why don’t you give me all of your listing descriptions and everything else?

Steve: How much are you paying for the inspector, just curious?

Toni: I think it’s about $300, and I don’t remember the order was pretty substantial when we initially contacted with them and we wanted them to inspect. I think we were probably about 70,000 items, not probably six skews, but maybe a thousand of each.

Steve: It sounds like you were just selling so quickly that you didn’t even have the opportunity to do operation inspector before the holiday season. And it’s just now that you are just kind of wrapping up the inspector.

Toni: Right, so we try to ramp it up at least we started the process I think in early October after we got our charcoal line, and after that…

Steve: Let’s call it the goth line.

Toni: The goth line, yes, sorry the goth line, so after we got the goth line we realized we really needed to get someone over there to help us, because this was — and this was actually we had another entire shipment I think of 3000 skews that were absolutely the wrong thing shipped to us which we got completely refunded.

Steve: Okay, let’s elaborate on some of these things, so goth line you couldn’t do anything about, so you just kept the goth line.

Toni: Yeah, and I ended up — so I heard from somebody that you could sell anything over the holidays. So I thought, hey, our list is on Amazon, and we’ll see if anyone would buy them, and listed them in a pretty steep discount from what we typically charge, and we sold out, so we sold them all.

Steve: Yeah, pretty amazing right over the holidays like literally, yeah?

Toni: Yeah, I was like really you guys don’t know what you are buying. But yeah I mean they weren’t in bad condition, they just were not at all what we wanted to sell. So we ended up being able to liquidate, I think we had about 800 sellable out of a 1000, so we ended up being able to liquidate all 800 of them.

Steve: Okay, the shipment of 3000, I actually did not know about this one, you guys shipped the wrong item, what did you do with that, how did you get the refund?

Toni: They admitted that they completely screwed up the order, and I think the guy we actually worked with doesn’t work there anymore, I’m not sure if that’s why, but this was his second mistake with us, and they are actually still sitting in my bedroom.

Steve: Oh so you didn’t have to ship anything back, and the fact that you had ordered I guess a couple thousand units already, they were nice about it.

Toni: We had already probably ordered 5000 units from them when we got this, and we had already ordered the same exact product, and so this was our second order of this one, and was just completely wrong. They admitted that they had made a mistake, and I think shipped us — I think they didn’t refund our money, they shipped us the right product for no charge. So basically it was washed right, like we got what we wanted.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about just how you kind of established a relationship, did you guys Skype with your vendors or anything like that, or was it just email?

Toni: We have not Skyped with any of our vendors although I’m in a focus group and all of them are Skyping with their vendors, and I have been very pleased with that process. And actually it helped them weed out some vendors that were difficult to Skype with, so it’s something that I want to talk about with my partner moving forward, because we have had trouble finding good vendors. We have done everything via email and then via the Alibaba chat feature, so that’s all of our communication has gone through that.

Steve: Yeah, I mean for us at least we always try to meet them face to face, obviously people can’t do that depending on the situation. But Skype works pretty well and you often presently surprised by who you are dealing with, at I have been.

Toni: Yeah, I think it’s really beneficial and a couple of other girls in my group were able to immediately, they were choosing between one of two vendors for their first order and it became every clear after those Skype conversation which one was the one that they felt like they clicked with and understood them better, and was more professional and things like that? I definitely think it’s something that we should be doing, because it seems like it solves a lot of problems in the process.

Steve: Sounds like you only have one vendor right now, is that still the case or?

Toni: No, we have — so we have a second vendor now although our last shipment had a 25% damage rate from that vendor. So we are working with them to try to figure out how that can be rectified because that’s obviously not acceptable.

Steve: Well let me ask you this, would you have gone with multiple vendors from the start or do you feel like the way you kind of preceded was what you felt comfortable with?

Toni: No, I absolutely would have done multiple vendors from the start.

Steve: Okay, even if you didn’t know like whether your stuff is going to sell, like would you still have — like based on your initial 200 order, was that enough for you to just place like a bulk order of like a couple of thousand units?

Toni: Yeah, absolutely, so that initial 200 I would have just gone with one vendor for sure like we did. We got the person in California, but as soon as we saw that those were selling, I think it’s because we were taken a little bit by surprise at how well these products sold. So from the second or third week of being in business, we felt like we were always behind as far as how many do we need to order, should we start a new skew, what’s — is this worth it?

So we were trying to do all these things at once, like should we introduce new products, what do we do about quality, how do we find vendors, how are we going to set up our store, all these things trying to do them all while we are also processing our products here. So it was really a lot considering I wasn’t thinking like, hey I’m going to do this 50 hours a week from the beginning.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, let’s talk about the pain. Okay we so far we’ve talked about everything that’s kind of gone right outside of like the inventory, can we just talk about like the Amazon pain right now, your experience selling on there?

Toni: I love selling on Amazon, I think it’s great because I get Facebook messages and emails from everybody that I have ever met with screenshots of my product, and ads on other websites, but Amazon is painful. I love being able to be in front of that like huge audience on Amazon. In that way it’s great, it’s really easy to do the FBA as far as once you get a hang of getting your labels and packing up and shipping it to them, it’s really nice not ship your own stuff out, especially when you are first getting started and you don’t really have a set up to do that.

Steve: Wait, I thought you loved shipping your stuff out yourself?

Toni: Oh well only during the holidays.

Steve: Okay, well we’ll get to that part of the story, sorry go on.

Toni: I loved that that they make it really easy for you because you basically put all your stuff in a box, ship it to them and they deal with a lot of the customer service; they deal with a lot of the delivery issues. So it’s really taking a lot of work off of you, however they are taking what, 30% to 40% of whatever you make.

And on top of that Amazon, I mean I am an Amazon shopper, I probably buy stuff on Amazon five times a week, and I love that they are so amazing to buyers, but with that comes the cost that they are really crappy with their sellers. When you have a problem with Amazon, it’s not uncommon for me to talk to like 16 people at Amazon before I get to somebody that can help me.

Or they can help me with like one very small specific detail of my problem, but then of course they have to send me to this person who is not available and they’ll have to call me back. So there have been days where I’ve spent and my partner has spent three to four hours either on chat, on the phone, on email with Amazon trying to correct a problem that really wasn’t ours to begin with. In that way it’s you take the good and the bad, so you take the big exposure, you take the ability to sell to a lot more people, and having them promote your products with the fact that they control everything.

Steve: So let’s elaborate on some of the reasons why you had to contact Amazon support.

Toni: So in October I woke up and checked on my listings like I do most mornings, and there was my listing with my picture and my description and with a totally different price. And not really having a ton of experience I thought we had been hacked. So I’m panicking, I’m calling my husband, I’m thinking like this is the worst thing in the world, and I’m thinking like has my whole Amazon account have been hacked, what’s the deal? And then come to find out after a little bit of research is that we were actually piggy backed which is it’s — I don’t know what it is; it’s a process or a thing that is actually allowed by Amazon, where someone can sell your same product under your listing for a different price.

And from everything that I have now read about it and know about it, it’s kind of like if Nike is selling their Nike jogger shoes on Amazon. Well if I’m like the footlocker I can sell Nike shoes on Amazon too, but the deal is I kind of have to stay in the same price point as far as Amazon etiquette goes. And with piggy backing what I think seems to happen with most like small businesses like me, and probably other people in your class is that people that are piggybacking you are not like a footlocker or a DSW, it’s a vendor in China who’s under cutting you by like 70%.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. Here is where Bench accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports. So no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced, and the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months, now back to the show.

And in fact they are probably not even selling the exact same product either.

Toni: Yes they are absolutely not selling the exact same product, so it’s like your product is getting your [inaudible 00:32:56] pass for much cheaper.

Steve: So okay so you get piggy backed, what did you do about it?

Toni: So I panicked…

Steve: Well besides that, that’s obvious yeah.

Toni: Yes I panicked, I read every forum post, every Amazon– I spent eight hours on Google. I think I talked to you and I ended up– you connected me with Lars who is like the Amazon expert. And the first thing he told me to do was match their price, and went back to buy box, which was a little difficult to take, because that minute I was dropping my price by several dollars and when you don’t have an expensive product you are cutting into your profits pretty significantly radically by doing that. But the theory behind that is when they have the buy box they are seeing the volume that you are selling, because they are getting all the sales or a good percentage of them.

I mean one of the interesting things about when people are piggy backing you is they are usually an FBA, they are usually shipping form most of the time China, so people have to wait four to six weeks to get their item. You can still get sales if you don’t have the buy box and that’s your situation, but our situation was we saw almost like our sales went from probably 20 units a day to two. They were getting all of our sales.

Steve: Right, and the shipping was a lot longer right since it was coming from China and not shipping the same stuff so that could really have screwed you up.

Toni: Yes, because what I also found out which is makes Amazon suck is that they order a product that’s your product although it’s not really yours from a seller that’s not you, and then they leave a review of that product that’s not really yours on your product. When they are getting merchandised, it doesn’t actually fit our description.

And we have branded packaging and we sell some accessories with it, so you are really getting something very specific when you buy from us that wasn’t coming with the product that was — that they were selling from overseas. The potential for us to be hurt by negative reviews was really high, because they were selling a significantly inferior product with all pictures in our listing that made it look like they would be getting something very different.

Steve: So how did you end up getting rid of this piggy backer?

Toni: So one of the things you can do is you can have someone, a friend or someone you know order the item from the piggy backer, and then contact and file an A to Z complaint or submit a return. There is a bunch of different ways you can do it and depending on when you get– someone on Amazon will let you do this before you actually get the product, but in our situation our people couldn’t do anything until they had the product in hand.

And then the first time we did it what happened was is that they went to file the A to Z complaint which is I think the place you go to file like a counterfeit or the item wasn’t as described type of complaint which was supposed to almost immediately get that seller suspended was that Amazon told the buyer and of course we knew the buyer, so we are talking to them as the process is going on.

Was that if they — they had to first contact the seller, and in our case the seller actually accepted the return which we had been told that that wouldn’t happen. We were told that, oh its form China, they don’t want to mess it, they are just going to like not mess with the return at all, they are not going to contact the person, but our seller actually did. We ended up like the first two times we had someone order this piggybacked product the seller ended up taking — seller ended up letting them return it, so they couldn’t file the A to Z complaint because the seller had issued a refund.

Now I think on the third time they were actually able to file the A to Z complaint and then on top of that we had them leave seller reviews on Amazon. There is the listing review of the actual product, but then the seller has its own reviews, so we had them leave reviews basically stating that, hey, I got this product it wasn’t as described, it’s a counterfeit, things like that to bring their seller review rating down.

Because when they initially started they had like two reviews there both five stars. And we had like five stars too, but we had 50 or whatever, but it didn’t really matter because our people really see that we have achieved the five stars filled up on Amazon. So we had them do that, we had them contact Amazon, and then at one point they actually took over our listing.

Steve: Yeah I remember that yeah.

Toni: So I logged in into my dashboard and I couldn’t edit anything because it said I don’t remember the exact words, this listing is not owned by you or something. And they actually weren’t allowed to do that, because during the very first piggy backing we went and got the brand registry which I…

Steve: Yeah I was just going to ask yeah.

Toni: Yes which I wish we would have done in June; we ended up doing it like October, September maybe. So that was actually really easy to do, there is a tutorial on Amazon, it’s…

Steve: Yeah, you guys should always do that first because otherwise it leaves your listing open to people just taking over the entire listing.

Toni: Yes, which we thought we were protected against because when the piggyback initially happened we did the brand register. And it only took us like 24 hours to get brand registered maybe 48 it was very, very quick. We contacted Amazon and said, hey we can’t access our listing, we are brand registered, and it was basically equipped on Amazon.

They had never actually put us as brand — even though they had sent us a confirmation and we had gone through all the process. And they had said we completed the steps via email. They had never adjusted it in their backend. As soon as they took over our listing, and then we reported it and we got them to acknowledge our brand registry, the piggy backers actually were gone in like a day. So I don’t know, so it’s kind of like we don’t really know exactly which one of our five techniques worked, but one of them did.

Steve: Yeah usually after a series of complaints at some point Amazon — it will trigger something within Amazon, and you haven’t seen those guys since right?

Toni: We haven’t although our gothic line has actually been piggy backed.

Steve: Oh really?

Toni: Yes, but we are sold out, so I’m like good riddance you can sell all those that you want.

Steve: Maybe that was actually a good product upfront, maybe these goth people are potential customers that you haven’t tapped yet?

Toni: Yes, I feel like we missed the boat on that one for sure, but…

Steve: In fact for your podcast image I might have something a little cooked up here for you.

Toni: Oh good great.

Steve: So let’s talk about — like let’s stop talking about Amazon for a moment and did you have your own site at this point or?

Toni: We tried to launch the site I think in August, we just used Shopify, I think even — I think we used a free theme. It’s very similar to WordPress, so I actually was able to set it up pretty easily by myself. We got it set up I think in August and did a soft launch on Facebook because we still were sort of messing with our inventory stuff, so we didn’t really…

Steve: And don’t you need product to sell?

Toni: You do, so…

Steve: You do right okay.

Toni: So we had a Facebook page that probably had 1500 fans for our brand. And we did like a Facebook class like, hey we have a store, here is a coupon code back to school or something like that, it was time around school started. And right after that I think was when we sold out of something again.

So basically we stopped talking about the website after that, so we did maybe one or two Facebook things in the first couple of weeks to decide it was live. And then we just stopped because we really felt like since Amazon was like a clear working model at that point, we really felt like we needed to send all of our inventory to Amazon as opposed to holding inventory back for the site.

Steve: Can we talk about your Facebook page real quick, I think we glossed over that, but how did you build up a page o 1500 people?

Toni: So I actually followed I think it was Neil Patel, right about the time that we got started. Did some sort of experiment where he was trying to grow a Facebook page and a blog on like help in nutrition and he was doing this whole the tests with how to build fans quickly. I basically thought — I was actually trying to find a link to give it to you the other day, and I couldn’t find it, but I’ll dig it up. But basically I think I might have promoted it — I promoted it on a personal page, we bought likes, or bought fans or whatever they are calling it these days.

Steve: How much did you end up paying per like?

Toni: 3 cents.

Steve: 3 cents okay.

Toni: And basically we did that and I think it was Neil that talked about this is it, you set your language in your areas that you will buy the fans from, and so you can keep from getting a lot of junk likes. And then so we did that, I watched it pretty closely and I think we set I don’t remember how much we said we were going to spend, but when we had about 1000 fans we shut that campaign off. And we didn’t spend more than definitely under $100, and that’s about…

Steve: Do you know how many sales were attributed to just that Facebook page, you probably don’t know right?

Toni: I know that almost all of our — no okay all of our store sales before Christmas were attributed to Facebook.

Steve: Okay and how many — what was like the ball park?

Toni: Oh we probably had 15-20 sales, so not many, but we didn’t — we didn’t promote it. And the other thing we did with the Facebook page is that when we started it we were buying the likes or the fans, but we were also posting content that would be — we thought about like our ideal customer, who’s going to buy our product.

And then we would post content that that person will probably like or share on Facebook. So we didn’t post anything about our products, we just posted articles or funny like the [inaudible 00:43:07] and things like that in order to just get people to like comment or like or share which grew the page organically.

Steve: Like people with dark make up, emo [ph] music, that sort of thing right? Okay.

Toni: Yes, 18 year old teenage girls, yes, that’s really who we marketed to.

Steve: Okay so that Facebook, okay so it sounded like you had like inventory problems, so you really didn’t have an opportunity to even work on your site, and plus you probably would have had to fulfill these sales yourself with your site also, right?

Toni: Yes.

Steve: Let’s talk about going forward, so you have this Amazon channel, like going forward are you going to work more on your site, or like what’s your future plan?

Toni: I think for the future, obviously we are not going to walk away from Amazon, it’s been really successful for us, and I feel like there is — since we started there has been — we’ve had a lot people come in with competition. But I feel like we are ahead of them as far as we have a lot of reviews now just from selling the volume that we are selling.

And we do sell some products that are not much harder to copy. So I think we are going to obviously continue to focus on Amazon although at this point there is not much we can do with Amazon outside of customer service, so fixing any problems people have, watching the reviews, I know one time we had on one of our products, it actually has really great reviews, the top review was a terrible review.

It was like everything under that was like amazing, like I love it, it’s awesome, thank you so much, you guys are great. We ended up being able to like push that review down and put some better reviews. So things like that watching the reviews, watching the pricing. So making sure that we are priced competitively with other sellers out there, now that we do have more people trying to do something similar, and then launching like one or two new products that are a little more expensive.

That’s the Amazon plan. Then the other goal would be to really start working on the site and key one just because I feel like Amazon does take a large cut of what we make, and after all the piggy backing and all that that happened in the fall, it really kind of opened my eyes to the fact like this all could be wiped out in a second. I don’t want that to be something where we are 100% dependent on the Amazon revenue.

Steve: Let me ask you this, do you plan on still having Amazon fulfill even your store orders, right?

Toni: I didn’t know about that.

Steve: Oh, maybe you should watch some videos.

Toni: I didn’t know about that until like two weeks ago. Yes, that is definitely, actually my partner and I talked yesterday and she didn’t know that either. I brought that up and that actually seems like a really great way for us to do it, just because I’m not a huge fan of shipping the stuff myself, but I’m also not a huge fan of keeping the inventory at my house.

Steve: Just, a lot of the listeners don’t know the back-story, but at some point you ran out of inventory at Amazon’s warehouse and shipping more inventory to the warehouse would have taken too long, so you decided to ship stuff yourself, right?

Toni: Right.

Steve: Without any equipment, without any know-how of like the whole shipping process, no software and you ended up driving to the post office to deliver your stuff?

Toni: Oh yeah. They know me there now. Everybody, we knew that black Friday and cyber Monday would be big, and we still were having issues getting of course inventory, because–and this was the big reason why I think having one supplier is really dumb is because we ordered this huge order for the holidays, and it just he did not ship, something was wrong, then this happened and then he shipped part of the order, he didn’t ship the whole order. It was like a ten week total process to get our full order. We had expected to have inventory like November 1st and we didn’t get the last shipment until like December 17th. He was like our only guy, so we have nothing else coming in, we have no relationships because we had to fire the lady who sent us the goth necklaces.

We just didn’t have any other levers we can pull when we were having issues with this guy. It really put us in a bad spot as far as just not having anywhere else to turn when things, when he didn’t live up to his end of the bargain. So anyway, we did really well on black Friday, I think much better than we thought we would. I think, from what I’ve heard from other sellers, everybody had a really great black Friday and cyber Monday. I think things were up for a lot of people, but what it meant was between the increased sales of the holidays and our piggy backers. So our pricing was really low, so we were not only beating out like the big firms, we were beating out all of our competitors because we were priced lower. We were also beating out our other products.

Our products that were selling really well, then stopped selling as well because we had these two products that were piggy backed. They were priced three to four dollars below what everything else was priced in the entire market place. Those items were not at stock over the Thanksgiving holiday. All I could hear at the back of my mind was Lora saying, “Don’t let them see your volume, don’t let them see your volume.” And I thought we had received part of the shipment, but they were still at my house like we hadn’t processed it and send it off the Amazon yet. The only thing I could think of was, well, I’ll just ship it out from here. I’ll switch it to merchant fulfilled, offer free shipping, because it still was– we still made out better doing that.

Steve: I think this example just kind of illustrates how persistent Toni is. Some normal person would have probably just said, hey I’m going to enjoy my holiday, I don’t want to be packing and shipping stuff where I have no experience doing this whatsoever, but there you go.

Toni: That’s what I did every Thanksgiving break.

Steve: Real quick, what’s some advice you would give just to people who are just kind of starting out. You haven’t really been doing this for very long. What would you tell people who are just thinking about at least just starting out with Amazon at least?

Toni: I think there’s a few things. One, get in a focus group. If you are part of the course, I know that you can– I think you can meet people that way. I actually joined the focus group really late in the game. I think I joined in October or November, but that’s actually been really, really valuable for me, because as I look into other products and other ideas, having people to bounce things off of, and then me as someone who’s been doing this for not very long but a little bit longer than everybody else in my group, I’m able to give them a perspective that I can say, “Hey you should look into this.” I’m not going to tell them everything, but then they can go into the videos or the blog post or whatever on your site or whatever else they are getting their information, and doing more research on things.

When I got piggy backed, I’d never heard of that before. But now everybody in my focus group knows all about it, so if anything like that would happen to them, they automatically they are like five steps ahead of where I was when I started. I think the focus group is really valuable to have that group of like a couple of people to bounce ideas off of, get advice, even like, have you had trouble with the vendor like doing this, or do you think I can get my samples for less, things like that. That would be the first thing.

The second thing is I really do think your product matters. I think we got lucky. We came up with, we didn’t have to research for a product. The idea was before we got started. I think finding something that is lower competition, quit trying to do what everyone else is doing. Find something a little bit different or new or hijack a trend that you can sell an accessory to or something like that, because I think that’s really valuable. Because when you have a lot of competition, it’s really hard to beat out the people that are on the first page of Amazon. And honestly like second page of Amazon, you are like you are dead. No one is finding you there.

You can use like Jungle Scout, it’s a great tool to research and find out where the products rank and what the opportunity would be like as far as the revenue. I think that’s a big thing. I guess my third thing is really take all the pricing into consideration. You might find a great product that doesn’t have a lot of competition and that might actually be in demand, but when you do the math, which you know I love…

Steve: Toni is excellent at math.

Toni: I’m terrible at math, that’s why I love all the little calculators you can use. Sometimes it’s not worth your time. We had a couple of products this summer that we actually have just kind of let die a slow death on Amazon, because when we priced out the math, the cost of our product plus what we pay people to package and ship it off, our margin isn’t worth it for us. Unless we would do in a million, it wouldn’t be worth it to make a dollar off a product. I think really doing the math on– and I think you have a really good calculator where even does the shipping cost where you can compare like your freight and things like that.

Steve: Yes. That is me.

Toni: He will have the link in the show notes for you, but anyway …

Steve: Who’s giving this interview, are you?

Toni: Sorry. I won’t give out your phone number. I won’t let them call you. I think things like that. It’s easy to get carried away when you think you have a good idea, but I really recommend researching every aspect. Like how long is it going to take you to package it? How much is it going to cost you to get it from overseas or from the United States wherever you are getting them from, things like that? You can quickly find out that this great idea might be absolutely terrible, because you are going to make so many five cents at the end of the day. So, those will be my three big ones.

Steve: I just wanted to throw this out there also, Toni had experience running conferences and I have experience in ecommerce, so we kind of decided to work together and we are putting on this ecommerce conference. I know that last year, towards the end of last year we actually went to a couple of ecommerce conferences together. And you had a really positive experience, right?

Toni: I did. I actually– I run a conference that’s blogging related. And one of the activities we did at our conference was to set goals for the rest of the year. So our conference is September. We basically made everybody group hug and hey let’s talk about some really crazy goal that you want to accomplish before the end of 2015. I said, “I want to do 100K in 30 days with my ecommerce.” As soon as it came out of my mouth I was like, “What did I just say? Like, that’s crazy.” I think I had been selling for three months at that point, four months.

But as soon as I said it I felt like man, I’ve got to hit this or what does my word to anybody after that, if I go off there and make some big proclamation and then don’t hit it. I went to that conference, did that and then you and I went to those couple of events in October and because I had sort of thrown that out there, I really felt like when I was at those events, that I needed to meet as many people, talk to as many people, learn as much as I could in those sessions, take notes, because there was in no way that I was going to get that goal if I didn’t have more knowledge about the wholesaling process.

I think honestly being at those events and having those like, eating lunch or sitting down in a hallway and having those conversations with people, I just think about– We had that conversation with Daniel Solid, the Amazon. He gave me two pieces of advice in the hall way that I think just kind of propelled us to the 100K which wasn’t in any session, it wasn’t– it wasn’t like someone stood in front of us and gave us advice, but it was like because we had this relationship and I ended up getting on a call with him a couple of weeks after the event and building a relationship, exchanging ideas, and so I think that attending those events was huge for me, because it automatically plugged me into a network of people that all are doing the same thing and didn’t want to help you. I think it was huge.

Steve: That is why I decided to start a conference working with Toni. It’s called the Sellers Summit. It’s at sellerssummit.com, it’s going to be a very intimate conference. We are talking no more than a 100 people, small focus groups, workshops, the people that Toni mentioned Lars and Daniel; they are going to be speakers at this conference. They will be there to answer your questions and that sort of thing. So, I basically took the conferences that I’ve been to and modeled it into the conference that I wanted to attend. Yeah, you still there Toni?

Toni: I’m here. I was like can I clap, I don’t know.

Steve: Yeah, go check that out. It’s sellersummit.com and Toni thanks for coming on and telling your crazy story, always a pleasure having you.

Toni: Thank you.

Steve: All right. Take care.

Toni: Bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Toni’s experiences is a clear testament to the power of ecommerce and Amazon, and the fact that she’s made over 190,000 in just seven months and as much as 100K in just a single month is amazing. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode111.

Once again I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring thing episode. As I mentioned earlier FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

110: How To Source Anything From China And Establish Good Vendor Relationships With Dave Bryant

110: How To Source Anything From China And Establish Good Relationships With Dave Bryant

Today I’ve got my buddy Dave Bryant on the show.  Dave and I met when he randomly reached out to me via email and we’ve kept in touch ever since.  And what’s cool is that we finally met face to face at the Ecommerce Fuel conference last year.

Dave runs several online stores selling boat equipment but I think his most successful site sells boat anchors of all things:)   Big and heavy boat anchors that he imports from China.  Talk about niche.

Dave also runs the popular blog ChineseImporting.com where he teaches others how to import goods from China.   He’s been importing since age 16, he’s written a few books about the topic and what’s cool is he works with his wife just like me.

Today, we are going to discuss his businesses and some more in depth topics on importing that go way beyond your typical find a product to sell on Alibaba stuff that you’ve heard in the past.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Dave got into the boat anchor business.
  • Why Dave decided to sell the heaviest, most unwieldy items possible.
  • Where Dave finds his vendors.
  • How to find Chinese vendors outside of Alibaba.
  • Which sourcing services Dave recommends.
  • Dave’s opinion on Alibaba vs Global Sources vs Canton Fair vs using Panjiva and Import Genius.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical, whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous YouTubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50. The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I have got my buddy Dave Bryant on the show. Now I’m actually not 100% sure how we met Dave, but he randomly reached out to me one day and we’ve kept in touch ever since. And we finally were able to meet face to face at the Ecommerce Fuel conference last year.

Now David runs several online stores selling boat equipment, but I think the biggest business that he has sells boat anchors of all things. Big and heavy boat anchors that he imports from China, so that’s pretty niche as far as niches go. Now David also runs the popular blog Chineseimporting.com where he teaches others how to import goods from China, he’s been doing this since age 16.

He’s even written a couple of books about the topic, and what’s also cool is that he works with his wife just like I do. Today we are going to discuss his businesses and some more in depth topics on importing that kind of go beyond your typical find the products on Alibaba stuff that you’ve probably heard on other podcasts. With that welcome to the show Dave, how are you doing today man?

Dave: Good and I’ll clarify this because my wife is on maternity leave and the government of Canada would not like to hear about her working for me. She does not currently work for me, maybe in the future.

Steve: Everybody works for their wife Dave; it’s cool to admit it.

Dave: That is true, I only work for her, but she does not work for me.

Steve: I have always been curious how does one get into boat anchors of all things, like they are the heaviest most unwieldy things that you can possibly sell in my mind?

Dave: The lucrative world of boat anchors, so it’s kind of funny, way back when I was in university I was kind of a globe trotter, and I was always in the back [inaudible 00:03:53] crazy parts of the world. One of the things in my bucket list is — one of the countries to visit was North Korea, and the only way to get to North Korea is through China. Believe it or not there is no direct flight from Canada to North Korea.

I had to go through China to North Korea. I was – decided obviously while I’m in China I might as well travel around a little bit. And while I was there I decided to visit a couple of trade shows. I had always worked — I had worked with a family friend working for his import company actually. He was selling boat anchors himself. I was over there and I kind of split off with him, I didn’t talk to for a couple of years.

I was kind of familiar with the business itself, so I attended a trade show while I was in China, a boat trade show. I met a supplier there and I kind of hit it off with the supplier and he had this one product that I was really interested in, and it was boat anchors. I asked him if I could bring one of these samples back with me to Canada and he said sure no problem.

I took this boat anchor and there is actually a couple of other products with me, and I had this huge box of products I carried around me for the next 3 weeks all throughout Asia. And I was like going on trains and I was going on buses, and I was going on…

Steve: With the boat anchor?

Dave: With the boat anchor and actually people I’m sure said all things. Anyways long story short I made my way back to Canada somehow all the products arrived safe and sound. I put them on eBay even though I got the products for free; I knew the cost was about $50, sold them for I think around 200. Of course I went back to the supplier, I asked him, hey can I can buy some more products off you, of course he agreed, he sent me some more products, again had a similar success. And fast forward about 7 years later and the supplier to this day is actually our largest supplier.

Steve: Amazing, so wait you sold things on eBay, did you have the intention of creating this business at the time or no, you were just testing?

Dave: I mean it was a test to me. I knew like I said, I had worked with a friend, our family friend way back when he was actually doing something similar to boat anchors himself. And I kind of split off from him, and he had gone on his own way doing different things. I was kind of testing the water more than anything.

Steve: Do you own a boat?

Dave: I do not.

Steve: You do not own a boat, but you went to — okay you went to a boating…

Dave: My family has been in the boating their entire life, so I think that’s probably part of the reason why I don’t own a boat myself. I have grown sick of the [inaudible 00:06:14] over the years. It’s a great clientele to work with, but by myself, or I myself, no real interest in boats.

Steve: Okay and then you are based in Canada, right?

Dave: I am.

Steve: Okay, so for the listeners what’s kind of interesting about Dave and I get a lot of questions about this. He is in Canada, but he actually makes most of his sales in the United States, is that right?

Dave: Yes, absolutely true.

Steve: Do you ship to any other countries besides the US?

Dave: The way we work is we don’t — we actually don’t inventory anything in Canada really, everything is inventoried in the US. We ship anywhere in the world like pretty much any congress country. But even if we are shipping something in Canada, we actually ship from the US to Canada. We sell something to the UK the same thing going from the US to UK.

Steve: That implies that all of your goods when you make a shipment goes straight to the US and you don’t actually see it or?

Dave: It’s kind of a backwards way to do; we do it through the port of Vancouver and what they call your shipping in bond to the US. Meaning that it comes through Canada, we don’t pay any duties or taxes on it. It pays all the US duties and taxes, and then it goes directly to the warehouse in the US. But we never touch — we never put our fingers on it.

Steve: Okay so wow, okay I was going to talk about this later, but let’s try to talk about it now, what do you do about quality control?

Dave: We work with– I do travel to China once or twice a year kind of do a little bit of QA there. It’s a little bit tough to do it if you are not permanently situated in China as you might have experience with. Other than that we’ll use a third party inspection agency, pay $300 or $400, have them check it out kind of according to our checklist.

Then once it arrives in the US, then obviously we’ll have our warehouse down there do some QA there, take the [inaudible 00:08:00] we need it, and just kind of get an idea of the overall I guess quality of the products. And what was I going to say here? Yeah, we have such long lasting relationships with our suppliers where we haven’t really had any huge quality control issues, and when it has come up they’ve been pretty good at addressing it after the buck.

Steve: Because you told me earlier that you sell over 300 items, 300 skews, is that right?

Dave: Yeah, it’s about 300 skews. A lot of those are variations, so I would say it’s closer to probably 75 if you get rid of size and color variations.

Steve: Okay, and then for each one of these items you have a separate quality control checklist for each one of these?

Dave: I mean certain things you don’t necessarily need to have the stringent quality control checklist. So something like an anchor I mean more or less there is not a lot that can go wrong in an anchor, some of the…

Steve: Okay.

Dave: Some of the other things obviously yeah, you do need to– we have a certain checklist that we go through for example something like a rope. We’ll have a checklist, and basically asking them if it’s supposed to be happening throughout, we’ll have the third party inspecting agency or the supplier measure it, physically measure it to make sure it’s actually happened. We have a whole bunch of different criteria we use for all of the different products that we just kind of have either the supplier check, or have a third party inspection agency check, or have a warehouse checked after its been received.

Steve: In terms of sales you have your own website and you are also selling on Amazon, but if someone places an order on your site do you — like how does the communication go to your warehouse to — the shipment is from the US, right?

Dave: Yeah, so if somebody places an order on the website, it goes through our automatic — our auto management software. We have an order taker here, she basically just checks it over and make sure it’s all good, and then she emails it down to the warehouse and they ship it out. It’s kind of, it’s an old school way of doing it with this email and back and forth just a PDF invoices.

Steve: Interesting.

Dave: We are trying to get a little bit more automated, but a lot of times when you are working with these third party fulfillment companies especially some of the smaller ones, their automation schemes aren’t exactly up to today’s standards, so they prefer just the old PDF invoices even faxing them sometimes.

Steve: What about returns? Do people return anchors?

Dave: They do believe it or not, a lot of times they are on their boat. So it’s a pretty low return item, but people do return it like anything. A lot of gifts that people return and returns are a bit of a pain in the butt just for the fact that it’s hard without us really having any eyes and ears on the ground to handle returns.

But our third party fulfillment company that we work with, I kind of consider them almost one of the girls there, almost one of our employees because she’s been handling our orders for God almost five years plus now. She knows the products pretty much inside out, she can decide if it can be resold, it should be disposed off or whatever.

Steve: If it can’t be resold you just junk it?

Dave: Yeah pretty much. Well at times a lot of the products that we deal with are metals, so stainless steel items and they can actually be scrapped, and we can actually get a little bit of money back, I mean from when they are scrapped.

Steve: Interesting, so you said you sell over 300 items maybe 70 unique items, and you source all these from China, right?

Dave: Yeah, most of them are coming from China. We work with a few local distributors and manufactures in the US, a couple companies in Taiwan and even the guy in Canada too, but 90% of our sales are coming from Chinese made products.

Steve: I want to talk a little bit about kind of how you found these vendors. Now everyone who kind of listens to podcast and has been doing this, everyone talked about Alibaba, but let’s talk about some of the other things outside of Alibaba today.

Dave: Yeah, so I mean Alibaba is one of those things, it’s — You can’t really escape. And it’s like if you want to buy something online even if you don’t actually buy on Amazon, at some point they are probably going to be on the Amazon website. The same thing if you are looking for a product at some point you are probably going to come across Alibaba. But Alibaba is probably not the most ideal place to find a supplier, basically 99% of importers, that’s the first and only they go to is Alibaba.

If you find a supplier on Alibaba and a really good product and you are selling a ton of them on Amazon, somebody at some point in time is going to come along and see that, hey Dave is selling all these products, I want to buy the same thing. I’m going to go to Alibaba, try to find the supplier that Dave is using and just import the exact same product from the exact same supplier. If you can find the supplier not advertised on Alibaba, you’ve basically cut down 99% of your competition.

Steve: Good point, I think you are pretty safe with anchors though by the way Dave.

Dave: You would be surprised Steve.

Steve: Really, okay?

Dave: I think the nature of kind of the whole private labeling boundary now; I think there is competition in absolutely every single niche. Now obviously some niches are well guarded than others, but every niche out there is you have some degree of competition.

Steve: What’s funny is we never had used Alibaba until relatively recently I guess within the last few years, because we just always went to trade shows to find our vendors.

Dave: Yeah, and that’s how I found our top supplier like I said we meet the trade show too, and the great thing is they don’t advertising on Alibaba, so…

Steve: Yeah same with ours, none of the vendors that we use actually today pretty much they are not advertising on Alibaba anymore.

Dave: Yeah absolutely and it’s kind of weird, not every supplier wants to advertise on Alibaba. Alibaba is kind of like internet dating for Chinese suppliers, and if you ever talked to a girl that’s on an internet dating site, they get dozens of enquires a day, people messaging them all types of creepers and only a small selection of actually serious incredible guys.

For Chinese suppliers I get the impression it’s kind of the same way with Alibaba where they might get dozens of enquiries a day, and only a really small fraction of that actually turn in to sales. And the sales that they do get tend to be kind of picky really cheap buyers who are typically ordering pretty small orders.

Steve: Right, yeah, actually I asked our vendor the last time we were there why they weren’t on Alibaba. And they said that — in so many words that they didn’t want to deal with the riffraff.

Dave: Yeah, I think that’s absolutely right, but I mean it’s a lot of work I think for these guys actually managing all the leads that they get on Alibaba, and some which are obviously not the greatest quality.

Steve: Do you use Alibaba for any of your stuff?

Dave: Yeah, I mean again like I said, like Amazon if you want to buy something online you kind of go to Amazon. If you want to find a supplier you kind of go to Alibaba, and I would say about half of our suppliers I found through Alibaba. Those products don’t make up a huge percentage of our sales, but they are a lot of our recent products that aren’t necessarily a huge part of our sales yeah, we use Alibaba to find source.

Steve: In general do you go there first, or do you hit some of the other places we are going to talk about here first?

Dave: I mean it depends, if there is a product which I think that — I just know that our customers are going to buy it, they going to buy an anchor and they need this product as an ad on, and they really not that pretty sensitive, absolutely I go to Alibaba and just try to find it in the lowest price there and import it.

If it’s a product that I really want to be kind of considerable portion of our business which I — yeah which is not going to be an ad on or an accessory product, then I’ll try to reach out to some of our current suppliers, or like I say I’ll use a couple of the other tools available which I don’t know if you want to get to now or later to try to find a supplier.

Steve: Okay, well let’s talk about the way that you guys find vendors right now first, so outside of Alibaba.

Dave: Yeah, so first thing we do is go to trade shows. And every year I try to go over there and I try to attend a big one for instance obviously boat trade shows. Like I said the great thing with the trade shows is that you will find a lot of suppliers not advertising on Alibaba. The great thing with China is a lot of people know about Canton Fair. The Canton Fair is great, that’s a huge massive trade show, it takes place twice a year in Guangzhou, China.

The only problem with the Canton Fair is that it tends to be just such a huge fair and it has a little bit of everything, but it doesn’t really specialize in anything. In China there is a specialized trade show for absolutely every single niche that you can think of. Going to these specialized trades shows, there’s really a network; you’ll find some of the best suppliers for your products. Again the Canton Fair is an okay place to start, but there are a lot of trade shows outside of the Canton Fair.

Steve: How did you find these trade shows?

Dave: I believe Chinaexhibiton.com; I just goggled China trade shows, it has a huge list of all the trade shows. And again once you’ve kind of learn your niche that you are in, you just kind of get a feel for what the most popular trade shows are. It’s kind of a — it’s a long process to learn a niche, but once you do, you do this just intuitively through speaking to various people. You kind of know the big trade shows.

Steve: What is your process from when you get to the trade show, like what preparation do you do prior to going?

Dave: Ideally I’ll go through the website of the trade show, go through the supplier list, and kind of try to get a feel for anyone’s that I would like to speak to in particular. So go through — most trade shows will have exhibition or exhibitor list, go through those exhibitors, kind of browse their website, and get a feel for who is there. Make kind of a hit list for people that I want to talk to, and then when I’m there talk to them.

Then at the same time while I’m there maybe some other companies catch my eye which I never even knew about browsing the exhibitor list and talk to them. And more or less so I do kind of when I go to these trade shows, I want to kind of have an idea of various products I am interested in importing. I don’t really go there and get surprised by new products that I even never even thought about.

Steve: Is there a lot of overlap between these companies, do they go to both that fair and the Canton Fair?

Dave: Most of our suppliers especially in our niche they don’t go to the Canton Fair.

Steve: Okay, probably because you are in boating, right?

Dave: Yeah, I mean there is a boating section in the Canton Fair. There is a boating section at the Canton Fair, but again I think it’s maybe six or seven suppliers where a boat show would probably have like 300 suppliers. It’s the same thing for anything; I mean there is a popcorn trade show in China. There is a trade show for everything.

Steve: Interesting, okay, yeah, I have only been to the Canton Fair myself and some of the ones in Hong Kong too, but…

Dave: Yeah, I’m surprised with you because I think linens, handkerchiefs; there must be a natural specialized trade show for that I would think.

Steve: Interesting, yeah I’ll go look after this, not that that would really excite me, but yeah, I’m sure — at least with the Canton Fair there is variety like, if you are bored you can go off and see some of the other cool stuff.

Dave: I know, I mean it’s overwhelming. I mean I have only been there actually once in my life, and it’s — you definitely need quite a few days to actually go through it. And I think that’s almost the predicament people are getting into, there is so much selection there, it’s almost too much selection. If you have a more narrow idea of what you want to import, it’s a lot of times you can deal with a more a little bit more efficient.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t actually recommend going there without a plan, because otherwise you’ll just wonder aimlessly. Okay so trade shows, what else you got?

Dave: The other way, so another actual good way that we reach out to a lot of suppliers is we’ve got put on these Chinese spam lists. And somehow if you ever give your card out to any trade show in China, you get put on any email list. First pity you and second you are going to get a lot of emails from a million different suppliers every day.

The only funny thing is aside from your traditional spam which nobody is ever interested in, when you get put on these Chinese spam list, actually quite a few credible suppliers will email you. They’ll say, “Hey Dave, we noticed that you are selling boat anchors. By the way we sell boat anchors. You may be interested in our products.” It’s actually, responding to those spam emails is kind of a nontraditional way actually to find suppliers.

Steve: We’ve actually found two legit suppliers that way now that you mention it.

Dave: I think talking before you; you met a guy in India out of all places?

Steve: Yeah.

Dave: So, it’s kind of funny. I will never reply to a spam email from a US company, but Chinese company for whatever reason, it’s pretty well directed spam.

Steve: Yeah, exactly and actually that one person even showed his photos of stuff that was similar to what we sold on our site, and so that’s what caught our attention.

Dave: Yeah, they do a lot of due diligence.

Steve: Unlike the US companies which just …

Dave: I know, it’s just a mass of email to everybody.

Steve: Okay, so we’ve got emails, what else?

Dave: The other thing is you can public import records. This might not be news to all of your listeners, but probably news to a lot of them that whenever you import something to US, at least if it was coming via ocean freight, the information contained on the shipping records is public information. If I’m importing boat anchors, you can actually, and you know that company name, you can go find what supplier we are using and what products we are importing.

The US government releases its public information. I think they do it on the premise that’s it’s free information, and can be used to predict economic indicators, but long story short it’s public information. To get access to this information, you either have to pay the US government a fee, or you can use one of the websites out there. There’s free websites out there and you can actually access this information, and you can type any company name, and basically type in Dave Bryant company import records, and it will return a list of some of the products that we’ve imported.

But some of the paid services like Import Genius and Panjiva, what they will do is they aggregate the information a lot more nicely. So you type in the company name, and it will really give you an itemized list of all the suppliers that my company or any other company is using, and it will give you a list of the products they are importing and a list of all the supplier names.

And why this is really good is that you can use one of these import tools, you type in the company name that you are kind of snooping on, and normally what I like to use, I do pick a big retailer who is probably less products I know they are private labeling themselves. Type in that name of that company and maybe take for example [inaudible 00:22:30]. I will type into Import Genius and they will give me a list of all suppliers that [inaudible 00:22:34] is using to import from China.

Then I will get that list of suppliers and I’ll search for them on Google, and I will reach out to all those suppliers, and only a small fraction of them are actually going to reply to you with cost sheets and spec sheets. And the ones that do, typically they are going to have really good high quality good products, because they are selling to the bigger brands, and they are going to have pretty low prices as well.

Steve: What I actually didn’t know is that, you mentioned that there are some free services that do this? Do you happen to know what they are off head?

Dave: Yeah. I think there’s, Port Examiner is one of them. I think if you go to them, you’ll kind of get my point of what I mean is that they don’t aggregate information very nicely. So they’ll give you I think, if there’s 30 different import records from my company, they’ll give you 30 different HTML pages, where some of the paid services, they’ll actually export to a nice excel worksheet for you.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: There’s [inaudible 00:23:25] and then there’s paid services.

Steve: In terms of ordering, or when you look for suppliers, do you tend to go this route first, second, third, last?

Dave: It’s pretty aware now, we have such a– we have a nice typing group of maybe ten to 12 suppliers that we kind of rely upon. When it comes to actually finding new suppliers, first thing I will do is actually I would go through kind of my list of various companies that I’ve bumped into tradeshows, and see if there’s anybody there that might be selling the products I’m interested in.

Second, I would see if one of the big box retailers is selling the products, because the big box retailers they tend a lot of times especially in small niches like boating, they tend to sell for really high prices. So I will go on to Import Genius or one of the other tools, find the list of the suppliers that they are using, get that list of suppliers, find the ones who are selling the products I’m interested in, see if there– and reach out to those suppliers directly. Then as kind of a last resort, I’ll go on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay, okay. What about Global Sources?

Dave: I think, I’ve heard good things about Global Sources and the fact that you can kind of refine your search criteria a little bit better, but my impression has always been Global Sources more or less is kind of Alibaba 2.0.

Steve: Global Sources, from what I understand is, the vendors are more vetted and they tend to cater to – they are like more established players, whereas Alibaba seems like a hodge purge [ph] of a lot of different types of vendors.

Dave: Yeah, I’ve heard really good things about Global Sources. Just my experience using that I always find it more or less a lot of overlap between them. Like said, I know people that swear by them.

Steve: Yeah, I just actually had Peter, I don’t know if I added the episode yet, the CIO of Global Sources here. I was just curious what your opinion was.

Dave: Yeah, I’ve actually never used them, but I’ve heard good things about them.

Steve: Okay, so that, today at least that’s the order it seems like you go to Alibaba, kind of like a last resort so to speak today?

Dave: Yeah, like I said the only problem with Alibaba, and you can actually find good suppliers, the problem is I know if I go to Alibaba, I find a supplier without a product I know if it starts to take off, somebody is going to rip me off probably within a year.

Steve: Okay. Let’s just assume now for a sec that you’ve kind of found a potential vendor, what I was going to talk with you about today was kind of more along the lines of establishing relationships with vendors, negotiating and that sort of thing. You’ve gotten in touch with a vendor, what are some steps to kind of ease the relationship so to speak? Do you start negotiating on a price, do you talk about MOQs, what do you do to ensure quality?

Dave: I mean, I think one of the bigger mistakes that new importers make is that, I don’t know how to say it, they tend to be a little high maintenance. So they’ll send a million emails back and forth with the supplier on a really small order. So I think one of the first thing that you can do to kind of start building that relationship is be to the point, be efficient with your communication, don’t hug all over pennies on a crazy off, you should have an idea if you are importing a product. You got to have an idea of more or less what the fair price for it is.

So if you know the fair price for an anchor is $100, don’t try to get them down to $50. Get a whole bunch of quotes from different suppliers, figure out what the fair price for it is, and just make sure you get a fair price, but don’t be a haggler, nickel, and diming the supplier. Be efficient with the communication. Don’t– if you get your products and you order a thousand widgets and one of those widgets is defective, don’t make a bid deal of it. So I think just being really efficient is a really good way to kind of get your relationship with the supplier off on the right foot.

Steve: I actually don’t ever negotiate on price in the beginning. Instead I just do a shot gun, and just go with the range of prices and kind of wrap up the highest and the lowest. Do you do that too?

Dave: Yeah, absolutely. I think time is changing quite a bit in the last few years where the prices you get tend to be a lot more firm. I don’t know about your experience too, but the negotiating room there isn’t quite as high as it used to be.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials, and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is that you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: In fact my prices have been going up.

Dave: Yeah, except up until recently with the price of oil and everything has really been dropping prices.

Steve: Okay, so your tip was be low maintenance.

Dave: Number two, it’s scary for a lot of people this idea, but actually travelling to China and meeting your supplies, because China still is a very relationship oriented country. So actually going over to China and going for beers, going for dinner with your supplier, you can’t really duplicate that relationship building and trust building the same way that you can through email and even Skype.

It’s scary I know travelling over to China, and eating a bunch of weird of food, but if you can go over there even once and meet a supplier that you’ve been working with, I guarantee you, you are going to see a huge improvement in your relationship with that supplier, and so certain benefits that you don’t get. Obviously your lead time will go from 60 days to 30 days if you let the supplier know that your order is urgent. They won’t be self [inaudible 00:29:23] on minimum order quantities with you. Overall the quality of products that you get will tend to be a lot higher if you kind of have that good relationship with your supplier.

Steve: I think that a lot of suppliers that you find, at least on Alibaba, they give you a high MOQ just to kind of weed out like the riffraff, but if you actually fly over there and visit them, they know you are serious and they are probably much more willing to work with you and be more flexible.

Dave: Yeah, absolutely, I mean our main suppliers; MOQ is not really an issue. Obviously they are not going to sell you one, but we want to import ten or twenty as a sample, no problem. The minimum order quantity doesn’t really come up all that often. Again, that’s kind of one of the things that’s important about building that relationship with your supplier, because getting low MOQs is probably one of the most important things when you are importing from China. You have that relationship and you can kind of make it. So MOQ is not really an issue. You are going to have quite a leg up on your competition.

Steve: Let’s say you can’t go to China, what are some of your strategies for lowering the MOQ at least in the beginning?

Dave: Yeah, if you are just working with a supplier, professional off the butt, first thing you can do is again just be low maintenance. So a lot of times, take for example I was working with a new supplier this year. I think that an MOQ 250 pieces, I only wanted to order 50. They said there’s no negotiation on the MOQ. I said, okay, we can only do 50, but we will pay entirely upfront not 30% deposit and 70% upon shipment like normally, and will make payment right away tomorrow.

And they said okay, fine, fine, fine. Yeah, we made the payment in full and upfront, real quick and we never really hag all over the price too much. Again, paying upfront and just offering to pay 100% upfront a lot of times will– a lot of suppliers will be a lot more open to that low MOQ.

Steve: Also just asking for their bank number, so you can wire the money over right away does wonders.

Dave: Yes absolutely. Yeah if you start asking for something like a PayPal account, where you can escrow the money to, they are probably not going to be as receptive. Again, just be straight to the point like you said ask for the bank information, and a lot of times money talks. It’s hard to say no to money.

Steve: Okay. What are some other things because we were talking prior to the recording here, what are some of the other things that you kind of talk about besides price and MOQs, some of the more obvious things. What else do you negotiate?

Dave: When I’m negotiating with the buyer, I kind of figure, price is kind of the last thing I always negotiate. I figure these five things that I kind of go to order trying to negotiating. Kind of every order I try to negotiate with that supplier on a new item. The first one is obviously minimum order quantity. I think for most importers, that’s always going to be the first thing they need to negotiate, because it’s pretty rare that a supplier gives a minimum order quantity that you are completely comfortable with. So it’s kind of trying to negotiate that minimum order quantity.

Then the second thing that you can negotiate is shipment terms. Again, I’ve seen so many importers get burned on this. Supplier will get them a really low price, but will have shipment terms of EXW their factory, and I get the impression that you … Have you been burnt?

Steve: I haven’t been burned, but some of the students who just didn’t do their research, they are like, this is so cheap and then they realized they had to pay everything from the factory all the way to their warehouse.

Dave: To give some background of EXW you basically normally people or suppliers are going to quote you on FOB Shanghai or FOB Beijing, and that basically means supplier pays everything to get it to the port. If you’ve been quoted EXW, chances are you are going to pay at least $500 to $1000 more in extra fees, basically customs, brokerage to export the products, getting the products from your supplier’s factory on to a track and load it to the port, and a bunch of other mysterious fees. EXW adds a lot of money to the price. So if you get quoted EXW, that’s another negotiation point. Try and negotiate it to get FOB terms.

Third thing that you can negotiate is actually the cost of freight. Again once you are ordering big enough, your supplier might not be receptive to say a 5% price cut, but if you ask them hey do you think you can cover the cost of freight to Vancouver, for whatever reasons, suppliers tend to be a lot more receptive to covering the cost of freight to your country rather than actual price discount.

Steve: Interesting. I have not tried that before.

Dave: Our two biggest suppliers right now, one of them pays all the freight, every order to Vancouver, and the other one pays half bill.

Steve: I wonder if it’s just all the same though. They are like wamping that into the cost of the goods.

Dave: I’m sure it’s being locked in to the cost to some degree. The one that obviously pays for all of it I’ve no idea what they are charging. The other guy, where we pay 50%, I mean our prices haven’t changed in four years.

Steve: That’s impressive. Okay.

Dave: When we first started working with them, they weren’t paying the cost of the freight, so I get the impression that they are actually just eating that cost now.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: Yeah, obviously if they agree to cover the cost of freight and they jack up your prices, $2 per unit then you are not really saving. The third thing or the fourth thing you can negotiate is packaging. Again it’s something that a lot of new importers forget about is packaging. Your supplier, when you are importing, their default is going to be to give you the cheapest ugliest packaging possible.

Steve: Yes.

Dave: Depending on your product, I’ve ordered products before, 100 different widgets. Assuming that they are going to come individually boxed, instead they just give you 100 widgets in one massive box. Of course you will be selling online, that means that now you have 100 widgets which you need to buy boxes for. That can actually be a pretty sizable sum.

So either getting something as simple as what they call an inner box for each item, or actually have them pay for the cost of all color packaging. Because even if you are selling online, look in what somebody gets when they first get an amazingly design package, it does result in a lot better reviews on places like Amazon. Packaging does matter even if you are selling online. That is something to keep in mind, negotiate with your supplier especially once you start getting orders which are, have the bigger variety.

Steve: So you guys have a box for your anchors, or is it for the other stuff?

Dave: No we actually don’t, we don’t have – actually it’s not true, some of our anchors do have boxes off. It’s a long story. Most of them do not, but all of our other products do.

Steve: So I’m just curious, this is kind of a different topic, how do you find the suppliers outside of China since prices are kind of increasing?

Dave: We don’t actually– we work with suppliers in like say Vietnam, United States and Canada, but that’s pretty much it. I haven’t actually gone looking for boat anchors anywhere else in the world yet. Maybe in the future that will happen. I do notice for a lot of suppliers, the suppliers in China, they are outsourcing a lot of their manufacturing to different countries.

Take for example I was getting a quote recently for some life jackets, just like [inaudible 00:36:51] that you wear them on the boat, and they were having a lot of production done in Vermont. So it seems to be kind of the way Chinese suppliers tend to be outsourcing their production now.

Steve: Yeah, that’s kind of what I’ve noticed as well. They have like teams in like Pakistan or Vietnam.

Dave: I don’t know if we’re ever going to come to a point in history where we have such a big country of cheap labor that’s barely professional and they can barely high quality goods. India and Pakistan and those countries, they are trying to compete, but still in terms of price and quality, it’s really hard to compete with China even today.

I know prices are going up in China, but it’s still ridiculously cheap and like we kind of touched on before with the price of oil and kind of the Chinese economy not going down right now, they are not doing as well as it was in the past. Prices due seem to be stabilizing in China. I’m not an economic forecaster, but I think it’s probably going to be stable for at least a couple more years down.

Steve: Prior to the recording we kind of talked about some of these cool online services that you use for importing. What are kind of your go-to services?

Dave: So important doing this like I mentioned Duty Calculator is definitely your importing product, that’s what you should kind of always, that should be one of the first places you go to is figuring out what the duty on your product is. And Duty Calculator does a really good job of kind of classifying goods.

You can type in a pretty broad definition of your product. So running shoes and it will give you a fairly accurate duty rate for that product in your country. That should definitely be one of the places that you check. Make sure that you don’t get burned, because you can get burned pretty easily importing various products.

There’s personnel mastermind group for importers. The guy was importing pencil crowns from China. It turns out that pencil crowns have been plagued like antidumping product by the US government. Basically he gets charged like 110% duty on pencil crowns when he imports them, and he had no idea until the shipment actually arrived in port. Make sure you actually get an idea of what the duty rate on your products is.

Steve: Pencil crowns?

Dave: Yeah, for some bizarre reason, the US government what they call antidumping they think China is really affecting supply of pencil crowns in the United States, and they’ve now decided to tack on 110% duty on pencil crowns.

Steve: Interesting. What is your go to place in terms of finding out whether there’s any special rules and regulations for selling a product in the US?

Dave: Yeah, I know it’s a tough one, I mean that’s one of the reasons why you should try to work with a customs broker. If you work with a customs broker and you kind of build that, again that relationship they will likely tell you for free if you say, “Hey I want to import pencil crowns. Is there anything I should be aware of?” They will probably tell you for free, “Hey Dave, watch out, there’s a 110% duty on that product.”

Or if I’m considering importing a product that’s heavily regulated, they might say, “Hey Dave you got to be careful that you need to have such and such testing done.” A customs broker is a really good place that you can start. After that, there’s definitely certain categories of products which you always have to be aware of, and that you can eat or drink, anything for a kid, and anything really that’s inherently dangerous.

Steve: What is your go to place for finding a customs broker? For us, we just kind of went with the first one and we’ve kind of stuck with him ever since. But do you actually have a go to place that you recommend.

Dave: No, I’m kind of the same way; we’ve worked with our customs broker for years. I mean, I’ll just pick the biggest one in your area. I mean there’s quite a few of them. I think every city probably has at least a handful of them. Pick the biggest one, preferably the one that we work with they also have a freight forwarding division, so they can do everything for our shipment, by the time it comes in the port they can pick up their shipment, they can pay the various different local companies that need to be paid, they can pay the ports; they can absolutely do the customs for us.

Look for a customs broker that kind of has a few different services branched together. You might even be able to find one where they can actually arrange for pick up in China from you and ship it all the way to wherever you need to have it shipped. It’s really; it’s a really nifty feature to have if you have a customs broker who has a few different services that they offer.

Steve: It’s worth saying that the freight forwarding is pretty important because otherwise your goods are just sitting there at the port. What’s funny at least for me at least is getting the goods from the port to our warehouse often times cost as much as or more the shipment over.

Dave: Yeah, absolutely. We have something coming in the port right now. Overall cost was $9000 on the container. I think after the container fees, customs and all that, I think the fees were nearly $4000. It’s almost 50% of the overall cost was just on customs, freight and all that money stuff.

Steve: Cool. So what are some of the other services?

Dave: Aside from that, another fun little one is seafreight.com. Seafreight.com, what you can do is you can track basically any boat in the world, and track it where it is in the world. Why that is kind of fun is if you are importing something from China, you are going to get a bill of rating, and on that bill of rating is going to be the name of the ship that your products are on. It might be the Korea 123 Express.

You simply go under seefreight.com, type in the name of that ship and you can actually find out where your products are in the world. I don’t normally have some practical use, but there is something about seeing your shipment of products sitting in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, I don’t know, something bad about it.

Steve: Okay.

Dave: I think that’s pretty much the big three that I would recommend. Import Genius, Duty Calculator, and searates.com, sorry.

Steve: Searates.com yeah. I want to switch gears a little bit because I want to talk, since you are kind of unique in that you are from Canada and you sell into the US, but you don’t have like a US entity, right?

Dave: We don’t have US entity per say. I will get into that after the only thing that we do have to have.

Steve: Okay, but you do have like a three PR I guess in the US.

Dave: Maybe an easier way I will give a brief overview of how we do things. We are a Canadian company through and through. We don’t have a US company. What we do have, if you are– wherever you are warehousing your products in the states, if there’s a state sales tax there, you are going to be responsible for paying that state sale tax.

If you are– in our case, we warehouse our products in Washington State. We have to collect sales tax on any Washington State order. We have to be registered with the State of Washington. We collect sales tax of any Washington order, but in terms of actually US business, paying US income tax, we don’t do that.

Steve: And in terms of just selling on Amazon, you pretty much just need a bank account, right?

Dave: To sell on Amazon yes you only need a bank account. FBA is a whole another [inaudible 00:44:03] of legal issues when it comes to the tax ratio. But in terms of the selling on Amazon, yup, absolutely I believe that is right now all you need is just a bank account. That bank account, it can be a Canadian bank account. The only crappy thing is if you are a Canadian company, or a UK company or whatever, Amazon will only pay you in your local currency. For us if we had a Canadian bank account, Amazon would only pay us in Canadian dollars which kind of sucks, because when you are paying your Chinese suppliers you are paying them in US dollars. What happens is you are changing money from basically US to Canadian back to US.

Steve: Right, right.

Dave: It’s kind of a in-depth answer, but…

Steve: I’m also kind of curious what avenues you use to kind of market your store. First of all, I was just curious; do you make more money on Amazon or on your own site right now?

Dave: Every year you get maybe you can just speak to this. It seems every year Amazon is chipping away 10% on all the other channels. I don’t know if that’s kind of been reflective of your experience?

Steve: I haven’t been doing on Amazon as long as you have, so I have less data to work with. I mean our site is still by far more lucrative than Amazon. But that’s probably going to change this year.

Dave: Yeah, with Amazon taking more and more. For us right now Amazon– our website sales are about 25% of our sales, eBay is about 20%. 5% is just miscellaneous tradeshows, selling direct and 25% is selling directly on Amazon as a third party seller. The other 25% is selling on Amazon what they call through the vendor central platform. That’s basically them buying our products and selling them directly on behalf of Amazon.

Steve: They asked you to join that program, right?

Dave: It’s an invite only program. I get the feeling if you hit a certain threshold on Amazon in terms of your private label products; they will send you an invite because we’ve gotten a couple invites after we’ve been enjoying this program. They think that we are different company than we really are, but I do get the sense that after you hit a certain point on Amazon sales, they’ll pretty much automatically send you the invite.

Steve: Is that basically like an invite where you join or else they’ll find someone else to replace you?

Dave: No, they seem to do it. I think every– basically Amazon’s goal is to have every product in the universe. So once they kind of categorize you as a fairly large seller, they’ll say, okay we want to have your products. You can decline the invitation, but there are already lots of parts to it.

It seems that Amazon when they buy your products, they’ll tend to outsell you 2 to 1. We might have been selling 100 boat anchors as a direct seller on Amazon, when they start to buy our products; they were selling maybe 200 boat anchors. So it’s seems to be you are going to move up to 50% to 100% sales increase by selling directly to Amazon.

Steve: Outside of just the volume of sales, in terms of margins though, how far did they go down once you started…

Dave: That’s the crappy thing. They take more or less about 25% off your margins.

Steve: Okay, but they make up for it in volume.

Dave: Theoretically.

Steve: Have you ever had any…

Dave: You got to be careful. We got burned our first year of not watching the margins quite as well as we should have, and I’ve heard that from other people too.

Steve: Okay. I mean, is there any– what are the pros and cons of doing—like would you have declined? What would have happened if you declined? They probably would have found someone else and then lowered your visibility, right?

Dave: It’s hard to say. I mean, you’re always going to wonder with Amazon what kind of punishments they inflict on people. It’s kind of hearsay what they would have done. We agreed to it more or less. We don’t sell every product to them. We over the– they really wanted us to sell the product to them, but some of the time the margins just, we can’t do.

Steve: Didn’t make sense, right. Okay, and then you do a combination of that and you do FBA also or no?

Dave: I try to stay away from FBA just for some of the sales tax issues. I know it’s– FBA is becoming such a monstrous zone on behalf, but sometimes I try to avoid.

Steve: Okay by avoiding FBA, you are only covering sales tax in Washington.

Dave: Yes, and that’s one of the things, I mean, every seller, no matter where you are, if you are selling an FBA you should theoretically be collecting sales tax in nine states, or however many states that Amazon has warehouses in. Truth of it is that probably no one is doing that, but technically you should be. Again that’s a talk for another day.

Steve: Okay, no I was just curious because if you had that attitude, then FBA probably would have boosted your sales regardless, and are they going to go after you in Canada, maybe less likely than someone in the US.

Dave: In terms of Amazon and trying to find our competitors?

Steve: No, in terms of the US government going after you for taxes.

Dave: Yeah, yeah, I figure they’ll go after you before me.

Steve: Yeah exactly. Actually can we comment on what you just said though, Amazon like just going by passing you and going straight for your supplier?

Dave: Yeah, I don’t know. I mean, they are definitely doing that. There’s actually one product that we sell which is not a huge chunk of our sales, but they’ve actually are now sourcing it under what do they call private label brand, I forget. That was on basics I think. They have actually are sourcing now directly from China for that product. I think boat anchors and that type of product is going to be pretty low on their packing order, but I think it’s something everybody else is going to be aware of. They do seem to be reaching out more and more directly out to Chinese suppliers.

Steve: So given that they are doing that, when you are actually finding products to sell, do you have criteria more along the lines of random products, or like more niche products like boat anchors.

Dave: Again, that’s something I always try to recommend to people that the more niche you can get, the more successful you are going to be. Me and you, like you’ve mentioned in the intro we were at the Ecommerce Fuel live conference. One of the striking things attending this conference, it was basically a whole bunch of sellers just like me and Steve, and the crazy niches that were all in from boat anchors to handkerchiefs to pencil crowns to coloring books. Everybody seems to be…

Steve: Air filters.

Dave: Air filters. Everybody seems to be in some crazy little niche. I guess that’s one defining criteria to pick a product to sell. The crazier the niche probably the better protected you are going to be.

Steve: I also want to– every other person I talk to there seems to have been hijacked, or had problems with Amazon in some shape or form. That was one of my key take away from the conference session.

Dave: In terms of Amazon and kind of stealing their products and…

Steve: Either stealing their products or other suppliers just hijacking, similar to what you said, they found it on Alibaba, someone else just went on Alibaba and decided to either hijack or piggybacked a listing or sell something exactly the same.

Dave: It’s a check we do every month. Now we actually check all the listings to make sure nobody is piggybacking our brands, because you can’t, if you are selling our branded products, you can’t theoretically hijack that listing, you shouldn’t be able to. Normally just send an email to them saying, “Hey, you are probably not aware of what you are doing, but it is not allowed and could you please stop.” So that’s kind of a monthly check just to make sure nobody is piggybacking any of our products. Again we probably find five people every month doing it.

Steve: Going forward, just curious, are you spending more effort on your own site or Amazon and if it is your own site, what are some things that you are trying to do to increase sales?

Dave: I wish I could say it’s more of our own site, but Amazon– even people that go to our site, they are ultimately ending up on Amazon it seems. They might start this search and they might end up on our website looking for a product, but they are going to simply go to Amazon and see if they can find our branded product on Amazon. They have that trust I guess with buying through Amazon. It seems people sometimes joke about best buy being the display room for Amazon. I think in a lot of ways our websites are display rooms for Amazon.

Steve: Interesting. Even for boat anchors, amazing.

Dave: I know, it’s crazy. We are putting a lot– we are still continuing to put a lot of energy into our website, but not necessarily for direct sales through the website. If anything, just as kind of a display room for the products on Amazon.

Steve: Given that you are saying that, why not just have links directly to Amazon product listing.

Dave: Well, hopefully people buy through our websites; we don’t get charged 15% commission that Amazon does. I mean, ideally they don’t click through to Amazon, but like I mentioned, still about 25% of our customers do buy through our website, but a large portion of them are going to Amazon. Hopefully they buy through our website, but still a lot of them are going to Amazon ultimately.

Steve: What is your primarily traffic source of sales for your own website?

Dave: Definitely AdWords. And AdWords again is becoming more competitive. Just going through our yearly profit and loss kind of per campaign like our cost per clicks it seems like 50% higher in 2015 than they were in 2014. Again, everyone is getting squeezed there, so AdWords isn’t quite as profitable as it once was, but you can still definitely run some pretty profitable campaigns on there.

Google shopping is really where all the money is in terms of our ROI. So Google shopping is just becoming a huge avenue in some regards. I think if anybody was kind of trying to sell their own products through their website, first thing I would do is make sure you are on Google shopping.

Steve: What about organic search?

Dave: Again, it’s one of the things where all the big brands Google tend to be favoring more and more. We still get probably half of our sales are through organic search, but like everything, it’s becoming more and more competitive even for boat anchors.

Steve: Amazing, boat anchors.

Dave: I know.

Steve: Do you guys do anything on Facebook or…

Dave: Facebook, because of our audience we tend to be kind of an older clientele, they don’t tend use Facebook a lot, so we don’t use a lot of Facebook, compare to some shopping engines, things like Nextag and…

Steve: Does that work for you?

Dave: And [inaudible 00:54:29] and Shopzilla.

Steve: Shopzilla.

Dave: They actually, they bring quite a bit of traffic.

Steve: Do they really for boat anchors? Okay.

Dave: Yeah, again it’s just– I think again because of our older clientele, it’s just, if they have a search and maybe Shopzilla is their default search engine. So that’s how they find it.

Steve: I stopped using Shopzilla because I was getting really high volumes of fake clicks.

Dave: Yeah, it’s hard to say. I mean there’s some products where we make a killing on, and there’s other products where they are outnumbering Google in terms of clicks and you get to wonder how is that possible.

Steve: Well, I actually stalked a few of these people and they are clearly butts.

Dave: Really?

Steve: Yeah because I was annoyed, because I contacted them and I said, “Hey these are clearly boughts, and I have logs to show for it.” He was like, “No, we do a great a job of filtering out clicks.” Anyway that’s why I stopped using them.

Dave: Yeah, I know. That’s been our experience. You really have to monitor the campaigns, because you can dump a lot of money on a product, get out so there’s no conversions from it. But if you do monitor, you can actually get some pretty profitable campaigns.

Steve: Cool. Hey, Dave, we’ve actually been chatting longer than I was planning. I understand you got a pretty cool website. Where can people contact you? First of all, what is the website and where people can contact you at?

Dave: Yup, so the best way is chineseimporting.com, we get a lot about how to use [inaudible 00:55:57] and importing from China. So it’s a really good way if you are a beginner import, a lot of useful information there. If you are even a more experience importer there’s a lot of good information there for you too. On Facebook, facebook.com/chineseimporting.

Steve: And you have a book, right?

Dave: We do. It’s Importing is Easy: How to Make a Million Dollars Importing from China. You can buy that through the website chineseimporting.com, or you can find it on Amazon.

Steve: Awesome. Thanks Dave for coming on the show.

Dave: Yeah, thank you for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

Dave: You too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Dave is the perfect example of a business that does extremely well in a very narrow niche. Like boat anchors would probably the last thing that I would think to import from China, but Dave makes it work. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode110.

Once again I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring thing episode. As I mentioned earlier, FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers, and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. It cost as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off.

So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online. And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year of business, so go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

109: How To Make 7.5 Million Per Year Selling On Amazon With Will Tjernlund

109: How To Make 7.5 Million Per Year Selling On Amazon With Will Tjernlund

Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Tjernlund. Now I met Will at the StartupBros conference and I’m really glad that I did.

He and his brother Andrew made about 7.5 million dollars from Amazon and their own stores last year making him one of the most successful Amazon sellers that I’ve had on the podcast so far.

And the best part is that his business is just a 2 man operation with him and his brother. Today, we’re going to go into depth on how he got started.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Will got into ecommerce and what made him start selling while he was still in college.
  • How many products Will was selling in 2014 to achieve 7.5 million in revenue
  • How Will came up with what to sell.
  • How he got his start
  • Will’s strategy is for entering new markets
  • Will’s main criteria for selecting a product to sell

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain tractions for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year in business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. FameBit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagrammers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagrammers to promote your business for as low as $50. The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off our first campaign. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Tjernlund. I met will at the StartupBros conference and I’m really glad that I did. He and his brother Andrew made about $7.5 million from Amazon in 2014 in their own stores last year making him one of the most successful Amazon sellers that I’ve had on the podcast thus far.

The best part is that they are basically a two man show with just he and his brother. Now you might be wondering how that is even possible. Well, Will sells his own private label items, buys from manufacturers in China, and then sends his products directly to Amazon for fulfillment using FBA. And today we are going to go into great depth on how he does it. With that welcome to the show Will, how are you doing today?

Will: I’m doing pretty good. How are you doing?

Steve: I’m doing good. It’s good to hear. We chatted a little bit before the interview started. There’s a lot of stuff going on with you. I did want to, I was very curious on how you kind of got started in ecommerce, because I understand you did this while you are still in college, right?

Will: Yeah, even kind of before that. I’ve always been kind of looking for gaps in the market and always looking for different ways to make money ever since I was in like high school even. Me and my buddies were doing black [inaudible 00:03:29] out of my basement the whole grade, every Friday that kind of thing, always finding a way to make money. And I actually started selling online when I was still in high school.

I worked at Target and I would buy all the Nintendo Wii and Xbox 360s when they were in high demand, and sell them for about 30% more on eBay. That’s when I first started selling online. But then from there, my brother graduated high school in 2003 and soon after that he started private labeling from Alibaba and selling on eBay. And so even when I was only 13, I saw it was very possible to import and make money selling online.

Steve: So your brother was the first one that kind of got to get you into this?

Will: Yeah, at a grand scale like I could not believe it the first time even when I was 13, when he showed me Alibaba and saw the prices on there, because this is way before any kind of private labeling and stuff people were doing now, and a classic example will be like if you just saw Alibaba today and you saw like the price of tablets on there. You go, wow you can get like a android tablet for $12? This is crazy. They go for $200 in the stores, because we just didn’t know back then like what kind of quality assurance and all that kind of stuff that factories were doing.

Steve: What was like the first product that you imported over to sell?

Will: The first one I personally imported all by myself was like my sophomore junior college and it was actually a marijuana vaporizer pen.

Steve: How did you come over that Will?

Will: No, seriously though, it was one of those things where I was just constantly doing the one tab Alibaba, one tab Amazon and just looking for random crap. And I got on the tobacco products, and then from there they all qualified themselves as tobacco products. But I saw that they were charging $100 and I go, well that can’t cost $100 from Alibaba. It ended up costing like $7. So that was like one of my first big products.

Steve: So you were in college, where did you store the stuff. I assume you had– you shipped it to yourself.

Will: Yeah. I would just have the stuff air freighted or myself. Then from there I was– I was even doing FBA when I first started doing like my sophomore year in college. There’s actually a post office on my campus. So I would just have a backpack full of vaporizer pens that I would drop off on my way to class.

Steve: I see. So was this for eBay or was this for Amazon?

Will: Both.

Steve: Both?

Will: I was even doing a little Craigslist.

Steve: So can you kind of describe why you decided to use both platforms?

Will: I just kind of– it’s the– I always think in terms of why not? I knew that eBay sold well, and I knew Amazon sold well. For me to just– I was pretty much create the listing once, then copy and paste all the descriptions and photos and all that stuff over. So for an extra whatever 10 minutes of time, the potential value could be thousands of dollars.

Steve: What’s your take real quick on just Amazon versus eBay, the type of customers and selling on those platforms?

Will: I hate eBay more than anything. I hate the all the customers. They are all terrible. Etsy is like the anti-eBay. Where in eBay you deal with every single individual customer, they are always asking for tracking information, and they are always bugging you about the kind of intricacies of your product, where on Etsy, the customers are always overly nice, they are super optimistic.

You tell them I’m sorry, the shipping is going to be three weeks, they go, “Wow, that’s great. I’m just happy it’s not four,” kind of thing. If I sold 1000 items on eBay in one day, my life is going to be miserable trying to flip through all those orders. If I sold 1000 times in one day on Amazon, I don’t even notice.

Steve: Yeah, I mean I had the same experience in eBay. Everyone there tends to be cheaper buyers.

Will: I compare to people who shop on eBay are more Wal-Mart shoppers, and people who shop on Amazon are more Target shoppers, where the Amazon customers are willing to pay maybe that 10% more to get like the automatic two-day shipping and have them more quality experience, where the people on eBay are shopping more for deals and they are wiling to deep dive and try to find those diamonds on the raft.

Steve: Do you still sell on eBay today?

Will: No. we sold over a million dollar in 2014 on eBay, and we quit even though it was all automated through our fulfillment and everything. My brother and I quit selling on eBay in 2015, because we were spending just as much time on eBay as we were Amazon, but selling 7 times as much on Amazon.

Steve: Okay. Amazon is it all FBA or do you do any merchant fulfilled?

Will: The only merchant fulfilled I do would be most likely if I’m like drop shipping.

Steve: Okay, okay. And you pretty much only drop ship when you are testing the product or?

Will: Either when I’m testing it or say like, I sign up a deal with a distributor where their catalogue has a thousand products. I only want 50 of their products, but the other 950 I have available for me to drop ship. So I might as well throw up a merchant fulfilled listing for all those to see if I can get anything. Even if those things sell maybe one unit a day, it’s still an extra thousand units a day.

Steve: Yeah, I know, that totally makes sense. So, I know the listeners out there are very curious on how you actually come up with stuff to sell. If you can just kind of talk about your strategy for finding stuff that will make you a profit.

Will: All right, so I can go all day about this. Cut me half when you need to. But basically I’m just looking for items that have high proceed value with minimal down sides. I make sure that the product can always be liquidated. Example, say if I’m buying a set of four drink coasters for a dollar, and I usually sell for $20, if I sell them for $4 and break even, they will fly off the shelves and at least I know I can get rid of say 100 units I order as a sample.

I always make sure they can be liquidated, and I always try to have minimal moving parts and minimal electronics in it. So like my perfect product is the drink coaster, because nothing can go wrong with it. I’m not really worried about quality assurance or anything like that. It’s just going to be a square piece of say wood, and there’s not going to be anything else to it. I really like kind of products that just nothing can go wrong and products that are super simple where I’m either selling a hunk of rubber, metal, wood, or plastic.

Steve: So when you say liquidate, do you mean liquidate on eBay or Amazon?

Will: Either or, just liquidating in general where something where I can charge such a low price that people can’t help but buy it type of thing. Whereas I give everyone selling a product for $30 and I’m just trying to sell for $4.50, there’s no way that I don’t at least just get rid of my inventory.

Steve: Okay, so that implies that your margins, you require something on the order of 8X then?

Will: Not necessarily 8X. It’s more kind of a proceed value type of thing. It’s different per each product category. When I’m selling something that’s like more home and industrial, that kind of product has a lot less price fluctuations than maybe say like a fashion item. And so that one I can only charge maybe 20% below market price, and still liquidate it pretty quickly because everyone has the same exact price, as opposed to drink coasters where some might be five dollars, some might be $100.

Steve: Okay, and so can you give us an example of your ideal products. So with coasters, I mean, I don’t know that’s like a real product that you just mentioned?

Will: Yeah, exactly. That’s a perfect product where I’m walking through Target, and I see some men drink coasters a four pack of them for $25. And I go, that doesn’t make any sense because a cinder block cost like a dollar. So I go and look that product up on eBay, I mean on Amazon real quick.

And I go wow, they are selling concrete drink coasters and they go for about $20 for four pack. That still doesn’t make sense to me. Then I look it up on Alibaba store, and I go, wow, those things are four pack cost a buck. Well, if I order 25 packs, it’s really hard for me not to at least just get my money back kind of thing.

Steve: Okay, do you use any sort of tools to find these products, or do you just go through and flip through Amazon.

Will: Yeah, I don’t use any tools. I feel like when everyone uses the same tools, it draws the same conclusion for everyone. It’s hard with these analytics tools, and an example I always use is the drone landing pad, and still no one sources yet even though I’ve used that example a million times, but there is two listings currently on Amazon. If you throw a drone landing pad, you’d be the third one on Amazon. It’s just like there are certain products like that where you would be shooting and fishing a barrel not to source that product and try it out.

If you looked it up on one of Amazon’s softwares it would say that there’s a very low sales velocity and that you shouldn’t even try it, but that’s because not enough people are offering quality product yet, because the only drawn mini pads are like one foot by one foot landing pads and not like what the customers really want. So the software can be kind of deceiving because it won’t show sales for products that aren’t there yet.

Steve: So how did you find like a drone landing pad for example?

Will: I just continuously click the also bought with button.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: And so I will go and I will see – I was looking at drones just to buy one myself just to see what kind of price they are at, and then I see like also bought with XYZ and I’m like, weird. I didn’t think about drone accessories. Then I looked up drone carrying cases, and then after looking at the shipping and the pricing it’s like, oh, there’s no money to be really made there and it’s like okay how about drone spare parts.

I was like no money will be made there. It’s like, oh what about a landing pad. Then I looked it up, and there’s no one selling it and it’s merchant fulfilled with reviews. It’s like, wow, I could just come in here and just dominate this market if I wanted to.

Steve: Are you worried at all that if there’s not that many people selling it that the demand might not necessarily be that high for it?

Will: No, because I know the demand is going to keep going up with drones just in general if you look at Google trends. Also, I love the idea of products that fly under the radar, instead of selling the silicon baking mat and try to sell a hundred units a day, and constantly finding a few people piggy backing on your listing and fighting off all these competitors.

I love the idea of selling say a 50 dollar drone landing pad that I get for ten dollars that I make $25 a unit, and I sell for a day. I’m sneakily making a hundred bucks a day, 36 grand a year off of this drone landing pad, and people look it up and go 4 a day, that’s not worth my time.

Steve: Okay, so I was just curious then, so for your seven and a half million revenue that you did in 2014, how many products was that?

Will: 1700.

Steve: 1700? Holy crap! When you sell these products, do you ship them direct to Amazon, or do you ship them to yourself first and analyze them or look at them?

Will: Ship them to myself first. I still don’t fully trust any of my Chinese suppliers to do everything correctly, and I would hate to have a container get denied at Amazon. It doesn’t cost that much more like an insurance policy for me to have it stop it at my place beforehand, or my pre-fulfillment place beforehand.

And then with my wholesale suppliers I think a lot of them don’t know I’m selling on Amazon. I don’t want them just to send straight to Amazon, because then basically I’m teaching them how to cut me out of loop.

Steve: 1700 products and you use the same strategy you are trying to fly under the radar with these products.

Will: Yeah, it’s way easier to sell a thousand products once a day, than to sell one product a thousand times a day.

Steve: Interesting. So then it doesn’t really matter I guess when you look on Amazon you don’t see that many listings, you just go with your gut is what it sounds like.

Will: Yeah, with my gut and like very small low risks moves over and over again. Where I’m not sitting there going and buying a crazy amount of inventory right off the butt, I’m sitting there ordering 20 units, then 100 units then 200 units, then 1000 units kind of thing where I never get caught with like my foot in my mouth, because I ordered too much and I don’t know what to do with the inventory.

Because it’s all about basically once you get product selection down, which is not– it’s like one of the more difficult parts, the whole entire Amazon game basically just comes down to cash flow, and how can you hold the perfect amount of inventory where you have enough cash on hand to keep growing, but at the same time you have enough cash to replenish your current inventory.

Steve: What are some of the price points that you like on Amazon then? Do you have any guidelines there?

Will: No real guidelines. More times than not, I tend to lean towards more expensive products, because I like the idea of knowing like I’m getting a size more cash every time I sell a unit. So instead of me saying, oh I did a thousand dollars in sales doing 20% profit margin after everything, I’ve become more and more tuned to saying, I sold four units and I made a hundred dollars. I put a hundred dollars new in my pocket from those four units, as opposed to saying I did 400 in sales at a 25% margin.

Steve: Does that imply then that your price points is in the order of hundreds of dollars then?

Will: Yes, my brother and I our average price point was like a $130. But it was the kind of thing where, that kind of skewed as I explained earlier because of say they had those thousand skew catalogues we would get, and we’d only source a 100 items, and then have 900 items or whatever as an example drop shipped.

More times than not we are drop shipping those one because we don’t want to tie up cash in them because there are hundreds and hundreds of dollars. My brother and I we are selling some products that are like $2000 each.

Steve: Oh, wow, and you’re fronting the inventory for that?

Will: Yeah basically we are just sitting there having a merchant fulfilled and say as soon as we see a sale come through we just email the supplier and say we have a drop ship to this address. And so we only spend the money once we’ve already made it.

Steve: Oh sorry, I meant like the ones that you actually store at Amazon using FBA. Like what’s your price point?

Will: Oh we try to be lower. It really comes down to like you prefer under a hundred dollars. But at the same time it really comes down to sales velocity. So how fast can I get that dollar 20 back in my bank account after I spent that dollar. If I sell say, some of my products were selling like say 15 units a day. I don’t mind that it’s a more expensive product because I know I’m flipping my inventory quickly, where if I know I’m only going to be selling five units a week, then I’m probably going to back off on ordering so many units of that if that makes sense at all.

Steve: Yeah I know. It totally does. And so if you can, can you just walk me through a typical example of how you proceed from product inception all the way to the sourcing process?

Will: Yeah, I will give you an example of a product we used to sell. We used to sell knee scooters. When someone injures their foot, and they scoot around, if you’ve ever seen those instead of scratches.

Steve: That sounds like an oversize product.

Will: It is. It’s like a 3 foot by like 1 foot by one and a half foot box.

Steve: So you don’t care about that either.

Will: No, because the thing is that they are such low competition in margin. So these things were going for like 200 to 300 dollars on Amazon, and we can get one for 60 dollars landed. So like there’s plenty of margin we made there. Even after everything we were only making 40 bucks a unit, it’s like that’s still a pretty good margin.

With the knee scooter was my cousin broke his foot, and he had to get a knee scooter. And he emailed my brother and I since he knows we like buy stuff online for a living and said, “I’m having trouble finding this knee scooter for anything cheaper than like $200 to $300 anywhere online. Do you think you guys can find anywhere cheaper online?”

And so we went and looked all over online and couldn’t find a cheaper, and we go, that’s kind of bizarre because it’s just like less moving parts like a child’s bike, and a child’s bike doesn’t cost that much. Again it comes down to perceived value, like why does this cost so much for no reason?

So then we looked it up on Alibaba and saw that after shipping and everything we can get them for 60 backs landed. It’s the kind of thing where we go, well crap. We only have to sell maybe half of a 20 foot container to break even. That’s not going to be too difficult.

And so we ordered I think it was a 20 foot container which was 210 units, and what got tricky was we sold 5 units that very first day between eBay and Amazon, and so then it took us 60 days from us ordering to getting the items in stock at Amazon. We are looking and we go wow, we ordered 210 units, five units a day for 60 days, that’s going to be X300 units. Even though we only sold five units of that container, we had to go buy another container already which was kind of an annoying thing to do.

Steve: So what are your guidelines then when you are sourcing? You mentioned before you like to start out with really small quantities. It sounds like here you start out with a 20 foot container?

Will: Yeah, that’s the thing where it’s hard for me to give guidelines, because I do something different almost every time where with these knee scooters I looked and I go this is a product people need not want. This is a product where we can just kill people price wise, where we can go, oh you are selling this for 300, I’m going to sell the same exact quality one for 160 bucks. It’s like, what are they going to do about that?

It’s like, when I show up and then two it’s a low velocity item. After I get like two sales in a review I’m already on like the first page. And so when they see mine for 160 bucks with good reviews, everyone else selling for 300 bucks, I just knew that people couldn’t help themselves. They’d had to buy ours, because it would literally make zero sense for them to buy anyone else’s. Also ours came in different colors, and everyone’s else’s in back.

It’s like I just knew there was like four different ways that we were going to just knock the competition off the pack. So I was willing to do a bigger order right off the butt, where if I’m using concrete drink coasters, they might be more competitive and I’m not really sure what the sales velocity is, and it’s a product that people want, not need. I’m going to order maybe 20 units because I’m not sure about it.

Steve: Okay, with these scooters then, that’s like a pretty large outlay, but you were confident– how were you confident that the quality was the same as the others? Did you actually buy the competition and compare the two?

Will: No, we did get one– we did bite the bull and get one air freighted to us very quickly. I was like, test driving it around like a little warehouse and that kind of stuff, and beating it up pretty bad, nothing happened to it. I was like trying to like rough house it and everything seemed fine. It seemed like a great product. But this is why we don’t source them anymore, is because everyone needs a new scooter for about 3 weeks. And so everyone returns it when they are done, and gets their money back.

Steve: Okay.

Will: We had about zero negative reviews, but 75% of them got returned. What does that say, kind of thing?

Steve: Right. I’m just curious. Are you only selling in Amazon or do you have your own site?

Will: I have my own sites, but for like a different private label brands. They are basically there for legitimacy. They don’t really make any money. It’s kind of thing where I don’t know that much about SEO or like social media marketing, or any of that kind of stuff where the amount of time I’d have to spend to the returns is not worth it to me.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go with your coaster example, because that seems like something that is more obtainable for someone who doesn’t have a whole lot of money to invest. So let’s say I only have like $500 or $1000, how would you proceed?

Will: Okay, if you had say 500 dollars, I would go and I would try to find lower competition products and that’s something that’s like in a top 100 BSR or anything, I would try to find lower competition products for anywhere from one to four dollars on Aliexpress. And buy these items for one to four dollars, will sell from anywhere from 15 to 25 dollars on Amazon. You are going to be looking for stuff on Aliexpress with a big price discrepancy. You are going to be looking for stuff with free shipping and shipping that’s in 15 days. If you can find products like that, you can basically undercut the price enough that you can make yourself competitive no matter what.

Then I would go and order with that $500, I would order say 20 units of five different skews. So say in that, like say that can be at five dollars a unit landed. That’s even on a high end. From there you send in those five different skews, 20 of each unit into Amazon, set up the Amazon PPC and sit back and wait for two weeks. During those two weeks, you are just trying to see if, if you flip a generic sample with no reviews, and you get any traction at all on Amazon, you know you are on to something.

Like a typical example is I put up a listing of a new product I’m trying on Aliexpress. I sell maybe two or three units the first week, and in the next second week, I end up selling seven units, and I go, “Wow, I sold ten units in two weeks and I have zero reviews, a crappy picture and a crappy product?

Now that I know that there’s demand for the product and I know that I can compete, I’m going to start keep continuously flipping my Aliexpress product while I start working on my Alibaba order. Because of the time zone difference with Alibaba, it takes forever to go back and forth which is prior and takes forever to get all the details ironed out, and so you might as well keep selling and making cash from Aliexpress while you go through that whole process.

Once you are done with the Alibaba process and you actually have your order in hand, say two months later. You can go back to that listing from Aliexpress, you can reupload the photos, reupload the title to a new private label title, and have this listing with reviews and with sales history to launch your new private label product from.

Steve: Okay, so the five skews then, you just run with the winners and then you just liquidate the crappy guys that don’t sell.

Will: Yeah, and then repeat that process every month. So, this basically came from– My brother and I had 1700 skews at Amazon, and we kind of looked at it and go wow, it’s an 80/20 rule to the max where the top 100 units make up 90% of our sales. Then our top ten units make up like 65% of our sales. It’s like, wow, wouldn’t it be sweet if we only had like ten skews and we are still making millions of dollars.

This would be like the easiest job of all time and it would be so easy to manage. The only way we found only those ten skews is through testing all those products. And so once I started working by myself this past May, I’ve started just testing tones and tones of products from Aliexpress trying to find my ten true winners out of the 1700.

Steve: So you guys sell 1700 and it sounds like to me that you want to reduce that number to just a handful.

Will: It was more than 1700 if you include all the drop shipping. But yeah, it’s the kind of thing where 1700, it’s an easy way to build up a bunch of revenue and make a bunch of money easily, but now I’m spoiled enough where I can focus more on my lifestyle than the cash flow. That’s where I’m more worried about. So it’s cool making all that money with my brother, but it’s not cool working in a factory over 40 hours a week. And so I’d rather make 100 grand working an hour a week than ten million dollars a year working 100 hours a week.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worse aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports, so no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches.

Plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you get to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So back in 2014 you guys were still a two man show, right. I would imagine to house all these products, like four or whatever five million dollars worth, that’s a pretty big warehouse and you have to go through each product?

Will: Not necessarily, because we were really efficient about it. We could get a container in and have it out the same day.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So we would get a container in and then me and my brother would just mad men unloading this container, labeling it, making sure everything looks legit, stacking it out on pallet, wrapping the pallets, weighing the pellets and having all the weights and pellets and everything labeled by later that day where then we could call the freight company, the third party whatever freight company, and they could pick it up and bring it on its way to Amazon later that day if we got it early in the day. So the longest our inventory ever sat at a warehouse was like 20 hours.

Steve: Oh wow, okay, you guys are sick. I think I saw a picture of your warehouse. It’s pretty big.

Will: Yeah, we have like a – it’s kind of confusing, I was worked out, but my family owns a manufacturing company. So they have like a manufacturing type of warehouse where it’s like we don’t go anywhere near for like safety reasons. But we got our own little section because they moved over to lee manufacturing and had a bunch of extra space. We use their extra warehouse space and knocked down a couple of walls to add some more loading dock doors for ourselves.

Steve: I’m just curious, you are doing all these products, have you ever had any problems with quality control and dealing with vendors?

Will: I haven’t really had much to deal with quality control. The only kind of issue I’ve ever really had is when I either get like a few samples and they just suck, and I just basically throw them away. It’s a price of doing business. Or I once get a container of these products where the two sides didn’t fit. But I had already ordered say four containers in the past year from this company, and I was a good customer and I told them that “Hey, you attached the wrong part to it. It doesn’t fit properly.” Without question for free, they air freighted out the right part and we got it all fixed and everything was fine.

Since I had a past history with them, and I would spend tens of thousands of dollars with them, they had no problem just to admit that they are wrong and just air freight the stuff out there. I have very good relationships with all my suppliers. So I have no problem asking them to bend over backwards for me at this point.

Steve: Do you think the reason for that is because you pick really simple products like your coasters example, right?

Will: Yeah, that’s the main, main reason is that I really try to go out of my way to perceive any problems ahead of time. Then when I don’t perceive the problem ahead of time, it’s something stupid like the knee scooter where people just return them like in 30 days which I just had no idea. I didn’t think about that.

Steve: Did you end up liquidating those knee scooters then?

Will: We ordered a second container, sold all those and then we thought about ordering a third container and said F it, we don’t want to waste our time anymore.

Steve: Okay, and so with your vendors then you mentioned that you start out with like 20 units and that’s like from Aliexpress, right?

Will: Usually. Yeah.

Steve: Then for your second order, you said you graduate, I think you said like a hundred units or something like that.

Will: Again, it’s a really case by case kind of thing where say, if there’s $100 a unit, I’ll probably just order another twenty again and just keep ordering 20 every week, because I don’t want to tie up my cash flow. But if they are a dollar a unit, then I might just order 500 because it’s like I just don’t want to waste my time ordering again.

Steve: Have you ever run into any problems where the vendor like after that small initial order that they want you to order like 500 units for example?

Will: Well not on Aliexpress, because you don’t really talk to the vendor at all. You just …

Steve: Oh, this is all in the context of Aliexpress.

Will: Yeah, I don’t order from Alibaba and tell them I’m going to order a large quantity, that I’m going to actually private label and do like a little bit customization to it and all that stuff, because that process takes long. I hate wasting two months of emailing back and forth. I want to make money now kind of thing.

Steve: Okay. You mentioned before I asked you this whether you had like your own store for your own website. You made it sound like those are just place holders I guess or brand pages?

Will: Yeah, they are basically there if I ever want to make an ecommerce site, like it’s indexed on Google for a certain amount of time, so it looks better and two if anyone ever like searches the brand name, something at least pops up and it looks like a semi legit website and stuff. It’s something like my business partner and I will make a square space site in the afternoon, and then that’s good enough for us. It’s not like we are spending a bunch of time on it.

Steve: Are you showing your products on there with links to Amazon listings at all?

Will: Yes, that’s exactly what we are doing. We are doing like the add the cart button and the add to cart button links to our Amazon listing through a super URL.

Steve: Here’s one thing I was always curious about. Are you worried about Amazon kind of pushing you out and going direct to your manufacturers at some point?

Will: I don’t think worried is the right word. I know it’s going to happen. I’m just ready for it. I have grown up in a weird time where I was born in 1990. And so I’ve seen like [inaudible 00:32:08], like Yahoo, AOL and Myspace like go out of business over night. I’ve seen a bunch of tech companies come and go, and that’s basically how my whole life has been.

I’m so very used to the idea that like Amazon might just come in and wipe everyone out and take away all the third party sellers, and then ten years from now Amazon is going out of business because the rejects is going crazy or something. And so it’s kind of thing where I’m always have the kind of mind frame that this is probably not going to be there tomorrow, so make as much cash as you can today.

Steve: Are you doing anything to kind of prepare when that happens, or are you just prepared to gradually lose this over time and come up with new things?

Will: Well, if you can’t beat them join them. I’ve been selling a lot to Amazon.

Steve: You mean with the vendor program?

Will: Yup.

Steve: Can you just describe that real quick for the listeners who don’t know what that is.

Will: It’s basically you just sell to Amazon instead of on Amazon. It’s a little bit more annoying because they place like multiple purchase orders a week and you kind of have to have the inventory ready to send to them or to back order it. But it’s a very wise thing to do if you have a very hot selling product and you are competing for the buy box, because if you sell to Amazon, Amazon will basically control the buy box, and yes you will make a smaller profit margin, but controlling the buy box 100% is pretty sweet. Amazon will buy a lot from you. They will pay you fairly fast, so it really clears off the cash flow issue.

Steve: Can you talk about like the decision making process or was it just clear cut decision to sell to Amazon for you?

Will: It just kind of like…

Steve: Because there’s pros and cons I would imagine, right?

Will: Well there’s definitely cons, but it’s how do you take advantage of Amazon’s greed. Do you know what I’m saying? And so you think and they are going, okay, Amazon wants to have every skew possible, and they want everything for like low prices. If I see a product that’s not on Amazon yet, and I can get like a wholesale say account with them, I can take that catalogue of a thousand products and upload it to Amazon saying, “Hey I had these thousand products and you want to buy them for me.”

And if Amazon even looks at them and goes “Wow, we don’t have any of those products yet. Yeah, we want to add to our catalogues, can we get three units of each?” Those sell out probably instantly within like a week, because Amazon promotes its own stuff a lot more than third party sellers. Then I sold 3,000 units to Amazon that week kind of thing, and I did nothing besides copy and paste like a spread sheet over to them.

Steve: Let’s say you said to Amazon, “Hey, I don’t want to use– I don’t want to sell direct to you,” and then they go with someone else, are you pretty much screwed at that point?

Will: That’s why if you have like a legitimate private label brand, there’s really nothing they can do about it. So that’s basically the only time you wouldn’t want to sell to Amazon is that you have a legitimate private label brand, you are the only one on the listing and you are selling 30 units a day.

If you sell to Amazon, you may go up to 40 units a day, but then you are going to lose your profit margin. You are going to make any money in that. If they go and they try to source any of your competitor’s products to try to like run you out of business, there’s nothing you can do about that. At that point, if you are competing with Amazon like that, then I would just sell yours to Amazon too.

Steve: So by legitimate you mean something really unique that no one else is offering.

Will: Yeah, if you are just selling some crappy yoga mat with just like your logo on the corner, or you are selling something like meat cloths, or like barbecue gloves or something like that where you are adding zero value and there’s nothing unique at all about your product, then yeah, I wouldn’t blame Amazon for taking down all those similar listings and just having a few barbecue gloves. But if you actually have something somehow unique, then yeah, I doubt they are just going to [inaudible 00:35:39] your listing because you are competing with them.

Steve: Can you give us an example of something that you are selling direct to Amazon or?

Will: Yeah, I’m trying to think of something on top of my head. Because it’s like we were selling like those knee scooters directly to Amazon. Once we kind of like things started slowing down a little bit, and we thought that might boost sales, but also with mostly like my brother just signed a big contract with a wholesale company that has 10,000 skews. He uploaded those 10,000 skews to Amazon, and Amazon first order from him was for 500,000.

And so my brother made basically like 100 grand of that being a middle man. That 500 grand is already sold, it’s not like you are sending 500 grand in the inventory and to wait to sell it for months, its already sold because Amazon bought it from him. It clears the whole cash flow issue.

Steve: So here’s a question on that, a perfect example, why don’t they just list their stuff on Amazon and instead go through your brother?

Will: Because, this is where it gets kind of slimy. Have you ever read “The Everything Store.” It’s Jeff Bezos’ biography?

Steve: No, I haven’t read that.

Will: He explains in there a story about wood stove knives. Have you ever heard of wood stove knives?

Steve: Yes, of course.

Will: Okay. Most people I tell this example to have never heard of it which is like okay, I know you’ve heard of it.

Steve: Are they not married? I mean the real one registers for those.

Will: Exactly, so Wood stove knives was contacted by Amazon. This is back like 2008 or 2009. They were contacted by Amazon saying, hey we want to sell your knives. They say– say wood stove buys 10,000 knives to a knife store for $100 and then they are supposed to market it for $400. They sold their knives to Amazon for $100. Amazon went around and sold them for like $101 on Amazon.

Wood stove just freaks out and goes, “What the heck are you doing? You are screwing over like a hundred year history of our family selling to all these different brick and motor shops, you are screwing up our whole entire supply chain, all our wholesale accounts, we are not selling to you anymore Amazon. Amazon goes, “I don’t care. There’s a million Mom and Pop shops already have contracts with you who will sell directly to us.”

And so all these Mom and Pop shops sit there and sell all their stuff to Amazon, wood stoves are trying to contact these 500,000 distributors they had throughout the world, saying who is selling to Amazon. They can’t figure out who it is. Amazon is still selling them at break-even prices. Most more times than not, big large manufacturers and distributors don’t want to sell to Amazon, because they are afraid of them undercutting mat pricing, and they don’t want them to screw up all the distribution channels. It’s basically, you are sitting there being kind of like a middle man for Amazon to make sure they can get inventory, they can’t get their hands on personally.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Again it’s taking advantage of Amazon’s greed.

Steve: Do you see like the Asian manufacturers selling direct on Amazon?

Will: A little bit. I don’t know. It’s like no offence to anyone anywhere, but like from a lot of Chinese businesses I’ve dealt with, they are a bunch of idiots. Like they would never– they are very good at following very strict directions, but I don’t think a lot of them are like good at thinking outside the box and thinking about like, “Oh look, we are selling a crazy amount of these products and he’s having us label them for Amazon.

Maybe we should cut this guy out of the chain and just sell these directly on Amazon, because it’s easy enough for them.” It’s not blocked in China, Amazon is in. they just look it up in Amazon and go, “He’s getting $40 a unit? We are selling to him for $4 a unit. Why don’t we just cut him out of loop? He already showed us how to label it for Amazon.”

That’s happening to maybe 1,000 different suppliers throughout China and not one of them has just skipped the step, and instead they put up these super crappy listings on Amazon that are merchant fulfilled with like 70 day shipping. It’s like obviously they don’t understand how Amazon works, how the customers work, how prime works, anything. It would take them a half second to look it up, but they just don’t think that way.

Steve: No, I agree. They are actually really good at copying stuff, not so good at—but here’s the thing, whenever I get on the phone and I notice someone has perfect English, that’s when I get worried.

Will: Oh yeah, that’s for sure. I even thought about is a consulting job just doing my rounds around Shenzhen and Guanghou and just teaching everyone on how to sell on Amazon, and just making billions of dollars and screwing over everyone, because they just like shooting fish in a barrel.

Steve: Yeah, totally, yeah. Let’s take a step back. I want to talk a little bit about this before we go. Do you have like strategy for getting your first sales on Amazon? Do you use any strategies and reviews services when you launch a product, or do you just let it ride?

Will: I use it as PPC and just let it ride. I’m usually going after super low competition products, or very specific products where I’m selling each HP190SL, which is like a specific model of someone. You know what I’m saying where’s it’s like someone is going to search HP190SL and even if mine has zero reviews, it’s going to be the first one that shows up because it’s such a specific search.

Steve: Okay, so all of your products that you sell in your store, kind of follow these guidelines so that you don’t actually need to do like a zone blast or something like that for example?

Will: Yeah, I don’t really believe in zone blast or a lot of those give away services. I’d rather, like I was saying earlier, fly under the radar and sell a thousand products once a day. Those are kind of my ways, it’s dumb really kind of trying to grow my business quickly, because it’s just the easiest way with the least amount or work on my end.

Steve: So on that note then, when you are doing your research, how many sellers do you like to see on Amazon for a given product?

Will: It really depends. It really depends on their price because– they is going to be a thousand sellers if they are all selling for $100, and if I can make money at $50 then I don’t really care if there’s a thousand sellers. I go compete with them. Like my wooden sunglasses, I sell just because I can go in there and totally undercut everyone’s price, and so that’s why I’m luring not because of my style. But then another one is where it’s I know I can’t cut the price down as much. I need to make sure there’s not as many sellers out there, so it’s a balance.

Steve: What is your strategy going forward assuming that Amazon is going to push everyone’s prices down to like the minimum?

Will: Strategy moving forward is I’m going to start my kick starter most likely in 2016. I’m also going to build out a few of my brands and actually try to do some legitimate marketing for the ones that are really selling. I’ve also looked at selling some of my private label items to brick and motor stores, and all sorts of different things. I’ve just been looking at every single thing I can, and listening to every business podcast I can that’s not about Amazon, and trying to use outside business tactics and apply them to Amazon.

Steve: I guess what I was trying to get with that was, are you going to try to invent your own unique product that’s kind of tangible?

Will: That’s what the kick starter. That’s what I think about with that is I’m going to take some products that has already been made on Alibaba, just add a few quick little things to it, and say I’m coming out with a brand new product. If I can create say 20 to 40,000 dollars, and pay for that first container, I’m just going to make a killing, because once you can get up to the sea freight level, you pay so much less per unit.

Steve: It sounds like you feel like that’s kind of like the way to create a lasting business going forward, right?

Will: Yeah, it’s no way you are going to be able to have a business where you are just slapping your brand name on it ten years from now.

Steve: Okay, to prepare for that– so it obviously requires a much larger investment, that’s why you are mentioning kick starter.

Will: Yeah, the kick starter is not only the investment, but it’s also the proof of concept. It’s also that I get everyone’s emails from kick starter. So as I come out with more products in that brand and that niche, I can sit there and spam out to say a thousand people who funded me over and over saying, hey now we are coming out with this version of it, now we are coming out with the waterproof version, and just doing that over and over again because now I have actually a built in base.

Steve: That was actually my next question. Do you do any marketing for your Amazon products outside of just Amazon’s visibility?

Will: No, I don’t at all. It’s something I’ve done in the past. I’ve done something like Google PPC and that kind of stuff, but it’s too expensive. But if I actually had like an email list of people who are interested in my products, I think it would be a totally different thing.

Steve: Do you try to gather any emails or having people register for your products? Do you have any inserts in your products?

Will: No, well not really inserts. I have like I go and visit print and I get a bunch of really high quality stickers that have like a logo on it, have our website and have like our Instagram and all that accounts. I stick those outside the packaging, so it looks like it’s actually part of the packaging.

That sticker also has like a UPC coat on it. It’s like a super nice glossy looking like sticker that’s maybe the size of a deck of cards. Yeah, it has our logo, it has our UPC, it has everything on it. And so like we can label that one fell swoop and then two, Amazon can’t get mad at us for like us trying to drive traffic to our website instead of Amazon, because it’s actually a part of UPC label we have to have it.

Steve: So let’s say people do go to your website, are you doing anything special on your website like do you offer coupons in response for emails or anything like that?

Will: No, honestly. The amount of traffic we get say like four visitors a day or whatever, it’s not something that I will really spent too much time on.

Steve: Okay, so it is literally just a brand website, and so even if you were to drive traffic there, it doesn’t really matter that much.

Will: Yeah, if they got ten thousand visitors today, I don’t know if our sales can go up on Amazon really, because it’s like – they are really not that awesome at all.

Steve: Here is kind of a question that I have been curious about since we’ve been experiencing with our store. Prices in China have been increasing pretty dramatically from year to year. Are you looking in other countries to source besides China at this point?

Will: Yeah, I only do China usually because it’s the lowest price I find in Alibaba. If someone says they can give me a higher quality lower pricing in Vietnam or in Canada, or anywhere, I don’t really care, I’ll just buy the lowest price at the highest quality. I can care less what country I do business with.

Steve: Yeah, but are you– how would you find those other vendors like in Vietnam or Pakistan for example?

Will: Alibaba does have a bunch of other countries on there. But then to go into like the different trade shows and all that kind of stuff and just through my networks now that I know enough Amazon people, and I know people who have designed their own products enough times that it– I can go and I know people I can contact who’s like, “Hey this guy has made back pack before.” I can go to this guy about back packs.

This guy has made cosmetics before. I can go talk to him about the natural cosmetics. I’ll go talk to someone like that and kind of pick their brand and see what they know about the industry and say, “Oh no, yeah, you definitely want to go to source it from Vietnam.” You don’t want to source it from China. Then I will go with that. So it’s just kind of– I’m totally open to it, but I don’t have any specific way how I target non Chinese countries.

Steve: Have you traditionally then just used Alibaba and trade shows for your vendors then?

Will: Yeah. Like 99% Alibaba and then for like the wholesale accounts I get, that’s just stumbling upon them on Amazon where I see something selling for 200 bucks, has 200 reviews and it’s isn’t fulfilled by Amazon. It’s like I should probably source that and take over the buy box.

Steve: I see, I see. Just to kind of close this interview, we’ve been talking for a while, if you were to give some advice to people who want to try this, just to get into ecommerce and Amazon, give them a couple of pieces of advice.

Will: Don’t over think things. Don’t try to anticipate too many problems before they happen. It’s just going to make you freeze, you don’t move forward. I had someone email me today saying, “Should I start on Amazon Canada because I’m afraid I might sell too much out of the gates and on Amazon US, and I’m not prepared for it.” These are the kinds of problems that you do not need to worry about. It’s just a total waste of time, worrying about what if I sell too much and I can’t get my account under control. Figure out once you get there.

But these are the kinds of things where people try to sike themselves out, and smart people try to over think things. One of the biggest benefits I had was that I was young and dumb when I first started and I wasn’t worried about if I find LLC on [inaudible 00:47:38] and I wasn’t worried about if I was paying the exact custom fees, or any of that kind of stuff. I just got started and didn’t think about it. It sounds like that would be terrible advice, but honestly, until you sell 10,000 worth of stuff on Amazon, just don’t think about anything. Just get selling. And then once you hit that five figure plateau, then you can actually start systemizing and actually figuring out how to actually run your business.

Steve: In terms of timeline, minimum investment.

Will: Minimum investment, the more the better. At least five to ten thousand dollars, is you are going to be able to move a lot faster than if you only have say 1000 dollars. If you have 1000 dollars, you can maybe expect to be doing five thousand dollars in sales within six months, but you start with $5000, you can maybe be doing 20,000 dollars in sales in the six months.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of timeframe, how quickly can you make your first sale?

Will: That day. Like I do it all the times where I’ve thrown up listings and sold something maybe 20 minutes later.

Steve: Oh, you mean when you don’t have products?

Will: When you don’t have products?

Steve: I mean the whole process from start.

Will: You are starting from scratch? The fastest I’ve ever done it was from, with these glowing sunglasses, but they were from me ordering hitting buy now on Aliexpress to be in stock in Amazon and my first pair sold was ten days.

Steve: Wow.

Will: It was very first in China. It was like 6 days from China, and then I immediately later that day got it sent it to Amazon and it was like 3 days until I was in stock in Amazon and sold later that day.

Steve: So you can literally get started in two weeks, it sounds like.

Will: Exactly. That’s why it really discourages me when people spend two weeks just doing research, because they can already know whether something sells within two weeks.

Steve: It sounds like if I can just put some words in your mouth, you like to go with the shot gun method so to speak. You just put a bunch of stuff up, see what sells and just ride the winners?

Will: Yeah, and I’m not a detail oriented person. I’m not a marketing type person. I’m a type of person who likes to take action and see results after the fact. The shock and effect works great for me where I can go try a million products, and if none of them work, whatever, if they all work, great. It’s kind of thing where if you test a product and you have to liquidate it, a looser looses once and a winner wins forever.

Steve: It sounds like the minimum investment, I mean you are not putting down large amounts of money to test each of these products either, it sounds like.

Will: No, I am. I had this, like I was mentioning, I had this marijuana glowing sunglasses I was selling that were for like when you grow in indoor rooms, and they are basically sunglasses with a key word marijuana growing in front of them. I bought 20 pairs for $70 landed and I sold them out within two weeks and did $400 in sales. I turned $70 into $400 in two weeks. So it’s like you can’t really beat that kind of…

Steve: I kind of like your strategy actually. Less thinking, more action which is what a lot of people lack actually.

Will: Exactly. That was the whole entire reason why I kind of came up with this. It’s between what my brother and I what worked. From same people go, okay, I spent X amount of money in software, I’ve ordered two samples, I’ve been talking to suppliers for three months and I still haven’t sold anything yet. What should I do? It’s like, well, by three months, you should have already tested twenty products, you should already know what sells, what doesn’t and be on your way.

Steve: Interesting. Hey, Will, where can people find you if they have questions?

Will: You can email me, just my name WilliamTjernlund@gmail.com, also Twitter at @Wtjern add me on Facebook, I’m pretty easy to find because of my last name. Besides that, yeah, that’s the easiest way to get in contact me.

Steve: Awesome Will. Thanks for coming on the show. I learned a lot and it was kind of refreshing to hear a different Amazon strategy actually.

Will: Yeah. There’s– I’ve made money about a million different ways on Amazon between drop shipping, private labeling, wholesaling, everything and it seems everyone is kind of stuck in the same ark of chambers. So I’m happy you gave me an opportunity to kind of express my opinions.

Steve: Well thanks for coming on the show. I really appreciate it.

Will: Thank you.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, Will’s story is awesome, and it just goes to show that you don’t need a large stuff to run a seven figure ecommerce store. Now imagine just making 7.5 million dollars with just two people. Obviously it can be done. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode109.

Once again I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring thing episode. As I mentioned earlier FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.
And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

108: How John Rampton Lost His 7 Figure Amazon Business

How John Lost His 7 Figure Business By Getting Banned From Amazon

Today I’m thrilled to have John Rampton with me on the show. John is someone who I met at FinCon 2 years ago and he’s got an amazing story to share with you today.

In fact, his story is almost unreal. 10 years ago, he was working in construction when he had his legs crushed in a freak accident.

He didn’t think he could walk again and during that time when he was bed ridden, he studied business, marketing and selling online 16-20 hours a day.

Fast forward to today, he’s started a bunch of 7 figure companies. He writes for Forbes, Entrepreneur, Huffington Post and he the founder of his current company Due.com which provides simple online invoicing and time tracking for freelancers and businesses.

Anyway, the reason I decided to have John on the podcast is because 1, he’s awesome and 2, I wanted him to talk about his former 7 figure Amazon business.

That’s right. John used to sell on Amazon and made a lot of money doing it too until one day he was banned and lost it all.

What You’ll Learn

  • Why John got his Amazon account banned
  • How he could have prevented getting banned
  • How he tried to get his account back
  • What he did with all of his inventory.
  • Recommendations for Amazon sellers on how to avoid getting banned.
  • Whether John recommends creating an Amazon business today
  • How he bounced back with his new venture

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year in business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email.

Before we begin I’m happy to announce that I’m holding my own ecommerce conference on May19th in Miami Florida this year called the Sellers Summit. Instead of the large crowded conferences that you are used to hearing about, mine will be small and intimate with a focus on learning. So picture a small round table workshops instead of large auditoriums with a focus on actionable strategies that will grow your ecommerce business. For more information go to sellerssummit.com and watch the video.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. FameBit is the number one market place for influencer marketing, with over 20,000 YouTubers, Instagrammers, people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Yes, you can get famous YouTubers and Instagrammers to promote your business for as low as 50 bucks.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code “my wife” at famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to faembit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your product. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have John Rampton with me on the show. John is someone who I met at Fincon two years ago, and he’s got an amazing story to share with you today. In fact his story is almost unreal. But ten years ago he was working in construction when he had his legs crushed in a very freak accident. He didn’t think that he could walk again.

During that time when he was bedridden, he actually studied upon business; marketing and selling online pretty much 16 to 20 hours a day, and fast forward to today he’s started a bunch of seven figure companies. He writes for Forbes, Entrepreneur, Huffington Post. He’s the founder of his current company due.com which provides simple online invoicing and time tracking for freelancers and businesses.

The reason I decided to have John on the podcast today is because one, he’s awesome and two I wanted him to talk about his former 7 figure Amazon business. So that’s right, John used to sell on Amazon and he made a lot of money doing it until one day he was banned and lost it all. With that, welcome to the show John. How are you doing today man?

Rampton: Hey doing very well? Thanks for having me.

Steve: Tell us about your back story. I mean I kind of glossed upon it in the intro, but how did you become the serial entrepreneur that you are today, and how did that freak accident shape who you are?

Rampton: I’ve always kind of been an entrepreneur. From a young age, I really loved money. I like making money. I like what it can do, but more importantly I kind of like when it just builds up in your bank account, and you could see that number just growing.

Steve: It is fun.

Rampton: Yeah, it’s a lot of fun seeing that number grow. From a young age, I started the candy stand, did this and working. After and I guess during college as you mentioned I got in a freak accident. I was working at a construction site. I got ran over. It crushed my right leg, completely just crushed it. The doctor said I’ll never walk like ever, ever walk again.

I spent the next however many years it was. It was about a year I spent in bed. I had to be– I mean to the point of I was sponge bathed and had– I couldn’t get out of bed for nine months. During that time, you still have bills to pay even though I was a college student. At the time I was with my parents living there. I still had a car payment, I still had this payment, I still– you still have bills. So I had to find a way to make money from my bed. That’s kind of when I got in into the whole marketing thing is I had no other choice. That’s what I had to do.

Steve: Amazon wasn’t your first venture then, right?

Rampton: No. I originally worked at real estate startup. We were helping people, helping real estate agents sell their homes online and…

Steve: This is from your bed or?

Rampton: Yeah, I was working pre bed and post bed. I mean if you can imagine that. So I got hurt. I was working a side job on the side, and decided I was going to make some extra money on the side, that’s when I got hurt. Basically what happened is I worked at this job and every time I made a sale I got paid like $8. I found this, when I got hurt and even while I was at my job, you can only call so many people every single day as a sales person. There’s only so many calls you can make. So then I started doing other things. I got into affiliate marketing. I got into tax marketing. I started finding there are better ways to sell than to just sit and call people on the phone.

I went on Craigslist and I said for $6 per sale, I will pay anybody who can sell what this is for $6. I was making a $2 cut. I was the top sales rep at the time, and I was getting like ten sales a day. Then I started having other people sell for me, and just playing the middle man and that, and I started getting really good at people and getting to know people and having men sell for me. My top sales day there was 540 sales, and the next higher sales rep was like 11.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Rampton: I was– one I was making great money, but two, I really learned how to sell online. And if you are going to get in to like ecommerce and selling on Amazon, and doing that type of stuff, you need to find what works and find ways to make money online. And as a business owner, you can’t just be like, “Oh I’m going to sell this way, or oh my customers are going to come to me.” You have to go out there and find those ways.

Steve: Okay, and so how did you transition from this real estate company to selling physical products on Amazon?

Rampton: That was kind of a weird transition. I actually left that company that I was working at and I started a competitor about a year and a half or about two years. Technically we launched like two years to the day after I left there. So we launched this company. It went very, very well. We sold it. We made some money. We ended up taking that money and pouring it directly into an ecommerce company located in Southern California called organize.com. We bought organize.com…

Steve: That an amazing domain by the way.

Rampton: Oh yeah, it was a great domain, and had existing sales. We had this very, very large warehouse with about 56,000 skews. We were selling pretty decent amount of things, of product. Had a little team and I came in there and I was like you know, I’m really good at this online stuff. I can triple the sales. We came in and I started applying my methods and stuff. We started really getting into ecommerce.

Some of the things that you can do in ecommerce and especially on Amazon, there’s a couple different tools you can use that for example they go on Amazon and they say, “Hey here’s your product, and here’s” — there’s twenty other products on Amazon just like yours. So you can say, “Hey I want my product to be 8% lower than the lowest price, but here’s the lowest I’m willing to go.” We went and did that for most of our products. Immediately we started, we almost doubled our revenue in a couple of weeks. We were selling a lot more. We weren’t as profitable, but we were selling just massive amounts. I mean …

Steve: Can we back a little bit. Why did you think you could triple revenues as soon you went in there? What things were the companies not doing when you got there?

Rampton: Well first of all, I analyzed the numbers and I’m like, man first of all traffic perspective. They were only converting at about a half a percent.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay that’s really little, okay.

Rampton: So I look at that and I’m like man, there is one way I can triple. Second I went in there and most ecommerce companies have this problem. What happens with large ecommerce companies that have been around for a while is they are not up to date on current methods and practices. For example, when an order came in for us, we printed off a piece of paper. That paper then was taken over and manually entered into our system.

Then another then taken, they stamped it, take it back to the warehouse where the person would pick the stuff, ship it, mark right on there the shipping address, and then we would have to manually go enter that into Amazon.

Steve: Oh my goodness.

Rampton: Once that was entered into Amazon we take the reference number and enter it into Quick Books. That sadly is how a lot of ecommerce companies today are.

Steve: Was this a purely Amazon business when you got there or was it…

Rampton: It was Amazon. Their own website did about 10%, 12% of all things and there were a couple of other things, but it was primarily Amazon.

Steve: So it wasn’t FBA, it was self fulfilled Amazon?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay got it.

Rampton: Yup. When you have that many skews you really can’t – it’s really hard to do FBA. FBA for those who don’t know is fulfilled by Amazon where they fulfill the orders for you. If you’re– FBA has to have a good profit margin for them. You pay them a lot more and the skews have to sell very, very quickly. They don’t like inventory sitting on their shelves. Most of our things were ones to two Zs. We did have a lot, but we wanted the actual profit margin.

Steve: So these were other people’s branded products or were they your own branded products?

Rampton: They were other people’s products. All we did was sell other people’s products.

Steve: Okay, and so the margins probably weren’t high enough to make FBA worthwhile?

Rampton: I mean, they were, but the problem with FBA, and if you have somebody else’s products is – I mean one reason why we left FBA is if they are not your products, they will find the original person, and take you out of the equation. Amazon did that several times, and that’s how they ruin a lot of companies, middlemen, like ourselves. If you are going down that route and FBA will– if you put in there, they’ll go direct.

Steve: Okay. So this business was already there when you had acquired it.

Rampton: Correct, yeah.

Steve: They were selling organizational products?

Rampton: Correct. Like picture the container store online. We are probably their largest competitor online.

Steve: I see. So what was the differentiating factor? Were you just selling similar products in container store, or did you kind of have like a — what was your value preposition is what I’m trying to get at?

Rampton: I mean one the trust. I mean people just go online and they say what’s the lowest price, and we were usually the lowest price. So that was our biggest value differentiator. We sell the exact same products as container store. All container store is us with a different marketing. There’s a million other stores out there too that have these products and sell them online.

Steve: Okay and then so you went in there and you found I guess in the fulfilling side, there were a lot of inefficiencies, but how did you increase your sales on Amazon? You mentioned you used some automated pricing tool where you reduced prices by X number of percent. Was there anything else that you did to kind of scale this?

Rampton: I mean instead of like when you direct people to Amazon, there’s a couple SEO techniques. For example if your emailing out a list and you are saying, “Hey, buy this product on Amazon.” We usually say, “Hey go search this specific name,” and we direct people through the funnel instead of directing them to the end of the funnel. It doesn’t help you out as much on direct sales at that moment, but if you can direct people down the funnel that you know the majority of people are doing and everybody goes to you, Amazon’s algorithm is set to make it so that you come up a little higher in their search results.

We did this on two or three different occasions, one for example on a Christmas tree storage box. We said go type in Amazon Christmas tree storage. We were on page two. At the time we sent like– our email list was like 600,000 customers. We had a very, very large email list, but we directed probably like 50,000 clicks, people going towards this. They all typed in Christmas tree storage and they wanted the lowest price, and they know that ours is the lowest price because they could search it really easily.

They search that, and then they go to page two and they find us and they purchase us. Well over the course of one week we went from page two to page one, and that increased our sales on that one product by like 2000% because all of a sudden anyone who types Christmas tree storage is now, we are number one. And we are the lowest cost, so they are always going to purchase that. So we got– I mean we had one day where we had almost 6000 orders of that product.

Steve: Let me ask you this, how did you develop that 600,000 email list when Amazon doesn’t give you emails?

Rampton: Those were actually from our own site. We do get significant orders. We do have a lot of people ordering from our own site. Amazon also used to give you the email addresses. They don’t anymore.

Steve: Okay, what year was this by the way just for context?

Rampton: This was in 2014.

Steve: Oh, so it was just last year?

Rampton: Yeah, 2013, sorry.

Steve: Okay. So you were building emails based on your website sales which were about 10% of the over all.

Rampton: 10%, maybe 15% of the overall.

Steve: And then at the same time Amazon was giving you emails which you added to your part of your email addresses.

Rampton: Correct, yeah.

Steve: And then just to summarize for everyone listening, you’d have someone do a search and then you take that URL with the search term in it, and then drive traffic to that.

Rampton: We would actually drive them to Amazon and say to like Amazon.com, or to the category page, and we would say search this term. Like look for us.

Steve: Oh I see. You would have them do the search.

Rampton: Yeah, we would have them do a search. We won’t direct them through the search. We would direct them to the search. Again we lost a lot of money doing this, because we are directing people to our competitors. But we found that whenever we did this, people would search out our product, and find that one, we were still the lowest price. That’s in most worlds that’s the most important thing is having the lowest price. But we would direct them and we would say here is how you find us, here is how you do this and it worked, very, very well.

Steve: That’s interesting, because I’m just curious what the math look like, versus directing that traffic directly to the buy button on your own site, and I imagine your margins are a lot higher.

Rampton: We did a split test where we sent 25%. We originally started with 50-50, but then we switched. We always did 25% to our own website. The rest to Amazon, but on our own site people would do that, and we got usually a very high significant, literally when we sent that email out, we probably of the 25% versus 75%, we probably made equal revenue between the two.

Steve: Oh wow, okay.

Rampton: I mean it hurt us a lot. Having, from it taking us from page two to page one, or– we didn’t tell people what to type in either. We just said, whatever, and people used their own keywords, their own prices. We did say, type in Christmas tree storage or whatever you are looking for on the storage and find us there, because we have lots of products. People– so all of our search terms, now you type in that, and we were number one on all of them.

Steve: That is interesting. So that was just like a long term…

Rampton: The short term result within seven business days, they broke even, both of them 50-50. The longer term thing is we noticed the week after, like our sales improved by like 10, 15% a week.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Rampton: Like Intel was like, holy cow, we are getting– like I said we had one day where we had like over 4,000 or 5000 orders of one product.

Steve: That’s interesting. Do you recommend that strategy today?

Rampton: Yeah, it works. I mean don’t like bet all your chips on that, never put all your chips in one basket. We will get into that a little bit later.

Steve: Yeah we will.

Rampton: But like that was a very, very strong technique that worked very, very well for us. Again it hurt us in the short term; it helped us in the long term.

Steve: So can you talk a little bit about FBA, because you didn’t have the prime monitor next to your product, right?

Rampton: Correct, no we did not.

Steve: Were there any competitors with prime that were competing against you?

Rampton: We still beat them. The prime versus non prime, it still comes down to a pricing issue. If they can get it, if a person has to wait one additional day, they are already waiting– online shoppers are actually really, really good shoppers. They know what they are looking for and they are willing to wait. If they are not willing to wait, just go down to WalMart and buy it, or go down the container store and buy it.

Those are for people who have to have it now and impulse shoppers. Online shoppers are typically online impulse shoppers, but they are willing to wait. They are willing to wait a couple of days. The difference between getting the package in two days versus getting a package in three days is not that big of a deal.

Steve: Interesting. Okay and you still think that holds true today?

Rampton: Oh yeah. I mean, did it hurt us? Yes. I’m sure it hurt us. I’m sure there’s a percentage of people that say effort. I want in two days or I’d rather pay a $1.50 more to get prime. Overall I would say the majority of online shoppers are really, really, like price conscious, that’s why they are going online and not running over to WalMart. It’s a price issue for them.

Steve: So I was going to ask out this question, if you saw an FBA you said Amazon would seek out the true supplier. Did that imply that you do not recommend selling FBA for products that are non-branded to your own name?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay, so anyone selling other people’s products you don’t want to use FBA and sell much and fulfill to take advantage of the actual profits.

Rampton: Correct, if you are selling others, I don’t recommend it. Again if it’s small and you are doing ones and twos numbers, it’s just fine. If you are a stay at home mum and you are making $3,000, $4,000 a month, they are not going to go after you. But when we were making–when we were doing– I mean we had one product that netted us probably $2 million in one month. They are going to go after that.

Steve: Okay. And when you are selling other people’s– okay, so you basically out strategize all your competitors by getting it to rank in Amazon?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay, got it. I want to transition us a little bit, did you ever have any problems with Amazon going forward. I mentioned earlier that you got banned, was this just like a total surprise, or did you see it coming?

Rampton: Amazon is a little hard to work with. It’s a good thing and it’s a bad thing. What happens with Amazon is Amazon wants you to have a certain satisfaction rate and shipping rate and on time rate. When you are selling other people’s products and for example we did some drop shipping, which a lot people listening to this are probably going to be drop shipping.

It’s really, really hard if the drop shipper runs out of products. So you are last on the totem pole to get that. For example, that one product that we sold 5,000 in one day, we preordered 100,000 units in our thing. But within about 30 days we’d already blown through almost 100,000 units.

When we were selling those and when you are selling things, if you run out of something all of a sudden your shipping date gets kind of screwed, which forces you to fall below. They have a very high, I think it’s 96% customer satisfaction, 94% shipping rate, and 95% on time shipping. So you have to ship it by a certain day, and it has to be received by a certain day.

Then all the customers have to be happy. Around Christmas time and in high demand times, that’s very hard on any company. During that time, we were getting again, a minimum of a 1,000 orders of a couple of products a day, and when somebody runs out and you– we got probably on average like 3,000 orders a day.

Steve: Crazy.

Rampton: Yeah, we were getting massive volumes. It was great. Whatever that is, if you are getting 3 orders a day and one of those three orders is behind, that all of a sudden causes all your numbers to be skewed.

Steve: You can’t just cancel the order?

Rampton: Well, that hurts your customer satisfaction, because that is not good customer service to cancel orders.

Steve: I see.

Rampton: You can’t cancel up to like 3% of orders without it hurting you– but after that, for every like 1% of your total volume, I’m not sure what the exact is, but I’m kind of mixing this up, but for everyone 1% of your total order volume that you cancel, you go down 1% in customer satisfaction.

At the time when they canceled that and they told us, so they told us two days after they run out. And we’d run out as well. They are like it’s going to be a week and a half. And we are like all my work. By that time, by the time we paused that, we had 7,000 pending orders.

Steve: Oh my goodness.

Rampton: When you are only having 3,000 orders a day, and you have 7,000 pending orders I mean even for an entire month, that’s 10% of all your orders. You are screwed.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated book keepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports. So no more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: How big is this operation, how many employees did you have?

Rampton: At the time we had like 14.

Steve: 14, that’s it. Okay. This kind of…

Rampton: We had most of our things were dropped shipped. 70% of all of our items were drop shipped. 30% were in-house.

Steve: So given that inventory is so crucial when using merchant fulfilled, you really had to have a very strong tie to your drop shipper’s databases.

Rampton: Correct, yup.

Steve: Okay, and so you had this one…

Rampton: For all of you wondering, that’s called EDI.

Steve: Yes, I think that’s a little advanced for the listeners, but yeah.

Rampton: Yeah.

Steve: So this one order basically screwed you guys over or this one product?

Rampton: This one product screwed us over. It was actually a combination. We had this a couple of times. This actually happened twice. So what happens in Amazon is you’ll get paused and then you’ll say, oh sorry we are improving this, then you have 30 days to make it better. But if all those orders are still like screwed, I mean it kills you overnight.

We got turned back on and then this happened again like three months later, whereas if somebody didn’t turn it off and it really, really hurt our company, and we ended up getting shut off permanently by Amazon. The first time they’ll kind of get back with you, the second time, like we tried everything. We contacted every person. I know every person I knew at the company and LinkedIn friend request them, everything. They would not turn us back on.

Steve: At this point you had a track record of doing lots of business with Amazon, right? It’s not like you were some pull down seller.

Rampton: Yeah, we had hundreds of thousands; I mean we had 100,000 reviews.

Steve: Crazy. And so that kind of implies that Amazon doesn’t really care even if you are making them a crap load of money. You fall below their standards and they’ll ban you.

Rampton: Correct. They just look at it as, oh, that product was making us a lot of money, but there’s still three other people selling that. Oh well. Or even if it’s your own product, they are like we are willing to take that, because we don’t want this perceived bad reputation.

Steve: I see. Could this have been prevented in your eyes looking back?

Rampton: I mean, automation, if we would have automated like if a person has a certain amount of orders that are outstanding, we automatically shut them off, but it’s really hard when you are getting massive amounts of orders for things. We could have preordered more. I mean we did preorder 100,000 or so units of one product. You figure that’s enough, but it’s not. In my eyes, there are little things we could do here, little things that we could do there, but overall there wasn’t much we could do to get over that problem.

Steve: I’m just thinking like this business model that you had doesn’t seem– it seems like you are going to get banned sooner or later.

Rampton: Most people, I would say yes. If they’re not your own product, yeah.

Steve: Just looking back also do you kind of still think that drop shipping this way is still a viable model?

Rampton: Yeah, I mean, I think it’s a very, very good model as long as you have good products that you can market that you know will go out, and you know your suppliers are not going to run out of.

Steve: Let me ask you this, the drop shippers, what’s their incentive not to list their own stuff on Amazon?

Rampton: Sometimes they just don’t want to deal with it. I mean we did have, we had like 4 or 5 customer service people. At times people from the warehouse and like our office staff had to come in and we had 8 people in customer service on the phone.

Steve: I see.

Rampton: A lot of companies don’t want to have to deal with that. They’re like hey, we make this product; we make a 20% margin on it no matter who we sell it to. Let’s just be good at that and sell that product, and there’re thousands of companies like that. They just don’t want to deal with it. To make an extra like 15% would increase their cost significantly; versus we have a thousand other products that we’re selling, so we can do that customer service.

You have to figure 1 to 3% of all orders will be coming back to you. It doesn’t matter if you have the best product in the entire world. 1 to 3 are going to be coming back, and most of the time the ones that come back are damaged or broken and problems like that. Again a lot of people don’t want to deal with that.

Steve: Even with FBA these companies– because you’re essentially outsourcing all that.

Rampton: I experienced the exact same thing like especially when you’re shipping containers and organizational stuff, like breakable items, a lot of these things just get broken in the mail and sure like, okay, it’s FedEx’s fault, or it’s UPS’s fault, but you still have a customer service, you stop to send out a new item, you still have to file that request. You still have to do all that. That requires a human body. For a $20 item, it’s going to take a person 20-30 minutes of time to get a refund on that item. Does that make sense?

Steve: It does, it does, so I’m thinking these people as like pure distributors. They don’t want to deal with anything consumer-facing, right?

Rampton: Correct. We are the consumers, the resellers.

Steve: I’m just curious logistically, when you got banned the first time,, were there any special steps that you took to get reinstated that first time?

Rampton: They make you go through a very, very strict process. Usually when you get banned you’ll get an email, you’ll have to log on, you’ll have to put together a reconsideration letter and send that back to them. It’s very process-driven and process-oriented. They do that because I’m sure they ban a lot of people.

Again we were a major account for them, but it wasn’t major enough to really have any direct people. I think that they could up their game in that, and really improve their company 10 fold by really caring about people like us, but again they don’t.

Steve: How long were you down for that first time?

Rampton: The first time we were down for 18 hours.

Steve:Okay. Oh okay, that’s not terrible.

Rampton: No, it wasn’t bad at all. I mean that still is a day, and a couple of hundred thousand dollars in sales, but yes.

Steve: Then the second time it was permanent. You were expecting that to happen then?

Rampton: No. We weren’t. We kind of got shut off. I mean we were tittering the line, but at the same time it was during our peak, peak, peak season. We were like okay, we understand this. We understand that we’re tittering the line, but we were a little bit over on the line towards the positive side. We were actually doing well.

Steve: You get that letter and then what happens?

Rampton: We got the email and our [inaudible 00:34:44] came in and she’s like, ah expressitory word, and I was like, well let’s get it back on. She’s like, okay I’m trying. I’ve already done this, this, this. The next day they didn’t respond, and the next day we submitted something and they were like we’ll be back to you within 24 hours. 4 days later we were like, okay. We started adding every person. We started calling every person, trying to make it work.

Steve: Did you shut down after that point?

Rampton: Yeah. It was like 2 weeks later, because I mean, our site sustains a lot, but it doesn’t sustain that many people, and in the ecommerce business we’re used to playing the numbers game. We have at any given time we had half a million dollars out like in accounts payable. We did have at the time like $180,000, maybe $200,000 in accounts receivable like coming from Amazon, coming from a couple different places, but that doesn’t make up for the half a million plus a good $50,000, $60,000 in payroll.

At that point I was like, we got to just nip this in the bud. There were a few little factors in there. I don’t really want to get too much on this, because it gets into details a lot more like on the thing. There were a bunch of other factors where we were just like, man this isn’t worth it to keep this alive.

Steve: Because I was just thinking, what I want to ask you was looking back would you have focused more efforts on your own site in marketing, or would you have still done the same thing and gone more or less selling on Amazon?

Rampton: I would have focused around, towards the end when we got cut off by them, we had never gone on Overstock, or [inaudible 00:36:50], eBay or other places. We put all of our skews on eBay, and we started selling like 200 units immediately. Then we put them on Overstock and we’re selling another 100 units a day. We made up for about 20 and maybe even 30% of that within a week, and we were like okay well damn it, why didn’t we do this originally, because that would have improved our margins and had us a lot more profitable and made us been able to sell more and stuff like that.

My recommendation for people getting into this business is don’t have 100% or 90% or even 80% of your revenue all from one place. If 50% plus of your revenue is coming from one source, you need to start working on other sources to get in revenue. If we would have done a lot earlier– eBay limits you in the beginning to how many products you can sell, same with Amazon, same with all of them. If we would have focused on that a lot sooner, we would have had a lot better of an ability to make a lot more profit earlier on which would have helped us through this time.

We were two and half, three weeks after Amazon shut us off before we were at actually live in Overstock. House was another one. They were another market place and we were selling like 10-15 units a day on their thing. If we had had all these other things along the way, and we’d been shut off, we would have been like, oh shoot there goes 40% of our revenue. We’ve got to lay off a couple of people, but not close down shop because it doesn’t make sense. We just didn’t have the time at working at those to really make sure that it would work.

Steve: Basically there wasn’t enough cash in the bank to kind of pay all the bills for a couple of months. Is that correct?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: Okay. You decided to shut that down may be like a month later it sounds like?

Rampton: Correct.

Steve: What happened after that? Did you immediately start your next venture?

Rampton: Yeah. I started my next venture a little while after that, again kind of going back to the other thing that actually ended in a lawsuit. It was with the previous owner so part of us closing it down was it didn’t make sense knowing that a couple of things were not disclosed when we purchased the business a year prior. We actually ended up filing a lawsuit and winning that lawsuit about a year and a half later. It wasn’t that long ago.

Those were other reasons and any person needs to make sure that they weigh all their options. Like I wasn’t everyone to be like, oh my word I just want to shut this business down next. Like there were so many factors in this where I’m like, it doesn’t make sense for me and my family to do this, so we shut it down. I kind of tucked my tail, lost tons, and tons of money, but you know this happens in life. You have successes, you have failures.

I then went back to marketing which is my thing. I started advising some companies, I started building my own personal brand. I got a couple odds and ends jobs. I got a couple of consulting gigs where I was helping different companies in search, and I was paying my bills. I started basically building up that cash flow. My wife and I live very, very humble lives. We don’t spend so much money. We pay for cash for like everything.

These are things that helped us the couple of crashes that we’ve had in our lives. To know that like, sure like I live in Palo Alto California, one of the most expensive places in the world to live. What most people don’t realize is I rent out my basement. That covers all my expenses. My entire living expenses is covered by me airbnbeing [ph] my basement every month, literally everything, the entire mortgage covers it. We do things like that and that allowed us to get back on our feet and start saving up money for the next venture.

Steve: Which is dew.com?

Rampton: Which is dew.com. About a year and a half after that collapsed, I was able to go purchase dew.com. Dew.com is an online invoicing thing. Firstly we kind of did the same thing. We found a really good URL and I purchased it and then I went and I was like well I need something to do with this. I went and bought an invoicing company. I was just like, hey here’s a good invoicing company, and I put it on Dew.com.

Steve: I’m just curious; you seem to like purchasing existing companies as opposed to starting them from scratch. Is that just a personal preference?

Rampton: Yes. I realized that I am not the best product person in the world, but I’m an amazing marketer. I always say that nobody can market products better than me out there, nobody. I can market products better than anybody else out there. But actually building a good product that people like, I’m not the best at. One tip for people is know what you’re good at.

If you find what you’re good at, don’t try and be good at something else. Be really, really good at one thing and okay at everything else. I realized I’m really, really good at marketing, but I’m okay at products, so I went and bought a good product, a really good product. Now I can market the hell out of it.

Steve: I’m just curious, is there a reason why you avoided ecommerce the second time around?

Rampton: I was really burnt out and I hate Amazon right now, like I still hate them. I think eventually I’ll get back to that, but right now, I just haven’t.

Steve: The things that you learned about marketing you learned while you were in bed during your injury?

Rampton: I learned a lot while I was in bed during my injury, but I learned a lot along the way, like just trial and error. I’m the guy that takes chances on everything. I’m the guy willing to jump off a cliff, and see if I can build a parachute or build the wings on the way down. That’s my experience. It’s trial by fire.

Steve: What I wanted to ask you was, when you’re a brand new online store and you sell physical products, what would be your first steps on the marketing side to get your first couple of sales?

Rampton: My first steps on a marketing side is probably research. I would research and make sure that you compete. There are a lot of other people out there who have been doing this for a long, long time, and if you can’t compete with them and you don’t know, you’ll never go anywhere.

If you want to sell a product, even if it’s your own product, if you go to the market place just saying, here’s what I’m going to charge, because somebody said online that they’d pay me that much. It’s great, but if you’re an ecommerce store and there’s other people that are a lot cheaper than you, you’re never going to sell anything, or it’s going to be onesy twosies. I would say a lot of research. That’s the first thing I would do to market my product, it’s research online.

Next find tools that can different price matching thing, so you’re actually when people search for a product you are the lowest price. Start getting a reputation for yourself. After you start getting a reputation you can up that price a little bit.

Steve: It sounds like in our conversations a lot of what you’re talking about is price-based, which seems to imply that brand and quality don’t factor as much if you’re not well known. It always comes down to the lowest common denominator which is price. Is that …

Rampton: I would say that is pretty true. I would say in that I was never selling a bad product, or a non-reputable product. I have always sold very, very high end products; I’m just the lowest priced of the high end.

Steve: I see. If you were to do an ecommerce thing all over again, would you sell other people’s products, or would you try to develop your own at this point in time?

Rampton: I would sell in mixture.

Steve: You’re saying you’re in drop shipping as well?

Rampton: I would just make sure I get in bed with the right drop shipping partners, and make sure that I take priority.

Steve: How do you get into bed with a good drop shipper if you have nothing, if you’re a beginner?

Rampton: Trial and error, trial by fire. Go find 20 of them and start working with them and start selling, and really get to know– I would really find a company that works on EDI, because that means their inventory is live updated. You want to find people who are online, who know what their inventory is.

EDI updates on like a true second, every one to two seconds. Like it updates your database, their database and then in turn updates Amazon, eBay, all the other places. You know what your live inventory is, and that would eliminate the problem all together.

Steve: Unless someone screws up on their end?

Rampton: Unless somebody screws up on their end, but the likelihood of that happening with EDI is very, very hard, because they have to physically scan in every product, and when products go in, unless they’re defective which is one thing, but when products are purchased somewhere else or by another vendor, that’s automatically taken out of the system, so you don’t have to worry about that.

Steve: I also want to give you an opportunity to talk about due.com, and what some of your value propositions are for your new business.

Rampton: We are due.com. We’re an online invoicing and time tracking company. Some of our competitors are FreshBooks, Xero, Cutlass, there’s a lot of them. Some of our value propositions; one you can bill people online, you can get paid online. We’re trying to make it a lot cheaper for people. You can integrate it with your own site, so you don’t have to go to a third party site to bill. It can basically all be done internally on your own site. When somebody gets your bill, they’ll come to your site to pay it. Those are some of the things…

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. John’s story just goes to show that you should never, ever depend on a single channel for all of your income for your business. If I lost a seven-figure business overnight, I’d probably go and start crying in the corner and swear off entrepreneurship forever. What’s incredible though is that John has bounced back and has created another successful business, because he is the man. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode108.

Once gain I want to thank FameBit for sponsoring this episode. As I mentioned earlier, FameBit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagrammers and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests, Emmanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as $50 to start. And the best part is if you to use the coupon code ‘mywife’ at famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products.

Finally, if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over $100,000 in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

107: How To Make 17 Million Dollars Selling iPhone And iPad Cases Online With Kai Klement

How To Make 17 Million Dollars Selling iPhone And iPad Cases Online With Kai Klement

Today I’m thrilled to have Kai Klement on the show. Kai is someone who reached out to me with an incredible story and I knew that I needed to have him on the podcast.

Kai and his partner Jorg(yerg) are the co-founders of Kavaj (kavai), an internationally top-selling leather case manufacturer for phones and tablets. They’ve sold over 500,000 cases generating over 17 million in revenue.

They both started out as former Amazon employees with zero knowledge of manufacturing, or product creation and ended up creating this awesome ipad and phone case company. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Kai came up with the idea to sell iPad cases
  • Kai’s motivations for starting his business.
  • Why Kai decided to manufacture his own cases
  • Kai’s product creation process
  • Where Kai found his vendors and how he designed his cases

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it would be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes, you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Kai Klement on the show. Now Kai is someone who reached out to me with an incredible story, and I knew that I needed to have him on the podcast. So Kai and his partner Joerg are the co-founders of Kavaj, an internationally top selling leather case manufacturer for phones and tablets.

Now they’ve sold over 500,000 cases generating over 90 million in revenue on a span of about four years. Now they both started out as former Amazon employees with zero knowledge of manufacturing product creation, and they ended up creating this awesome iPad and phone case company, and with that welcome to the show Kai how are you doing today man?

Kai: Thank you very much for the nice introduction Steve, I’m very well thank you, how are you?

Steve: I’m very good; I’m really excited to hear your story here. So give us the quick background story about Kavaj, how you kind of came up with selling genuine leather cases online?

Kai: Yeah, it’s very easy actually, so in 2010 when Apple launched the first iPad, Joerg — he wanted to have one, he was very, very keen on it. And by the time this case was only available in the US and as we founded our company in Germany, so we had to get it somehow. Joerg asked a friend who was a pilot at Lufthansa during the time to get one in New York. And once he had his iPad obviously he needed a case. So we both were looking around, checking out Amazon in particular what was available, because Joerg and he had his dream case already in his mind.

His dream case was a thin genuine leather case. And by the time nothing like this was available online and nothing available on Amazon nor somewhere else. This was like the turning point, then we thought okay let’s do it. We will produce our own case and we — yeah first we do it for us, and then second we do it for everyone else, because there was nothing around we liked. So it’s like the story how we came up with the idea.

Steve: It was — your primary motivation was because Joerg was looking for an iPad case?

Kai: Exactly, this is a private motivation, so it’s the passion for — we needed first ourselves and then yeah let’s do it.

Steve: Were you guys both working at Amazon at the time?

Kai: Yes, exactly this was the background, we both we used to work Amazon before we started Kavaj and yeah.

Steve: So did you start this while working on Amazon, or were there any rules about that?

Kai: Yes, exactly we started while we were working there; obviously it was not allowed like to build your company besides working there. So we did it like everyone else was doing it, who has this entrepreneurs [inaudible 00:05:19] like we used a company which was led by my wife, and then we were kind of advisors for her obviously we were running it all.

Every morning we were like we met at seven and discussed like our project, and before we started like producing genuine leather stuff, we did a trial. We took a little bit of everyone and then we did a trial in order to test the whole system like how to source stuff, how this stuff works, how Amazon…

Steve: This first case was not leather though, right?

Kai: Yeah, exactly we just took like simple case and then yeah created…

Steve: So before we get into like the product creation, I was just a little bit curious since you mentioned that you formerly worked at Amazon, did working there actually help you guys at all, and what did you learn from Amazon that kind of gave you the courage, or helped you sell this product?

Kai: Yeah, definitely it helped us. This was our idea in the first place to get into cooperate business for 2 or 3 years in order to learn as much as possible about business, about running businesses. And one of the most important things I think we learned even while working at Amazon is like to be so customer focused is one of the key factors of your success. Like this was the first reason in the first place I used to work for Amazon because I was such a happy customer.

Okay, I said, I have to work for this company because they are so customer centric. And while working there we recognized they really lived this kind of customer philosophy also internally. Every project, everything is like, on the top as the customer. If you have a reason why the customer will love this or will hate this, we will always get the project through management.

Steve: Okay, but in terms of any sort of insights and contacts inside of Amazon to help you launch, did you guys take advantage of anything like that?

Kai: Unfortunately not, I would even say we had a kind of disadvantage …

Steve: Oh why is that?

Kai: Because like all the people we used to work with, they said, okay, they know everything; they don’t need an account manager. So basically — imagine obviously we had the advantage to see all the internal figures, internal data of other people or other sellers working there.

This advantage, everyone has this, so during coffee breaks, stuff like this everyone was talking about okay, I would do this, I can do this. But Steve it’s one thing to have all this knowledge, it’s completely different to use it and do your own thing, so…

Steve: Sure, I was just wondering if you guys got by like sat around the water cooler and saying, hey, these leather cases are really hot, we need to get into that, because you have access to that data.

Kai: No.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: But there are a lot of products we have access to, but as I said it’s not the access to data or the information that’s really the use of it and really doing it.

Steve: Okay, so let’s start from the beginning then with your cases, you just mentioned to me earlier that you didn’t start out with a leather case; you started out by testing something, a plain old case. So was this just a generic case that you sourced from China or something like that?

Kai: Exactly, we started out with a simple plastic case we sourced on Alibaba, because we just each didn’t have $1000 and yeah. In order to get enough products, we put the money into the product and then just sourced via Alibaba and via email.

Steve: And what was the purpose of this test because it wasn’t anything close to your final product, right?

Kai: No, exactly it wasn’t like our dream case, the purpose was really to set up like all these background systems we needed in order to scale the business basically. So meaning first how did we get the products to Germany? How do we get the products to Amazon warehouse, so we…

Steve: Okay, so the logistics basically?

Kai: The logistics, so then the second part was what do we need company wise, which company do we have to establish? What kind of taxes do we have to pay, where? So the second biggest part and the third part obviously was how do we get the product to sell on Amazon. Obviously we had all these figures, but we didn’t– yeah, we hadn’t been like the seller so far, so we didn’t know how did we do this.

Obviously I was in working in this department, so I told people what to do, but I didn’t see what they actually did. We built up our own system and like promoting the product and generating traffic and marketing the product, so these 3 big things we basically set up with our test.

Steve: Okay and in that first vendor selling the plastic cases, they weren’t the ones that manufacture the leather ones, are they or?

Kai: No.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This is what we recognized, we had one, it wasn’t a factory by the time it was an agent on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: When we started our real business with Kavaj we met this agent in China, and recognized we cannot talk, because we only communicated via email so far, and she was not able to talk in English. The boss of the factory of the agency wasn’t able to talk English either, so our relationship was finished once we met in person.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about these plastic cases first.

Kai: Yes.

Steve: You listed them on Amazon how did you– it seems like they were just generic cases right that all the other guys were selling as well, so how did you get rid of those, or how did you move those in the first place?

Kai: Exactly, it was a generic case, we just proto did a simple generic name on it and RAR14, and then we listed the product. The first one we did is really we listed the product, we optimized like the whole product detail page.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: And we named all these information which are for free on Amazon on the detail page, first the title, the bullet points, the product description, the search key words, and the images is one of the most important parts, is the images. This is where we really had like the lack of founding a company very early, because we tried to find someone who took images like for our budget. We emailed 20 people around our city in Munich, and they all offered us images of like $1000.

It’s a very high price for one, the shooting of high professional images. The other day one guy came back with a really cheap like $200 offer, and we first couldn’t believe it and in the end it was really a very professional photographer who used 2 or who’s doing photos for BMW and all these big machines, and he said he really like our inquiry. He was starting a business also like 30 years ago, and he decided to help us out if we come back again. He wanted to test our inquiry if we were serious about it.

Steve: I see.

Kai: Then we got to him and we got really high, very, very high quality images, and I would say this is one of the key elements on Amazon. If you have really high professional images, you are way better than a lot of other of your competitors.

Steve: From what I understand you stood out from the rest of the park because of your product photos at the time?

Kai: Yes exactly, this was…

Steve: This is probably almost 10 years ago then right or no not that long?

Kai: No it’s like 6 years ago I would say.

Steve: 6 years ago, okay.

Kai: Yes 6 or 6 ½ years ago we did this, yeah.

Steve: Would that work today like going back and trying to sell a generic case, I’m just curious what your opinion is on that?

Kai: Yeah I think it still would work as a one shot, it still would work with this strategy, because it’s something a lot of people are doing like this one shot opportunities in several niches, because Amazon is such a huge market place. It’s going like when we used to work there like Amazon had 80 around 88 or something million customers.

Today I just checked the favor it’s like they have 295 million customers worldwide. They’re just growing this so huge that I would say it would still work, and but what we did after that is what works much better is like to build a brand on Amazon.

Steve: Right.

Kai: Because this is like the ultimate thing, we had to learn, we almost messed up with this but…

Steve: Are you still there?

Kai: Yes.

Steve: The tendency– so you had this one successful product in the beginning which was just like a rebrand of an existing product. How did you decide that that wasn’t good enough and that you actually needed to create your own branded product? Because a lot of people will just take that money and they go hey great, let’s keep this going?

Kai: Yeah, the thing is this case was as you said it was just a generic product with not designed anything name on it, and just a weird kind of name. There was no brand strategy behind it, not at all, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Fortunately our designer by the time he convinced us hey if you want to really be successful in the long-term, build the brand, and do this consistently through all your channels, you’re using your brand, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We decided to do this first, in first place we decided to do this in design and in naming process. The naming process I would say also with our cases because we have all got a city name, so…

Steve: Okay.

Kai: People nowadays after 4 years like they really look for our brand and the city combined. Then they find our case, this was of course like by chance, it wasn’t really planned out like this well, but now we have experience. We say okay, have you just started? The best way you can do this, build the brand from the start out, think about all your elements you can put into this.

Steve: Just curious, you said you had no practice or any experience, how does one go about designing a leather case from scratch?

Kai: Yeah. This is also pretty simple, because what we did is we took two weeks of our vacation at Amazon, and then we checked out okay, where can we go out to get ideas about a simple and genuine leather thin leather cases, where can we go? Then we checked out the fairs in Hong Kong and in China.

Steve: Which ones, the Canton Fairs…

Kai: Yes.

Steve: Did you go to Global Sources also?

Kai: Exactly we went to Canton Fair, Global Sources.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: And where all these suppliers meet 2 times a year and we went there to get ideas, so what was possible, and what exists. Then we met with a couple of– we did like our due diligence with the suppliers. After deciding which supplier would be suitable for us we went to the suppliers, and actually checked out their factories and met with the designers in house, because every factory basically has like the tech guys and designers in house, who are producing their design for the local market usually, and then we just talked as like as I said we wanted the case basically for us for ourselves.

Steve: Right.

Kai: We saw what they can do, and then we asked okay we want to change this and this and that, can you do a sample for us? So and then we…

Steve: Did you specify measurements, how specific were you when you…

Kai: No, we didn’t specify any measurements because for the devices like the iPhone, the iPad, stuff like this, it’s all like you cannot change the dimensions, they are all given so to speak.

Steve: That’s not what I meant, like if you wanted to put a little pocket on there, did you specify the dimensions, or did you let the designer give you?

Kai: No, we didn’t specify the dimensions, we iterated. We said okay we want like, we want the following like this, or we want to add something here and then they gave us a sample, and we checked it out with a real device. We said okay, no we don’t like this, we don’t like that, can you please change this, so…

Steve: Were you in China the whole time during this iteration, or did you shift things back and forth?

Kai: No, we were during our first order where we were in the first, we were in China all the time, so it was like a very fast process was kind of this, we did this.

Steve: Wow okay. Did you, I’m just curious, did you commit to a large order before they were willing to do this for you, or did they just make these samples for you?

Kai: They made the samples for us before committing to the core [inaudible 00:19:57].

Steve: How much did you have to pay for each sample?

Kai: Nothing actually, because we decided … I think because we tried to build relationships, like really from the start. They also had the feeling, okay these guys are serious. They are here, they ask us for samples which nobody really does in this … Because we would spend, really, hours and then days there. I think they were like also sure that we would definitely buy something if they just deliver what we asked for.

Steve: Yeah. That’s just a quick tip for the listeners out there. If you actually go to the fair and meet the vendors face to face, they’ll take you a lot more seriously. We found the same thing with our stuff. Clearly that’s something that Kai experienced with his case.

Kai: Yeah, definitely, much, much, much more seriously. We’re going to China basically 3 to 4 times a year just to foster these relationships, and do it face to face.

Steve: You’re iterating over these designs. For anything custom, what was your minimum order
quantity for your first design?

Kai: It was always 500 for every design.

Steve: 500 units?

Kai: 500 units, yes.

Steve: Okay. Did you start out with one particular model? Was it just for iPad and when did you decide to branch out to some of the other devices?

Kai: Yeah, this Steve actually was one big mistake we made, because we actually knew that we had to focus on a few models or a few designs in order to be successful, but once we were there in China, we took vacations, and was first time order and all these hundreds and hundreds of suppliers and millions of people.

We were kind of overwhelmed during the first days. Then we made the mistake to do 10, I think it was 11 designs for our first order. 11 X 500 different designs, and then also 3 different suppliers. Once we were back in Germany and we tried to build our system, we build with our test case; we recognized it’s impossible actually to get 11 different designs on page one of your main search keywords on Amazon, because this is the ultimate goal.
Your listener should listen closely, this is your ultimate goal for all you do on Amazon is to have your main keyword, and to get this main keyword, your product, on page 1 of Amazon search results, and in the best case, 1,2,3, because this is where the magic basically happens. This is not possible with 11 designs.

Steve: Right. Did you drastically cut back then, and only do a couple of designs per keyword I guess?

Kai: We drastically cut back. Unfortunately we had to remove quite a lot of these first designs. We didn’t sell all of these. We cut back to maximum 3 designs per device, so we can claim slot 1 to 3.

Steve: When you say 3 designs do you mean designs and colors, or do you just mean designs?

Kai: I mean designs, and we do 2 colors, so basically we have maximum six products per device.

Steve: The minimum order per color, per device is 500, right?

Kai: Yes, nowadays are down to– we can basically order what we want, because we have really, really good relations with our main supplier, so it’s possible to get way below 500.

Steve: Okay. Yeah. It’s like that with ours too, but I am curious when you’re talking with these guys … First of all what were your margins early on?

Kai: On the test case or on …

Steve: On your first leather case.

Kai: On the first leather case like it’s always around 50-70%.

Steve: Okay. That’s interesting. I would expect it to be a little higher than that. Basically you were making around 3X it sounds?

Kai: The thing is with genuine leather you cannot compare it to these cheap plastic cases. We have to buy at a much more higher price. In order to sell really big numbers you cannot price it higher than like $50-$60 on Amazon, because that’s like the matching price for on Amazon. After that it is just impossible to compete against the $10, $15 on the first page.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running all of my online businesses, but you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in.
Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice, concise financial reports. No more data entry, no more number crunching, and no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced.
And the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: How did you guys know that you were getting genuine leather?

Kai: We tested everything. Basically we asked a testing company to test all the stuff for is it genuine leather using no chemicals which could be possibly dangerous.

Steve: You did your first production; let’s just say you did 500 units. Once you got those 500 units, did you have any defects? Did you have any issues, or did you just kind of list those on Amazon right away?

Kai: No, we had like– not with the genuine leather cases we had no issues, but with two cases from the other designs we had issues because they were not packed properly. They got damaged. Almost half of them got damaged. Fortunately by the time we did the QC ourselves in Munich, we spent almost a day looking through 700 cases, and just throwing 350 away because they were just compressed, so we couldn’t sell them anymore. The thing is they just forgot something to insert into this case, so during transportation they just made the mistake.

Steve: I see, so an inspection company probably would not have helped in this case?

Kai: No, I don’t think so.

Steve: Okay. Your first batch, it sounds like you had to throw away half almost?
Kai: Yeah, half of one design. It was really one case … I don’t know how they forgot this, but it was this one supplier who forgot to insert something so that the transport wouldn’t harm the cases.

Steve: You went through everything and then you just listed them on Amazon. You hired a photographer to take professional pictures?

Kai: We still used the same photographer we had for our first test case. He was helping us out the second time, and the third time he said, okay, now you’re in business and I’m actually much more expensive. Please find another one. He was like really was time constrained and we found another really good one.

Steve: What are your steps to getting the top 3 spots on Amazon search, because iPhone and iPad cases are an extremely competitive area?

Kai: Yes, exactly. What we do right now is we have iPad, and obviously we expanded to iPhone and iPad mini and all other Apple devices. The key is there are 2 main aspects to this. First thing is really optimize everything on your product detail page you can do. Like I mentioned, like the key words, the title, the hidden keywords, and the images, and …

Steve: Let’s go to that in a little bit more depth before you go on. How do you figure out all the keywords and make sure that you’re getting all of them? Do you use any tools or …

Kai: Right now we’re using tools. Back when we started we didn’t use any tools. We just thought okay, what are the top 3 main keywords our customers would search for? Only during our time we made this process better, meaning one thing like you said buy a software that can help you with this, but the easiest thing you can do, or your listeners can do is really check out what Amazon is suggesting when you type in your best keywords, because Amazon automatically fills in your search.

For example if you type in iPads, you will definitely see iPad case as one of the suggestions, and these suggestions are like the main search terms in terms of volume, what is currently running on Amazon. If you do this like for example iPad case, you would see there’s iPad case and there’s very high volume search terms ‘iPad case leather’.

If you type in iPad case leather, you will see iPad case leather and very high volume is iPad case leather black, iPad case leather brown. Only by checking out these automatic search suggestions, what Amazon is doing there, you can find your top keywords very, very easily.

Steve: You mentioned you use tools today. Do you suggest any keyword tools to use?

Kai: Yeah. We use MerchantWords.

Steve: MerchantWords, okay.

Kai: Yeah, we use this to just like search volume, and it’s basically our primary search tool. Another one we use is FreshKey, I don’t know if you have heard of it.

Steve: FreshKey. Yes I have.

Kai: These are basically 2 tools which can kind of automate this manual work to check out the Amazon Keywords.

Steve: You’ve got your keywords down; can you describe the process of putting together the bullet points on your listing?

Kai: Yes, of course. What we do is optimize first title, because this is like priority number one on Amazon, and second is bullet points, and we use … All keywords we’re not using on the title, we try to use in the bullet points because priority number two when you search on Amazon is bullet points. Most current information is that Amazon is currently changing its algorithm, and probably ranking the search keywords higher than the bullet points, but we’re just trying to figure out if it’s already happening or something like this.

Until today we’re really optimizing the bullet points as the second step, meaning we put the keywords, we’re not using in the title. The second is we answer the five questions a customer would ask us in the store, in an offline store. Imagine you were an offline store and a customer comes in and asks, okay, what can I do with this case? We try to use customer language, and combine it with the keywords we found for product.

Steve: Interesting, so what are the five questions that a customer asks about iPad cases?

Kai: First, what can I use it for? Do we have stand functionality? Does it support auto wake up function? Can I access all ports? Does it match your other Kavaj products? It’s [inaudible 00:33:57] and that’s the good thing of building a brand.

Steve: yeah, definitely.

Kai: People right now, they really want like sets. They want Kavaj iPad, iPhone, iPad mini and now we started doing wallets, and they just combine everything and they just look for the brand, and then next product.

Steve: You have your bullet points down, trying to use the customer’s language, answer commonly asked questions, what about your details, the product description?

Kai: Yes. Product description, we also value this very, very high. We take the same approach basically. We try to use really customer language. We get this customer language before using and reading the reviews. What we did is we called a couple of customers and did quality interviews in order to hear what we’re really talking about our cases.

What language do they use, and then we put together a product description and also stating the main benefits and really what the cases can do for them and help them in. For example they can use it for watching videos and doing presentations very nicely and to type on the case. It’s something like this, what Apple is also really doing nicely. Not putting out all features, but to really state, what can I do with this in real life?

Steve: Just curious. Do you find that a lot of people read your descriptions and that it makes a huge difference?

Kai: Yeah. You really have to specify. We think so but it’s the whole package of your detail page. If it really looks totally aligned, like images, everything looks professional. I think this is which makes the difference, because then people are checking out. It’s very hard to specify on Amazon, because we don’t have hard facts, hard data.

I think in the long term, the customers will really check out the whole feature page, if it makes sense, the number of reviews, and the bullet points and they will come back and check out this. What we see a lot is really in the seller feedback ‘Product as described.’ This is like the best feeling you can get. If people are writing this or giving you this feedback, then they’re obviously reading it.

Steve: Just curious in the very beginning, let’s say you have your listing down and everything is all good, how do you get it to rank? Did you start giving away products for reviews? What was your early strategy to get sales?

Kai: No, we didn’t do like giveaways or something. What we knew from the beginning is we had to drive all traffic we can possibly get to our Amazon detail page, because we had these tests with one product. We obviously had only one product. Then we really tried everything. Every channel we can get and in the early days we even used Google PPC.

We bought ads on Google, and then we built our own website and like putting the professional images there and building like a detail page for the test case already. Then we bought the PPC ads on Google, got the people to our website, and then we sent them to the Amazon detail page.

Steve: That’s interesting. You’re paying for ads and you’re not taking the sale for yourself, you’re instead giving the sale to Amazon where you have to pay Amazon’s fees. So the rationale was that you want to rank on Amazon over your own site?

Kai: Exactly. The rationale is really, we want to get our products into this magic page one of Amazon because as I said, Amazon, there are already 295 million customers who are searching there. The traffic you can get on Amazon on page one is all for free, because the people are searching there for free.

If your product is on the first page of Amazon search results, you will get the traffic automatically. You just have to get there somehow, and then the magic will happen all along.

Steve: Was this an issue of PPC traffic? Was it profitable despite the fact that you’re …

Kai: No. No PPC traffic is profitable in the first place for us right now, I would say. It’s really, we spent– it’s really our strategy to spend there, and then get the sale and get ranked. Once we are ranked, like the sales of page one are coming in and supporting this initial spending on PPC so to speak.

Steve: How do you correlate the two, because it’s not like you can put a conversion pix on Amazon site. How do you know that the sales are actually coming from PPC?

Kai: We don’t know, but in the early days when you don’t have a ranked product, or if you put in a product in a category like iPad cases, you have one million results, no one will find your product if you don’t do any kind of either PPC, or getting all the traffic you can get from other sources to your products.

It must be from somewhere. What you do doesn’t matter actually, but if it’s PPC, or if you like have an email list, or if you have YouTubers, bloggers talking about your product, but it must come from somewhere else in our category.

Steve: Interesting, okay. What were some other ways that you drove traffic to your Amazon listings early on?

Kai: Early on what we did is we got in touch with YouTubers and bloggers through influencers basically, and gave them samples for free. They did a review for our products, and then like posted these on their channel, and obviously linked on their channels to our product.

Steve: On Amazon?

Kai: On Amazon exactly. This was one very, very good way to promote it.

Steve: How did you find these people? Did you use any services, or did you just reach out to people on YouTube?

Kai: Exactly. We just reached out to people on YouTube, and basically what happened was like they reached out to us. Somehow they found us later. It wasn’t kind of that we put this much effort into it, but we would recommend to do this much more right now. I know that there are even services nowadays who can connect you with famous influencers. I think you even had one guy on the show who was very successful for this kind of strategy.

Steve: Yes

Kai: We didn’t use the services, but we definitely will look into this. I hope this information– this could be a very good strategy.

Steve: Can you comment on driving all that traffic to Amazon where you have to pay the 15% fee on top of FBA fees as opposed to taking it on your own website, saving that 15% and having Amazon for full regardless?

Kai: Yeah of course. Our strategy is really the thing to get ranked. Your sale on your website is one sale on your website. The sale on Amazon is one more sale than your competitor, and this means Amazon will rank you higher, because sales and traffic is the most important you can get on Amazon in order to get ranked. In the long run, or we see it with our products, this will benefit your products in terms of ranking.

Once you’re ranked on Amazon, you will just get the sales, first of organic traffic on Amazon instead of the sales on your website where you always have to drive the traffic to your website, and will always cost you money to drive this traffic to your website. On Amazon, once your products are ranked, you will get all this organic traffic from Amazon and these organic sales, which makes a huge difference, because you will never get 295 million customers on your website so to speak.

Steve: Interesting, so do you collect emails, like how do you, do you do any marketing outside of Amazon then?

Kai: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We started this way too late actually.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This whole email thing, nowadays when we last priced we use email as one of a big external traffic drivers as well, so we would recommend to use email very, very early on and try and start building a list so in order to spot your launches.

Steve: How do you entice people to give you their email because you can’t get it from Amazon right?

Kai: Exactly.

Steve: I assume you’re doing some sort of promotion outside on your own site?

Kai: Yes exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We just give them like a $5 coupon code, once they give us their email address, and this which is valid for all Kavaj products.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Exactly and we place this very prominently on our website, so like nowadays.

Steve: I see and then you send out an email and then you drive those people to the Amazon listing, and that in turn boosts your Amazon rankings, because that leads to sales?

Kai: Exactly.

Steve: I see so you’re going all in on Amazon basically?

Kai: We’re going all in on Amazon, all in.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: 100%.

Steve: Have you had any problems with Amazon?

Kai: Obviously yes.

Steve: Can you just go through some of the common problems that you faced?

Kai: Yeah, we have problems, first problem is for example someone else will hijack our listing, so basically…

Steve: Okay, how do you deal with that?

Kai: Basically I just describe what happens, we have 2 colors for example one iPad case black and brown, and then from one day to the other there, well there’re like 20 color variations like red whatever, blue something like this. It’s a different seller we didn’t know who cannot connect; it’s just hijacking of our listing, and benefiting from our sales rank probably.

What we do is we registered our trademark and our Amazon brand very, very early on, and we contact Amazon either the support team or the service performance team, and just proving that we are the manufacturer of these products. We are the only seller of these products, we have the brand registry, we have the trademark, and we have the EAN code on our website which only shows that we are selling black and brown cases. Then we ask please remove the seller, please correct the listing and this usually works within 24 hours.

Steve: You in this regard you mean they put up a different listing, not sharing your Amazon number, right?

Kai: Yes exactly, they are just extending our listing variation to more colors, yeah.

Steve: I see, but what about the ones you piggy back on your exact product number, how do you get rid of those people?

Kai: We didn’t have this kind of thing so or so to speak, we have our sellers who try to sell these products, but are only very, very limited number, and it’s not a problem for us basically.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Because they’re usually either selling like used or something, or they are selling higher prices.

Steve: I see.

Kai: And they are not, they cannot do FBA because we don’t sell them so.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Yeah this is basically it, second problem is, or any question to this or?

Steve: No, no I’m good yeah.

Kai: Like the second very common problem is that Amazon is just removing our product from the platform from one day to the other without noticing us. And this usually happens during Christmas season.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: Like just one week ago again, so it happens all on all platforms in UK, Germany, US, I don’t know if you’ve experienced this, but…

Steve: No, you mean just a complete removal of your product you mean?

Kai: Yes.

Steve: No, we haven’t seen that yet.

Kai: Okay and this can happen pretty easily because Amazon has a process called [inaudible 00:47:35] court. Which means if one customer either one customer is complaining about the same issue twice, or if 2 or 3 customers are complaining and talking about the same issue in a very short time period, like the Amazon guideline is pull [inaudible 00:47:55] and take the listing off line and to protect the customers, or basically the future customers in order to experience these kind of issues.

Then okay once this listing is offline you can inform the seller, and you can ask the seller to yeah, provide feedback on this issue, and a system to get the product online again. But the communication is very difficult with Amazon regarding this. The solutions also because basically, most of the time it’s obviously by chance that this happens that really one customer has the same problem twice without notifying us. Usually the people come to us and ask, hey what’s the problem? Can you help me? But there are customers who just don’t speak to us, but first to Amazon…

Steve: Right.

Kai: They know obviously and…

Steve: Do they, does Amazon at least warn you that this has happened, or did you have to just notice yourself?

Kai: No, well yes.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We have to notice it ourselves, so Amazon like we didn’t really fully understand how this works, sometimes they notify us, sometimes they don’t, so this is why we always recommend to monitor your listings very well on Amazon to also keep an eye is everything online. Especially your top sellers are they still online, because as I said it can happen pretty fast.

Yeah if just two customers are saying, okay I have this issue and the next comes I have this issue, like there’s a red light internally yeah on Amazon. The solutions also contact the Amazon support staff and then the Amazon service performance team and explain what happens. The best case you know what happens if they notify you. If you don’t know you have to just guess what happens.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: We had one example story from our products was we used to wrap all our cases into a wax paper, and at the beginning we only used black wax paper also for our coniac [ph] brown cases. People got these coniac cases, but saw okay they look black; I ordered brown, why does it look black. They just didn’t unpack the case, so they just saw the black wax paper, and figured okay this must be a black case, it’s a mistake.

They made it like Kavaj made it. They just reported us to Amazon that we shipped the wrong case, and if you ship a lot of cases during Christmas time, it’s very likely that two customers are not unpacking these cases, and then they’re just complaining at Amazon. This happened actually three times to us, and we always explained please check the bin, please unpack the case, the customer just had forget to unpack the cases.

Steve: I see, okay.

Kai: After three times we learned the lesson the hard way, we changed the packing material and now we wrap everything in their respective color brown or black.

Steve: Okay, that’s a good story. Hey Kai we’ve been chatting for quite a while, I understand you have a couple of other projects on the wing that I thought that you might want to mention.

Kai: Yeah definitely yeah, we got a lot of questions during our time during last couple of years because we built like Kavaj only in only 4 years, and we build a global brand in UK, US and in Germany, and people came to us saying how did you do this actually. We quite, we had quite a lot of people already in Germany and the UK and US and helping us out with explaining, just explaining what we did.

Then we figured okay we can share our knowledge like our experience from working in Amazon and building a brand, and what we did is we wrote a book and we put our whole story together. Steve for your listeners they can just go to kavajacademy/book, and they can get our book for free there.

Steve: Awesome.

Kai: We’re building like a whole Kavaj Academy around this topic selling on Amazon, because we saw there’s huge demand really how to sell on Amazon. We really love to get the feedback we already received from this book, and what we did with Kavaj Academy already.

Steve: Okay.

Kai: This is the second biggest thing we do currently besides Kavaj and expanding Kavaj internationally.

Steve: If any of the listeners have any questions for you Kai, where can they reach you?

Kai: Yeah, obviously as I said they could just go to Kavaj Academy, and we have a Facebook group, or a Facebook profile already for Kavaj academy, this will be probably the easiest way to get in touch with us or working.

Steve: Okay, sounds good. Well Kai thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Kai: Yes, thanks a lot.

Steve: I must say I think you are the first person who I’ve interviewed who drives all of their traffic from their own page to Amazon for ranking, so I found that very interesting.

Kai: Yeah, it is definitely very interesting, and it’s working, and all countries we use to do the strategy.

Steve: Yeah, awesome well thanks a lot.

Kai: Yeah, thank you Steve for having me and thanks for the interview.

Steve: All right take care.

Kai: Thank you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Kai’s story is truly amazing, and it just goes to show that you don’t need any business experience whatsoever to start a 9 figure business. All it takes is some initiative, a lot of hustle and a strong desire to learn and adapt. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequiteajob.com/episode 107. And once again I want to thank famebit.com for sponsoring this episode.

As I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to find YouTubers, Instagramers, and other influencers to promote your products online, and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in 4 months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com, you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products online.

And finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

106: How To Design A High Converting Website With Chase Reeves

How To Design A High Converting Business Website With Chase Reeves

Today I’m thrilled to have Chase Reeves on the show. Chase is someone who I met recently at the FinCon Expo in Charlotte and the face to face meeting was a long time coming.

If you don’t know Chase, he is the creative director for Fizzle.co, Corbett Barr’s awesome online business training course which was mentioned back in episode 45.

And he’s also the goofy white guy on the Fizzle podcast where he’s frickin hilarious. You should check it out. But the main reason, I decided to have Chase on today is because is he is great at design.

Here’s the thing. He’s not a developer in the traditional sense, but he’s just really good at designing websites that clearly convey a site’s true purpose and value proposition. He’s designed countless websites for entrepreneurs like Corbett Barr and Pat Flynn and I’m really excited to have him on the show to talk about how he does it.

What You’ll Learn

  • When you should redesign your website
  • The main things to consider for your design if you have an ecommerce store
  • The pain points that Chase tries to address in every site design.
  • Chase’s target design metrics
  • Design guidelines that your site must follow to increase conversions.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I just want to give a quick shout out to famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Famebit is the number one market place for influencer marketing with over 20,000 Youtubers, Instagramers people on Twitter and Vine looking to promote your company in any vertical whether it be beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Yes you can get famous Youtubers and Instagramers to promote your business for as low as $50.

The best part is that you don’t really need any money at all to post a campaign and receive free proposals from creators. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off your first campaign. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous youtubers to promote your products, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have Chase Reeves on the show. Now Chase is someone who I met recently at FinCon I think in Charlotte, and the face to face meeting was a long time coming to be quite rank. If you don’t know Chase he is the creative director for fizzle.co, which is Corbett Bar’s awesome online business training course, which was mentioned back in episode 45 when I had Corbett on the show.

And Chase is also the goofy white guy on the fizzle podcast where he is freaking hilarious, and you should definitely check out that podcast. The main reason that I decided to have chase on the show today is because he is great at design. So here is the thing, he is not a developer in the traditional sense, but he is just really good at designing websites that clearly convey a site’s true purpose and value preposition.

And he’s designed countless websites for famous entrepreneurs like Corbett Barr, Pat Flynn, he did nerdfitenss.com. I’m really excited to have him on the show to kind of talk about how he does it in the process, so with that welcome to the show Chase, how are you doing today man?

Chase: I’m doing good Steve; really pumped to be here, thanks for having me, you are right in that meeting each other at FinCon was long overdue.

Steve: Have you gone to previous FinCons before?

Chase: That was my first FinCon and I was impressed, I liked it. I really liked PT Money, the guy who puts on the show, I met him at WDS a few years back, and he just seemed like just as a cool dude. So his event lived up to my expectations.

Steve: Cool man so maybe I’ll see you there next year?

Chase: I think so.

Steve: So give us a quick overview about how you started out designing websites and kind of how you ended up at Fizzle. And feel free to explain what Fizzle is by the way just in case people don’t remember.

Chase: Sure, yeah, so Fizzle is a membership site, I think that’s kind of crapy way of putting it. What it is, is there is a lot of people who want to figure out how to start their own business. Steve have you’ve ever met anybody who is like this before, somebody who wanted to start his or her own business or something?

Steve: I don’t know, it’s rare, it’s rare.

Chase: So what we’ve been doing for a long time is teaching people how to start their own businesses. The truth is that a lot of people love to waste time learning everything that they can, and that’s kind of a natural path is you got to go learn everything to kind of feel confident enough to get started. But the thing that we’ve learned is that the only real learning happens once you get started. So what we’ve developed is this nine stage road map, plus a bunch of other courses that are what we call just in time learning.

Everything is broken down into bite size chunks so that you can learn, how, hey, I need to grow my email list, okay, boom take this quick course on that, grow your email, and now you’ve got everything you need to know to do to grow your email list. Same thing with the road map, there is these nine stages every business goes through. So just focus on the stage that you are in right now and what’s next instead of trying to be an expert in the whole can get brutal.

So that’s what we do at fizzle, we are constantly improving that and alongside the courses and the training is the community of entrepreneurs that won’t let you quit. We just locked out really early on probably due to that I think a lot of the design and copy writing that we did on the site, and just which is always — which is of course due to who I am and who Corbett is as entrepreneurs and what we care about.

We just somehow locked out that a bunch of great people started finding us and becoming members. Now it’s one of the liveliest online business communities that you can find, and more than that it’s zero douchebagary. It’s like not douche at all, like we — the headline on our home page is honest online business training, it’s something that we’ve really built our whole business on.
It’s just this idea of like I want to build the business that’s going to last, that’s sustainable, not something that’s like a flash and a pen, get a bunch — get a million email address, just try to take advantage of old people who are wondering what to do with their money at 3 PM in the afternoon, in between televangelist spots. You know what I mean, like I’m sick of internet business being associated with that. So we kind of got started to help people find the real route to honest success, and so that’s what we teach.

Steve: So you designed that website, right?

Chase: Yeah.

Steve: How did you end up there, like what was your early web design history, before Corbett yeah?

Chase: Where that started from was I got a computer kind of younger, I wasn’t like, Corbett got like a real old computer like way back in the day like learnt out code as the first thing. I got a computer like in high school I think, and started obviously beside like playing doom on windows, playing some silly video games. I just kind of started like fiddling with like Microsoft paint and like making things — trying to make like funny stuff, I was always like, I was always the funny guy, I always like to make people laugh.

That turned into to having a computer, knowing how to use it, and then I got into music a lot, I started recording a lot of music which kept me using the computer. Then I got into college and we needed like a dorm shirt made, and I had a computer and I knew how to pirate software from the internet. So I was like, I got Photoshop now, we can make our shirt. So I did that and started like making silly things for our dorm room shirts or something.

Now this kind of kept going, band, concert, posters and things, all the things that I was associated with, that I was like, oh my band’s playing, and I knew let’s make a silly [inaudible 00:07:37] poster and so we did it. So it kind of started there and then it turned into like I got really — like my dad says, like, men are so good at computers. I just got good at computers do you know what I mean?

So like I could add a video, I could design things, I could — in Photoshop I could manipulate images, I could make music and record it, and then add it and play it back and all of these things. That honestly was the foundation on top of — that I built my whole career on. Because what happened is my taste developed and maybe that was there before hand.

Like your taste is the thing that let you go like, no, that’s not very good, I don’t feel comfortable putting that out, that’s embarrassing. That just kept getting stronger and stronger, and then my skills started getting stronger trying to like make things up to the level of taste. Soon as the long way is…

Steve: So Chase real quick, sorry so there is a difference between designing something that looks great and designing something that actually converts well too. So did you pick up those skills at a job or apprenticeship or something like that?

Chase: No, no that’s all software lessons, so for me it really came to a T when I learned how to design websites and that was — like I respect writing a lot, adds up few personal blogs and I just wanted it to look a particular way. So that’s where I started fiddling with all the stuff about 10-11 years ago I guess. So you bring up a good point, so in design it’s very common founders people start to do their own business, they really want their site to look good right? We all want that, we want it to look good.

Okay we want it to feel kind of fancy right? We want to feel quality, we want to create that — what design does is it creates trust. Right, imagine that you are learning — you are searching Google, you are going across the internet a million miles an hour, you land on billions of websites or whatever, and it’s like you — how are you going to stand out from the noise, all the old crap that’s out there?

Like design is one of — is this brutal split second trust factor thing, it’s the first step in the door all right, you don’t seem like a total piece of crap, I’ll read your headline, you know what I mean? So it’s just this sense of — it’s almost like this intangible sense really, beyond that there is a lot of functional parts of design as well. Like you are getting into it what is the difference between sort of a good looking design and a very effective design.

And what you are talking about there is the effectiveness is direct result of what your goal is on the sight. If you want your site to have a lot of people to it and they just spend a lot of time there, well then that’s one goal. Another goal is to get them on your email list. A different goal is for you to get them to buy a product.

A different goal will be to get them to not only buy one product, but then up sell them by the time you’re going to let their shopping cart right, and now they’ve bought multiple products. It’s like there’s all of these goals you can bring in to your design, it matters immensely which one you choose to design for it, does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, totally just hey by the way Chase I’m going to just going to cut it real quick. Your mike is creating some back ground noise.

Chase: You’re getting background noise?

Steve: It’s like this scratching noise, I can’t describe it.

Chase: That’s probably online on my shirt, then what I’ll do is this.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: I can fix that, just like that. Okay. There we go how is that, is that a little better?

Steve: Yeah that’s better, okay.

Chase: Sorry about that.

Steve: Yeah no problem okay so hey…

Chase: I’m saying I like this thing and walk around so I’m kind of like I’m mobile.

Steve: I still here the scratching noise actually.

Chase: Okay you still can hear it now; you can still hear it now. Can you hear it now, am I still making…?

Steve: Yeah you’re good now, yeah maybe it’s only when you move.

Chase: Okay I’ll try to stay still.

Steve: Okay, all right so Chase one fundamental question that I always think to myself is when does a website actually need a redesign, and when are things just okay as is?

Chase: It depends, obviously it comes back to that idea about your goal right, so if your goal is to sell more products, up sell more products across your site, I’m speaking specifically to in ecommerce terms here so that because I understand most audience is doing ecommerce stores, is that correct?

Steve: That’s correct yeah.

Chase: Say you wanted to start up selling more things, well that could be a design goal, that could be a business goal that design helps you do, right? Other times you might just feel like way out of step with the competition, you might just feel like dude I look like it’s 1992 and everywhere else is playing in 2015. I really need to update my brand.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Another time might be when your business has changed direction, kind of changed focus, and you’re like actually this doesn’t feel like, I’m still using last year’s strategy in my design when I have a new strategy that I really want people to understand and resonate with, right?

Steve: Right.

Chase: Those are all perfect examples of when you might want to redesign something.

Steve: When someone comes to you with like a Pat Flynn or a Collin and says hey I need my site redesigned. There’s probably some sort of process that you go through right to figure out what their goals are and where you even start, because everyone’s different right?

Chase: Yeah.

Steve: How do you proceed?

Chase: Yeah absolutely, so perfect example is when Pat Flynn of Smart Passive Income needed to have a site looked at. Actually what happened was a long time ago I emailed Pat and I just thought the design, I’d probably, I had kind of gotten to know him a little bit. I was just like dude your site looks really lame, this is back in the day. He was under the impression that it was really the coolest site; he’s said what do you mean? Everybody loves my site, it’s working really well, what are you talking about?

I’m like listen here, I’m just saying, I took some screen shots like this is gross, that’s gross, all of this is out of line. You don’t have any great typography, like it all just feels a little sort of 1992 to me. He was like okay I guess whatever, and then like a year later he finally got in touch with me and was like, dude I really want you to design my site, come on let’s talk about it.

What happened is Corbett and I flew down to San Diego and we did a weekend down there just doing all these preliminary things and actually packaged this all together in a course within Fizzle called “The essentials of design for none designers,” okay.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: It’s just for business builders, for people who aren’t designers and there’s kind of like, in making the course I really sliced and diced my process into a few different things and then I call it craft C-R-A-F-T. Okay, so the C stands for a clarity of purpose, all right it takes a lot, this is that goal that we were talking about previously. What’s your goal and it’s not just what’s your goal, it’s what’s your goal right now, because your goal is going to change.

Your goal might eventually be to be at the level where Pat Flynn is or what Steve Chou is or who knows where right, but right now what’s your goal, what’s your goal right now. I’m trying to get to X amount per month or this year is the year that I something, something, something. That’s why it’s important not to go like I’m going to be Dave Ramsey, yeah okay.

I mean you can have a sight that looks like Dave Ramsey’s, it doesn’t mean that your business is performing like Dave Ramsey’s business right? The idea is where are you going right now, what’s your purpose right now and that always comes from who are the people I’m trying to attract, and what are they looking for that I can help them with right, it’s always comes…

Steve: These are like more broad based goals as opposed to specific ones like build an email list for example?

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay yeah.

Chase: Because that all very specific to, I mean to build an email list might not be relevant in 5 years, it might not be at all, but having a clarity of purpose, knowing what people in your audience rally want. Knowing the kind of wants you want to attract to your website, that is always necessary, that is always essentials right, and that’s where everything starts, so that’s you have this clarity of purpose that’s the C, then the R is a ruthless…

Steve: Can we focus on the C a little bit more; I know you’ve got 5 letters to go.

Chase: Yeah no, I mean…

Steve: But so for the C does that mean you have to have your target customer avatar in mind for that C potion also?

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Now this idea of the avatar or your customer profile or whatever, I come from, I was in the web agency world for a while, advertising world for a while and that’s very prominent in a lot of different places and it’s also the world of advertising, the world of design is split on that. Especially also the world of the startups this idea of like who’s our ideal customer is very important, but a very common thing that happens is we turn these avatars, these become like not real people in our brains.

These become — and we don’t get to use the biological, like honest to God intuition that you have about someone for instance that you really know. One this is in we have a free guide at Fizzel on defining your audience, defining your ideal customer, and one of the tricks in that is this idea that who is one real person that you know who is a part, who is like an ideal customer for you.

Steve: Okay.

Chase: Then because getting to the idea of, getting to the real person, now all of a sudden you know, you could call them up and go like listen Bob, here’s what you’re struggling with, here’s what’s going on, here’s what, here’s the limiting believe. Here’s what I wish you could do right now, and here’s the product I think that’s best for you where you are right now, because it’s going to give you this result that you really want.

It’s that kind of stuff that like that when you actually have a real person verses like a paper, that’s like my, this is Sally. She is my ideal customer avatar; she sells the whole this and has to [inaudible 00:17:23]. She is really neat; do you know what I mean?

It gets unhelpful doing that, because now you’re like I guess Sally would like this, I don’t know, Sally is not real. Whereas you know Bob in real life, and you’re like actually I would feel cheesy to Bob, actually Bob wouldn’t be able to find that. This is helping you make actual real life decisions about your conversion and design and copywriting on your site.

Steve: These people does it matter how many of these people there are out there, or do you just focus on one real life situation first?

Chase: That’s a great question, and you go with your gut. My experience I’ve been doing this for a while I would say I pick like one, it just happens naturally that’s seasonally, I pick one, one at a time, and then that might change in three months or two weeks or 6 years or whatever, but I’m checking in on myself. Okay we’re still making this for Joe, is that what this is still for, or is she already moved passed that and now we should go back to someone else, do you know what I mean?

Steve: Okay.

Chase: So having that real person that you can actually talk to, super, super valuable.

Steve: Okay, got it okay.

Chase: Does that make sense on the clarity of purpose?

Steve: It does yeah, let’s move on to R.

Chase: Okay so with R again this all still all stealing a craft because I’m a crafty little minx, R stands for this ruthless focus, all right, so…

Steve: R stands for ruthless?

Chase: Ruthless man.

Steve: Ruthless okay.

Chase: Ruthless focus. There’s a famous quote about writing, it says that in writing you have to cut out your darlings, you kind of have to murder your children. These little bits in your article that you really love, but they just don’t support the point of the article. You know what I mean, you have to cut those out because in order for the article to make more sense to more people.

Same thing with your website, the more crap you have in your website, the harder it is for someone to understand what the hell they’re supposed to do there, right. You don’t want to treat your website like some vest ad, like a TGI Friday, one of the waiters there that has got the flare all over the place and they’re leaning down at the table. They’re like hey guys really excited that you’re here are at TGI Friday. Can I tell you about our Apple Zilla, smash? We’ve got a great news or something or rather.

That’s not what your website is, your website isn’t this big convoluted messy bunch of buttons and Instagram feeds, and all of that sort of stuff. It’s focused, why? Because you have a clarity of purpose, you know who’s out there, what they’re struggling with, how your product solves their problem, and now you have to edit. You have to remove things so that that’s what they understand about it. It’s not just knowing what your purpose is, it’s effectively communicating, and that means you don’t say other crap on your website. Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, so one thing I teach in my class, is for example if you are on ecommerce store on a product page, the whole purpose of them going on that product page is to hit the “add the cart” button. Is that something similar to what you are saying?

Chase: Exactly, exactly. That actually gets to the next one which is A, which is you get to choose one action per page, one action per page and yeah, for that product page. For example, guess what the action is, you nailed it. It’s click the button, add to cart. It’s not – and actually in some ways the insight there is not that it’s just that, it’s how do I get them to — how do I get that experience to feel like they are more prone to complete the cart.

Because anybody in ecommerce knows that like cart abandonment is a really big deal, because people are adding things to carts, because it’s easy to do so. It’s just this virtual little click. It doesn’t cost me anything. But then, “No, maybe I want it. No maybe I will come back here later.” And they never do.

I don’t know how — there’s ways and designs that you could sort of make that feel a little more substantial, they click it, the cart goes from 0 to 1 and gets bigger, and you have a message that goes, “Awesome. Just think of what it’s going to feel like when you get your good new gismo, and you put it on your thingy, and everything is amazing, and your life all of a sudden has meaning and purpose.” Whatever it is that you have to try to tell them or something, but the action idea is that there’s one action per page.

I would — most of the people, a lot of the people that we help coach are bloggers and podcasters. I kind of have this idea that I’ve always stuck to about there’s basically one action across your entire website, because you can treat things progressively over time. You can be in a relationship with your customers over time if you pick the first right action. If your first action is just “purchase,” ecommerce is a little different than blogging, because in blogging world, you kind of want your first action right after them reading something or acting on something and like it, you want it to be like getting on the email list.

Now you can have a second action. Yeah, maybe follow on social networks somewhere, but like we all know that’s not nearly as effective as email. If you everywhere across the site you are getting people on your email, now you can justify a second point of contact hopefully, if you don’t just go straight to …

Steve: Does that imply that you remove all the other buttons except for …

Chase: Go on. Keep on.

Steve: Except for an email sign up when you can. I actually haven’t looked that closely at the Fizzle blog, but do you not have social media buttons or anything.

Chase: We really don’t have social media buttons or anything. We make those a part of the first email that goes out to people. Basically the big action across the site is, we are kind of split right now, because we’ve also got a lot of people coming to the site for the second, third, fifth, tenth, a millionth time.

We have like a 150,000 uniques on the site every month. There’s many different customer segments there that we kind of have to serve. This is what happens when you site gets bigger, bigger, and bigger. When it’s smaller, when you have a more pointed niche kind of focus, a lot of the sites I design, have been like that.

When I designed Pat’s site, when I designed Nerd Fitness for example, Steve Kamb’s website, the conversation went up by 80%. When we redesigned, traffic conversion went up by, it was either — it double, went up by 100%. When I designed Small Passive Income, which was a bit bigger than think Traffic, actually not Demo Traffic and conversion stayed relatively similar, but one of Pat’s goals was to get a lot of people over to the podcast page.

I had — his podcast listeners went down because a lot of people were listening wherever in the blog before. I had changed how some of that works for the sake of being way more focused and focusing on one action. And what happened is he realized how much of a goal was for him to keep his podcasts listeners up. We had to go back and make some changes. Design is that iterative thing like that.

When you have big sites, you kind of have to do the work to identify those different user groups to be able to serve all of them. But as you are saying, for the most part, you got, if you pick one action across the site, it’s going to perform well on that action. You will have to do some testing over time, see how it’s doing. Maybe that’s the wrong action, who knows. That’s where you get to use like sort of like your intuition on this stuff, right?

Steve: Yeah. I’m just thinking about all these blogs that I look at and a lot of them have these really cluttered side bars and a whole bunch of buttons everywhere, social media buttons. Somewhere buried in there they have the email sign up form. I was just curious maybe we can talk about some examples later on once we get through your framework.

Chase: Yeah, definitely. That’s C claritive purpose, R is the ruthless focus, A is the only one action per page, and F is for your first time visitor. This is, you want to design your site for growth. Maybe in an ecommerce situation you are designing your site for impulse buyers in somewhat, which in the same way, that’s a first time visitor. But when you design it for your first time visitor, instead of for your over and over and over again visitors which always is going to happen. They are going to find tier way around over time if you keep putting up great content, if you have new products etcetera.

But this first time visitor, what I find is that if you can do the work to sort of slip into their skin, and think about what it feels like to land on your site just another ecommerce site that they are landing on. Because they don’t give a crap, they don’t care who you are. They don’t care about the product, they don’t care who you are. They are busy. Their mum is sick. Their kids are yelling in the background, who knows where they are.

They seriously don’t care about you or your website designer or anything like that. What are they interested in? What do they want? What do they want that brought them to your page? What’s their intention? Then, how can your site perfectly line up with that intention?

Steve: How do you figure out that sometimes? Do you use any tools to figure that if you don’t really know?

Chase: Honestly my favorite tool for this is customer interviews.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Chase: For developing more content businesses, customer interviews are great. You can obviously use search stuff, looking through Google’s key word, tracker thing. You can look through Moses tools to understand how people – with obviously Google analytics looking where are people searching that they are landing on this product page. How can you infer like the intention from that thing.

But for me, I’m often times, I find and a lot of people find this. You can be really intuitive about that and sometimes you hit the nail on the head. But often times you think it’s this reason, but really it was totally different, it’s this reason over here that’s why. And if you knew that before hand, you could totally have — you would totally change the design or the copywriting on this page.

One great example of that is, there’s a framework called jobs to be done. This milkshake stand every morning filled up with people. What the heck is this all about? They hire –meaning people just do like pack, get buying milkshakes like crazy in the morning. It doesn’t seem like a very morning kind of thing for me to do. That seems strange.

They hired these business consultants to check out what’s going on here. They started talking to customers and realized everybody that was there was a commuter. They were driving a long a distance to work. They needed to get breakfast, but something that they could hold on one hand while they are driving. And they needed it to kind of keep them filled up at least till lunch time.

The milkshake weirdly fulfills all these rules, but there was no merchandise or marketing of billboards out saying like, “Have a milkshake for breakfast.” It’s just something that a lot of people started figuring out on their own. That changed the idea of how you can present what’s available to the people during the morning time at the milkshake stand. It’s one of those weird, like you could have been intuitive about this, now that we are going backwards. But it took talking to customers to really understand where it came from.

Now I understand talking to customers actually is kind of a nightmare for most of us entrepreneurs. Honestly, it still is for me. I’ve done a lot now so I sometimes get a little excited about it, but most of the times, it still feels like work. In an ecommerce business, it can feel really kind of weird.

Steve: It’s actually not so bad. So earlier on, whenever a customer actually called us, I would interrogate them so to speak. I did a lot of that earlier on. I don’t do it anymore obviously, but it was quite helpful. We found a lot of bugs with our site that way.

Chase: Yeah, it makes tones of sense because when you get to — the whole point of conversion and design, the whole point of this craft frame that they develop is how do I get you out of your skin and into an actual potential buyer skin, not only just a potential buyer but like that ideal customer?

How do I let you know what it’s like for Bob to land on your website after they’ve been on hundreds of similar websites? How can you really grab Bob’s attention and resonate with them by saying, “Bob, I know who you are. I understand what you care about and this is the thing.”

A great example of this is like, comic t-shirts or Giki culture of some kind. The kind of place that has that t-shirt and that highly curates hilarious comic books inside joke type t-shirts or knickknack and things like that, all of a sudden I feel like these people know who I am, because they are getting — I get these inside jokes from world of Warcraft or Minecraft or something like that.

It’s that kind of like “You are speaking my language. Holy crap, I found — these people know who I am.” That’s where I always loved those smaller sort of niche sites even though you might have less people to your site, you might be more profitable in the end.

Steve: How about if it is aesthetics versus copy, because I’ve seen some really heinous looking websites that convert super well.

Chase: Yes, that’s a good point. This is one of the first points in the design course that I made. It’s this fancy effectiveness thing we kind of touched on the beginning. But the truth is your website’s most important assets are its words. And that doesn’t mean that just because it’s on the page it’s working, you have to tell me which words are important to pay attention to. And there are literally words I can’t unpay attention to for lack of a better term.

For instance if you go to, like a site that’s very clean like Medium, if you read any articles on Medium, pay attention to how it feels to land there. There’s a big headline right centered, like in some image or something like that, and then there’s no distractions on the left or the right or even on the top. You just fall directly down into the copy and you start reading. If it’s well written, if they are talking to you, then you kind of like keep going and now they are — now they are convincing you of something. Do you know what I mean? That’s the beauty of good sales copy.

A great example to look out for that is also Base Camps home page. Unfortunately it changes all the time. But if you go to basecamp.com, you will be able to see like right now, there’s a very simple homepage; one column of text just saying here’s what we do. It’s super effective for them. To answer to your question, the words are to me the most important part. Your headline has one job and that’s to get them to read the very first sentence, which has one job to get them to read the next sentence, which has one job to get them to read the next sentence. You are drawing them in to this kind of relationship.

And so if your headline sticks out, it’s eligible, it kind of set nicely in some good fonts, it’s not gross and weird and some crazy cuss of handwriting font thing, even though you think that looks cool man. That is like neat and pretty. It’s all of these kinds of simple things. All of that details of that stuff I get into in the course. I’ll keep going on the craft process if that’s good for you.

Steve: Do you do an Asian accent too by the way? You are doing southern accent the whole time.

Chase: No I can’t listen. I mean, I think it’ll just be two item in [inaudible 00:32:46]. I can’t see. I’m not going to. How could that not be offensive? I’m trying — I do a lot on the physical shows, I do a lot of voices. I really like for instance I really like doing the Indian voice, these certain Indian voice, but I try — I’m trying to keep myself from doing anything that is not done by a Caucasian man, just for the sake of like not offending somebody.

I don’t mean any harm by it. I literally love these accents. I love the way they sound and I love making them, but I have to try and keep it to like just, I can tell you a little bit of this you know. It’s a white dude in London, is a bit of a Christ Stoker accent really. It’s not like I kind of want to go full anything else I guess.

Steve: We are on T, right?

Chase: Yeah, so F was for the first time visitor because they don’t give a damn about you. They don’t care about who you are. They have their own story in their own life going on. Either you have a product that solves their problem or you don’t. Do you know what their problem is? Can you focus on that and ruthlessly focus down on that?

Then T is the last part. It’s the testing over time. Because one of the big mistakes I see people make as they start conversion optimizing AB testing stuff, is they can actually crank down too hard on converting this time at the expense of someone trusting you to buy next time.

The idea is you want a sustainable long term business. You also — that competes sometimes with I want to make as much money as I possibly can right now. Do you know what I mean? I can slam you hard with the bill sales message, and all this crap and pop ups and things that don’t let you quit — you just try to quit the page and the job description button goes, “Are you sure you want to do this?”

You can slam people really hard with stuff which all that does now is it goes like, “Oh clearly you are desperate. I don’t trust you. You clearly don’t have a great product.” That’s becoming more and more common as more people come on to the market place savvy about computers and things.

This long term view is not looking at your business just this week or this month, but over the course of the next five and ten years, how can you keep tweaking this in a way that makes it feel more like a relationship, that makes it feel more like you are providing value for people who have an honest need, and all this everything that’s going back and forth here is totally human, it’s total like actual connection and interaction.

That’s my fantasy about business. I know it can happen that way. I’m ruthless about promoting that way of doing business instead of just like, scorch to earth policies, steal money from everyone kind of thing.

Steve: The problem with that though is it’s a little harder to quantify, right?

Chase: Yeah, it is hard to quantify. To be honest, it’s a big mistake that I see people — the first big mistake that I see people make is focusing on fanciness instead of effectiveness. Then the other side of that coin is when you focus on effectiveness too much, and have no sense of relationship in there.

There is no magic number you are trying to get to that I can tell you once you get to this kind of conversion rate, then you are a real business. It’s all has to be felt. It all has to be felt. It’s like, it’s art. It’s literally a kind of a soulful artistic way of going through the things. The truth is you could probably try to tweak a bunch of stuff on your site to increase the conversion and stuff, and you are not going to see a tone of change.

There are some places where you are going to see change and that’s going to be your headlines, that’s going to be your copywriting, stuff that’s easy for people to read, your product photos, and how enticing those kind of things look. And all of that stems from, how well do you know your buyer? How well do you honestly know your buyer? That’s going all the way back again to this clarity of purpose.

Steve: You keep mentioning conversion rate. I was just curious, you mentioned like you increased Corbett’s conversion rate, Steve Kamb’s and then Pat’s. What was the conversion metric?

Chase: Conversion metric for them was always email, so a visitor to an email subscriber. For contents like that’s the big thing because now you’ve trusted me enough to give me your email, I gave you this free book or something in return, now over time can I walk the balance of capping you with an email and making you feel like there’s some value in this, reminding you of our relationship, is it worthwhile to keep intact without you going like, “All right you are bugging me. Unsubscribe.” You know what I mean? It’s just like being at a bar and trying to woo a person of the opposite sex. It’s this delicate sort of balance. That’s the artistry and the stuff that I really love.

Steve: Yeah, it definitely it is an art. Unfortunately art is often hard to describe in words, right?

Chase: Yup. No actually it’s not. For me, I’m becoming really like — because I’ve thought a lot about that. I live more in this like sort of the fancy artist designer musician world than I do kind of in the business world most of the time even though my work is in the business world. I actually from Stephen Colbert [ph] I was learning a lot about faith and art and the things. He says things very succinctly and concretely because he’s so smart. These were in interviews not in a show or anything. Just in interviews with him out of character.

All I know for sure is that art gives you a feeling. That’s the art I’m interested in. I’m interested in the art that make me feel something. I think business is like is the thing that can make us feel something, that can remind us of our humanity, that can make us feel more connected to each other to the earth to the things, rather than just being someone who is just unconsciously consuming whatever comes in your own mouth. You know what I mean?

I want to live better. I’ve bought products that made me live better [inaudible 00:38:55] there’s a donut here in town, not voodoo donut, I live in Portland, Oregon, but this little donut called [inaudible 00:39:02] is the most delicate little [inaudible 00:39:04] bar Steve. I swear to god, it’s the donut that made me want to be a better man. I swear to god.

I believe that product, that there’s something about a great product that’s well designed, that’s thought through, that meets my needs, that kind of like, it makes me feel like, “Yeah, maybe I’m not a piece of crap. Maybe I can live well. Maybe I can stay married. Maybe I can be a good dad.” Do you know what I mean? I need all the help I can get, because that sounds really hard.

Steve: I need to get some of this donuts man. Let’s take a look at the fizzle.co website because you designed that, and obviously you were there and now, I’m just curious about some of the design elements. I notice right when you land on the page, it’s basically just a video and then the headline. It’s not even like long form copy. You got like maybe five paragraphs with the verbation and stuff free trial. I was just curious how you came up with that landing page.

Chase: We tried a few different things. We didn’t try a million things; we just tried a few of the different pages. Originally we had a long page that was really well designed, all these customer testimonials, all this part, and the other. But honestly the story of our product, of our service lives in this video. So we wanted the headline to be extremely simple and clear with a little bit of style and then you come right down into the video where in the first 15 seconds — I won’t give away the joke in the first 15 seconds, but in the first 15 seconds it was this little great like wait what!

This is, what am I watching, and them it just tumbles straight down into this little letter from Corbett our CEO. And it works really well for us because to be honest we can’t — I don’t know we could fiddle a lot with a lot more stuff, but this works really well right now.

And because it’s so simple, because it’s kind of so human and honest, because on video and the audio and the video like you hear our voices you get the reflection you kind of get know us a bit. And also in Corbett’s simple letter there, you kind of get to know our point of view just a little bit more and just the tone and things like that; it’s really effective, so it works really well for us.

Steve: Would you say that most of the people who land on that page already know who you are, or do mostly cold people land on that page?

Chase: It’s a good question. I think most — like I don’t, I couldn’t tell you for a fact one way or the other, I could probably go look it up in the analytics at some point. Or have one of my spreadsheet guys do that, we have these spreadsheets guys. Yeah, he is actually our head of growth, so he does deal with a lot of that stuff. The truth is there is going to be a lot of both, there is going to be a lot of both, I bet most that convert it’s not their first time landing on our site or the home page.

Steve: Because I’m curious for you guys, I wonder if you get a lot of podcast people come in right.

Chase: We do, we do get a lot of podcast, so we have — on the podcast we have a sort of little some tiny advertisement for Fizzle there with a special link that people go to. And that takes them to a different page that just — that gives them a special discount for people listening to the show, right?

So we do see a lot of people converting from that especially after they listen to several episodes, because what happens with people right now who are listening to you Steve, they are listening to you because they trust you. They trust your point of view, they know you have experience, and so if you recommend something to them they are going to listen to you right?

And I feel like with podcast way more than any medium, honestly even more than video, there is something trustworthy about it, because I’m listening to you while I walk the dog or I commute or I go on a jog, or I’m walking around or doing the dishes, I can listen to you anywhere. I’m rarely listening to a podcast when I’m just sitting on my butt listening to a podcast. I’m always kind of doing something else right?

So when your ear, your voice is in my head all the time, I don’t know, I feel like you get to know someone all the time through just hearing their voice kind of like when you used to have those girlfriends or boyfriends in junior high. And you were calling them on the phone and you go like, no you hang up, no you, no you hang up. I don’t know if you remember talking to people on the phone like and like your dad was like, get off the phone, I need to call someone.

Steve: I would just hang out because I was too cheeky to even talk to them so…

Chase: I just settled from x-tapes, I just…

Steve: Yeah x-tapes those were the days man, yeah.

Chase: Totally.

Steve: Okay so this page I guess then you kind funnel people through the podcast, this landing page in which case they’ve…

Chase: And the blog, I mean the blog is a different design, right? So the blog if you land on any of these posts from the blog, for instance if you give content away will anyone pay? It’s sort of one of our related episodes of the podcast where we talk all about like sort of the balance there. And you have this — where there is content, a couple of quotes, you have actual podcast player.

So this is just content, everybody is used to looking at a blog page, an article. Then there is nothing too sexy or crazy about it, I feel like if there was something crazy about it you would be like wait how am I supposed to proceed? You know what I mean, like it’s supposed to just be a blog page.

But then on the right side this is where it’s like okay we have some interesting links over here, we have a free trial sort of promotion, and then asks for the — get on the email list there at the bottom of the page as well as on the top.

Steve: Yeah it’s very minimalist, I’m looking at it right now actually, so I guess these are all the main goals that you want someone to click on. And I notice you don’t have any like previous posts, you have popular posts, but you don’t have a whole bunch of links on the sidebar.

Chase: No, I kept the sidebar super clean and minimal and just kind of like it’s like to me it’s like you get here, you land on this particular episode, if you give content away will anybody pay. If there was a longer article or shorter article, I don’t care I want you focus totally on that. If that’s interesting enough to you hopefully the call to action at the bottom or the very top will get you.

And go like, oh, well, I trust these guys, I like their voice, I’ll just go back to the blog and see what else they are talking about. Oh I can subscribe to the podcast, oh because you know what there is a lot of those little touch points, you got to see the same person at the bar maybe a couple of times before you get enough confidence to talk to him.

You know what I mean? Because very few of us are like brush enough to just dive right in, and it feels like it’s something similar in the way that a regular user person — a regular person just browses the web, finds content, and looks into stuff, you know what I mean?

Steve: So I’m looking at one of your blog post right now, and it seems like obviously that getting an email sign up is the primary purpose because those buttons are like orange right, and they stand out. So I’m just curious I didn’t notice any pop ups or anything either, and I was just wondering where your philosophy was on that?

Chase: Well I mean so to me I hate pop ups, I just hate pop ups, so I don’t do them. And I feel like I can make a big [inaudible 00:45:50] argument about how…

Steve: It’s just a philosophy thing then, right?

Chase: Disrespectful to the people, they don’t trust, to be honest they can be really, really effective tool. This is one of those situations where it’s like I have faith in humanity that I don’t have to do a pop up to get as many people on the list as possible. One of the things I just had a cruise event speaking to a bunch of podcasters, and one of the things a handful of other speakers like Chris Brogan was saying is how his favorite thing is like deleting people from his list. Like he goes through and finds everybody that hasn’t clicked any links or opened anything on his list, he sends them all an email and says, if you are not — if you want to stay on the list click this link otherwise I’m removing you. And he loves calling his list down, down, down.

Steve: I do that once a month actually.

Chase: Do you really?

Steve: Yeah I do.

Chase: What’s it like for you, do you like it?

Steve: I don’t mind it because like if they are not clicking I don’t want to be paying for those people on my list right? That’s my philosophy at least.

Chase: Yeah, I mean it’s something I haven’t done, but this is like the front end of that right? It’s almost like, if you don’t put a pop up there you are not going to get a bunch of crapy unwanted people on your list, unqualified people.

Steve: So for a blog for an ecommerce site what would you say you would — how would you populate your sidebar and that sort of thing? If making a sale was your ultimate goal?

Chase: It totally depends right, because what you have, you have the potential in some systems you have the potential for a lot of intelligence. So someone lands on your site because they were searching for rollerblades and you are selling rollerblades, and they land on this one particular rollerblade, the K2 fatty and they land there and then…

Steve: Sorry go on.

Chase: That’s a real rollerblade.

Steve: I noticed yeah.

Chase: Yeah, so then they go like, oh, this kind of interesting, but I’m not ready to buy right now and they go up to the blog. Some sites it’s very easy to have the kind of intelligence that goes like you were looking at the K2 fatty, let’s make the sidebar sort of special to someone who is looking at that. Which could be another sort of like offer for the K2 or some or who knows what right? Like wheels or any other little things, the kinds of things that you could sell.

But ultimately for a blog, this is where the difference between like I have a bunch of products for sale, and I want to create an audience for people, who believe in this kind of thing, or who care about this kind of thing right? If I was building an audience of people who care about rollerblading, I would have a kind of freebie to give away to them with like quotes from my favorite rollerblades.

Or like the top 10 rollerblade wheels or bearings revealed by someone that you know. That’s free, get on the list, will send it to you, and then you just have the responsibility to keeping that relationship good. Keeping that relationship honest and fresh too, right? So that when they do want to buy some K2 fatties they come straight to you. Because in one of the emails you are like listen, as a reader we just want to make sure that you know that we value you, the attention and being a rollerblade yadi yadi yada, here is a discount for 5% off anything in the next 30 days.

Steve: Chase this is funny yeah, I just recently wrote a post about this, I think this is the direction ecommerce is taking because you got these amazon.coms out there, where people are selling similar products, and it’s just the race to the bottom right? And the only way you can really stand out is by building a community that really appreciate you as business and they’ll buy from you just out of loyalty.

Chase: Yeah, and that to me is a massive difference, because to be honest it’s like you can sell products without a community, and you are totally in business, you are like partnered with wherever your traffic sources are which is probably going to be Google, or links from other sites, or who knows where, buying advertising, things like that. Then you do have a race at the bottom because if your prices are more than somebody else, then I’m going to go somewhere else, because guess what I could find that at the tip of my finger, like I just opened up another tab and I just search.

And frankly I’m just searching on Amazon which has the lowest prices I can find, right? So why would I buy from you? Now a good example of this a great example of an ecommerce store that the design is extremely good is Need. It’s called neededition.com, N-E-E-D edition .com, and its men’s clothing for that like sort of like 30 to 40 year old men thing. There is nothing, you don’t get discounts here, there is no discounts. But I want to buy everything on that site because he so nails who I am. Do you know what I mean?

He is like this is who you are, and he writes a little story about each of the article of clothing for sale. These funnel clothing he sells some low price items there too sometimes socks or ties or like magazines, like specialty magazines or whatever, and he nails it. And he actually he is a friend of mine, he just switched over to Shopify actually, from a totally custom built thing, now everything is running on Shopify which is pretty fascinating. Even more so then the custom thing, he is like no I would just go to Shopify after they had already spent a bunch of money making the custom thing, it’s pretty cool, that Shopify has got so many functions.

Far so much functionality rather, but that’s a great example of he is built a community and they are open rate — here is what he does, every month there is a new edition, right? So there is new articles of clothing for sale, and he’s built a massive email list, because you only get notified about the edition by email. His open rate is like 80 something percent, I don’t remember what.

Steve: That’s ridiculous.

Chase: It’s ridiculous, okay, so it’s just fascinating edition way of doing an ecommerce site. Obviously the design, what’s the design here? The design doesn’t get in the way you understand? Like the point of design is to not get in the way of what the customer wants and what the business wants. You want to facilitate that interaction as well as possible.

The message that the business has, that’s the message you are helping the audience resonate with. And the design can only amplify that or turn it down. So the whole idea is that in amplifying that, you are always going to become more minimal. You are always going to become more sort of essential, unless like flair on a vest at TGI Friday restaurant, you know what I mean? So he does that really well at Need Edition.

Steve: So people don’t comparison shop, they just buy straight from his email is what you are saying?

Chase: Yeah pretty much, so the email that comes out is just a short little bub about the spirit of this issue, of this edition basically. And then you click the link and you go over there and you see all the articles. And then I mean half the time I just read through, I have no money to spend on this stuff right now, my wife would kill me.

But I just read through it, because it’s funny, and then I really want that $130 shirt, like I really want it. Because I just read the story of the person who makes it, and the designer and the silly English guy talking about like why this shirt other than other shirts, and it’s this relationship based community based kind of thing.

Steve: And it’s not his product brands right, it’s other peoples brands, and he still…?

Chase: No, totally and now they’ve become so big that a lot of other brands have started doing collaborations with them, they’ll do a shirt that’s just for Need, which is kind of fascinating.

Steve: Awesome, yeah, I’ll definitely link up that site, it sounds really interesting.

Chase: Yeah it’s a very good example.

Steve: Cool Chase hey, we’ve been chatting for like 50 minutes man, so let’s close this with some facts about yourself. Where can people reach you if they have any design questions, do you still design websites, I imagine not anymore, right?

Chase: I don’t, no, yeah, I’m so on the — I’m full time Fizzle now. So where you can find us is at fizzle.co. And actually I went through the course on the design steps to try to just like think through what exactly to share with you guys. And I found a handful of worksheets that I’m totally good with sharing with your audience. There is one on how to visualize and do some worksheets on your first time visitor, there is also another one on like questions such as like a long term view, how do you set up your thing for a long term view, as well as another one just like the overview of this craft conversion and design system.

So what I’ll do is I’ll make those available for everyone who wants it at fizzle.co/chouchou. And I know that you said that that’s something that they might have teased you with in junior high school?

Steve: Elementary school but yeah, so it was my last name right it’s not chouchou as…

Chase: It’s your last name, yeah, so chouchou, I just wanted to have a unique URL that wasn’t too long, and I was like I just couldn’t get chouchou out of my head.

Steve: I’m sure I’ll find some way to get you back because it is my blog and I’ll be posting your graphic, so we’ll see how.

Chase: Perfect.

Steve: All right man, hey thanks for coming to the show, I learned a lot today man.

Chase: I’ll do well, thanks for having me, thanks for doing the work you do man.

Steve: Cool all right, take care.

Chase: Bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, designing a high converting website is both an art and a science, and Chase is an expert when it comes to funneling site visitors to their desired destinations. For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode106.

Once again I want to thank Famebit for sponsoring this episode, as I mentioned earlier Famebit is the best place to YouTubers, Instagramers and other influencers to promote your products online and it works. One of my podcast guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in 4 months with YouTube influencer marketing, and it costs as low as 50 bucks to start.

The best part is if you use coupon code mywife@famebit.com you will automatically get $25 off. Go to famebit.com right now, and get famous YouTubers to promote your products and get $25 off with coupon code my wife.

Finally if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course right away via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!